IMS Final Release

IMS Global Logo

IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI): Assessment, Section and Item Information Model Version 3.0

IMS Final Release
Version 1.0

Date Issued: 1st May 2022
Latest version: http://www.imsglobal.org/activity/qti/

IPR and Distribution Notices

Recipients of this document are requested to submit, with their comments, notification of any relevant patent claims or other intellectual property rights of which they may be aware that might be infringed by any implementation of the specification set forth in this document, and to provide supporting documentation.

IMS takes no position regarding the validity or scope of any intellectual property or other rights that might be claimed to pertain to the implementation or use of the technology described in this document or the extent to which any license under such rights might or might not be available; neither does it represent that it has made any effort to identify any such rights. Information on IMS's procedures with respect to rights in IMS specifications can be found at the IMS Intellectual Property Rights web page: http://www.imsglobal.org/ipr/imsipr_policyFinal.pdf.

Org Name Date Election Made Necessary Claims Type
CITO March 11, 2022 No RF RAND (Required & Optional Elements)
HMH March 11, 2022 No RF RAND (Required & Optional Elements)

Copyright © 2022 IMS Global Learning Consortium. All Rights Reserved.

Use of this specification to develop products or services is governed by the license with IMS found on the IMS website: http://www.imsglobal.org/speclicense.html.

Permission is granted to all parties to use excerpts from this document as needed in producing requests for proposals.

The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by IMS or its successors or assigns.

THIS SPECIFICATION IS BEING OFFERED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER, AND IN PARTICULAR, ANY WARRANTY OF NONINFRINGEMENT IS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ANY USE OF THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE MADE ENTIRELY AT THE IMPLEMENTER'S OWN RISK, AND NEITHER THE CONSORTIUM, NOR ANY OF ITS MEMBERS OR SUBMITTERS, SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY WHATSOEVER TO ANY IMPLEMENTER OR THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ARISING FROM THE USE OF THIS SPECIFICATION.

Public contributions, comments and questions can be posted here: www.imsglobal.org/forums/ims-glc-public-forums-and-resources.

Trademark information: http://www.imsglobal.org/copyright.html

Document Name: IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI): Assessment, Section and Item Information Model v3.0

Revision: 1st May 2022

toc | top

Abstract

This document is the core part of the IMS Global Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) v3.0 specification. This document describes the information model for items, sections and whole tests used in assessment. Formally these are known as the Assessment, Section and Item (ASI) features.

The IMS QTI specification describes a data model for the representation of question (qti-assessment-item) and test (qti-assessment-test) data and their corresponding results reports. Therefore, the specification enables the exchange of this item, test and results data between authoring tools, item banks, test constructional tools, learning systems and assessment delivery systems. The data model is described abstractly, using the Unified Modeling Language (UML) to facilitate binding to a wide range of data-modelling tools and programming languages. For interchange between systems a binding is provided to the industry standard Extensible Markup Language (XML) [QTI-BIND-30] and use of this binding is required for certification. The IMS QTI specification has been designed to support both interoperability and innovation through the provision of well-defined extension points. These extension points can be used to wrap specialized or proprietary data in ways that allows it to be used alongside items that can be represented directly.

toc | top

Table of Contents

Abstract

1. Introduction

1.1 Scope and Context

1.2 Changes in QTI 3.0

1.3 Conventions

1.4 Structure of this Document

1.5 Nomenclature and Definitions

2. Key Data Model Features

2.1 The Structure of the Data Model

2.1.1 Assessments, Sections and Items

2.1.2 Metadata

2.1.3 Usage Data

2.1.4 Results Reporting

2.2 Items

2.2.1 The Item Session Lifecycle

2.2.2 Item Variables

2.2.2.1 Context Variable

2.2.2.2 Response Variable

2.2.2.3 Outcomes Variable

2.3 The Content Model

2.3.1 Basic Classes

2.3.2 XHTML Elements

2.3.2.1 Text Elements

2.3.2.2 List Elements

2.3.2.3 Object Elements

2.3.2.4 Presentation Elements

2.3.2.5 Table Elements

2.3.2.6 Image Elements

2.3.2.7 Hypertext Element

2.3.2.8 HTML5 Elements

2.3.3 MathML

2.3.4 Variable Content

2.3.5 Formatting Items with Stylesheets

2.3.6 Accessibility

2.3.7 Internationalization

2.4 Interactions

2.4.1 Simple Interactions

2.4.1.1 Choice Interaction

2.4.1.2 Order Interaction

2.4.1.3 Associate Interaction

2.4.1.4 Match Interaction

2.4.1.5 Gap Match Interaction

2.4.2 Text-based Interactions

2.4.2.1 Inline Choice Interaction

2.4.2.2 Text Interaction

2.4.2.3 Extended Text Interaction

2.4.2.4 Hot Text Interaction

2.4.3 Graphical Interactions

2.4.3.1 Hotspot Interaction

2.4.3.2 Graphic Order Interaction

2.4.3.3 Graphic Associate Interaction

2.4.3.4 Graphic Gap Match Interaction

2.4.3.5 Select Point Interaction

2.4.3.6 Position Object Interaction

2.4.4 Miscellaneous Interactions

2.4.4.1 Slider Interaction

2.4.4.2 Media Interaction

2.4.4.3 Drawing Interaction

2.4.4.4 Upload Interaction

2.4.4.5 Custom Interaction

2.4.4.6 Portable Custiom Interaction (PCI)

2.4.5 Alternative Ways to End an Attempt

2.5 Response Processing

2.5.1 Response Processing Templates

2.5.2 Generalized Response Resprocessing

2.6 Modal Feedback

2.7 Item Templates

2.7.1 Using Template Variables in an Item's Body

2.7.2 Using Template Variables in Operator Attributes Values

2.7.3 Template Processing

2.8 Tests, Testparts and Sections

2.8.1 The Structure of a Test

2.8.2 Navigation and Submission

2.8.3 Pre-conditions and Branching

2.8.3.1 Pre-conditions

2.8.3.2 Branching

2.8.4 Adaptive Sequencing using IMS CAT

2.8.5 Time Limits

2.8.6 Rubric Blocks

2.9 Outcome Processing

2.10 Test-level Feedback

2.11 Expressions

2.11.1 Builtin General Expressions

2.11.1.1 BaseValue Expression

2.11.1.2 Variable Expression

2.11.1.3 Default Expression

2.11.1.4 Correct Expression

2.11.1.5 Map Response Exprssion

2.11.1.6 Map Response Point Expression

2.11.1.7 Math Constant Expression

2.11.2 Expressions Used only in Outcomes Processing

2.11.2.1 Number Correct Expression

2.11.2.2 Number Incorrect Expression

2.11.2.3 Number Presented Expression

2.11.2.4 Number Responded Expresson

2.11.2.5 Number Selected Expression

2.11.2.6 Outcome Minimum Expression

2.11.2.7 Outcome Maximum Expression

2.11.2.8 Test Variables Expression

2.11.3 Operators

2.11.3.1 AnyN Expression

2.11.3.2 Custom Operator Expression

2.11.3.3 Equal Expression

2.11.3.4 Equal Rounded Expression

2.11.3.5 Field Value Expression

2.11.3.6 Index Expression

2.11.3.7 Inside Expression

2.11.3.8 Multiple Expression

2.11.3.9 Ordered Expression

2.11.3.10 And Expression

2.11.3.11 GCD Expression

2.11.3.12 LCM Expression

2.11.3.13 Min Expression

2.11.3.14 Max Expression

2.11.3.15 Or Expression

2.11.3.16 Product Expression

2.11.3.17 Contains Expression

2.11.3.18 Delete Expression

2.11.3.19 Divide Expression

2.11.3.20 Duration Expression

2.11.3.21 Duration LT Expression

2.11.3.22 GT Expression

2.11.3.23 GTE Expression

2.11.3.24 Integer Divide Expression

2.11.3.25 Integer Modulus Expression

2.11.3.26 LT Expression

2.11.3.27 LTE Expression

2.11.3.28 Match Expression

2.11.3.29 Member Expression

2.11.3.30 Power Expression

2.11.3.31 Subtract Expression

2.11.3.32 ContainerSize Expression

2.11.3.33 Integer to Float Expression

2.11.3.34 IsNull Expression

2.11.3.35 Not Expression

2.11.3.36 Random Expression

2.11.3.37 Round Expression

2.11.3.38 Truncate Expression

2.11.3.39 Math Operator Expression

2.11.3.40 Sum Expression

2.11.3.41 Pattern Match Expression

2.11.3.42 Repeat Expression

2.11.3.43 RoundTo Expression

2.11.3.44 Stats Operator Expression

2.11.3.45 String Match Expression

2.11.3.46 Substring Expression

2.12 Items and Test Fragments

2.13 The Accessibility Features

2.13.1 Alternative Accessibility Content Functionality

2.13.2 Support for Speech Synthesis Markup Language

2.13.3 Support for WAI-ARIA

2.14 The Internationalization Features

2.14.1 Support for Bidirectional Text

2.14.2 Support for Ruby

2.14.3 Support for Alternative Languages

3. Root Attribute Descriptions

3.1 "qti-assessment-item" Root Attribute Description

3.2 "qti-assessment-section" Root Attribute Description

3.3 "qti-assessment-stimulus" Root Attribute Description

3.4 "qti-assessment-test" Root Attribute Description

3.5 "qti-outcome-declaration" Root Attribute Description

3.6 "qti-response-processing" Root Attribute Description

4. Root Class Descriptions

4.1 "AssessmentItem" Root Class Description

4.1.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

4.1.2 "title" Characteristic Description

4.1.3 "label" Characteristic Description

4.1.4 "language" Characteristic Description

4.1.5 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

4.1.6 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

4.1.7 "adaptive" Characteristic Description

4.1.8 "time-dependent" Characteristic Description

4.1.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

4.1.10 "qti-context-declaration" Attribute Description

4.1.11 "qti-response-declaration" Attribute Description

4.1.12 "qti-outcome-declaration" Attribute Description

4.1.13 "qti-template-declaration" Attribute Description

4.1.14 "qti-template-processing" Attribute Description

4.1.15 "qti-assessment-stimulus-ref" Attribute Description

4.1.16 "qti-companion-materials-info" Attribute Description

4.1.17 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

4.1.18 "qti-item-body" Attribute Description

4.1.19 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

4.1.20 "qti-response-processing" Attribute Description

4.1.21 "qti-modal-feedback" Attribute Description

4.2 "AssessmentSection" Root Class Description

4.2.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

4.2.2 "required" Characteristic Description

4.2.3 "fixed" Characteristic Description

4.2.4 "title" Characteristic Description

4.2.5 "class" Characteristic Description

4.2.6 "visible" Characteristic Description

4.2.7 "keep-together" Characteristic Description

4.2.8 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

4.2.9 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

4.2.10 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

4.2.11 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

4.2.12 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

4.2.13 "adaptive" Attribute Description

4.2.14 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

4.2.15 "sectionPart" Attribute Description

4.3 "AssessmentStimulus" Root Class Description

4.3.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

4.3.2 "title" Characteristic Description

4.3.3 "label" Characteristic Description

4.3.4 "language" Characteristic Description

4.3.5 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

4.3.6 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

4.3.7 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

4.3.8 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

4.3.9 "qti-stimulus-body" Attribute Description

4.3.10 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

4.4 "AssessmentTest" Root Class Description

4.4.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

4.4.2 "title" Characteristic Description

4.4.3 "class" Characteristic Description

4.4.4 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

4.4.5 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

4.4.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

4.4.7 "qti-context-declaration" Attribute Description

4.4.8 "qti-outcome-declaration" Attribute Description

4.4.9 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

4.4.10 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

4.4.11 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

4.4.12 "qti-test-part" Attribute Description

4.4.13 "qti-outcome-processing" Attribute Description

4.4.14 "qti-test-feedback" Attribute Description

4.5 "OutcomeDeclaration" Root Class Description

4.5.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

4.5.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

4.5.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

4.5.4 "view" Characteristic Description

4.5.5 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

4.5.6 "long-interpretation" Characteristic Description

4.5.7 "normal-maximum" Characteristic Description

4.5.8 "normal-minimum" Characteristic Description

4.5.9 "mastery-value" Characteristic Description

4.5.10 "external-scored" Characteristic Description

4.5.11 "variable-identifier-ref" Characteristic Description

4.5.12 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

4.5.13 "lookupTable" Attribute Description

4.6 "ResponseProcessing" Root Class Description

4.6.1 "template" Characteristic Description

4.6.2 "template-location" Characteristic Description

4.6.3 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5. Data Class Descriptions

5.1 "A" Class Description

5.1.1 "href" Characteristic Description

5.1.2 "type" Characteristic Description

5.1.3 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

5.2 "ARIABase" Class Description

5.2.1 "role" Characteristic Description

5.2.2 "aria-controls" Characteristic Description

5.2.3 "aria-describedby" Characteristic Description

5.2.4 "aria-flowto" Characteristic Description

5.2.5 "aria-label" Characteristic Description

5.2.6 "aria-labelledby" Characteristic Description

5.2.7 "aria-level" Characteristic Description

5.2.8 "aria-live" Characteristic Description

5.2.9 "aria-orientation" Characteristic Description

5.2.10 "aria-owns" Characteristic Description

5.2.11 "aria-hidden" Characteristic Description

5.2.12 "aria-activedescendant" Characteristic Description

5.2.13 "aria-atomic" Characteristic Description

5.2.14 "aria-autocomplete" Characteristic Description

5.2.15 "aria-busy" Characteristic Description

5.2.16 "aria-checked" Characteristic Description

5.2.17 "aria-disabled" Characteristic Description

5.2.18 "aria-expanded" Characteristic Description

5.2.19 "aria-haspopup" Characteristic Description

5.2.20 "aria-invalid" Characteristic Description

5.2.21 "aria-multiline" Characteristic Description

5.2.22 "aria-multiselectable" Characteristic Description

5.2.23 "aria-posinset" Characteristic Description

5.2.24 "aria-pressed" Characteristic Description

5.2.25 "aria-readonly" Characteristic Description

5.2.26 "aria-relevant" Characteristic Description

5.2.27 "aria-required" Characteristic Description

5.2.28 "aria-selected" Characteristic Description

5.2.29 "aria-setsize" Characteristic Description

5.2.30 "aria-sort" Characteristic Description

5.2.31 "aria-valuemax" Characteristic Description

5.2.32 "aria-valuemin" Characteristic Description

5.2.33 "aria-valuenow" Characteristic Description

5.2.34 "aria-valuetext" Characteristic Description

5.2.35 "aria-modal" Characteristic Description

5.2.36 "aria-current" Characteristic Description

5.2.37 "aria-placeholder" Characteristic Description

5.2.38 "aria-colcount" Characteristic Description

5.2.39 "aria-rowcount" Characteristic Description

5.2.40 "aria-colindex" Characteristic Description

5.2.41 "aria-rowindex" Characteristic Description

5.2.42 "aria-colspan" Characteristic Description

5.2.43 "aria-rowspan" Characteristic Description

5.2.44 "aria-keyshortcuts" Characteristic Description

5.2.45 "aria-roledescription" Characteristic Description

5.2.46 "aria-errormessage" Characteristic Description

5.2.47 "aria-details" Characteristic Description

5.3 "AdaptiveSelection" Class Description

5.3.1 "qti-adaptive-engine-ref" Attribute Description

5.3.2 "qti-adaptive-settings-ref" Attribute Description

5.3.3 "qti-usagedata-ref" Attribute Description

5.3.4 "qti-metadata-ref" Attribute Description

5.4 "AnyN" Class Description

5.4.1 "min" Characteristic Description

5.4.2 "max" Characteristic Description

5.4.3 "logic" Attribute Description

5.5 "AreaMapping" Class Description

5.5.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

5.5.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

5.5.3 "default-value" Characteristic Description

5.5.4 "qti-area-map-entry" Attribute Description

5.6 "AssessmentItemRef" Class Description

5.6.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.6.2 "required" Characteristic Description

5.6.3 "fixed" Characteristic Description

5.6.4 "class" Characteristic Description

5.6.5 "href" Characteristic Description

5.6.6 "category" Characteristic Description

5.6.7 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.6.8 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

5.6.9 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

5.6.10 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

5.6.11 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

5.6.12 "qti-variable-mapping" Attribute Description

5.6.13 "qti-weight" Attribute Description

5.6.14 "qti-template-default" Attribute Description

5.7 "AssociableHotspot" Class Description

5.7.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.7.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.7.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.7.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

5.7.5 "shape" Characteristic Description

5.7.6 "coords" Characteristic Description

5.7.7 "hotspot-label" Characteristic Description

5.7.8 "match-max" Characteristic Description

5.7.9 "match-min" Characteristic Description

5.8 "AssociateInteraction" Class Description

5.8.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.8.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

5.8.3 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

5.8.4 "qti-simple-associable-choice" Attribute Description

5.9 "Audio" Class Description

5.9.1 "src" Characteristic Description

5.9.2 "crossorigin" Characteristic Description

5.9.3 "preload" Characteristic Description

5.9.4 "autoplay" Characteristic Description

5.9.5 "mediagroup" Characteristic Description

5.9.6 "loop" Characteristic Description

5.9.7 "muted" Characteristic Description

5.9.8 "controls" Characteristic Description

5.9.9 "source" Attribute Description

5.9.10 "track" Attribute Description

5.10 "BDI" Class Description

5.10.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

5.11 "BDO" Class Description

5.11.1 "title" Characteristic Description

5.11.2 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

5.12 "BR" Class Description

5.13 "BaseHTML5Flow" Class Description

5.13.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

5.14 "BaseHTML5Phrasing" Class Description

5.14.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

5.15 "BasePromptInteraction" Class Description

5.15.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.15.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.15.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.15.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.15.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.15.6 "base" Characteristic Description

5.15.7 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.15.8 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.15.9 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.15.10 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.15.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.15.12 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

5.16 "BaseSequence" Class Description

5.16.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.16.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.16.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.16.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.16.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.16.6 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.16.7 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.16.8 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.16.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.17 "BaseSequenceEmpty" Class Description

5.17.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.17.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.17.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.17.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.17.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.17.6 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.17.7 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.17.8 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.17.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.18 "BaseSequenceFull" Class Description

5.18.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.18.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.18.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.18.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.18.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.18.6 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.18.7 "base" Characteristic Description

5.18.8 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.18.9 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.18.10 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.18.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.19 "BaseSequenceRIdent" Class Description

5.19.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.19.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.19.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.19.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.19.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.19.6 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.19.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.19.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.19.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.19.10 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.20 "BaseSequenceXBase" Class Description

5.20.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.20.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.20.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.20.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.20.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.20.6 "base" Characteristic Description

5.20.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.20.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.20.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.20.10 "data-ssml" Characteristic Description

5.20.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.21 "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" Class Description

5.21.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.21.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.21.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

5.21.4 "language" Characteristic Description

5.21.5 "label" Characteristic Description

5.21.6 "base" Characteristic Description

5.21.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.21.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.21.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

5.21.10 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.22 "BlockQuote" Class Description

5.22.1 "cite" Characteristic Description

5.22.2 "flowContent" Attribute Description

5.23 "BranchRule" Class Description

5.23.1 "target" Characteristic Description

5.23.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.24 "Calculator" Class Description

5.24.1 "qti-calculator-type" Attribute Description

5.24.2 "qti-description" Attribute Description

5.24.3 "qti-calculator-info" Attribute Description

5.25 "Caption" Class Description

5.25.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

5.26 "Card" Class Description

5.26.1 "support" Characteristic Description

5.26.2 "language" Characteristic Description

5.26.3 "cardSelection" Attribute Description

5.26.4 "qti-card-entry" Attribute Description

5.27 "CardEntry" Class Description

5.27.1 "language" Characteristic Description

5.27.2 "default" Characteristic Description

5.27.3 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.27.4 "qti-html-content" Attribute Description

5.27.5 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

5.28 "Catalog" Class Description

5.28.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.28.2 "qti-card" Attribute Description

5.29 "CatalogInfo" Class Description

5.29.1 "qti-catalog" Attribute Description

5.30 "ChoiceInteraction" Class Description

5.30.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.30.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.30.3 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.30.4 "orientation" Characteristic Description

5.30.5 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.30.6 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.30.7 "qti-simple-choice" Attribute Description

5.31 "Col" Class Description

5.31.1 "span" Characteristic Description

5.32 "ColGroup" Class Description

5.32.1 "span" Characteristic Description

5.32.2 "col" Attribute Description

5.33 "CompanionMaterialsInfo" Class Description

5.33.1 "qti-calculator" Attribute Description

5.33.2 "qti-rule" Attribute Description

5.33.3 "qti-protractor" Attribute Description

5.33.4 "qti-digital-material" Attribute Description

5.33.5 "qti-physical-material" Attribute Description

5.33.6 "extensions" Attribute Description

5.34 "ContextDeclaration" Class Description

5.34.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.34.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

5.34.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

5.34.4 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

5.35 "CorrectResponse" Class Description

5.35.1 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

5.35.2 "qti-value" Attribute Description

5.36 "CustomInteraction" Class Description

5.36.1 "extension" Characteristic Description

5.36.2 "extension" Attribute Description

5.37 "CustomOperator" Class Description

5.37.1 "class" Characteristic Description

5.37.2 "definition" Characteristic Description

5.37.3 "extension" Characteristic Description

5.37.4 "logic" Attribute Description

5.37.5 "extension" Attribute Description

5.38 "DD" Class Description

5.38.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

5.39 "DL" Class Description

5.39.1 "dlSelection" Attribute Description

5.40 "DT" Class Description

5.40.1 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

5.41 "DefaultValue" Class Description

5.41.1 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

5.41.2 "qti-value" Attribute Description

5.42 "Details" Class Description

5.42.1 "open" Characteristic Description

5.42.2 "summary" Attribute Description

5.42.3 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

5.43 "Div" Class Description

5.43.1 "divSelection" Attribute Description

5.44 "DrawingInteraction" Class Description

5.44.1 "object" Attribute Description

5.44.2 "img" Attribute Description

5.44.3 "picture" Attribute Description

5.45 "EndAttemptInteraction" Class Description

5.45.1 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.45.2 "title" Characteristic Description

5.45.3 "count-attempt" Characteristic Description

5.46 "Equal" Class Description

5.46.1 "tolerance-mode" Characteristic Description

5.46.2 "tolerance" Characteristic Description

5.46.3 "include-lower-bound" Characteristic Description

5.46.4 "include-upper-bound" Characteristic Description

5.46.5 "logic" Attribute Description

5.47 "EqualRounded" Class Description

5.47.1 "rounding-mode" Characteristic Description

5.47.2 "figures" Characteristic Description

5.47.3 "logic" Attribute Description

5.48 "ExtendedTextInteraction" Class Description

5.48.1 "base" Characteristic Description

5.48.2 "string-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.48.3 "expected-length" Characteristic Description

5.48.4 "pattern-mask" Characteristic Description

5.48.5 "placeholder-text" Characteristic Description

5.48.6 "max-strings" Characteristic Description

5.48.7 "min-strings" Characteristic Description

5.48.8 "expected-lines" Characteristic Description

5.48.9 "format" Characteristic Description

5.48.10 "data-patternmask-message" Characteristic Description

5.49 "FeedbackBlock" Class Description

5.49.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.49.2 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.49.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.49.4 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.49.5 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.49.6 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.50 "FeedbackContentBody" Class Description

5.50.1 "feedbackBlockStatic" Attribute Description

5.51 "FeedbackFlowContentBody" Class Description

5.51.1 "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.52 "FeedbackInline" Class Description

5.52.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.52.2 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.52.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.52.4 "feedbackInlineGroup" Attribute Description

5.53 "FieldValue" Class Description

5.53.1 "field-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.53.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.54 "Figure" Class Description

5.54.1 "figcaption" Attribute Description

5.54.2 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

5.55 "Gap" Class Description

5.55.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.55.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.55.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.55.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

5.55.5 "required" Characteristic Description

5.56 "GapImg" Class Description

5.56.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.56.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.56.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.56.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

5.56.5 "match-max" Characteristic Description

5.56.6 "match-min" Characteristic Description

5.56.7 "object-label" Characteristic Description

5.56.8 "top" Characteristic Description

5.56.9 "left" Characteristic Description

5.56.10 "object" Attribute Description

5.56.11 "img" Attribute Description

5.56.12 "picture" Attribute Description

5.57 "GapMatchInteraction" Class Description

5.57.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.57.2 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

5.57.3 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

5.57.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.57.5 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.57.6 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

5.57.7 "gapChoice" Attribute Description

5.57.8 "blockStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.58 "GapText" Class Description

5.58.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.58.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.58.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.58.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

5.58.5 "match-max" Characteristic Description

5.58.6 "match-min" Characteristic Description

5.58.7 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

5.59 "GraphicAssociateInteraction" Class Description

5.59.1 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

5.59.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

5.59.3 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

5.59.4 "qti-associable-hotspot" Attribute Description

5.60 "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" Class Description

5.60.1 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

5.60.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

5.60.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.60.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.60.5 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

5.60.6 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

5.60.7 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

5.60.8 "gapChoice" Attribute Description

5.60.9 "qti-associable-hotspot" Attribute Description

5.61 "GraphicOrderInteraction" Class Description

5.61.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.61.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.61.3 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

5.61.4 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

5.61.5 "qti-hotspot-choice" Attribute Description

5.62 "HR" Class Description

5.63 "HTMLContent" Class Description

5.63.1 "language" Characteristic Description

5.63.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.63.3 "htmlContentFlow" Attribute Description

5.64 "HTMLText" Class Description

5.64.1 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

5.65 "HotText" Class Description

5.65.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.65.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.65.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.65.4 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

5.66 "HotTextInteraction" Class Description

5.66.1 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.66.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.66.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.66.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.66.5 "blockStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.67 "HotspotChoice" Class Description

5.67.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.67.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.67.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.67.4 "shape" Characteristic Description

5.67.5 "coords" Characteristic Description

5.67.6 "hotspot-label" Characteristic Description

5.68 "HotspotInteraction" Class Description

5.68.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.68.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.68.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.68.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.68.5 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

5.68.6 "qti-hotspot-choice" Attribute Description

5.69 "Img" Class Description

5.69.1 "src" Characteristic Description

5.69.2 "alt" Characteristic Description

5.69.3 "longdesc" Characteristic Description

5.69.4 "height" Characteristic Description

5.69.5 "width" Characteristic Description

5.70 "IncrementSI" Class Description

5.70.1 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

5.70.2 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

5.71 "IncrementUS" Class Description

5.71.1 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

5.71.2 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

5.72 "Index" Class Description

5.72.1 "n" Characteristic Description

5.72.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.73 "InlineChoice" Class Description

5.73.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.73.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

5.73.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.73.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.73.5 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

5.74 "InlineChoiceInteraction" Class Description

5.74.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.74.2 "required" Characteristic Description

5.74.3 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.74.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.74.5 "data-prompt" Characteristic Description

5.74.6 "qti-label" Attribute Description

5.74.7 "qti-inline-choice" Attribute Description

5.75 "Inside" Class Description

5.75.1 "shape" Characteristic Description

5.75.2 "coords" Characteristic Description

5.75.3 "logic" Attribute Description

5.76 "InteractionMarkup" Class Description

5.76.1 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.76.2 "template" Attribute Description

5.77 "InteractionModules" Class Description

5.77.1 "primary-configuration" Characteristic Description

5.77.2 "secondary-configuration" Characteristic Description

5.77.3 "qti-interaction-module" Attribute Description

5.78 "InterpolationTable" Class Description

5.78.1 "default-value" Characteristic Description

5.78.2 "qti-interpolation-table-entry" Attribute Description

5.79 "ItemBody" Class Description

5.79.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.79.2 "class" Characteristic Description

5.79.3 "language" Characteristic Description

5.79.4 "label" Characteristic Description

5.79.5 "dir" Characteristic Description

5.79.6 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

5.79.7 "itemBodySelect" Attribute Description

5.80 "ItemFileInfo" Class Description

5.80.1 "mime-type" Characteristic Description

5.80.2 "label" Characteristic Description

5.80.3 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

5.80.4 "qti-resource-icon" Attribute Description

5.81 "LI" Class Description

5.81.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

5.82 "Label" Class Description

5.82.1 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

5.83 "Logic0toMany" Class Description

5.83.1 "logic" Attribute Description

5.84 "Logic1toMany" Class Description

5.84.1 "logic" Attribute Description

5.85 "LogicPair" Class Description

5.85.1 "logic" Attribute Description

5.86 "LogicSingle" Class Description

5.86.1 "logic" Attribute Description

5.87 "LookupOutcomeValue" Class Description

5.87.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.87.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.88 "Mapping" Class Description

5.88.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

5.88.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

5.88.3 "default-value" Characteristic Description

5.88.4 "qti-map-entry" Attribute Description

5.89 "MatchInteraction" Class Description

5.89.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.89.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

5.89.3 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

5.89.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.89.5 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.89.6 "data-first-column-header" Characteristic Description

5.89.7 "qti-simple-match-set" Attribute Description

5.90 "MatchTable" Class Description

5.90.1 "default-value" Characteristic Description

5.90.2 "qti-match-table-entry" Attribute Description

5.91 "MathOperator" Class Description

5.91.1 "name" Characteristic Description

5.91.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.92 "MediaInteraction" Class Description

5.92.1 "autostart" Characteristic Description

5.92.2 "min-plays" Characteristic Description

5.92.3 "max-plays" Characteristic Description

5.92.4 "loop" Characteristic Description

5.92.5 "coords" Characteristic Description

5.92.6 "object" Attribute Description

5.92.7 "audio" Attribute Description

5.92.8 "video" Attribute Description

5.93 "ModalFeedback" Class Description

5.93.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.93.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.93.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.93.4 "title" Characteristic Description

5.93.5 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.93.6 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.93.7 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.93.8 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.94 "NumericLogic1toMany" Class Description

5.94.1 "logic" Attribute Description

5.95 "OUL" Class Description

5.95.1 "li" Attribute Description

5.96 "Object" Class Description

5.96.1 "data" Characteristic Description

5.96.2 "type" Characteristic Description

5.96.3 "width" Characteristic Description

5.96.4 "height" Characteristic Description

5.96.5 "objectFlowGroup" Attribute Description

5.97 "OrderInteraction" Class Description

5.97.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.97.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.97.3 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.97.4 "orientation" Characteristic Description

5.97.5 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.97.6 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

5.97.7 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

5.97.8 "qti-simple-choice" Attribute Description

5.98 "Ordering" Class Description

5.98.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

5.98.2 "extension" Characteristic Description

5.98.3 "extensions" Attribute Description

5.99 "OutcomeCondition" Class Description

5.99.1 "qti-outcome-if" Attribute Description

5.99.2 "qti-outcome-else-if" Attribute Description

5.99.3 "qti-outcome-else" Attribute Description

5.100 "OutcomeElse" Class Description

5.100.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

5.101 "OutcomeIf" Class Description

5.101.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.101.2 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

5.102 "OutcomeProcessing" Class Description

5.102.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

5.103 "OutcomeProcessingFragment" Class Description

5.103.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

5.104 "PatternMatch" Class Description

5.104.1 "pattern" Characteristic Description

5.104.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.105 "Picture" Class Description

5.105.1 "source" Attribute Description

5.105.2 "img" Attribute Description

5.106 "PortableCustomInteraction" Class Description

5.106.1 "custom-interaction-type-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.106.2 "module" Characteristic Description

5.106.3 "qti-interaction-modules" Attribute Description

5.106.4 "qti-interaction-markup" Attribute Description

5.106.5 "qti-template-variable" Attribute Description

5.106.6 "qti-context-variable" Attribute Description

5.107 "PositionObjectInteraction" Class Description

5.107.1 "center-point" Characteristic Description

5.107.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.107.3 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.107.4 "object" Attribute Description

5.107.5 "img" Attribute Description

5.107.6 "picture" Attribute Description

5.108 "PositionObjectStage" Class Description

5.108.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.108.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.108.3 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

5.108.4 "qti-position-object-interaction" Attribute Description

5.109 "Prompt" Class Description

5.109.1 "promptStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.110 "Protractor" Class Description

5.110.1 "qti-description" Attribute Description

5.110.2 "qti-increment" Attribute Description

5.111 "Q" Class Description

5.111.1 "cite" Characteristic Description

5.111.2 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

5.112 "RTC" Class Description

5.112.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

5.112.2 "rt" Attribute Description

5.113 "Repeat" Class Description

5.113.1 "number-repeats" Characteristic Description

5.113.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.114 "ResponseCondition" Class Description

5.114.1 "qti-response-if" Attribute Description

5.114.2 "qti-response-else-if" Attribute Description

5.114.3 "qti-response-else" Attribute Description

5.115 "ResponseDeclaration" Class Description

5.115.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.115.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

5.115.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

5.115.4 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

5.115.5 "qti-correct-response" Attribute Description

5.115.6 "qti-mapping" Attribute Description

5.115.7 "qti-area-mapping" Attribute Description

5.116 "ResponseElse" Class Description

5.116.1 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.117 "ResponseIf" Class Description

5.117.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.117.2 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.118 "ResponseProcessingFragment" Class Description

5.118.1 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.119 "RoundTo" Class Description

5.119.1 "rounding-mode" Characteristic Description

5.119.2 "figures" Characteristic Description

5.119.3 "logic" Attribute Description

5.120 "RubricBlock" Class Description

5.120.1 "use" Characteristic Description

5.120.2 "view" Characteristic Description

5.120.3 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.120.4 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.120.5 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.121 "RubricBlockContentBody" Class Description

5.121.1 "contentModel" Attribute Description

5.122 "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" Class Description

5.122.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.122.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.122.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.122.4 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.122.5 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.122.6 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.123 "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" Class Description

5.123.1 "rtBlockContentModel" Attribute Description

5.124 "RubricBlockTemplateInline" Class Description

5.124.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.124.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.124.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.124.4 "rtInlineStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.125 "Ruby" Class Description

5.125.1 "rubySelection" Attribute Description

5.126 "Rule" Class Description

5.126.1 "qti-description" Attribute Description

5.126.2 "qti-rule-system" Attribute Description

5.127 "SIRuleSystem" Class Description

5.127.1 "qti-minimum-length" Attribute Description

5.127.2 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

5.127.3 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

5.128 "SelectPointInteraction" Class Description

5.128.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

5.128.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

5.128.3 "object" Attribute Description

5.128.4 "img" Attribute Description

5.128.5 "picture" Attribute Description

5.129 "Selection" Class Description

5.129.1 "select" Characteristic Description

5.129.2 "with-replacement" Characteristic Description

5.129.3 "extension" Characteristic Description

5.129.4 "extensions" Attribute Description

5.130 "SetValue" Class Description

5.130.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.130.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.131 "SimpleAssociableChoice" Class Description

5.131.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.131.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

5.131.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.131.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.131.5 "match-group" Characteristic Description

5.131.6 "match-max" Characteristic Description

5.131.7 "match-min" Characteristic Description

5.131.8 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.132 "SimpleChoice" Class Description

5.132.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.132.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

5.132.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.132.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.132.5 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.133 "SimpleMatchSet" Class Description

5.133.1 "id" Characteristic Description

5.133.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.133.3 "qti-simple-associable-choice" Attribute Description

5.134 "SliderInteraction" Class Description

5.134.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

5.134.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

5.134.3 "step" Characteristic Description

5.134.4 "step-label" Characteristic Description

5.134.5 "orientation" Characteristic Description

5.134.6 "reverse" Characteristic Description

5.135 "Source" Class Description

5.135.1 "src" Characteristic Description

5.135.2 "type" Characteristic Description

5.135.3 "srcset" Characteristic Description

5.135.4 "media" Characteristic Description

5.135.5 "sizes" Characteristic Description

5.136 "StatsOperator" Class Description

5.136.1 "name" Characteristic Description

5.136.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.137 "StimulusBody" Class Description

5.137.1 "selectStimulus" Attribute Description

5.138 "StringMatch" Class Description

5.138.1 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

5.138.2 "substring" Characteristic Description

5.138.3 "logic" Attribute Description

5.139 "Substring" Class Description

5.139.1 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

5.139.2 "logic" Attribute Description

5.140 "TDH" Class Description

5.140.1 "headers" Characteristic Description

5.140.2 "scope" Characteristic Description

5.140.3 "abbr" Characteristic Description

5.140.4 "axis" Characteristic Description

5.140.5 "rowspan" Characteristic Description

5.140.6 "colspan" Characteristic Description

5.140.7 "align" Characteristic Description

5.140.8 "valign" Characteristic Description

5.140.9 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

5.141 "TR" Class Description

5.141.1 "tableCellGroup" Attribute Description

5.142 "Table" Class Description

5.142.1 "summary" Characteristic Description

5.142.2 "caption" Attribute Description

5.142.3 "col" Attribute Description

5.142.4 "colgroup" Attribute Description

5.142.5 "thead" Attribute Description

5.142.6 "tfoot" Attribute Description

5.142.7 "tbody" Attribute Description

5.142.8 "tr" Attribute Description

5.143 "TablePart" Class Description

5.143.1 "tr" Attribute Description

5.144 "Template" Class Description

5.144.1 "extensions" Attribute Description

5.145 "TemplateBlock" Class Description

5.145.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.145.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.145.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.146 "TemplateBlockContent" Class Description

5.146.1 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.146.2 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.146.3 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.147 "TemplateBlockContentBody" Class Description

5.147.1 "fatBlockStatic" Attribute Description

5.148 "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" Class Description

5.148.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.148.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.148.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.149 "TemplateCondition" Class Description

5.149.1 "qti-template-if" Attribute Description

5.149.2 "qti-template-else-if" Attribute Description

5.149.3 "qti-template-else" Attribute Description

5.150 "TemplateConstraint" Class Description

5.150.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.151 "TemplateDeclaration" Class Description

5.151.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.151.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

5.151.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

5.151.4 "param-variable" Characteristic Description

5.151.5 "math-variable" Characteristic Description

5.151.6 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

5.152 "TemplateDefault" Class Description

5.152.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.152.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.153 "TemplateElse" Class Description

5.153.1 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.154 "TemplateIf" Class Description

5.154.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

5.154.2 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.155 "TemplateInline" Class Description

5.155.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.155.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.155.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.155.4 "inlineStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.156 "TemplateProcessing" Class Description

5.156.1 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

5.157 "TestFeedback" Class Description

5.157.1 "access" Characteristic Description

5.157.2 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.157.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

5.157.4 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.157.5 "title" Characteristic Description

5.157.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.157.7 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.157.8 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.157.9 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.158 "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" Class Description

5.158.1 "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

5.159 "TestPart" Class Description

5.159.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

5.159.2 "title" Characteristic Description

5.159.3 "class" Characteristic Description

5.159.4 "navigation-mode" Characteristic Description

5.159.5 "submission-mode" Characteristic Description

5.159.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

5.159.7 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

5.159.8 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

5.159.9 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

5.159.10 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

5.159.11 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

5.159.12 "assessmentSectionSelection" Attribute Description

5.159.13 "qti-test-feedback" Attribute Description

5.160 "TestRubricBlock" Class Description

5.160.1 "view" Characteristic Description

5.160.2 "use" Characteristic Description

5.160.3 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

5.160.4 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

5.160.5 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

5.160.6 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

5.161 "TestRubricBlockContentBody" Class Description

5.161.1 "contentModel" Attribute Description

5.162 "TextEntryInteraction" Class Description

5.162.1 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.162.2 "base" Characteristic Description

5.162.3 "string-identifier" Characteristic Description

5.162.4 "expected-length" Characteristic Description

5.162.5 "pattern-mask" Characteristic Description

5.162.6 "placeholder-text" Characteristic Description

5.162.7 "format" Characteristic Description

5.162.8 "data-patternmask-message" Characteristic Description

5.163 "Track" Class Description

5.163.1 "kind" Characteristic Description

5.163.2 "src" Characteristic Description

5.163.3 "srclang" Characteristic Description

5.163.4 "default" Characteristic Description

5.164 "USRuleSystem" Class Description

5.164.1 "qti-minimum-length" Attribute Description

5.164.2 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

5.164.3 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

5.165 "UploadInteraction" Class Description

5.165.1 "type" Characteristic Description

5.166 "Video" Class Description

5.166.1 "src" Characteristic Description

5.166.2 "crossorigin" Characteristic Description

5.166.3 "preload" Characteristic Description

5.166.4 "autoplay" Characteristic Description

5.166.5 "mediagroup" Characteristic Description

5.166.6 "loop" Characteristic Description

5.166.7 "muted" Characteristic Description

5.166.8 "controls" Characteristic Description

5.166.9 "poster" Characteristic Description

5.166.10 "width" Characteristic Description

5.166.11 "height" Characteristic Description

5.166.12 "source" Attribute Description

5.166.13 "track" Attribute Description

6. Abstract Class Descriptions

6.1 "Adaptive" Class Description

6.1.1 "qti-adaptive-selection" Attribute Description

6.1.2 "selectOrderSelection" Attribute Description

6.2 "AssessmentSectionSelection" Class Description

6.2.1 "qti-assessment-section" Attribute Description

6.2.2 "qti-assessment-section-ref" Attribute Description

6.3 "BlockContentModel" Class Description

6.3.1 "pre" Attribute Description

6.3.2 "h1" Attribute Description

6.3.3 "h2" Attribute Description

6.3.4 "h3" Attribute Description

6.3.5 "h4" Attribute Description

6.3.6 "h5" Attribute Description

6.3.7 "h6" Attribute Description

6.3.8 "p" Attribute Description

6.3.9 "address" Attribute Description

6.3.10 "dl" Attribute Description

6.3.11 "ol" Attribute Description

6.3.12 "ul" Attribute Description

6.3.13 "hr" Attribute Description

6.3.14 "blockquote" Attribute Description

6.3.15 "table" Attribute Description

6.3.16 "div" Attribute Description

6.3.17 "article" Attribute Description

6.3.18 "aside" Attribute Description

6.3.19 "audio" Attribute Description

6.3.20 "figure" Attribute Description

6.3.21 "footer" Attribute Description

6.3.22 "header" Attribute Description

6.3.23 "nav" Attribute Description

6.3.24 "section" Attribute Description

6.3.25 "video" Attribute Description

6.4 "BlockGroup" Class Description

6.4.1 "qti-position-object-stage" Attribute Description

6.4.2 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.3 "qti-portable-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.4 "qti-drawing-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.5 "qti-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.6 "qti-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.7 "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.8 "qti-hotspot-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.9 "qti-graphic-order-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.10 "qti-select-point-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.11 "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.12 "qti-slider-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.13 "qti-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.14 "qti-media-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.15 "qti-hottext-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.16 "qti-order-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.17 "qti-extended-text-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.18 "qti-upload-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.19 "qti-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

6.4.20 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

6.4.21 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.4.22 "math" Attribute Description

6.4.23 "include" Attribute Description

6.4.24 "blockContentModel" Attribute Description

6.5 "BlockStaticGroup" Class Description

6.5.1 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

6.5.2 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.5.3 "math" Attribute Description

6.5.4 "include" Attribute Description

6.5.5 "blockContentModel" Attribute Description

6.6 "CardSelection" Class Description

6.6.1 "qti-html-content" Attribute Description

6.6.2 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

6.7 "DLSelection" Class Description

6.7.1 "dd" Attribute Description

6.7.2 "dt" Attribute Description

6.8 "DivSelection" Class Description

6.8.1 "qti-position-object-stage" Attribute Description

6.8.2 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

6.9 "ExpressionGroup" Class Description

6.9.1 "qti-and" Attribute Description

6.9.2 "qti-gt" Attribute Description

6.9.3 "qti-not" Attribute Description

6.9.4 "qti-lt" Attribute Description

6.9.5 "qti-gte" Attribute Description

6.9.6 "qti-lte" Attribute Description

6.9.7 "qti-or" Attribute Description

6.9.8 "qti-sum" Attribute Description

6.9.9 "qti-duration-lt" Attribute Description

6.9.10 "qti-duration-gte" Attribute Description

6.9.11 "qti-subtract" Attribute Description

6.9.12 "qti-divide" Attribute Description

6.9.13 "qti-multiple" Attribute Description

6.9.14 "qti-ordered" Attribute Description

6.9.15 "qti-custom-operator" Attribute Description

6.9.16 "qti-random" Attribute Description

6.9.17 "qti-substring" Attribute Description

6.9.18 "qti-equal-rounded" Attribute Description

6.9.19 "qti-null" Attribute Description

6.9.20 "qti-delete" Attribute Description

6.9.21 "qti-match" Attribute Description

6.9.22 "qti-index" Attribute Description

6.9.23 "qti-power" Attribute Description

6.9.24 "qti-equal" Attribute Description

6.9.25 "qti-contains" Attribute Description

6.9.26 "qti-container-size" Attribute Description

6.9.27 "qti-correct" Attribute Description

6.9.28 "qti-default" Attribute Description

6.9.29 "qti-any-n" Attribute Description

6.9.30 "qti-integer-divide" Attribute Description

6.9.31 "qti-integer-modulus" Attribute Description

6.9.32 "qti-is-null" Attribute Description

6.9.33 "qti-member" Attribute Description

6.9.34 "qti-product" Attribute Description

6.9.35 "qti-round" Attribute Description

6.9.36 "qti-truncate" Attribute Description

6.9.37 "qti-field-value" Attribute Description

6.9.38 "qti-random-integer" Attribute Description

6.9.39 "qti-random-float" Attribute Description

6.9.40 "qti-variable" Attribute Description

6.9.41 "qti-test-variables" Attribute Description

6.9.42 "qti-integer-to-float" Attribute Description

6.9.43 "qti-inside" Attribute Description

6.9.44 "qti-base-value" Attribute Description

6.9.45 "qti-pattern-match" Attribute Description

6.9.46 "qti-map-response-point" Attribute Description

6.9.47 "qti-map-response" Attribute Description

6.9.48 "qti-string-match" Attribute Description

6.9.49 "qti-repeat" Attribute Description

6.9.50 "qti-round-to" Attribute Description

6.9.51 "qti-lcm" Attribute Description

6.9.52 "qti-gcd" Attribute Description

6.9.53 "qti-min" Attribute Description

6.9.54 "qti-max" Attribute Description

6.9.55 "qti-math-constant" Attribute Description

6.9.56 "qti-stats-operator" Attribute Description

6.9.57 "qti-math-operator" Attribute Description

6.9.58 "qti-number-correct" Attribute Description

6.9.59 "qti-number-incorrect" Attribute Description

6.9.60 "qti-number-presented" Attribute Description

6.9.61 "qti-number-responded" Attribute Description

6.9.62 "qti-number-selected" Attribute Description

6.9.63 "qti-outcome-minimum" Attribute Description

6.9.64 "qti-outcome-maximum" Attribute Description

6.10 "FeedandTempBlockStatic" Class Description

6.10.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.10.2 "math" Attribute Description

6.10.3 "include" Attribute Description

6.10.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.10.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.10.6 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

6.10.7 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.10.8 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.11 "FeedbackBlockStatic" Class Description

6.11.1 "blockGroup" Attribute Description

6.11.2 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.11.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.11.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.11.5 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.12 "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" Class Description

6.12.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.12.2 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

6.12.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.12.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.12.5 "math" Attribute Description

6.12.6 "include" Attribute Description

6.12.7 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.13 "FeedbackInlineGroup" Class Description

6.13.1 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.13.2 "math" Attribute Description

6.13.3 "include" Attribute Description

6.13.4 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.13.5 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.14 "FlowContentModel" Class Description

6.14.1 "pre" Attribute Description

6.14.2 "h1" Attribute Description

6.14.3 "h2" Attribute Description

6.14.4 "h3" Attribute Description

6.14.5 "h4" Attribute Description

6.14.6 "h5" Attribute Description

6.14.7 "h6" Attribute Description

6.14.8 "p" Attribute Description

6.14.9 "address" Attribute Description

6.14.10 "dl" Attribute Description

6.14.11 "ol" Attribute Description

6.14.12 "ul" Attribute Description

6.14.13 "br" Attribute Description

6.14.14 "hr" Attribute Description

6.14.15 "img" Attribute Description

6.14.16 "object" Attribute Description

6.14.17 "blockquote" Attribute Description

6.14.18 "em" Attribute Description

6.14.19 "a" Attribute Description

6.14.20 "code" Attribute Description

6.14.21 "span" Attribute Description

6.14.22 "sub" Attribute Description

6.14.23 "acronym" Attribute Description

6.14.24 "big" Attribute Description

6.14.25 "tt" Attribute Description

6.14.26 "kbd" Attribute Description

6.14.27 "q" Attribute Description

6.14.28 "i" Attribute Description

6.14.29 "dfn" Attribute Description

6.14.30 "abbr" Attribute Description

6.14.31 "strong" Attribute Description

6.14.32 "sup" Attribute Description

6.14.33 "var" Attribute Description

6.14.34 "small" Attribute Description

6.14.35 "samp" Attribute Description

6.14.36 "b" Attribute Description

6.14.37 "cite" Attribute Description

6.14.38 "table" Attribute Description

6.14.39 "div" Attribute Description

6.14.40 "bdo" Attribute Description

6.14.41 "bdi" Attribute Description

6.14.42 "figure" Attribute Description

6.14.43 "audio" Attribute Description

6.14.44 "video" Attribute Description

6.14.45 "article" Attribute Description

6.14.46 "aside" Attribute Description

6.14.47 "footer" Attribute Description

6.14.48 "header" Attribute Description

6.14.49 "label" Attribute Description

6.14.50 "nav" Attribute Description

6.14.51 "section" Attribute Description

6.14.52 "ruby" Attribute Description

6.14.53 "ssmlGroup" Attribute Description

6.14.54 "picture" Attribute Description

6.14.55 "details" Attribute Description

6.15 "FlowGroup" Class Description

6.15.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.15.2 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

6.15.3 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

6.15.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.15.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.15.6 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.15.7 "math" Attribute Description

6.15.8 "include" Attribute Description

6.15.9 "qti-text-entry-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.10 "qti-inline-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.11 "qti-end-attempt-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.12 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.13 "qti-portable-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.14 "qti-drawing-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.15 "qti-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.16 "qti-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.17 "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.18 "qti-hotspot-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.19 "qti-graphic-order-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.20 "qti-select-point-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.21 "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.22 "qti-slider-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.23 "qti-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.24 "qti-media-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.25 "qti-hottext-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.26 "qti-order-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.27 "qti-extended-text-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.28 "qti-upload-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.29 "qti-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

6.15.30 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.16 "FlowStaticGroup" Class Description

6.16.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.16.2 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

6.16.3 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.16.4 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.16.5 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.16.6 "math" Attribute Description

6.16.7 "include" Attribute Description

6.16.8 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.17 "GapChoice" Class Description

6.17.1 "qti-gap-text" Attribute Description

6.17.2 "qti-gap-img" Attribute Description

6.18 "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" Class Description

6.18.1 "object" Attribute Description

6.18.2 "img" Attribute Description

6.18.3 "picture" Attribute Description

6.19 "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" Class Description

6.19.1 "object" Attribute Description

6.19.2 "img" Attribute Description

6.19.3 "picture" Attribute Description

6.20 "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" Class Description

6.20.1 "object" Attribute Description

6.20.2 "img" Attribute Description

6.20.3 "picture" Attribute Description

6.21 "HTMLContentFlow" Class Description

6.21.1 "math" Attribute Description

6.21.2 "flowContent" Attribute Description

6.22 "HotspotInteractionSelection" Class Description

6.22.1 "object" Attribute Description

6.22.2 "img" Attribute Description

6.22.3 "picture" Attribute Description

6.23 "IncrementSelection" Class Description

6.23.1 "qti-increment-si" Attribute Description

6.23.2 "qti-increment-us" Attribute Description

6.24 "InlineChoiceGroup" Class Description

6.24.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.24.2 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.24.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.24.4 "math" Attribute Description

6.24.5 "include" Attribute Description

6.24.6 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.25 "InlineContentModel" Class Description

6.25.1 "img" Attribute Description

6.25.2 "picture" Attribute Description

6.25.3 "br" Attribute Description

6.25.4 "object" Attribute Description

6.25.5 "em" Attribute Description

6.25.6 "a" Attribute Description

6.25.7 "code" Attribute Description

6.25.8 "span" Attribute Description

6.25.9 "sub" Attribute Description

6.25.10 "acronym" Attribute Description

6.25.11 "big" Attribute Description

6.25.12 "tt" Attribute Description

6.25.13 "kbd" Attribute Description

6.25.14 "q" Attribute Description

6.25.15 "i" Attribute Description

6.25.16 "dfn" Attribute Description

6.25.17 "abbr" Attribute Description

6.25.18 "strong" Attribute Description

6.25.19 "sup" Attribute Description

6.25.20 "var" Attribute Description

6.25.21 "small" Attribute Description

6.25.22 "samp" Attribute Description

6.25.23 "b" Attribute Description

6.25.24 "cite" Attribute Description

6.25.25 "bdo" Attribute Description

6.25.26 "bdi" Attribute Description

6.25.27 "label" Attribute Description

6.25.28 "ruby" Attribute Description

6.25.29 "ssml11Group" Attribute Description

6.26 "InlineGroup" Class Description

6.26.1 "qti-text-entry-interaction" Attribute Description

6.26.2 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

6.26.3 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.26.4 "qti-gap" Attribute Description

6.26.5 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.26.6 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.26.7 "qti-inline-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

6.26.8 "qti-end-attempt-interaction" Attribute Description

6.26.9 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

6.26.10 "math" Attribute Description

6.26.11 "include" Attribute Description

6.26.12 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.27 "InlineStaticGroup" Class Description

6.27.1 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

6.27.2 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.27.3 "qti-gap" Attribute Description

6.27.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

6.27.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.27.6 "math" Attribute Description

6.27.7 "include" Attribute Description

6.27.8 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.28 "ItemBodySelect" Class Description

6.28.1 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

6.28.2 "blockGroup" Attribute Description

6.29 "LookupTable" Class Description

6.29.1 "qti-match-table" Attribute Description

6.29.2 "qti-interpolation-table" Attribute Description

6.30 "NumericExpressionGroup" Class Description

6.30.1 "qti-sum" Attribute Description

6.30.2 "qti-subtract" Attribute Description

6.30.3 "qti-divide" Attribute Description

6.30.4 "qti-multiple" Attribute Description

6.30.5 "qti-ordered" Attribute Description

6.30.6 "qti-custom-operator" Attribute Description

6.30.7 "qti-random" Attribute Description

6.30.8 "qti-null" Attribute Description

6.30.9 "qti-delete" Attribute Description

6.30.10 "qti-index" Attribute Description

6.30.11 "qti-power" Attribute Description

6.30.12 "qti-container-size" Attribute Description

6.30.13 "qti-correct" Attribute Description

6.30.14 "qti-default" Attribute Description

6.30.15 "qti-integer-divide" Attribute Description

6.30.16 "qti-integer-modulus" Attribute Description

6.30.17 "qti-product" Attribute Description

6.30.18 "qti-round" Attribute Description

6.30.19 "qti-truncate" Attribute Description

6.30.20 "qti-field-value" Attribute Description

6.30.21 "qti-random-integer" Attribute Description

6.30.22 "qti-variable" Attribute Description

6.30.23 "qti-test-variables" Attribute Description

6.30.24 "qti-integer-to-float" Attribute Description

6.30.25 "qti-base-value" Attribute Description

6.30.26 "qti-map-response-point" Attribute Description

6.30.27 "qti-map-response" Attribute Description

6.30.28 "qti-repeat" Attribute Description

6.30.29 "qti-round-to" Attribute Description

6.30.30 "qti-lcm" Attribute Description

6.30.31 "qti-gcd" Attribute Description

6.30.32 "qti-min" Attribute Description

6.30.33 "qti-max" Attribute Description

6.30.34 "qti-math-constant" Attribute Description

6.30.35 "qti-stats-operator" Attribute Description

6.30.36 "qti-math-operator" Attribute Description

6.30.37 "qti-random-float" Attribute Description

6.30.38 "qti-number-correct" Attribute Description

6.30.39 "qti-number-incorrect" Attribute Description

6.30.40 "qti-number-presented" Attribute Description

6.30.41 "qti-number-responded" Attribute Description

6.30.42 "qti-number-selected" Attribute Description

6.30.43 "qti-outcome-minimum" Attribute Description

6.30.44 "qti-outcome-maximum" Attribute Description

6.31 "ObjectFlowGroup" Class Description

6.31.1 "math" Attribute Description

6.31.2 "include" Attribute Description

6.31.3 "param" Attribute Description

6.31.4 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.32 "OutcomeRule" Class Description

6.32.1 "qti-lookup-outcome-value" Attribute Description

6.32.2 "qti-outcome-processing-fragment" Attribute Description

6.32.3 "qti-set-outcome-value" Attribute Description

6.32.4 "include" Attribute Description

6.32.5 "qti-exit-test" Attribute Description

6.32.6 "qti-outcome-condition" Attribute Description

6.33 "PhraseRBSelection" Class Description

6.33.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

6.33.2 "rb" Attribute Description

6.34 "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" Class Description

6.34.1 "a" Attribute Description

6.34.2 "abbr" Attribute Description

6.34.3 "b" Attribute Description

6.34.4 "bdo" Attribute Description

6.34.5 "br" Attribute Description

6.34.6 "cite" Attribute Description

6.34.7 "code" Attribute Description

6.34.8 "dfn" Attribute Description

6.34.9 "em" Attribute Description

6.34.10 "i" Attribute Description

6.34.11 "img" Attribute Description

6.34.12 "picture" Attribute Description

6.34.13 "kbd" Attribute Description

6.34.14 "object" Attribute Description

6.34.15 "q" Attribute Description

6.34.16 "samp" Attribute Description

6.34.17 "small" Attribute Description

6.34.18 "span" Attribute Description

6.34.19 "strong" Attribute Description

6.34.20 "sub" Attribute Description

6.34.21 "sup" Attribute Description

6.34.22 "var" Attribute Description

6.34.23 "audio" Attribute Description

6.34.24 "bdi" Attribute Description

6.34.25 "label" Attribute Description

6.34.26 "ruby" Attribute Description

6.34.27 "video" Attribute Description

6.35 "PositionObjectStageSelection" Class Description

6.35.1 "object" Attribute Description

6.35.2 "img" Attribute Description

6.35.3 "picture" Attribute Description

6.36 "PromptStaticGroup" Class Description

6.36.1 "math" Attribute Description

6.36.2 "include" Attribute Description

6.36.3 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.37 "RPRTSelection" Class Description

6.37.1 "rp" Attribute Description

6.37.2 "rtrtcSelection" Attribute Description

6.38 "RTRTCSelection" Class Description

6.38.1 "rt" Attribute Description

6.38.2 "rtc" Attribute Description

6.39 "ResponseRuleGroup" Class Description

6.39.1 "include" Attribute Description

6.39.2 "qti-response-condition" Attribute Description

6.39.3 "qti-response-processing-fragment" Attribute Description

6.39.4 "qti-set-outcome-value" Attribute Description

6.39.5 "qti-exit-response" Attribute Description

6.39.6 "qti-lookup-outcome-value" Attribute Description

6.40 "RubricBlockContentModel" Class Description

6.40.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.40.2 "math" Attribute Description

6.40.3 "include" Attribute Description

6.40.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

6.40.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

6.40.6 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.41 "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" Class Description

6.41.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.41.2 "math" Attribute Description

6.41.3 "include" Attribute Description

6.41.4 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.42 "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" Class Description

6.42.1 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

6.42.2 "math" Attribute Description

6.42.3 "include" Attribute Description

6.42.4 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

6.43 "RubySelection" Class Description

6.43.1 "phraseSelection" Attribute Description

6.43.2 "rprtSelection" Attribute Description

6.44 "RuleSystemSelection" Class Description

6.44.1 "qti-rule-system-si" Attribute Description

6.44.2 "qti-rule-system-us" Attribute Description

6.45 "SSMLGroup" Class Description

6.45.1 "p" Attribute Description

6.45.2 "s" Attribute Description

6.45.3 "say-as" Attribute Description

6.45.4 "phoneme" Attribute Description

6.45.5 "sub" Attribute Description

6.45.6 "voice" Attribute Description

6.45.7 "emphasis" Attribute Description

6.45.8 "break" Attribute Description

6.45.9 "prosody" Attribute Description

6.45.10 "mark" Attribute Description

6.45.11 "audio" Attribute Description

6.45.12 "speak" Attribute Description

6.46 "SectionPart" Class Description

6.46.1 "include" Attribute Description

6.46.2 "qti-assessment-item-ref" Attribute Description

6.46.3 "qti-assessment-section" Attribute Description

6.46.4 "qti-assessment-section-ref" Attribute Description

6.47 "SelectOrderSelection" Class Description

6.47.1 "qti-selection" Attribute Description

6.47.2 "qti-ordering" Attribute Description

6.48 "SelectStimulusBody" Class Description

6.48.1 "math" Attribute Description

6.48.2 "blockContent" Attribute Description

6.49 "TableCellGroup" Class Description

6.49.1 "td" Attribute Description

6.49.2 "th" Attribute Description

6.50 "TemplateRuleGroup" Class Description

6.50.1 "qti-set-template-value" Attribute Description

6.50.2 "qti-exit-template" Attribute Description

6.50.3 "qti-template-condition" Attribute Description

6.50.4 "qti-set-default-value" Attribute Description

6.50.5 "qti-set-correct-response" Attribute Description

6.50.6 "qti-template-constraint" Attribute Description

6.51 "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" Class Description

6.51.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.51.2 "include" Attribute Description

6.51.3 "math" Attribute Description

6.52 "TestRubricBlockContentModel" Class Description

6.52.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

6.52.2 "include" Attribute Description

6.52.3 "math" Attribute Description

7. Derived Class Descriptions

7.1 "ARIABaseEmpty" Class Description

7.1.1 "role" Characteristic Description

7.1.2 "aria-controls" Characteristic Description

7.1.3 "aria-describedby" Characteristic Description

7.1.4 "aria-flowto" Characteristic Description

7.1.5 "aria-label" Characteristic Description

7.1.6 "aria-labelledby" Characteristic Description

7.1.7 "aria-level" Characteristic Description

7.1.8 "aria-live" Characteristic Description

7.1.9 "aria-orientation" Characteristic Description

7.1.10 "aria-owns" Characteristic Description

7.1.11 "aria-hidden" Characteristic Description

7.1.12 "aria-activedescendant" Characteristic Description

7.1.13 "aria-atomic" Characteristic Description

7.1.14 "aria-autocomplete" Characteristic Description

7.1.15 "aria-busy" Characteristic Description

7.1.16 "aria-checked" Characteristic Description

7.1.17 "aria-disabled" Characteristic Description

7.1.18 "aria-expanded" Characteristic Description

7.1.19 "aria-haspopup" Characteristic Description

7.1.20 "aria-invalid" Characteristic Description

7.1.21 "aria-multiline" Characteristic Description

7.1.22 "aria-multiselectable" Characteristic Description

7.1.23 "aria-posinset" Characteristic Description

7.1.24 "aria-pressed" Characteristic Description

7.1.25 "aria-readonly" Characteristic Description

7.1.26 "aria-relevant" Characteristic Description

7.1.27 "aria-required" Characteristic Description

7.1.28 "aria-selected" Characteristic Description

7.1.29 "aria-setsize" Characteristic Description

7.1.30 "aria-sort" Characteristic Description

7.1.31 "aria-valuemax" Characteristic Description

7.1.32 "aria-valuemin" Characteristic Description

7.1.33 "aria-valuenow" Characteristic Description

7.1.34 "aria-valuetext" Characteristic Description

7.1.35 "aria-modal" Characteristic Description

7.1.36 "aria-current" Characteristic Description

7.1.37 "aria-placeholder" Characteristic Description

7.1.38 "aria-colcount" Characteristic Description

7.1.39 "aria-rowcount" Characteristic Description

7.1.40 "aria-colindex" Characteristic Description

7.1.41 "aria-rowindex" Characteristic Description

7.1.42 "aria-colspan" Characteristic Description

7.1.43 "aria-rowspan" Characteristic Description

7.1.44 "aria-keyshorts" Characteristic Description

7.1.45 "aria-roledescription" Characteristic Description

7.1.46 "aria-errormessage" Characteristic Description

7.1.47 "aria-details" Characteristic Description

7.2 "ARIALevelInteger" Class Description

7.2.1 "minInclusive" Attribute Description

7.3 "AdaptiveHref" Class Description

7.3.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.3.2 "href" Characteristic Description

7.4 "AreaMapEntry" Class Description

7.4.1 "shape" Characteristic Description

7.4.2 "coords" Characteristic Description

7.4.3 "mapped-value" Characteristic Description

7.5 "AssessmentSectionRef" Class Description

7.5.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.5.2 "class" Characteristic Description

7.5.3 "href" Characteristic Description

7.5.4 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

7.6 "AssessmentStimulusRef" Class Description

7.6.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.6.2 "href" Characteristic Description

7.6.3 "title" Characteristic Description

7.6.4 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

7.7 "BaseValue" Class Description

7.7.1 "base-type" Characteristic Description

7.8 "ContextUniqueIDRef" Class Description

7.8.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.9 "Coords" Class Description

7.9.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.10 "Correct" Class Description

7.10.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.11 "DataHTML5Extension" Class Description

7.11.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.12 "Default" Class Description

7.12.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.13 "EncVariableString" Class Description

7.13.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.14 "FileHref" Class Description

7.15 "FileHrefCard" Class Description

7.15.1 "mime-type" Characteristic Description

7.16 "Identifier" Class Description

7.17 "InteractionModule" Class Description

7.17.1 "id" Characteristic Description

7.17.2 "primary-path" Characteristic Description

7.17.3 "fallback-path" Characteristic Description

7.18 "InterpolationTableEntry" Class Description

7.18.1 "source-value" Characteristic Description

7.18.2 "include-boundary" Characteristic Description

7.18.3 "target-value" Characteristic Description

7.19 "ItemSessionControl" Class Description

7.19.1 "max-attempts" Characteristic Description

7.19.2 "show-feedback" Characteristic Description

7.19.3 "allow-review" Characteristic Description

7.19.4 "show-solution" Characteristic Description

7.19.5 "allow-comment" Characteristic Description

7.19.6 "allow-skipping" Characteristic Description

7.19.7 "validate-responses" Characteristic Description

7.20 "Length" Class Description

7.20.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.21 "MapEntry" Class Description

7.21.1 "map-key" Characteristic Description

7.21.2 "mapped-value" Characteristic Description

7.21.3 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

7.22 "MapResponse" Class Description

7.22.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.23 "MatchTableEntry" Class Description

7.23.1 "source-value" Characteristic Description

7.23.2 "target-value" Characteristic Description

7.24 "MathConstant" Class Description

7.24.1 "name" Characteristic Description

7.25 "MimeType" Class Description

7.25.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.26 "NonNegativeDouble" Class Description

7.26.1 "minInclusive" Attribute Description

7.27 "Number" Class Description

7.27.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.27.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

7.27.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

7.28 "OutcomeMinMax" Class Description

7.28.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.28.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

7.28.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

7.28.4 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.28.5 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.29 "Param" Class Description

7.29.1 "name" Characteristic Description

7.29.2 "value" Characteristic Description

7.29.3 "valuetype" Characteristic Description

7.29.4 "type" Characteristic Description

7.30 "PrintedVariable" Class Description

7.30.1 "id" Characteristic Description

7.30.2 "class" Characteristic Description

7.30.3 "language" Characteristic Description

7.30.4 "label" Characteristic Description

7.30.5 "baseuri" Characteristic Description

7.30.6 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.30.7 "format" Characteristic Description

7.30.8 "base" Characteristic Description

7.30.9 "index" Characteristic Description

7.30.10 "power-form" Characteristic Description

7.30.11 "field" Characteristic Description

7.30.12 "delimiter" Characteristic Description

7.30.13 "mapping-indicator" Characteristic Description

7.31 "RadialSIValue" Class Description

7.31.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

7.32 "RadialUSValue" Class Description

7.32.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

7.33 "RandomFloat" Class Description

7.33.1 "min" Characteristic Description

7.33.2 "max" Characteristic Description

7.34 "RandomInteger" Class Description

7.34.1 "min" Characteristic Description

7.34.2 "max" Characteristic Description

7.34.3 "step" Characteristic Description

7.35 "SILinearValue" Class Description

7.35.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

7.36 "StyleSheet" Class Description

7.36.1 "href" Characteristic Description

7.36.2 "type" Characteristic Description

7.36.3 "media" Characteristic Description

7.36.4 "title" Characteristic Description

7.37 "SupportExtString" Class Description

7.37.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.38 "TemplateUniqueIDRef" Class Description

7.38.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.39 "TestVariables" Class Description

7.39.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.39.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

7.39.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

7.39.4 "variable-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.39.5 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.39.6 "base-type" Characteristic Description

7.40 "TimeLimits" Class Description

7.40.1 "min-time" Characteristic Description

7.40.2 "max-time" Characteristic Description

7.40.3 "allow-late-submission" Characteristic Description

7.41 "URL" Class Description

7.42 "USLinearValue" Class Description

7.42.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

7.43 "UniqueIdentifier" Class Description

7.44 "UniqueIdentifierRef" Class Description

7.45 "UseExtensionString" Class Description

7.45.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.46 "Value" Class Description

7.46.1 "field-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.46.2 "base-type" Characteristic Description

7.47 "Variable" Class Description

7.47.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.47.2 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.48 "VariableMapping" Class Description

7.48.1 "source-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.48.2 "target-identifier" Characteristic Description

7.49 "VariableString" Class Description

7.49.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

7.50 "Weight" Class Description

7.50.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

7.50.2 "value" Characteristic Description

8. Enumerated Vocabulary Descriptions

8.1 "ARIAAutoCompleteEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.2 "ARIACheckedEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.3 "ARIACurrentEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.4 "ARIAExpandedEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.5 "ARIAInvalidEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.6 "ARIALiveValueEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.7 "ARIAOrientationValueEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.8 "ARIAPressedEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.9 "ARIARoleValue" Vocabulary Description

8.10 "ARIASelectedEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.11 "ARIASortEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.12 "AlignEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.13 "BaseTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.14 "CORSSettingsEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.15 "CalculatorTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.16 "CardinalityEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.17 "DIR" Vocabulary Description

8.18 "ExternalScoredEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.19 "KindValueEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.20 "MathConstantsEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.21 "MathOperatorNameEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.22 "NavigationModeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.23 "OrientationEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.24 "ParamTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.25 "PreLoadValueEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.26 "RoundingModeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.27 "SIRadialUnitTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.28 "SIUnitTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.29 "ShapeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.30 "ShowHideEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.31 "StatsOperatorNameEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.32 "SubmissionModeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.33 "SupportEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.34 "SuppressTTSEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.35 "TableCellScopeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.36 "TestFeedbackAccessEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.37 "TextFormatEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.38 "ToleranceModeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.39 "USRadialUnitTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.40 "USUnitTypeEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.41 "UseEnum" Vocabulary Description

8.42 "ValignEnum" Vocabulary Description

9. Miscellaneous Descriptions

9.1 List Class Descriptions

9.1.1 "IdentifierList" Class Description

9.1.2 "IntegerList" Class Description

9.1.3 "MimeTypeList" Class Description

9.1.4 "StringList" Class Description

9.1.5 "ToleranceList" Class Description

9.2 Enumerated List Class Descriptions

9.2.1 "ARIARelevantList" Vocabulary Description

9.2.2 "ViewEnum" Vocabulary Description

9.3 Union Class Descriptions

9.3.1 "FloatOrVariableRef" Class Description

9.3.2 "IntOrIdentifier" Class Description

9.3.3 "IntegerOrVariableRef" Class Description

9.3.4 "StringOrVariableRef" Class Description

9.3.5 "SupportEnumExt" Class Description

9.3.6 "UseEnumExt" Class Description

9.4 Imported Class Descriptions

9.4.1 "Include" Class Description

9.4.2 "MathML3" Class Description

9.4.3 "SSMLv1p1" Class Description

10. Extending and Profiling the Data Model

10.1 Extending the Data Model

10.1.1 Companion Materials

10.1.2 Section Selection

10.1.3 Section Ordering

10.1.4 Customizable Interactions

10.1.5 Custom Operators

10.1.6 Enumerated Vocabularies

10.1.7 Controlled Characteristics on the HTML and Interaction Elements

10.2 Profiling the Data Model

References

Appendix A Modelling Concepts and Terms

A1 Data Model Descriptions

A1.1 Data Model Diagrams

A1.2 Class Descriptions

A1.3 Attribute and Characteristic Descriptions

A1.4 Enumerated Vocabulary Descriptions

A1.5 External Vocabulary Descriptions

A1.6 Import Class Descriptions

A1.7 Link Data Descriptions

A1.8 Common Data Model Persistent Identifier Descriptions

About this Document

List of Contributors

Revision History

toc | top

List of Figures

Figure 4.1 AssessmentItem class definitions

Figure 4.2 AssessmentSection class definitions

Figure 4.3 AssessmentStimulus class definitions

Figure 4.4 AssessmentTest class definitions

Figure 4.5 OutcomeDeclaration class definitions

Figure 4.6 ResponseProcessing class definitions

Figure 5.1 A class definitions

Figure 5.2 ARIABase class definitions

Figure 5.3 AdaptiveSelection class definitions

Figure 5.4 AnyN class definitions

Figure 5.5 AreaMapping class definitions

Figure 5.6 AssessmentItemRef class definitions

Figure 5.7 AssociableHotspot class definitions

Figure 5.8 AssociateInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.9 Audio class definitions

Figure 5.10 BDI class definitions

Figure 5.11 BDO class definitions

Figure 5.12 BR class definitions

Figure 5.13 BaseHTML5Flow class definitions

Figure 5.14 BaseHTML5Phrasing class definitions

Figure 5.15 BasePromptInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.16 BaseSequence class definitions

Figure 5.17 BaseSequenceEmpty class definitions

Figure 5.18 BaseSequenceFull class definitions

Figure 5.19 BaseSequenceRIdent class definitions

Figure 5.20 BaseSequenceXBase class definitions

Figure 5.21 BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty class definitions

Figure 5.22 BlockQuote class definitions

Figure 5.23 BranchRule class definitions

Figure 5.24 Calculator class definitions

Figure 5.25 Caption class definitions

Figure 5.26 Card class definitions

Figure 5.27 CardEntry class definitions

Figure 5.28 Catalog class definitions

Figure 5.29 CatalogInfo class definitions

Figure 5.30 ChoiceInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.31 Col class definitions

Figure 5.32 ColGroup class definitions

Figure 5.33 CompanionMaterialsInfo class definitions

Figure 5.34 ContextDeclaration class definitions

Figure 5.35 CorrectResponse class definitions

Figure 5.36 CustomInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.37 CustomOperator class definitions

Figure 5.38 DD class definitions

Figure 5.39 DL class definitions

Figure 5.40 DT class definitions

Figure 5.41 DefaultValue class definitions

Figure 5.42 Details class definitions

Figure 5.43 Div class definitions

Figure 5.44 DrawingInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.45 EndAttemptInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.46 Equal class definitions

Figure 5.47 EqualRounded class definitions

Figure 5.48 ExtendedTextInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.49 FeedbackBlock class definitions

Figure 5.50 FeedbackContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.51 FeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.52 FeedbackInline class definitions

Figure 5.53 FieldValue class definitions

Figure 5.54 Figure class definitions

Figure 5.55 Gap class definitions

Figure 5.56 GapImg class definitions

Figure 5.57 GapMatchInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.58 GapText class definitions

Figure 5.59 GraphicAssociateInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.60 GraphicGapMatchInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.61 GraphicOrderInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.62 HR class definitions

Figure 5.63 HTMLContent class definitions

Figure 5.64 HTMLText class definitions

Figure 5.65 HotText class definitions

Figure 5.66 HotTextInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.67 HotspotChoice class definitions

Figure 5.68 HotspotInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.69 Img class definitions

Figure 5.70 IncrementSI class definitions

Figure 5.71 IncrementUS class definitions

Figure 5.72 Index class definitions

Figure 5.73 InlineChoice class definitions

Figure 5.74 InlineChoiceInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.75 Inside class definitions

Figure 5.76 InteractionMarkup class definitions

Figure 5.77 InteractionModules class definitions

Figure 5.78 InterpolationTable class definitions

Figure 5.79 ItemBody class definitions

Figure 5.80 ItemFileInfo class definitions

Figure 5.81 LI class definitions

Figure 5.82 Label class definitions

Figure 5.83 Logic0toMany class definitions

Figure 5.84 Logic1toMany class definitions

Figure 5.85 LogicPair class definitions

Figure 5.86 LogicSingle class definitions

Figure 5.87 LookupOutcomeValue class definitions

Figure 5.88 Mapping class definitions

Figure 5.89 MatchInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.90 MatchTable class definitions

Figure 5.91 MathOperator class definitions

Figure 5.92 MediaInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.93 ModalFeedback class definitions

Figure 5.94 NumericLogic1toMany class definitions

Figure 5.95 OUL class definitions

Figure 5.96 Object class definitions

Figure 5.97 OrderInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.98 Ordering class definitions

Figure 5.99 OutcomeCondition class definitions

Figure 5.100 OutcomeElse class definitions

Figure 5.101 OutcomeIf class definitions

Figure 5.102 OutcomeProcessing class definitions

Figure 5.103 OutcomeProcessingFragment class definitions

Figure 5.104 PatternMatch class definitions

Figure 5.105 Picture class definitions

Figure 5.106 PortableCustomInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.107 PositionObjectInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.108 PositionObjectStage class definitions

Figure 5.109 Prompt class definitions

Figure 5.110 Protractor class definitions

Figure 5.111 Q class definitions

Figure 5.112 RTC class definitions

Figure 5.113 Repeat class definitions

Figure 5.114 ResponseCondition class definitions

Figure 5.115 ResponseDeclaration class definitions

Figure 5.116 ResponseElse class definitions

Figure 5.117 ResponseIf class definitions

Figure 5.118 ResponseProcessingFragment class definitions

Figure 5.119 RoundTo class definitions

Figure 5.120 RubricBlock class definitions

Figure 5.121 RubricBlockContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.122 RubricBlockTemplateBlock class definitions

Figure 5.123 RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.124 RubricBlockTemplateInline class definitions

Figure 5.125 Ruby class definitions

Figure 5.126 Rule class definitions

Figure 5.127 SIRuleSystem class definitions

Figure 5.128 SelectPointInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.129 Selection class definitions

Figure 5.130 SetValue class definitions

Figure 5.131 SimpleAssociableChoice class definitions

Figure 5.132 SimpleChoice class definitions

Figure 5.133 SimpleMatchSet class definitions

Figure 5.134 SliderInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.135 Source class definitions

Figure 5.136 StatsOperator class definitions

Figure 5.137 StimulusBody class definitions

Figure 5.138 StringMatch class definitions

Figure 5.139 Substring class definitions

Figure 5.140 TDH class definitions

Figure 5.141 TR class definitions

Figure 5.142 Table class definitions

Figure 5.143 TablePart class definitions

Figure 5.144 Template class definitions

Figure 5.145 TemplateBlock class definitions

Figure 5.146 TemplateBlockContent class definitions

Figure 5.147 TemplateBlockContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.148 TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock class definitions

Figure 5.149 TemplateCondition class definitions

Figure 5.150 TemplateConstraint class definitions

Figure 5.151 TemplateDeclaration class definitions

Figure 5.152 TemplateDefault class definitions

Figure 5.153 TemplateElse class definitions

Figure 5.154 TemplateIf class definitions

Figure 5.155 TemplateInline class definitions

Figure 5.156 TemplateProcessing class definitions

Figure 5.157 TestFeedback class definitions

Figure 5.158 TestFeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.159 TestPart class definitions

Figure 5.160 TestRubricBlock class definitions

Figure 5.161 TestRubricBlockContentBody class definitions

Figure 5.162 TextEntryInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.163 Track class definitions

Figure 5.164 USRuleSystem class definitions

Figure 5.165 UploadInteraction class definitions

Figure 5.166 Video class definitions

Figure 6.1 Adaptive class definitions

Figure 6.2 AssessmentSectionSelection class definitions

Figure 6.3 BlockContentModel class definitions

Figure 6.4 BlockGroup class definitions

Figure 6.5 BlockStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.6 CardSelection class definitions

Figure 6.7 DLSelection class definitions

Figure 6.8 DivSelection class definitions

Figure 6.9 ExpressionGroup class definitions

Figure 6.10 FeedandTempBlockStatic class definitions

Figure 6.11 FeedbackBlockStatic class definitions

Figure 6.12 FeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.13 FeedbackInlineGroup class definitions

Figure 6.14 FlowContentModel class definitions

Figure 6.15 FlowGroup class definitions

Figure 6.16 FlowStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.17 GapChoice class definitions

Figure 6.18 GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection class definitions

Figure 6.19 GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection class definitions

Figure 6.20 GraphicOrderInteractionSelection class definitions

Figure 6.21 HTMLContentFlow class definitions

Figure 6.22 HotspotInteractionSelection class definitions

Figure 6.23 IncrementSelection class definitions

Figure 6.24 InlineChoiceGroup class definitions

Figure 6.25 InlineContentModel class definitions

Figure 6.26 InlineGroup class definitions

Figure 6.27 InlineStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.28 ItemBodySelect class definitions

Figure 6.29 LookupTable class definitions

Figure 6.30 NumericExpressionGroup class definitions

Figure 6.31 ObjectFlowGroup class definitions

Figure 6.32 OutcomeRule class definitions

Figure 6.33 PhraseRBSelection class definitions

Figure 6.34 PhrasingContentModelHTML5 class definitions

Figure 6.35 PositionObjectStageSelection class definitions

Figure 6.36 PromptStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.37 RPRTSelection class definitions

Figure 6.38 RTRTCSelection class definitions

Figure 6.39 ResponseRuleGroup class definitions

Figure 6.40 RubricBlockContentModel class definitions

Figure 6.41 RubricTemplateBlockContentModel class definitions

Figure 6.42 RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.43 RubySelection class definitions

Figure 6.44 RuleSystemSelection class definitions

Figure 6.45 SSMLGroup class definitions

Figure 6.46 SectionPart class definitions

Figure 6.47 SelectOrderSelection class definitions

Figure 6.48 SelectStimulusBody class definitions

Figure 6.49 TableCellGroup class definitions

Figure 6.50 TemplateRuleGroup class definitions

Figure 6.51 TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions

Figure 6.52 TestRubricBlockContentModel class definitions

Figure 7.1 ARIABaseEmpty class definitions

Figure 7.2 ARIALevelInteger class definitions

Figure 7.3 AdaptiveHref class definitions

Figure 7.4 AreaMapEntry class definitions

Figure 7.5 AssessmentSectionRef class definitions

Figure 7.6 AssessmentStimulusRef class definitions

Figure 7.7 BaseValue class definitions

Figure 7.8 ContextUniqueIDRef class definitions

Figure 7.9 Coords class definitions

Figure 7.10 Correct class definitions

Figure 7.11 DataHTML5Extension class definitions

Figure 7.12 Default class definitions

Figure 7.13 EncVariableString class definitions

Figure 7.14 FileHref class definitions

Figure 7.15 FileHrefCard class definitions

Figure 7.16 Identifier class definitions

Figure 7.17 InteractionModule class definitions

Figure 7.18 InterpolationTableEntry class definitions

Figure 7.19 ItemSessionControl class definitions

Figure 7.20 Length class definitions

Figure 7.21 MapEntry class definitions

Figure 7.22 MapResponse class definitions

Figure 7.23 MatchTableEntry class definitions

Figure 7.24 MathConstant class definitions

Figure 7.25 MimeType class definitions

Figure 7.26 NonNegativeDouble class definitions

Figure 7.27 Number class definitions

Figure 7.28 OutcomeMinMax class definitions

Figure 7.29 Param class definitions

Figure 7.30 PrintedVariable class definitions

Figure 7.31 RadialSIValue class definitions

Figure 7.32 RadialUSValue class definitions

Figure 7.33 RandomFloat class definitions

Figure 7.34 RandomInteger class definitions

Figure 7.35 SILinearValue class definitions

Figure 7.36 StyleSheet class definitions

Figure 7.37 SupportExtString class definitions

Figure 7.38 TemplateUniqueIDRef class definitions

Figure 7.39 TestVariables class definitions

Figure 7.40 TimeLimits class definitions

Figure 7.41 URL class definitions

Figure 7.42 USLinearValue class definitions

Figure 7.43 UniqueIdentifier class definitions

Figure 7.44 UniqueIdentifierRef class definitions

Figure 7.45 UseExtensionString class definitions

Figure 7.46 Value class definitions

Figure 7.47 Variable class definitions

Figure 7.48 VariableMapping class definitions

Figure 7.49 VariableString class definitions

Figure 7.50 Weight class definitions

Figure 8.1 ARIAAutoCompleteEnum class definitions

Figure 8.2 ARIACheckedEnum class definitions

Figure 8.3 ARIACurrentEnum class definitions

Figure 8.4 ARIAExpandedEnum class definitions

Figure 8.5 ARIAInvalidEnum class definitions

Figure 8.6 ARIALiveValueEnum class definitions

Figure 8.7 ARIAOrientationValueEnum class definitions

Figure 8.8 ARIAPressedEnum class definitions

Figure 8.9 ARIARoleValue class definitions

Figure 8.10 ARIASelectedEnum class definitions

Figure 8.11 ARIASortEnum class definitions

Figure 8.12 AlignEnum class definitions

Figure 8.13 BaseTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.14 CORSSettingsEnum class definitions

Figure 8.15 CalculatorTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.16 CardinalityEnum class definitions

Figure 8.17 DIR class definitions

Figure 8.18 ExternalScoredEnum class definitions

Figure 8.19 KindValueEnum class definitions

Figure 8.20 MathConstantsEnum class definitions

Figure 8.21 MathOperatorNameEnum class definitions

Figure 8.22 NavigationModeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.23 OrientationEnum class definitions

Figure 8.24 ParamTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.25 PreLoadValueEnum class definitions

Figure 8.26 RoundingModeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.27 SIRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.28 SIUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.29 ShapeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.30 ShowHideEnum class definitions

Figure 8.31 StatsOperatorNameEnum class definitions

Figure 8.32 SubmissionModeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.33 SupportEnum class definitions

Figure 8.34 SuppressTTSEnum class definitions

Figure 8.35 TableCellScopeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.36 TestFeedbackAccessEnum class definitions

Figure 8.37 TextFormatEnum class definitions

Figure 8.38 ToleranceModeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.39 USRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.40 USUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Figure 8.41 UseEnum class definitions

Figure 8.42 ValignEnum class definitions

Figure 9.1.1 IdentifierList class definitions

Figure 9.1.2 IntegerList class definitions

Figure 9.1.3 MimeTypeList class definitions

Figure 9.1.4 StringList class definitions

Figure 9.1.5 ToleranceList class definitions

Figure 9.2.1 ARIARelevantList class definitions

Figure 9.2.2 ViewEnum class definitions

Figure 9.3.1 FloatOrVariableRef class definitions

Figure 9.3.2 IntOrIdentifier class definitions

Figure 9.3.3 IntegerOrVariableRef class definitions

Figure 9.3.4 StringOrVariableRef class definitions

Figure 9.3.5 SupportEnumExt class definitions

Figure 9.3.6 UseEnumExt class definitions

toc | top

List of Tables

Table 3.1 Description of the "qti-assessment-item" root attribute.

Table 3.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" root attribute.

Table 3.3 Description of the "qti-assessment-stimulus" root attribute.

Table 3.4 Description of the "qti-assessment-test" root attribute.

Table 3.5 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" root attribute.

Table 3.6 Description of the "qti-response-processing" root attribute.

Table 4.1 AssessmentItem class definitions

Table 4.1.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.3 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.5 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.6 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.7 Description of the "adaptive" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.8 Description of the "time-dependent" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.10 Description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.11 Description of the "qti-response-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.12 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.13 Description of the "qti-template-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.14 Description of the "qti-template-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.15 Description of the "qti-assessment-stimulus-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.16 Description of the "qti-companion-materials-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.17 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.18 Description of the "qti-item-body" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.19 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.20 Description of the "qti-response-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.1.21 Description of the "qti-modal-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" class

Table 4.2 AssessmentSection class definitions

Table 4.2.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.3 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.5 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.6 Description of the "visible" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.7 Description of the "keep-together" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.8 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.9 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.10 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.11 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.12 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.13 Description of the "adaptive" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.14 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.2.15 Description of the "sectionPart" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" class

Table 4.3 AssessmentStimulus class definitions

Table 4.3.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.3 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.5 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.6 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.7 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.8 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.9 Description of the "qti-stimulus-body" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.3.10 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" class

Table 4.4 AssessmentTest class definitions

Table 4.4.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.3 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.4 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.5 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.7 Description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.8 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.9 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.10 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.11 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.12 Description of the "qti-test-part" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.13 Description of the "qti-outcome-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.4.14 Description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" class

Table 4.5 OutcomeDeclaration class definitions

Table 4.5.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.4 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.5 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.6 Description of the "long-interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.7 Description of the "normal-maximum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.8 Description of the "normal-minimum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.9 Description of the "mastery-value" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.10 Description of the "external-scored" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.11 Description of the "variable-identifier-ref" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.12 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.5.13 Description of the "lookupTable" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class

Table 4.6 ResponseProcessing class definitions

Table 4.6.1 Description of the "template" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" class

Table 4.6.2 Description of the "template-location" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" class

Table 4.6.3 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessing" class

Table 5.1 A class definitions

Table 5.1.1 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "A" class

Table 5.1.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "A" class

Table 5.1.3 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "A" class

Table 5.2 ARIABase class definitions

Table 5.2.1 Description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.2 Description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.3 Description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.4 Description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.5 Description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.6 Description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.7 Description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.8 Description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.9 Description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.10 Description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.11 Description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.12 Description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.13 Description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.14 Description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.15 Description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.16 Description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.17 Description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.18 Description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.19 Description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.20 Description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.21 Description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.22 Description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.23 Description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.24 Description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.25 Description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.26 Description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.27 Description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.28 Description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.29 Description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.30 Description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.31 Description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.32 Description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.33 Description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.34 Description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.35 Description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.36 Description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.37 Description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.38 Description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.39 Description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.40 Description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.41 Description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.42 Description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.43 Description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.44 Description of the "aria-keyshortcuts" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.45 Description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.46 Description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.2.47 Description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class

Table 5.3 AdaptiveSelection class definitions

Table 5.3.1 Description of the "qti-adaptive-engine-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class

Table 5.3.2 Description of the "qti-adaptive-settings-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class

Table 5.3.3 Description of the "qti-usagedata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class

Table 5.3.4 Description of the "qti-metadata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class

Table 5.4 AnyN class definitions

Table 5.4.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "AnyN" class

Table 5.4.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "AnyN" class

Table 5.4.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "AnyN" class

Table 5.5 AreaMapping class definitions

Table 5.5.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class

Table 5.5.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class

Table 5.5.3 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class

Table 5.5.4 Description of the "qti-area-map-entry" attribute for the "AreaMapping" class

Table 5.6 AssessmentItemRef class definitions

Table 5.6.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.3 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.4 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.5 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.6 Description of the "category" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.7 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.8 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.9 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.10 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.11 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.12 Description of the "qti-variable-mapping" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.13 Description of the "qti-weight" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.6.14 Description of the "qti-template-default" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class

Table 5.7 AssociableHotspot class definitions

Table 5.7.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.5 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.6 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.7 Description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.8 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.7.9 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class

Table 5.8 AssociateInteraction class definitions

Table 5.8.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.8.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.8.3 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.8.4 Description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "AssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.9 Audio class definitions

Table 5.9.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.2 Description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.3 Description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.4 Description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.5 Description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.6 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.7 Description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.8 Description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.9 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Audio" class

Table 5.9.10 Description of the "track" attribute for the "Audio" class

Table 5.10 BDI class definitions

Table 5.10.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "BDI" class

Table 5.11 BDO class definitions

Table 5.11.1 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "BDO" class

Table 5.11.2 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "BDO" class

Table 5.12 BR class definitions

Table 5.13 BaseHTML5Flow class definitions

Table 5.13.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Flow" class

Table 5.14 BaseHTML5Phrasing class definitions

Table 5.14.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Phrasing" class

Table 5.15 BasePromptInteraction class definitions

Table 5.15.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.7 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.8 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.9 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.10 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.15.12 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "BasePromptInteraction" class

Table 5.16 BaseSequence class definitions

Table 5.16.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.6 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.7 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.8 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.16.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class

Table 5.17 BaseSequenceEmpty class definitions

Table 5.17.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.6 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.7 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.8 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.17.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class

Table 5.18 BaseSequenceFull class definitions

Table 5.18.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.6 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.7 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.8 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.9 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.10 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.18.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class

Table 5.19 BaseSequenceRIdent class definitions

Table 5.19.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.6 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.19.10 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class

Table 5.20 BaseSequenceXBase class definitions

Table 5.20.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.10 Description of the "data-ssml" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.20.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class

Table 5.21 BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty class definitions

Table 5.21.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.21.10 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class

Table 5.22 BlockQuote class definitions

Table 5.22.1 Description of the "cite" characteristic for the "BlockQuote" class

Table 5.22.2 Description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "BlockQuote" class

Table 5.23 BranchRule class definitions

Table 5.23.1 Description of the "target" characteristic for the "BranchRule" class

Table 5.23.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "BranchRule" class

Table 5.24 Calculator class definitions

Table 5.24.1 Description of the "qti-calculator-type" attribute for the "Calculator" class

Table 5.24.2 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Calculator" class

Table 5.24.3 Description of the "qti-calculator-info" attribute for the "Calculator" class

Table 5.25 Caption class definitions

Table 5.25.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "Caption" class

Table 5.26 Card class definitions

Table 5.26.1 Description of the "support" characteristic for the "Card" class

Table 5.26.2 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "Card" class

Table 5.26.3 Description of the "cardSelection" attribute for the "Card" class

Table 5.26.4 Description of the "qti-card-entry" attribute for the "Card" class

Table 5.27 CardEntry class definitions

Table 5.27.1 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class

Table 5.27.2 Description of the "default" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class

Table 5.27.3 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class

Table 5.27.4 Description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardEntry" class

Table 5.27.5 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardEntry" class

Table 5.28 Catalog class definitions

Table 5.28.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "Catalog" class

Table 5.28.2 Description of the "qti-card" attribute for the "Catalog" class

Table 5.29 CatalogInfo class definitions

Table 5.29.1 Description of the "qti-catalog" attribute for the "CatalogInfo" class

Table 5.30 ChoiceInteraction class definitions

Table 5.30.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.3 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.4 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.5 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.6 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.30.7 Description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "ChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.31 Col class definitions

Table 5.31.1 Description of the "span" characteristic for the "Col" class

Table 5.32 ColGroup class definitions

Table 5.32.1 Description of the "span" characteristic for the "ColGroup" class

Table 5.32.2 Description of the "col" attribute for the "ColGroup" class

Table 5.33 CompanionMaterialsInfo class definitions

Table 5.33.1 Description of the "qti-calculator" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.33.2 Description of the "qti-rule" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.33.3 Description of the "qti-protractor" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.33.4 Description of the "qti-digital-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.33.5 Description of the "qti-physical-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.33.6 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class

Table 5.34 ContextDeclaration class definitions

Table 5.34.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class

Table 5.34.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class

Table 5.34.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class

Table 5.34.4 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ContextDeclaration" class

Table 5.35 CorrectResponse class definitions

Table 5.35.1 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "CorrectResponse" class

Table 5.35.2 Description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "CorrectResponse" class

Table 5.36 CustomInteraction class definitions

Table 5.36.1 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomInteraction" class

Table 5.36.2 Description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomInteraction" class

Table 5.37 CustomOperator class definitions

Table 5.37.1 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class

Table 5.37.2 Description of the "definition" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class

Table 5.37.3 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class

Table 5.37.4 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class

Table 5.37.5 Description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class

Table 5.38 DD class definitions

Table 5.38.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DD" class

Table 5.39 DL class definitions

Table 5.39.1 Description of the "dlSelection" attribute for the "DL" class

Table 5.40 DT class definitions

Table 5.40.1 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "DT" class

Table 5.41 DefaultValue class definitions

Table 5.41.1 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "DefaultValue" class

Table 5.41.2 Description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "DefaultValue" class

Table 5.42 Details class definitions

Table 5.42.1 Description of the "open" characteristic for the "Details" class

Table 5.42.2 Description of the "summary" attribute for the "Details" class

Table 5.42.3 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Details" class

Table 5.43 Div class definitions

Table 5.43.1 Description of the "divSelection" attribute for the "Div" class

Table 5.44 DrawingInteraction class definitions

Table 5.44.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class

Table 5.44.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class

Table 5.44.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class

Table 5.45 EndAttemptInteraction class definitions

Table 5.45.1 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class

Table 5.45.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class

Table 5.45.3 Description of the "count-attempt" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class

Table 5.46 Equal class definitions

Table 5.46.1 Description of the "tolerance-mode" characteristic for the "Equal" class

Table 5.46.2 Description of the "tolerance" characteristic for the "Equal" class

Table 5.46.3 Description of the "include-lower-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class

Table 5.46.4 Description of the "include-upper-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class

Table 5.46.5 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Equal" class

Table 5.47 EqualRounded class definitions

Table 5.47.1 Description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class

Table 5.47.2 Description of the "figures" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class

Table 5.47.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "EqualRounded" class

Table 5.48 ExtendedTextInteraction class definitions

Table 5.48.1 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.2 Description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.3 Description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.4 Description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.5 Description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.6 Description of the "max-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.7 Description of the "min-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.8 Description of the "expected-lines" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.9 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.48.10 Description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class

Table 5.49 FeedbackBlock class definitions

Table 5.49.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.49.2 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.49.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.49.4 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.49.5 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.49.6 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.50 FeedbackContentBody class definitions

Table 5.50.1 Description of the "feedbackBlockStatic" attribute for the "FeedbackContentBody" class

Table 5.51 FeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions

Table 5.51.1 Description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowContentBody" class

Table 5.52 FeedbackInline class definitions

Table 5.52.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class

Table 5.52.2 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class

Table 5.52.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class

Table 5.52.4 Description of the "feedbackInlineGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackInline" class

Table 5.53 FieldValue class definitions

Table 5.53.1 Description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "FieldValue" class

Table 5.53.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "FieldValue" class

Table 5.54 Figure class definitions

Table 5.54.1 Description of the "figcaption" attribute for the "Figure" class

Table 5.54.2 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Figure" class

Table 5.55 Gap class definitions

Table 5.55.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class

Table 5.55.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class

Table 5.55.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "Gap" class

Table 5.55.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "Gap" class

Table 5.55.5 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "Gap" class

Table 5.56 GapImg class definitions

Table 5.56.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.5 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.6 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.7 Description of the "object-label" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.8 Description of the "top" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.9 Description of the "left" characteristic for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.10 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.11 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.56.12 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GapImg" class

Table 5.57 GapMatchInteraction class definitions

Table 5.57.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.2 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.3 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.5 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.6 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.7 Description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.57.8 Description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.58 GapText class definitions

Table 5.58.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.5 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.6 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapText" class

Table 5.58.7 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "GapText" class

Table 5.59 GraphicAssociateInteraction class definitions

Table 5.59.1 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.59.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.59.3 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.59.4 Description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class

Table 5.60 GraphicGapMatchInteraction class definitions

Table 5.60.1 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.5 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.6 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.7 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.8 Description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.60.9 Description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class

Table 5.61 GraphicOrderInteraction class definitions

Table 5.61.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class

Table 5.61.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class

Table 5.61.3 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class

Table 5.61.4 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class

Table 5.61.5 Description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class

Table 5.62 HR class definitions

Table 5.63 HTMLContent class definitions

Table 5.63.1 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class

Table 5.63.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class

Table 5.63.3 Description of the "htmlContentFlow" attribute for the "HTMLContent" class

Table 5.64 HTMLText class definitions

Table 5.64.1 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "HTMLText" class

Table 5.65 HotText class definitions

Table 5.65.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class

Table 5.65.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class

Table 5.65.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotText" class

Table 5.65.4 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "HotText" class

Table 5.66 HotTextInteraction class definitions

Table 5.66.1 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class

Table 5.66.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class

Table 5.66.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class

Table 5.66.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class

Table 5.66.5 Description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "HotTextInteraction" class

Table 5.67 HotspotChoice class definitions

Table 5.67.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.67.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.67.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.67.4 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.67.5 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.67.6 Description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class

Table 5.68 HotspotInteraction class definitions

Table 5.68.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.68.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.68.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.68.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.68.5 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.68.6 Description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class

Table 5.69 Img class definitions

Table 5.69.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Img" class

Table 5.69.2 Description of the "alt" characteristic for the "Img" class

Table 5.69.3 Description of the "longdesc" characteristic for the "Img" class

Table 5.69.4 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Img" class

Table 5.69.5 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Img" class

Table 5.70 IncrementSI class definitions

Table 5.70.1 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class

Table 5.70.2 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class

Table 5.71 IncrementUS class definitions

Table 5.71.1 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class

Table 5.71.2 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class

Table 5.72 Index class definitions

Table 5.72.1 Description of the "n" characteristic for the "Index" class

Table 5.72.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Index" class

Table 5.73 InlineChoice class definitions

Table 5.73.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class

Table 5.73.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class

Table 5.73.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class

Table 5.73.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class

Table 5.73.5 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "InlineChoice" class

Table 5.74 InlineChoiceInteraction class definitions

Table 5.74.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.3 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.5 Description of the "data-prompt" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.6 Description of the "qti-label" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.74.7 Description of the "qti-inline-choice" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class

Table 5.75 Inside class definitions

Table 5.75.1 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "Inside" class

Table 5.75.2 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "Inside" class

Table 5.75.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Inside" class

Table 5.76 InteractionMarkup class definitions

Table 5.76.1 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class

Table 5.76.2 Description of the "template" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class

Table 5.77 InteractionModules class definitions

Table 5.77.1 Description of the "primary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class

Table 5.77.2 Description of the "secondary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class

Table 5.77.3 Description of the "qti-interaction-module" attribute for the "InteractionModules" class

Table 5.78 InterpolationTable class definitions

Table 5.78.1 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTable" class

Table 5.78.2 Description of the "qti-interpolation-table-entry" attribute for the "InterpolationTable" class

Table 5.79 ItemBody class definitions

Table 5.79.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.3 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.4 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.5 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.6 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.79.7 Description of the "itemBodySelect" attribute for the "ItemBody" class

Table 5.80 ItemFileInfo class definitions

Table 5.80.1 Description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class

Table 5.80.2 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class

Table 5.80.3 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class

Table 5.80.4 Description of the "qti-resource-icon" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class

Table 5.81 LI class definitions

Table 5.81.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "LI" class

Table 5.82 Label class definitions

Table 5.82.1 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "Label" class

Table 5.83 Logic0toMany class definitions

Table 5.83.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic0toMany" class

Table 5.84 Logic1toMany class definitions

Table 5.84.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic1toMany" class

Table 5.85 LogicPair class definitions

Table 5.85.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicPair" class

Table 5.86 LogicSingle class definitions

Table 5.86.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicSingle" class

Table 5.87 LookupOutcomeValue class definitions

Table 5.87.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class

Table 5.87.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class

Table 5.88 Mapping class definitions

Table 5.88.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class

Table 5.88.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class

Table 5.88.3 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "Mapping" class

Table 5.88.4 Description of the "qti-map-entry" attribute for the "Mapping" class

Table 5.89 MatchInteraction class definitions

Table 5.89.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.3 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.5 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.6 Description of the "data-first-column-header" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.89.7 Description of the "qti-simple-match-set" attribute for the "MatchInteraction" class

Table 5.90 MatchTable class definitions

Table 5.90.1 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "MatchTable" class

Table 5.90.2 Description of the "qti-match-table-entry" attribute for the "MatchTable" class

Table 5.91 MathOperator class definitions

Table 5.91.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathOperator" class

Table 5.91.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "MathOperator" class

Table 5.92 MediaInteraction class definitions

Table 5.92.1 Description of the "autostart" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.2 Description of the "min-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.3 Description of the "max-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.4 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.5 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.6 Description of the "object" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.7 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.92.8 Description of the "video" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class

Table 5.93 ModalFeedback class definitions

Table 5.93.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.5 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.6 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.7 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.93.8 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class

Table 5.94 NumericLogic1toMany class definitions

Table 5.94.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "NumericLogic1toMany" class

Table 5.95 OUL class definitions

Table 5.95.1 Description of the "li" attribute for the "OUL" class

Table 5.96 Object class definitions

Table 5.96.1 Description of the "data" characteristic for the "Object" class

Table 5.96.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Object" class

Table 5.96.3 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Object" class

Table 5.96.4 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Object" class

Table 5.96.5 Description of the "objectFlowGroup" attribute for the "Object" class

Table 5.97 OrderInteraction class definitions

Table 5.97.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.3 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.4 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.5 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.6 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.7 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.97.8 Description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "OrderInteraction" class

Table 5.98 Ordering class definitions

Table 5.98.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "Ordering" class

Table 5.98.2 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Ordering" class

Table 5.98.3 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Ordering" class

Table 5.99 OutcomeCondition class definitions

Table 5.99.1 Description of the "qti-outcome-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class

Table 5.99.2 Description of the "qti-outcome-else-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class

Table 5.99.3 Description of the "qti-outcome-else" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class

Table 5.100 OutcomeElse class definitions

Table 5.100.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeElse" class

Table 5.101 OutcomeIf class definitions

Table 5.101.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class

Table 5.101.2 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class

Table 5.102 OutcomeProcessing class definitions

Table 5.102.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessing" class

Table 5.103 OutcomeProcessingFragment class definitions

Table 5.103.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessingFragment" class

Table 5.104 PatternMatch class definitions

Table 5.104.1 Description of the "pattern" characteristic for the "PatternMatch" class

Table 5.104.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "PatternMatch" class

Table 5.105 Picture class definitions

Table 5.105.1 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Picture" class

Table 5.105.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "Picture" class

Table 5.106 PortableCustomInteraction class definitions

Table 5.106.1 Description of the "custom-interaction-type-identifier" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.106.2 Description of the "module" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.106.3 Description of the "qti-interaction-modules" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.106.4 Description of the "qti-interaction-markup" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.106.5 Description of the "qti-template-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.106.6 Description of the "qti-context-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class

Table 5.107 PositionObjectInteraction class definitions

Table 5.107.1 Description of the "center-point" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.107.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.107.3 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.107.4 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.107.5 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.107.6 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class

Table 5.108 PositionObjectStage class definitions

Table 5.108.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class

Table 5.108.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class

Table 5.108.3 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class

Table 5.108.4 Description of the "qti-position-object-interaction" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class

Table 5.109 Prompt class definitions

Table 5.109.1 Description of the "promptStaticGroup" attribute for the "Prompt" class

Table 5.110 Protractor class definitions

Table 5.110.1 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Protractor" class

Table 5.110.2 Description of the "qti-increment" attribute for the "Protractor" class

Table 5.111 Q class definitions

Table 5.111.1 Description of the "cite" characteristic for the "Q" class

Table 5.111.2 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "Q" class

Table 5.112 RTC class definitions

Table 5.112.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "RTC" class

Table 5.112.2 Description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTC" class

Table 5.113 Repeat class definitions

Table 5.113.1 Description of the "number-repeats" characteristic for the "Repeat" class

Table 5.113.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Repeat" class

Table 5.114 ResponseCondition class definitions

Table 5.114.1 Description of the "qti-response-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class

Table 5.114.2 Description of the "qti-response-else-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class

Table 5.114.3 Description of the "qti-response-else" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class

Table 5.115 ResponseDeclaration class definitions

Table 5.115.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.4 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.5 Description of the "qti-correct-response" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.6 Description of the "qti-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.115.7 Description of the "qti-area-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class

Table 5.116 ResponseElse class definitions

Table 5.116.1 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseElse" class

Table 5.117 ResponseIf class definitions

Table 5.117.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class

Table 5.117.2 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class

Table 5.118 ResponseProcessingFragment class definitions

Table 5.118.1 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessingFragment" class

Table 5.119 RoundTo class definitions

Table 5.119.1 Description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class

Table 5.119.2 Description of the "figures" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class

Table 5.119.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "RoundTo" class

Table 5.120 RubricBlock class definitions

Table 5.120.1 Description of the "use" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class

Table 5.120.2 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class

Table 5.120.3 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class

Table 5.120.4 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class

Table 5.120.5 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class

Table 5.121 RubricBlockContentBody class definitions

Table 5.121.1 Description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentBody" class

Table 5.122 RubricBlockTemplateBlock class definitions

Table 5.122.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.122.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.122.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.122.4 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.122.5 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.122.6 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class

Table 5.123 RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody class definitions

Table 5.123.1 Description of the "rtBlockContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" class

Table 5.124 RubricBlockTemplateInline class definitions

Table 5.124.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class

Table 5.124.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class

Table 5.124.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class

Table 5.124.4 Description of the "rtInlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class

Table 5.125 Ruby class definitions

Table 5.125.1 Description of the "rubySelection" attribute for the "Ruby" class

Table 5.126 Rule class definitions

Table 5.126.1 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Rule" class

Table 5.126.2 Description of the "qti-rule-system" attribute for the "Rule" class

Table 5.127 SIRuleSystem class definitions

Table 5.127.1 Description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class

Table 5.127.2 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class

Table 5.127.3 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class

Table 5.128 SelectPointInteraction class definitions

Table 5.128.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class

Table 5.128.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class

Table 5.128.3 Description of the "object" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class

Table 5.128.4 Description of the "img" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class

Table 5.128.5 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class

Table 5.129 Selection class definitions

Table 5.129.1 Description of the "select" characteristic for the "Selection" class

Table 5.129.2 Description of the "with-replacement" characteristic for the "Selection" class

Table 5.129.3 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Selection" class

Table 5.129.4 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Selection" class

Table 5.130 SetValue class definitions

Table 5.130.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SetValue" class

Table 5.130.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "SetValue" class

Table 5.131 SimpleAssociableChoice class definitions

Table 5.131.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.5 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.6 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.7 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.131.8 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class

Table 5.132 SimpleChoice class definitions

Table 5.132.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class

Table 5.132.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class

Table 5.132.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class

Table 5.132.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class

Table 5.132.5 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleChoice" class

Table 5.133 SimpleMatchSet class definitions

Table 5.133.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class

Table 5.133.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class

Table 5.133.3 Description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "SimpleMatchSet" class

Table 5.134 SliderInteraction class definitions

Table 5.134.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.134.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.134.3 Description of the "step" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.134.4 Description of the "step-label" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.134.5 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.134.6 Description of the "reverse" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class

Table 5.135 Source class definitions

Table 5.135.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Source" class

Table 5.135.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Source" class

Table 5.135.3 Description of the "srcset" characteristic for the "Source" class

Table 5.135.4 Description of the "media" characteristic for the "Source" class

Table 5.135.5 Description of the "sizes" characteristic for the "Source" class

Table 5.136 StatsOperator class definitions

Table 5.136.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "StatsOperator" class

Table 5.136.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "StatsOperator" class

Table 5.137 StimulusBody class definitions

Table 5.137.1 Description of the "selectStimulus" attribute for the "StimulusBody" class

Table 5.138 StringMatch class definitions

Table 5.138.1 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class

Table 5.138.2 Description of the "substring" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class

Table 5.138.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "StringMatch" class

Table 5.139 Substring class definitions

Table 5.139.1 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "Substring" class

Table 5.139.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Substring" class

Table 5.140 TDH class definitions

Table 5.140.1 Description of the "headers" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.2 Description of the "scope" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.3 Description of the "abbr" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.4 Description of the "axis" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.5 Description of the "rowspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.6 Description of the "colspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.7 Description of the "align" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.8 Description of the "valign" characteristic for the "TDH" class

Table 5.140.9 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "TDH" class

Table 5.141 TR class definitions

Table 5.141.1 Description of the "tableCellGroup" attribute for the "TR" class

Table 5.142 Table class definitions

Table 5.142.1 Description of the "summary" characteristic for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.2 Description of the "caption" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.3 Description of the "col" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.4 Description of the "colgroup" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.5 Description of the "thead" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.6 Description of the "tfoot" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.7 Description of the "tbody" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.142.8 Description of the "tr" attribute for the "Table" class

Table 5.143 TablePart class definitions

Table 5.143.1 Description of the "tr" attribute for the "TablePart" class

Table 5.144 Template class definitions

Table 5.144.1 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Template" class

Table 5.145 TemplateBlock class definitions

Table 5.145.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class

Table 5.145.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class

Table 5.145.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class

Table 5.146 TemplateBlockContent class definitions

Table 5.146.1 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class

Table 5.146.2 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class

Table 5.146.3 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class

Table 5.147 TemplateBlockContentBody class definitions

Table 5.147.1 Description of the "fatBlockStatic" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContentBody" class

Table 5.148 TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock class definitions

Table 5.148.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.148.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.148.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class

Table 5.149 TemplateCondition class definitions

Table 5.149.1 Description of the "qti-template-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class

Table 5.149.2 Description of the "qti-template-else-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class

Table 5.149.3 Description of the "qti-template-else" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class

Table 5.150 TemplateConstraint class definitions

Table 5.150.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateConstraint" class

Table 5.151 TemplateDeclaration class definitions

Table 5.151.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.151.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.151.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.151.4 Description of the "param-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.151.5 Description of the "math-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.151.6 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateDeclaration" class

Table 5.152 TemplateDefault class definitions

Table 5.152.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDefault" class

Table 5.152.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateDefault" class

Table 5.153 TemplateElse class definitions

Table 5.153.1 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateElse" class

Table 5.154 TemplateIf class definitions

Table 5.154.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class

Table 5.154.2 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class

Table 5.155 TemplateInline class definitions

Table 5.155.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class

Table 5.155.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class

Table 5.155.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class

Table 5.155.4 Description of the "inlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "TemplateInline" class

Table 5.156 TemplateProcessing class definitions

Table 5.156.1 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateProcessing" class

Table 5.157 TestFeedback class definitions

Table 5.157.1 Description of the "access" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.2 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.4 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.5 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.7 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.8 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.157.9 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class

Table 5.158 TestFeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions

Table 5.158.1 Description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" class

Table 5.159 TestPart class definitions

Table 5.159.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.3 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.4 Description of the "navigation-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.5 Description of the "submission-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.7 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.8 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.9 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.10 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.11 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.12 Description of the "assessmentSectionSelection" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.159.13 Description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "TestPart" class

Table 5.160 TestRubricBlock class definitions

Table 5.160.1 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.160.2 Description of the "use" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.160.3 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.160.4 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.160.5 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.160.6 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class

Table 5.161 TestRubricBlockContentBody class definitions

Table 5.161.1 Description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentBody" class

Table 5.162 TextEntryInteraction class definitions

Table 5.162.1 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.2 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.3 Description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.4 Description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.5 Description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.6 Description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.7 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.162.8 Description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class

Table 5.163 Track class definitions

Table 5.163.1 Description of the "kind" characteristic for the "Track" class

Table 5.163.2 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Track" class

Table 5.163.3 Description of the "srclang" characteristic for the "Track" class

Table 5.163.4 Description of the "default" characteristic for the "Track" class

Table 5.164 USRuleSystem class definitions

Table 5.164.1 Description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class

Table 5.164.2 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class

Table 5.164.3 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class

Table 5.165 UploadInteraction class definitions

Table 5.165.1 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "UploadInteraction" class

Table 5.166 Video class definitions

Table 5.166.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.2 Description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.3 Description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.4 Description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.5 Description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.6 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.7 Description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.8 Description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.9 Description of the "poster" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.10 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.11 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.12 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Video" class

Table 5.166.13 Description of the "track" attribute for the "Video" class

Table 6.1 Adaptive class definitions

Table 6.1.1 Description of the "qti-adaptive-selection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class

Table 6.1.2 Description of the "selectOrderSelection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class

Table 6.2 AssessmentSectionSelection class definitions

Table 6.2.1 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class

Table 6.2.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class

Table 6.3 BlockContentModel class definitions

Table 6.3.1 Description of the "pre" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.2 Description of the "h1" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.3 Description of the "h2" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.4 Description of the "h3" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.5 Description of the "h4" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.6 Description of the "h5" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.7 Description of the "h6" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.8 Description of the "p" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.9 Description of the "address" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.10 Description of the "dl" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.11 Description of the "ol" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.12 Description of the "ul" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.13 Description of the "hr" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.14 Description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.15 Description of the "table" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.16 Description of the "div" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.17 Description of the "article" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.18 Description of the "aside" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.19 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.20 Description of the "figure" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.21 Description of the "footer" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.22 Description of the "header" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.23 Description of the "nav" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.24 Description of the "section" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.3.25 Description of the "video" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class

Table 6.4 BlockGroup class definitions

Table 6.4.1 Description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.2 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.3 Description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.4 Description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.5 Description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.6 Description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.7 Description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.8 Description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.9 Description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.10 Description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.11 Description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.12 Description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.13 Description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.14 Description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.15 Description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.16 Description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.17 Description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.18 Description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.19 Description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.20 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.21 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.22 Description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.23 Description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.4.24 Description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class

Table 6.5 BlockStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.5.1 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class

Table 6.5.2 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class

Table 6.5.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class

Table 6.5.4 Description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class

Table 6.5.5 Description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class

Table 6.6 CardSelection class definitions

Table 6.6.1 Description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardSelection" class

Table 6.6.2 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardSelection" class

Table 6.7 DLSelection class definitions

Table 6.7.1 Description of the "dd" attribute for the "DLSelection" class

Table 6.7.2 Description of the "dt" attribute for the "DLSelection" class

Table 6.8 DivSelection class definitions

Table 6.8.1 Description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "DivSelection" class

Table 6.8.2 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DivSelection" class

Table 6.9 ExpressionGroup class definitions

Table 6.9.1 Description of the "qti-and" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.2 Description of the "qti-gt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.3 Description of the "qti-not" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.4 Description of the "qti-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.5 Description of the "qti-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.6 Description of the "qti-lte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.7 Description of the "qti-or" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.8 Description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.9 Description of the "qti-duration-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.10 Description of the "qti-duration-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.11 Description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.12 Description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.13 Description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.14 Description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.15 Description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.16 Description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.17 Description of the "qti-substring" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.18 Description of the "qti-equal-rounded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.19 Description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.20 Description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.21 Description of the "qti-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.22 Description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.23 Description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.24 Description of the "qti-equal" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.25 Description of the "qti-contains" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.26 Description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.27 Description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.28 Description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.29 Description of the "qti-any-n" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.30 Description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.31 Description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.32 Description of the "qti-is-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.33 Description of the "qti-member" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.34 Description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.35 Description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.36 Description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.37 Description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.38 Description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.39 Description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.40 Description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.41 Description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.42 Description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.43 Description of the "qti-inside" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.44 Description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.45 Description of the "qti-pattern-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.46 Description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.47 Description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.48 Description of the "qti-string-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.49 Description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.50 Description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.51 Description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.52 Description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.53 Description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.54 Description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.55 Description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.56 Description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.57 Description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.58 Description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.59 Description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.60 Description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.61 Description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.62 Description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.63 Description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.9.64 Description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.10 FeedandTempBlockStatic class definitions

Table 6.10.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.6 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.7 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.10.8 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class

Table 6.11 FeedbackBlockStatic class definitions

Table 6.11.1 Description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class

Table 6.11.2 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class

Table 6.11.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class

Table 6.11.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class

Table 6.11.5 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class

Table 6.12 FeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.12.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.2 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.5 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.6 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.12.7 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.13 FeedbackInlineGroup class definitions

Table 6.13.1 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class

Table 6.13.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class

Table 6.13.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class

Table 6.13.4 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class

Table 6.13.5 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class

Table 6.14 FlowContentModel class definitions

Table 6.14.1 Description of the "pre" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.2 Description of the "h1" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.3 Description of the "h2" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.4 Description of the "h3" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.5 Description of the "h4" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.6 Description of the "h5" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.7 Description of the "h6" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.8 Description of the "p" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.9 Description of the "address" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.10 Description of the "dl" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.11 Description of the "ol" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.12 Description of the "ul" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.13 Description of the "br" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.14 Description of the "hr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.15 Description of the "img" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.16 Description of the "object" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.17 Description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.18 Description of the "em" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.19 Description of the "a" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.20 Description of the "code" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.21 Description of the "span" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.22 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.23 Description of the "acronym" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.24 Description of the "big" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.25 Description of the "tt" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.26 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.27 Description of the "q" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.28 Description of the "i" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.29 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.30 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.31 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.32 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.33 Description of the "var" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.34 Description of the "small" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.35 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.36 Description of the "b" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.37 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.38 Description of the "table" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.39 Description of the "div" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.40 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.41 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.42 Description of the "figure" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.43 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.44 Description of the "video" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.45 Description of the "article" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.46 Description of the "aside" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.47 Description of the "footer" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.48 Description of the "header" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.49 Description of the "label" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.50 Description of the "nav" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.51 Description of the "section" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.52 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.53 Description of the "ssmlGroup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.54 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.14.55 Description of the "details" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class

Table 6.15 FlowGroup class definitions

Table 6.15.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.3 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.6 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.7 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.8 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.9 Description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.10 Description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.11 Description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.12 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.13 Description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.14 Description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.15 Description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.16 Description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.17 Description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.18 Description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.19 Description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.20 Description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.21 Description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.22 Description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.23 Description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.24 Description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.25 Description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.26 Description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.27 Description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.28 Description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.29 Description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.15.30 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class

Table 6.16 FlowStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.16.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.3 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.4 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.5 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.6 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.7 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.16.8 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.17 GapChoice class definitions

Table 6.17.1 Description of the "qti-gap-text" attribute for the "GapChoice" class

Table 6.17.2 Description of the "qti-gap-img" attribute for the "GapChoice" class

Table 6.18 GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection class definitions

Table 6.18.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.18.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.18.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.19 GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection class definitions

Table 6.19.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.19.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.19.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.20 GraphicOrderInteractionSelection class definitions

Table 6.20.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.20.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.20.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.21 HTMLContentFlow class definitions

Table 6.21.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class

Table 6.21.2 Description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class

Table 6.22 HotspotInteractionSelection class definitions

Table 6.22.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.22.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.22.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class

Table 6.23 IncrementSelection class definitions

Table 6.23.1 Description of the "qti-increment-si" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class

Table 6.23.2 Description of the "qti-increment-us" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class

Table 6.24 InlineChoiceGroup class definitions

Table 6.24.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.24.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.24.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.24.4 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.24.5 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.24.6 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class

Table 6.25 InlineContentModel class definitions

Table 6.25.1 Description of the "img" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.2 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.3 Description of the "br" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.4 Description of the "object" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.5 Description of the "em" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.6 Description of the "a" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.7 Description of the "code" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.8 Description of the "span" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.9 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.10 Description of the "acronym" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.11 Description of the "big" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.12 Description of the "tt" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.13 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.14 Description of the "q" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.15 Description of the "i" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.16 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.17 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.18 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.19 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.20 Description of the "var" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.21 Description of the "small" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.22 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.23 Description of the "b" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.24 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.25 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.26 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.27 Description of the "label" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.28 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.25.29 Description of the "ssml11Group" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class

Table 6.26 InlineGroup class definitions

Table 6.26.1 Description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.2 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.3 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.4 Description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.5 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.6 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.7 Description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.8 Description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.9 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.10 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.11 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.26.12 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class

Table 6.27 InlineStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.27.1 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.2 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.3 Description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.6 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.7 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.27.8 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.28 ItemBodySelect class definitions

Table 6.28.1 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class

Table 6.28.2 Description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class

Table 6.29 LookupTable class definitions

Table 6.29.1 Description of the "qti-match-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class

Table 6.29.2 Description of the "qti-interpolation-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class

Table 6.30 NumericExpressionGroup class definitions

Table 6.30.1 Description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.2 Description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.3 Description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.4 Description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.5 Description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.6 Description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.7 Description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.8 Description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.9 Description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.10 Description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.11 Description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.12 Description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.13 Description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.14 Description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.15 Description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.16 Description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.17 Description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.18 Description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.19 Description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.20 Description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.21 Description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.22 Description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.23 Description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.24 Description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.25 Description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.26 Description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.27 Description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.28 Description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.29 Description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.30 Description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.31 Description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.32 Description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.33 Description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.34 Description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.35 Description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.36 Description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.37 Description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.38 Description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.39 Description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.40 Description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.41 Description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.42 Description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.43 Description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.30.44 Description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class

Table 6.31 ObjectFlowGroup class definitions

Table 6.31.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class

Table 6.31.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class

Table 6.31.3 Description of the "param" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class

Table 6.31.4 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class

Table 6.32 OutcomeRule class definitions

Table 6.32.1 Description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.32.2 Description of the "qti-outcome-processing-fragment" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.32.3 Description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.32.4 Description of the "include" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.32.5 Description of the "qti-exit-test" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.32.6 Description of the "qti-outcome-condition" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class

Table 6.33 PhraseRBSelection class definitions

Table 6.33.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class

Table 6.33.2 Description of the "rb" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class

Table 6.34 PhrasingContentModelHTML5 class definitions

Table 6.34.1 Description of the "a" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.2 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.3 Description of the "b" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.4 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.5 Description of the "br" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.6 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.7 Description of the "code" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.8 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.9 Description of the "em" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.10 Description of the "i" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.11 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.12 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.13 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.14 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.15 Description of the "q" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.16 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.17 Description of the "small" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.18 Description of the "span" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.19 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.20 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.21 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.22 Description of the "var" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.23 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.24 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.25 Description of the "label" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.26 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.34.27 Description of the "video" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class

Table 6.35 PositionObjectStageSelection class definitions

Table 6.35.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class

Table 6.35.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class

Table 6.35.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class

Table 6.36 PromptStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.36.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class

Table 6.36.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class

Table 6.36.3 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class

Table 6.37 RPRTSelection class definitions

Table 6.37.1 Description of the "rp" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class

Table 6.37.2 Description of the "rtrtcSelection" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class

Table 6.38 RTRTCSelection class definitions

Table 6.38.1 Description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class

Table 6.38.2 Description of the "rtc" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class

Table 6.39 ResponseRuleGroup class definitions

Table 6.39.1 Description of the "include" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.39.2 Description of the "qti-response-condition" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.39.3 Description of the "qti-response-processing-fragment" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.39.4 Description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.39.5 Description of the "qti-exit-response" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.39.6 Description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class

Table 6.40 RubricBlockContentModel class definitions

Table 6.40.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.40.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.40.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.40.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.40.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.40.6 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.41 RubricTemplateBlockContentModel class definitions

Table 6.41.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.41.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.41.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.41.4 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.42 RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.42.1 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.42.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.42.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.42.4 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class

Table 6.43 RubySelection class definitions

Table 6.43.1 Description of the "phraseSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class

Table 6.43.2 Description of the "rprtSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class

Table 6.44 RuleSystemSelection class definitions

Table 6.44.1 Description of the "qti-rule-system-si" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class

Table 6.44.2 Description of the "qti-rule-system-us" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class

Table 6.45 SSMLGroup class definitions

Table 6.45.1 Description of the "p" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.2 Description of the "s" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.3 Description of the "say-as" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.4 Description of the "phoneme" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.5 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.6 Description of the "voice" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.7 Description of the "emphasis" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.8 Description of the "break" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.9 Description of the "prosody" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.10 Description of the "mark" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.11 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.45.12 Description of the "speak" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class

Table 6.46 SectionPart class definitions

Table 6.46.1 Description of the "include" attribute for the "SectionPart" class

Table 6.46.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-item-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class

Table 6.46.3 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "SectionPart" class

Table 6.46.4 Description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class

Table 6.47 SelectOrderSelection class definitions

Table 6.47.1 Description of the "qti-selection" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class

Table 6.47.2 Description of the "qti-ordering" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class

Table 6.48 SelectStimulusBody class definitions

Table 6.48.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class

Table 6.48.2 Description of the "blockContent" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class

Table 6.49 TableCellGroup class definitions

Table 6.49.1 Description of the "td" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class

Table 6.49.2 Description of the "th" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class

Table 6.50 TemplateRuleGroup class definitions

Table 6.50.1 Description of the "qti-set-template-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.50.2 Description of the "qti-exit-template" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.50.3 Description of the "qti-template-condition" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.50.4 Description of the "qti-set-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.50.5 Description of the "qti-set-correct-response" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.50.6 Description of the "qti-template-constraint" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class

Table 6.51 TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions

Table 6.51.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.51.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.51.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class

Table 6.52 TestRubricBlockContentModel class definitions

Table 6.52.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.52.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 6.52.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class

Table 7.1 ARIABaseEmpty class definitions

Table 7.1.1 Description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.2 Description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.3 Description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.4 Description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.5 Description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.6 Description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.7 Description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.8 Description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.9 Description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.10 Description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.11 Description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.12 Description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.13 Description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.14 Description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.15 Description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.16 Description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.17 Description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.18 Description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.19 Description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.20 Description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.21 Description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.22 Description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.23 Description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.24 Description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.25 Description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.26 Description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.27 Description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.28 Description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.29 Description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.30 Description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.31 Description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.32 Description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.33 Description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.34 Description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.35 Description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.36 Description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.37 Description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.38 Description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.39 Description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.40 Description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.41 Description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.42 Description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.43 Description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.44 Description of the "aria-keyshorts" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.45 Description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.46 Description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.1.47 Description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class

Table 7.2 ARIALevelInteger class definitions

Table 7.2.1 Description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "ARIALevelInteger" class

Table 7.3 AdaptiveHref class definitions

Table 7.3.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class

Table 7.3.2 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class

Table 7.4 AreaMapEntry class definitions

Table 7.4.1 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class

Table 7.4.2 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class

Table 7.4.3 Description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class

Table 7.5 AssessmentSectionRef class definitions

Table 7.5.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class

Table 7.5.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class

Table 7.5.3 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class

Table 7.5.4 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class

Table 7.6 AssessmentStimulusRef class definitions

Table 7.6.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class

Table 7.6.2 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class

Table 7.6.3 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class

Table 7.6.4 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class

Table 7.7 BaseValue class definitions

Table 7.7.1 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "BaseValue" class

Table 7.8 ContextUniqueIDRef class definitions

Table 7.8.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextUniqueIDRef" class

Table 7.9 Coords class definitions

Table 7.9.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Coords" class

Table 7.10 Correct class definitions

Table 7.10.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Correct" class

Table 7.11 DataHTML5Extension class definitions

Table 7.11.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "DataHTML5Extension" class

Table 7.12 Default class definitions

Table 7.12.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Default" class

Table 7.13 EncVariableString class definitions

Table 7.13.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "EncVariableString" class

Table 7.14 FileHref class definitions

Table 7.15 FileHrefCard class definitions

Table 7.15.1 Description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "FileHrefCard" class

Table 7.16 Identifier class definitions

Table 7.17 InteractionModule class definitions

Table 7.17.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class

Table 7.17.2 Description of the "primary-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class

Table 7.17.3 Description of the "fallback-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class

Table 7.18 InterpolationTableEntry class definitions

Table 7.18.1 Description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class

Table 7.18.2 Description of the "include-boundary" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class

Table 7.18.3 Description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class

Table 7.19 ItemSessionControl class definitions

Table 7.19.1 Description of the "max-attempts" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.2 Description of the "show-feedback" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.3 Description of the "allow-review" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.4 Description of the "show-solution" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.5 Description of the "allow-comment" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.6 Description of the "allow-skipping" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.19.7 Description of the "validate-responses" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class

Table 7.20 Length class definitions

Table 7.20.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Length" class

Table 7.21 MapEntry class definitions

Table 7.21.1 Description of the "map-key" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class

Table 7.21.2 Description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class

Table 7.21.3 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class

Table 7.22 MapResponse class definitions

Table 7.22.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "MapResponse" class

Table 7.23 MatchTableEntry class definitions

Table 7.23.1 Description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class

Table 7.23.2 Description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class

Table 7.24 MathConstant class definitions

Table 7.24.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathConstant" class

Table 7.25 MimeType class definitions

Table 7.25.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "MimeType" class

Table 7.26 NonNegativeDouble class definitions

Table 7.26.1 Description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "NonNegativeDouble" class

Table 7.27 Number class definitions

Table 7.27.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "Number" class

Table 7.27.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "Number" class

Table 7.27.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "Number" class

Table 7.28 OutcomeMinMax class definitions

Table 7.28.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class

Table 7.28.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class

Table 7.28.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class

Table 7.28.4 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class

Table 7.28.5 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class

Table 7.29 Param class definitions

Table 7.29.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "Param" class

Table 7.29.2 Description of the "value" characteristic for the "Param" class

Table 7.29.3 Description of the "valuetype" characteristic for the "Param" class

Table 7.29.4 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Param" class

Table 7.30 PrintedVariable class definitions

Table 7.30.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.3 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.4 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.5 Description of the "baseuri" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.6 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.7 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.8 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.9 Description of the "index" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.10 Description of the "power-form" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.11 Description of the "field" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.12 Description of the "delimiter" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.30.13 Description of the "mapping-indicator" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class

Table 7.31 RadialSIValue class definitions

Table 7.31.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialSIValue" class

Table 7.32 RadialUSValue class definitions

Table 7.32.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialUSValue" class

Table 7.33 RandomFloat class definitions

Table 7.33.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class

Table 7.33.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class

Table 7.34 RandomInteger class definitions

Table 7.34.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class

Table 7.34.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class

Table 7.34.3 Description of the "step" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class

Table 7.35 SILinearValue class definitions

Table 7.35.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "SILinearValue" class

Table 7.36 StyleSheet class definitions

Table 7.36.1 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class

Table 7.36.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class

Table 7.36.3 Description of the "media" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class

Table 7.36.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class

Table 7.37 SupportExtString class definitions

Table 7.37.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "SupportExtString" class

Table 7.38 TemplateUniqueIDRef class definitions

Table 7.38.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateUniqueIDRef" class

Table 7.39 TestVariables class definitions

Table 7.39.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.39.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.39.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.39.4 Description of the "variable-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.39.5 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.39.6 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class

Table 7.40 TimeLimits class definitions

Table 7.40.1 Description of the "min-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class

Table 7.40.2 Description of the "max-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class

Table 7.40.3 Description of the "allow-late-submission" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class

Table 7.41 URL class definitions

Table 7.42 USLinearValue class definitions

Table 7.42.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "USLinearValue" class

Table 7.43 UniqueIdentifier class definitions

Table 7.44 UniqueIdentifierRef class definitions

Table 7.45 UseExtensionString class definitions

Table 7.45.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "UseExtensionString" class

Table 7.46 Value class definitions

Table 7.46.1 Description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "Value" class

Table 7.46.2 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "Value" class

Table 7.47 Variable class definitions

Table 7.47.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class

Table 7.47.2 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class

Table 7.48 VariableMapping class definitions

Table 7.48.1 Description of the "source-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class

Table 7.48.2 Description of the "target-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class

Table 7.49 VariableString class definitions

Table 7.49.1 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "VariableString" class

Table 7.50 Weight class definitions

Table 7.50.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Weight" class

Table 7.50.2 Description of the "value" characteristic for the "Weight" class

Table 8.1 ARIAAutoCompleteEnum class definitions

Table 8.2 ARIACheckedEnum class definitions

Table 8.3 ARIACurrentEnum class definitions

Table 8.4 ARIAExpandedEnum class definitions

Table 8.5 ARIAInvalidEnum class definitions

Table 8.6 ARIALiveValueEnum class definitions

Table 8.7 ARIAOrientationValueEnum class definitions

Table 8.8 ARIAPressedEnum class definitions

Table 8.9 ARIARoleValue class definitions

Table 8.10 ARIASelectedEnum class definitions

Table 8.11 ARIASortEnum class definitions

Table 8.12 AlignEnum class definitions

Table 8.13 BaseTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.14 CORSSettingsEnum class definitions

Table 8.15 CalculatorTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.16 CardinalityEnum class definitions

Table 8.17 DIR class definitions

Table 8.18 ExternalScoredEnum class definitions

Table 8.19 KindValueEnum class definitions

Table 8.20 MathConstantsEnum class definitions

Table 8.21 MathOperatorNameEnum class definitions

Table 8.22 NavigationModeEnum class definitions

Table 8.23 OrientationEnum class definitions

Table 8.24 ParamTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.25 PreLoadValueEnum class definitions

Table 8.26 RoundingModeEnum class definitions

Table 8.27 SIRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.28 SIUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.29 ShapeEnum class definitions

Table 8.30 ShowHideEnum class definitions

Table 8.31 StatsOperatorNameEnum class definitions

Table 8.32 SubmissionModeEnum class definitions

Table 8.33 SupportEnum class definitions

Table 8.34 SuppressTTSEnum class definitions

Table 8.35 TableCellScopeEnum class definitions

Table 8.36 TestFeedbackAccessEnum class definitions

Table 8.37 TextFormatEnum class definitions

Table 8.38 ToleranceModeEnum class definitions

Table 8.39 USRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.40 USUnitTypeEnum class definitions

Table 8.41 UseEnum class definitions

Table 8.42 ValignEnum class definitions

Table 9.1.1 IdentifierList class description

Table 9.1.2 IntegerList class description

Table 9.1.3 MimeTypeList class description

Table 9.1.4 StringList class description

Table 9.1.5 ToleranceList class description

Table 9.2.1 ARIARelevantList class description

Table 9.2.2 ViewEnum class description

Table 9.3.1 FloatOrVariableRef class description

Table 9.3.2 IntOrIdentifier class description

Table 9.3.3 IntegerOrVariableRef class description

Table 9.3.4 StringOrVariableRef class description

Table 9.3.5 SupportEnumExt class description

Table 9.3.6 UseEnumExt class description

Table 9.4.1 Include class description

Table 9.4.2 MathML3 class description

Table 9.4.3 SSMLv1p1 class description

Table A1.1 The key to the descriptions of data model diagrams

Table A1.2 The key to the descriptions of the data class tables

Table A1.3 The key to the descriptions of the data attribute/characteristic tables

Table A1.4 The key to the descriptions of the enumerated vocabulary tables

Table A1.5 The key to the descriptions of the external vocabulary tables

Table A1.6 The key to the descriptions of the import class tables

Table A1.7 The key to the descriptions of the link data tables

Table A1.8 The key to the descriptions of the common data model persistent identifier tables

toc | top

1. Introduction

This Section is NOT NORMATIVE.

1.1. Scope and Context

The IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI): Assessment, Section and Item (ASI) Information Model definition is a part of the broader QTI specification. This document should be used in conjunction with the following documents:

This QTI ASI 3.0 Information Model is bound to an XML Schema Definition (XSD). This document and the accompanying XSD is generated using the IMS Global Binding Auto-generation Tool-kit (I-BAT) [I-BAT, 06].

1.2. Changes in QTI 3.0

This QTI ASI 3.0 specification supersedes the QTI ASI 2.2 version. The differences between these two versions are:

1.3. Conventions

All sections marked as non-normative, all authoring guidelines, diagrams (with the exception of the UML diagrams), examples, and notes in this specification are non-normative. Everything else in this specification is normative.

The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT", "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this document are to be interpreted as described in [RFC 2119]. This means that from the perspective of conformance:

The Conformance and Certification Guide for this specification may introduce greater normative constraints than those defined here for specific service or implementation categories.

The SHOULD/SHOULD NOT/RECOMMENDED statements MUST NOT be used in any document, or section of a document, that is responsible for defining the information model and/or the associated bindings and/or conformance and certification.

1.4. Structure of this Document

The structure of the rest of this document is:

2. Key Data Model Features The detailed descriptions of the core features used within QTI. This includes the composition of an Item and Test and the use of Sections as a grouping consruct, the HTML-based content model, the response and outcome processing and the various feedback mechanisms, and the accessibility features;
3. Root Attribute Descriptions The formal definition and description of the set of root attributes for the information model. These are the first class objects that can be exchanged using this data model. QTI ASI has six root attributes;
4. Root Class Descriptions The definition and description of the set of root classes for the information model. These are parent classes for the the first class objects i.e. the root attributes, that can be exchanged using this data model;
5. Data Class Descriptions The definition and description of the set of core classes from which the information model is composed;
6. Abstract Class Descriptions The definition and description set of abstract classes used within the information model. These are classes that will never be used to create a direct object. Instead the abstraction is used to define complex structured classes which would otherwise be impossible to create it such a concise way;
7. Derived Class Descriptions The definition and description of the set of derived classes. A derived class is one that is built upon either the primitive types (the base types avialable for any model) or other derived types;
8. Enumerated Vocabulary Descriptions The definition and description of the set of enumerated classes i.e. the embedded vocabularies, used throughout the specification (these vocabularies are not encapsulated as external IMS-based VDEX files);
9. Miscellaneous Descriptions The definition and description of the other types of classes used within the specification. This includes the classes for lists, enumerated lists, unions and constructs that are imported from other specifications;
10. Extending and Profiling the Data Model Identification of the ways in which the data model can be extended (both in terms of the extending features and proprietary extensions to the model) and how this base specification, and its model-based description, can be profiled to produce derivative specifications;
References The set of cited documents, normative and informative, that are used to support the technical details in this document;
Appendix A Modelling Concepts and Terms An overview of the model driven approach, the concepts and the terms used by IMS to create the data model representations (based upon a profile of UML), the corresponding set of bindings and the accompanying documentation (including this information model).

1.5. Nomenclature and Definitions

APIP Accessible Portable Item Protocol
ARIA Accessible Rich Internet Applications
ASI Assessment, Section and Item
Adaptive Item An adaptive item is an Item that adapts either its appearance, its scoring (Response Processing) or both in response to each of the candidate's Attempts. For example, an adaptive item may start by prompting the candidate with a box for free-text entry but, on receiving an unsatisfactory answer, present a simple choice Interaction instead and award fewer marks for subsequently identifying the correct response. Adaptivity allows authors to create items for use in formative situations which both help to guide candidates through a given task while also providing an Outcome that takes into consideration their path, enabling better subsequent content sequencing decisions to be made.
Adaptive Test An Adaptive Test is a Test that varies the items presented to the candidate based on the responses given on items already completed. This specification supports adaptivity through the use of pre-conditions and branching (see Pre-conditions and Branching). In QTI 3.0 support for adaptivity using the IMS Computer Adaptive Testing specification approach was added (see the sub-section 'Adaptive Sequencing using IMS CAT').
Assessment Assessment is the process of measuring some aspect of a candidate. In the context of this specification Assessment is carried out using Tests and the term Assessment is treated as being equivalent to an Assessment Test.
Assessment Delivery System A system for the administration and delivery of assessments to candidates. See also Delivery Engine.
Assessment Test An Assessment Test is an organized collection of Items that are used to determine the values of the outcomes e.g. level of mastery, when measuring the performance of a candidate in a particular domain. An Assessment Test contains all of the necessary instructions to enable the sequencing of the items and the calculation of the outcome values e.g. the final test score.
Assessment Variable An Assessment Variable is a variable used to maintain a value associated with an Item Session or Test Session. For example, the value of a Response given by the candidate or the value of an Outcome for an individual item or an entire test.
Attempt An attempt (at an Item) is the process by which the Candidate interacts with an item in one or more Candidate Sessions, possibly assigning values to or updating the associated Response Variables.
Authoring System A system used by authors for creating and editing Items and Assessments.
BIDI Bidirectional Unicode
Base-type A base-type is a predefined data type that defines a value set from which values for Item Variables are drawn. These values are indivisible with respect to the runtime model described by this specification.
Basic Item A basic item is an Item that contains one and only one Interaction.
Bi-directional Text This provides control for the layout of text so that it can be read from 'left-to-right' or 'right-to-left'.
CAT Computer Adaptive Testing
CP Content Packaging
CSS Cascading Stylesheet
Candidate A person that participates in a test, assessment or exam by answering questions. See also the actor candidate.
Candidate Session A period of time during which the candidate is interacting with the Item as part of an Attempt. An attempt may consist of more than one candidate session. For example, candidates that are not sure of the answer to one question may navigate to a second question in the same test and return to the first one later. When they leave the first question they terminate the candidate session but they do not terminate the Attempt. The attempt is simply suspended until a subsequent candidate session concludes it, triggering Response Processing and (possibly) Feedback.
Cloning Engine A cloning engine is a system for creating multiple similar items (Item Clones) from an Item Template.
Composite Item A composite item is an Item that contains more than one Interaction.
Container A container is an aggregate data type that can contain multiple values of the primitive Base-types. Containers may be empty.
DT Derived Type
Delivery Engine The process that coordinates the rendering and delivery of the Item(s) and the evaluation of the responses to produce scores and Feedback.
Feedback Any material presented to the candidate conditionally based on the value of an Outcome Variable. See also Integrated Feedback, Modal Feedback and Test Feedback.
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force.
ISO International Standards Organization
Integrated Feedback Integrated feedback is the name given to Feedback that is integrated into the item's itemBody. Unlike Modal Feedback the candidate is free to update their responses while viewing integrated feedback.
Interaction Interactions allow the candidate to interact with the item. Through an interaction, the candidate selects or constructs a response.
Item The smallest exchangeable assessment object within this specification. An item is more than a 'Question' in that it contains the question and instructions to be presented, the responseProcessing to be applied to the candidates response(s) and the Feedback that may be presented (including hints and solutions). In this specification items are represented by the assessmentItem class and the term assessment item is used interchangeably for item.
Item Clone Item Clones are items created by an Item Template.
Item Fragment An Item Fragment is part of an item managed independently of items that include it. See also Item Set.
Item Session An item session is the accumulation of all the Attempts at a particular item made by a candidate.
Item Set An Item Set is a set of items that share some common characteristic. For example, all items in the set may be introduced by the same Item Fragment, in which case the fragment is often referred to as the set leader.
Item Template Item templates are templates that can be used for producing large numbers of similar Items. Such items are often called cloned items. Item templates can be used to produce items by a special purpose Cloning Engine or, where Delivery Engines support them, be used directly to produce a dynamically chosen clone at the start of an Item Session. Each item cloned from an item template is identical except for the values given to a set of Template Variables. An item is therefore an item template if it declares one or more template variables and contains a set of Template Processing rules for assigning them values.
Item Variable A variable that records part of the state of an Item Session. The candidate's responses and any outcomes assigned by Response Processing are stored in item variables. Item variables are also used to define Item Templates. Item variables are a special kind of Assessment Variable.
Material Material means all static text, image or media objects that are intended for the user rather than being interpreted by a processing system. Interactions are not material.
Modal Feedback Modal feedback is the name give to Feedback that is presented to the candidate on its own, as opposed to being integrated into the item's itemBody.
Multiple Response A multiple response is a Response Variable that is a Container for multiple values all drawn from the value set defined by one of the Base-types. A multiple response is processed as an unordered list of these values. The list may be empty.
Non-adaptive Item An non-adaptive item is an Item that does not adapt itself in response to the candidate's Attempts.
Object Bank An object bank is a collection of objects used in assessment, including Items, Item Fragments, Tests or parts of tests. Object banks are not represented directly in this information model. See the QTI ASI Binding [QTI-BIND-30] for information about how to package assessment objects for interchange.
Ordered Response An ordered response is a Response Variable that is a Container for multiple values all drawn from the value set defined by one of the Base-types. An ordered response is processed as an ordered list (sequence) of values. The list may be empty.
Outcome The result of an Assessment Test or Item. An outcome is represented by one or more Outcome Variables.
Outcome Processing The process by which the values of item Outcomes (or Responses) are aggregated to make test outcomes.
Outcome Variable Outcome variables are declared by outcome declarations. Their value is set either from a default given in the declaration itself or by a response rule encountered during Response Processing (for Item outcomes) or Outcome Processing (for Test outcomes). See also the class outcomeDeclaration.
PCI Portable Custom Interaction (see definition).
PT Primitive Type
Pool A group of related items transported together with metadata that describes the group as a whole. A pool is a special case of an Object Bank.
Portable Custom Interaction This is the recommended mechanism for describing new QTI interactions to be used within QTI. PCI defines how the custom interaction functionality within QTI is extended by the use of a JavaScript API.
QTI Question and Test Interoperability
RFC Request For Comment
Response The data provided by the candidate through interaction with an item, or part of an item. The values of candidate responses are represented by Response Variables.
Response Processing The process by which the values of Response Variables are judged (scored) and the values of item Outcomes are assigned.
Response Variable Response variables are declared by response declarations and bound to Interactions in the Item body, they record the candidate's responses. See also the class responseDeclaration
Ruby Ruby allows one or more spans of phrasing content to be marked with ruby annotations. Ruby annotations are short runs of text presented alongside base text, primarily used in East Asian typography as a guide for pronunciation or to include other annotations. In Japanese, this form of typography is also known as furigana.
SSML Speech Synthsis Markup Language
Scoring Engine The part of the assessment system that handles the scoring based on the Candidate's responses and the Response Processing rules.
Single Response A single response is a Response Variable that can take a single value from the set of values defined by one of the Base-types.
Template Processing A set of rules used to set the values of the Template Variables, typically involving some random process, and thereby select the specific clone to be used for an Item Session.
Template Variable Template variables are declared by template declarations and used to record the values required to instantiate an item template. The values determine which clone from the set of similar items defined by an Item Template is being used for a given Item Session.
Test See Assessment.
Test Feedback The name given to feedback that is presented to the candidate conditionally based on the value of test Outcomes.
Test Fragment A Test Fragment is part of a test managed independently of the tests that include it.
Test Report A Test Report is a report about a Test Session.
Test Session A Test Session is the interaction of a candidate with a Test and the items it contains.
Time Dependent Item A time dependent item is an Item that records the accumulated elapsed time for the Candidate Sessions in a Response Variable that is used during Response Processing.
Time Independent Item A time independent item is an Item that does not use the accumulated elapsed time during Response Processing. In practice, this information may be collected by a Delivery Engine and may still be reported as part of a Test Report.
UML Unified Modeling Language
URI Uniform Resource Identifier
URL Uniform Resource Locator
VDEX Vocabulary Definition and Exchange
W3C World Wide Web Consortium
XML Extensible Markup Language
XSD XML Schema Definition

toc | top

2. Key Data Model Features

This Section is NOT NORMATIVE.

2.1. The Structure of the Data Model

The QTI v3.0 specification has four components that provide the total data interoperability capability:

2.1.1. Assessments, Sections and Items

This is the core functionality of the QTI specification and is the component that is addressed specifically by this document. This specification defines the exchange of a single Assessment (also known as a Test and Quiz), Sections and/or Items. Structurally an Assessment consists of one or more TestParts; each TestPart consists of one or more Sections; each Section consists of one or more Sections (hence a Section is recursive) and/or Items. This specification also permits the seperate exchange of an Outcome Declaration, a Response Processing Template and content Stimulus. The data model root classes are:

This data model is mapped to an XSD binding [QTI-BIND-30]. The data exchange is achieved as a zip package as defined in [CP-12].

2.1.2. Metadata

This is the QTI-specific metadata. In QTIv3.0 the QTI-specific metadata [QTI-MD-BIND-30] is aligned with the IEEE Learning Object Metadata (LOM) in accordance with the IMS Metadata Best Practice and Implementation Guide for [IMD, 06]. The IEEE LOM standard defines a set of metadata elements that can be used to describe learning resources, but does not describe assessment resources in sufficient detail. The application profile provided in this document therefore extends the IEEE LOM to meet the specific needs of QTI developers wishing to associate metadata with items (as defined by the accompanying Item Information Model). QTIv3.0 further extends this to enable the description of tests, pools and object banks.

This data model has its own XSD binding.

2.1.3. Usage Data

QTI Usage Data defines the exchange of statistical information about the usage of a set of items. The corresponding documentation [QTI-UD-30] provides detailed information about the data model. While the expectation is that the original definition of the corresponding Test and Items is based upon the use of the QTIv3.0 Assessment, Section and Item specification, this is not a pre-requisite for the use of this usage data representation.

The root class is 'UsageData'. Usage data, most commonly item statistics, do not form part of an assessmentItem directly because they always relate to some context or domain in which the statistics are valid. Therefore, this specification defines a separate class for describing these statistics. Each statistic refers to both its context and to the assessmentItem(s) it relates to. Therefore, instances of this class are bound and packaged separately for interoperability.

This data model has its own XSD binding.

2.1.4. Results Reporting

QTI Result Reporting defines the exchange of reporting the results of an assessment. The corresponding documentation [QTI-RR-30] provides detailed information about the model and specifies the associated requirements on delivery engines. While the expectation is that the original definition of the corresponding Test and Items is based upon the use of the QTIv3.0 Assessment, Section and Item specification, this is not a pre-requisite for the use of this result reporting representation.

The root class is 'AssessmentResult'. An AssessmentResult is used to report the results of a candidate's interaction with a test and/or one or more items attempted. Information about the test is optional, in some systems it may be possible to interact with items that are not organized into a test at all. For example, items that are organized with learning resources and presented individually in a formative context.

This data model has its own XSD binding.

2.2. Items

In this specification an assessment item encompasses the information that is presented to a candidate and information about how to score the item. Scoring takes place when candidate responses are transformed into outcomes by response processing rules. It is sometimes desirable to have several different items that appear the same to the candidate but which are scored differently. In this specification, these are distinct items by definition and must therefore have distinct identifiers. To help facilitate the exchange of items that share significant parts of their presentation this specification supports the inclusion of separately managed item fragments in the itemBody. The core functionality of an Item is defined using the classes:

2.2.1. The Item Session Lifecycle

An item session is the accumulation of all the attempts at a particular instance of an item made by a candidate. In some types of test, the same item may be presented to the candidate multiple times e.g. during 'drill and practice'. Each occurrence or instance of the item is associated with its own item session. Figure 2.1, illustrates the user-perceived states of the item session. Not all states will apply to every scenario, for example feedback may not be provided for an item or it may not be allowed in the context in which the item is being used. Similarly, the candidate may not be permitted to review their responses and/or examine a model solution. In practice, systems may support only a limited number of the indicated state transitions and/or support other state transitions not shown here.

Diagram of the lifecycle of an Item session.

Figure 2.1 - The lifecycle of an Item session.

For system developers, an important first step in determining which requirements apply to their system is to identify which of the user-perceived states are supported in their system and to match the state transitions indicated in the diagram to their own event model.The discussion that follows forms part of this specification's requirements on Delivery Engines.

The session starts when the associated item first becomes eligible for delivery to the candidate. The item session's state is then maintained and updated in response to the actions of the candidate until the session is over. At any time the state of the session may be turned into an Item-Result. A delivery system may also allow an itemResult to be used as the basis for a new session in order to allow a candidate's responses to be seen in the context of the item itself (and possibly compared to a solution) or even to allow a candidate to resume an interrupted session at a later time.

The initial state of an item session represents the state after it has been determined that the item will be delivered to the candidate but before the delivery has taken place.

In a typical non-Adaptive Test the items are selected in advance and the candidate's interaction with all items is reported at the end of the test session, regardless of whether or not the candidate actually attempted all the items. In effect, item sessions are created in the initial state for all items at the start of the test and are maintained in parallel. In an Adaptive Test the items that are to be presented are selected during the session based on the responses and outcomes associated with the items presented so far. Items are selected from a large pool and the delivery engine only reports the candidate's interaction with items that have actually been selected.

A candidate's interaction with an item is broken into 0 or more attempts. During each attempt the candidate interacts with the item through one or more candidate sessions. At the end of a candidate session the item may be placed into the suspended state ready for the next candidate session. During a candidate session the item session is in the interacting state. Once an attempt has ended response processing takes place, after response processing a new attempt may be started.

For non-adaptive items, response processing typically takes place a limited number of times, usually only once. For adaptive items, no such limit is required because the response processing adapts the values it assigns to the outcome variables based on the path through the item. In both cases, each invocation of response processing occurrs at the end of each attempt. The appearance of the item's body, and whether any modal feedback is shown, is determined by the values of the outcome variables.

When no more attempts are allowed the item session passes into the closed state. Once in the closed state the values of the response variables are fixed. A delivery system or reporting tool may still allow the item to be presented after it has reached the closed state. This type of presentation takes place in the review state, summary feedback may also be visible at this point if response processing has taken place and set a suitable outcome variable.

Finally, for systems that support the display of solutions, the item session may pass into the solution state. In this state, the candidate's responses are temporarily replaced by the correct values supplied in the corresponding response declarations (or NULL if none was declared).

2.2.2. Item Variables

Item variables are declared by variable declarations: context, response, outcome or template variables. All variables must be declared except for the built-in session variables referred to below which are declared implicitly and must not be declared. The purpose of the declaration is to associate an identifier with the variable and to identify the runtime type of the variable's value. An item variable may have no value at all, in which case it is said to have the special value NULL. For example, if the candidate has not yet had an opportunity to respond to an interaction then any associated response variable will have a NULL value. Empty containers and empty strings are always treated as NULL values. The declaration of variables is defined by the classes:

2.2.2.1. Context Variable

Context variables are declared by context declarations. Their intended purpose is to provide an information binding mechanism between a Delivery Engine, or a Scoring Engine, and an Assessment Item or an Assessment Test.

For example, an item might have different response evaluation (response processing) instructions depending on the test where/when the item is used. In this case, a response condition might evaluate the value of a context variable containing the test's identifier, and branch accordingly.

There is one built-in context variable: 'QTI_CONTEXT', which has record cardinality. Within the QTI_CONTEXT record, there are three built-in fields: "testIdentifier", "candidateIdentifier", and "environmentIdentifier", all of which have base-type string. QTI_CONTEXT is a built-in variable and so any references within an item or an assessment to the QTI_CONTEXT variable, or to the three built-in fields, must succeed i.e. it MUST NOT result in a null pointer exception.

Implementors of Delivery/Scoring Engines should take care to set the value of QTI_CONTEXT prior to any further processing e.g. template, response, or outcome processing. This is so that all processing instructions have the proper context available in the information model.

2.2.2.2. Response Variable

Response variables are declared by response declarations and bound to interactions in the itemBody. Each response variable declared may be bound to one and only one interaction. At runtime, response variables are instantiated as part of an item session. Their values are always initialized to NULL (no value) regardless of whether or not a default value is given in the declaration. A response variable with a NULL value indicates that the candidate has not offered a response, either because they have not attempted the item at all or because they have attempted it and chosen not to provide a response. If a default value has been provided for a response variable then the variable is set to this value at the start of the first attempt. If the candidate never attempts the item, in other words, the item session passes straight from the initial state to the closed state without going through the interacting state, then the response variable remains NULL and the default value is never used.

Implementors of Delivery Engine's should take care when implementing user interfaces for items with default response variable values. If the associated interaction is left in the default state (i.e., representing the default value) then it is important that the system is confident that the candidate intended to submit this value and has not simply failed to notice that a default has been provided. This is especially true if the candidate's attempt ended due to some external event, such as running out of time. The techniques required to distinguish between these cases are an issue for user interface design and are therefore out of scope for this specification.

There are two built-in response variables: 'numAttempts' and 'duration'. These are declared implicitly and must not appear in a 'response declaration'.

All Delivery Engines must maintain the value of numAttempts. This is a single integer that records the number of attempts at each item the candidate has taken. The value defaults to '0' initially and then increases by '1' at the start of each attempt.

Systems that support Time Dependent Items must also maintain the value of duration. The duration is defined as being a single float that records the accumulated time (in seconds) of all Candidate Sessions for all Attempts. In other words the time between the beginning and the end of the item session minus any time the session was in the suspended state. The resolution of the duration must be at least 1s and should be 0.1s or smaller. If the resolution is denoted by epsilon then each value of duration represents the range of values 'duration' <= 't' <= 'duration+epsilon'. In other words, duration values are truncated.

The value of duration for items that are not time dependent must not be used in any item or test-level expression, though systems should still report it in itemResults when it is known.

2.2.2.3. Outcomes Variable

Outcome variables are declared by outcome declarations. Their value is set either from a default given in the declaration itself or by a response rule during response processing.

Items that declare a numeric outcome variable representing the candidate's overall performance on the item should use the outcome name 'SCORE' for the variable. SCORE MUST be a float.

Items that declare a maximum score (in multiple response choice interactions, for example) should do so by declaring the 'MAXSCORE' variable. MAXSCORE MUST be a float.

Items or tests that want to make the fact that the candidate scored above a predefined threshold available as a variable should use the 'PASSED' variable. PASSED MUST be a boolean.

At runtime, outcome variables are instantiated as part of an item session. Their values may be initialized with a default value and/or set during response processing. If no default value is given in the declaration then the outcome variable is initialized to NULL unless the outcome is of a numeric type (integer or float) in which case it is initialized to 0.

For Non-adaptive Items, the values of the outcome variables are reset to their default values prior to each invocation of response processing. For Adaptive Items the outcome variables retain the values that were assigned to them during the previous invocation of response processing. For more information, see Response Processing (Subsection 2.5).

There is one built-in outcome variable, 'completionStatus', that is declared implicitly and must not appear in an outcome declaration. Delivery Engines must maintain the value of the built-in outcome variable completionStatus, a single identifier. It starts with the reserved value "not_attempted". At the start of the first attempt it changes to the reserved value "unknown". It remains with this value for the duration of the item session unless set to a different value by a setOutcomeValue rule in responseProcessing. There are four permitted values:

Any one of these values may be set during response processing. If an Adaptive Item sets completionStatus to completed then the session must be placed into the closed state, however an item session is not required to wait for the completed signal before terminating, it may terminate in response to a direct request from the candidate, through running out of time or through some other exceptional circumstance. Adaptive Items must maintain a suitable value and should set completionStatus to "completed" to indicate when the cycle of interaction, response processing and feedback must stop. Non-adaptive Items are not required to set a value for completionStatus, but they may do so. Delivery Engines are encouraged to use the value of completionStatus when communicating externally

2.3. The Content Model

Most of the content within QTI is used in the content of the AssessmentItem. The item body contains the text, graphics, media objects and interactions that describe the item's content and information about how it is structured. The body is presented by combining it with stylesheet information, either explicitly or implicitly using the default style rules of the delivery or authoring system.

The body must be presented to the candidate when the associated item session is in the interacting state. In this state, the candidate must be able to interact with each of the visible interactions and therefore set or update the values of the associated response variables. The body may be presented to the candidate when the item session is in the closed or review state. In these states, although the candidate's responses should be visible, the interactions must be disabled so as to prevent the candidate from setting or updating the values of the associated response variables. Finally, the body may be presented to the candidate in the solution state, in which case the correct values of the response variables must be visible and the associated interactions disabled.

The content model employed by this specification uses many concepts taken directly from [XHTML, 10]. In effect, this part of the specification defines a profile of XHTML. Only some of the elements defined in XHTML are allowable in an assessmentItem and of those that are, some have additional constraints placed on their attributes. Only those elements from XHTML that are explicitly defined within this specification can be used (see Subsection 2.3.2 XHTML Elements [XHTML, 10] for details). Finally, this specification defines some new elements which are used to represent the interactions and to control the display of Integrated Feedback and content restricted to one or more of the defined content views.

2.3.1. Basic Classes

Underpinning the content model are a number of abstract classes that are used to group elements of the body into categories that define peer-groups. These abstract classes are:

2.3.2. XHTML Elements

The structural elements of the content model are taken from [XHTML, 10]. Only those characteristics listed here may be used (including attributes inherited from parent classes). By default, elements and attributes have the same interpretation and restrictions as the corresponding elements and attributes in [XHTML, 10].

2.3.2.1. Text Elements

The supported text elements are:

2.3.2.2. List Elements

The supported list elements are:

2.3.2.3. Object Elements

The supported object elements are:

2.3.2.4. Presentation Elements

The supported presentation elements are:

2.3.2.5. Table Elements

The supported table elements are:

2.3.2.6. Image Elements

The supported image elements are:

2.3.2.7. Hypertext Element

The supported hypertext elements are:

2.3.2.8. HTML5 Elements

The supported elements added in HTML5 are:

2.3.3. MathML

MathML defines a Markup Language for describing mathematical notation using XML [MathML3, 14]. The primary purpose of MathML is to provide a language for embedding mathematical expressions into other documents, in particular into HTML documents.

It is often desirable to vary elements of a mathematical expression when creating item templates. Although it is impossible to embed objects such as printed variable defined for that purpose within a math object the techniques described in this section can be used to achieve a similar effect. In MathML, numbers are represented either by the 'mn' or 'cn' tags, for presentation or content representation respectively. Similarly, 'mi' and 'ci' represent identifiers. If mathVariable is set in a template variable's declaration then all instances of 'mi' and 'ci' that match the name of the template variable must be replaced by 'mn' and 'cn' respectively with the template variable's value as their content. It is possible that this technique of expanding template variables will be extended to other elements of MathML in future. The set of classes that support the MathML are:

2.3.4. Variable Content

This specification defines two methods by which the content of an assessmentItem can vary depending on the state of the item session. The first method is based on the value of an outcome variable and the second uses templates. When using outcome variables the classes that support this method are:

The syntax of the format attribute is based on the format conversion specifiers defined in the C programming language [ISO 9899] for use with printf and related functions. Each conversion specifier starts with a '%' character and is followed by zero or more flag characters (#, 0, -, " " [space] and +), an optional digit string indicating the minimum field width, an optional precision (consisting of a "." followed by zero or more digits) and finally one of the conversion type codes: E, e, f, G, g, r, R, i, o, X, or x. These are interpreted according to the C standard with the exception of i, which may be used to format numbers in bases other than 10 using the base attribute, and r/R which round to the number of significant figures given by the precision in the same way as g/G except that scientific format is only used if the requested number of significant figures is less than the number of digits to the left of the decimal point.

2.3.5. Formatting Items with Stylesheets

QTI recommends the use of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) for controlling the content formating. QTI supports CSS 2.1 [CSS2, 11] and CSS 3.0 [CSS3, 11]. The classes that define the associated stylesheet assignment are:

Stylesheets are applicable to the content in the following classes:

2.3.6. Accessibility

There are three accessibility features that are supported by QTI 3.0:

See Subsection 2.13 for more information on how Accessibility is supported.

2.3.7. Internationalization

The internationalization features supported in QTI 3.0 are:

See Subsection 2.14 for more information on how Internationalization is supported.

2.4. Interactions

2.4.1. Simple Interactions

The simple interactions are:

2.4.1.1. Choice Interaction

The choice interaction presents a set of choices to the candidate. The candidate's task is to select one or more of the choices, up to a maximum of max-choices. The interaction is always initialized with no choices selected. The qti-choice-interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality. The relevant classes are:

2.4.1.2. Order Interaction

In an order interaction the candidate's task is to reorder the choices, the order in which the choices are displayed initially is significant. By default the candidate's task is to order all of the choices but a subset of the choices can be requested using the max-choices and min-choices attributes. When specified the candidate must select a subset of the choices and impose an ordering on them. If a default value is specified for the response variable associated with an order interaction then its value should be used to override the order of the choices specified here. By its nature, an order interaction may be difficult to render in an unanswered state, especially in the default case where all choices are to be ordered. Implementors should be aware of the issues concerning the use of default values described in the section on Response Variables. The qti-order-interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and ordered cardinality only. The relevant classes are:

2.4.1.3. Associate Interaction

An associate interaction is a blockInteraction that presents candidates with a number of choices and allows them to create associations between them. The qti-associate-interaction must be bound to a response variable with base-type pair and either single or multiple cardinality. The relevant classes are:

2.4.1.4. Match Interaction

A match interaction is a block interaction that presents candidates with two sets of choices and allows them to create associates between pairs of choices in the two sets, but not between pairs of choices in the same set. Further restrictions can still be placed on the allowable associations using the match-max attribute of the choices. The qti-match-interaction must be bound to a response variable with base-type 'directedPair' and either single or multiple cardinality. The relevant classes are:

2.4.1.5. Gap Match Interaction

A gap match interaction is a blockInteraction that contains a number gaps that the candidate can fill from an associated set of choices. The candidate must be able to review the content with the gaps filled in context, as indicated by their choices. The qti-gap-match-interaction must be bound to a response variable with base-type 'directedPair' and either single or multiple cardinality, depending on the number of gaps. The choices represent the source of the pairing and gaps the targets. Each gap can have at most one choice associated with it. The maximum occurrence of the choices is controlled by the match-max attribute of qti-gap-choice. The relevant classes are:

2.4.2. Text-based Interactions

The text-based interactions are:

2.4.2.1. Inline Choice Interaction

An inline choice is an inlineInteraction that presents the user with a set of choices, each of which is a simple piece of text. The candidate's task is to select one of the choices. Unlike the qti-choice-interaction, the delivery engine must allow the candidate to review their choice within the context of the surrounding text. The qti-inline-choice-interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single cardinality only. The relevant classes are:

2.4.2.2. Text Interaction

A text-entry interaction is an inline-interaction that obtains a simple piece of text from the candidate. Like qti-inline-choice-interaction, the delivery engine must allow the candidate to review their choice within the context of the surrounding text. The qti-text-entry-interaction must be bound to a response variable with either single or record cardinality only. For single cardinality the base-type must be one of string, integer or float. For record cardinality the fields are 'stringValue', 'floatValue', etc. The relevant class is:

TextEntryInteraction is a String interaction and can be bound to numeric response variables, instead of strings, if desired. If detailed information about a numeric response is required then the string interaction can be bound to a response variable with record cardinality. The resulting value contains the following fields:

2.4.2.3. Extended Text Interaction

An extended text interaction is a blockInteraction that allows the candidate to enter an extended amount of text. The extendedTextInteraction must be bound to a response variable of single, multipe, ordered or record cardinality. If the response variable has record cardinality the fields in the records are 'stringValue' 'floatValue', etc. Otherwise it must have a base-type of string, integer or float. When bound to response variable with single cardinality a single string of text is required from the candidate. When bound to a response variable with multiple or ordered cardinality several separate text strings may be required, see maxStrings below. The relevant class is:

ExtendedTextInteraction is a String interactions and can be bound to numeric response variables, instead of strings, if desired. If detailed information about a numeric response is required then the string interaction can be bound to a response variable with record cardinality. The resulting value contains the following fields:

2.4.2.4. Hot Text Interaction

The hottext interaction presents a set of choices to the candidate represented as selectable runs of text embedded within a surrounding context, such as a simple passage of text. Like choice interaction, the candidate's task is to select one or more of the choices, up to a maximum of max-choices. The interaction is initialized from the 'defaultValue' of the associated response variable, a NULL value indicating that no choices are selected (the usual case). The hottext-interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality. The relevant classes are:

2.4.3. Graphical Interactions

The graphical interactions are:

2.4.3.1. Hotspot Interaction

A hotspot interaction is a graphical interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to select one or more of the areas (hotspots). The hotspot interaction should only be used when the spacial relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, choiceInteraction should be used instead with separate material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate the selected area(s) of the image and may also indicate the unselected areas as well. Interactions with hidden hotspots are achieved with the selectPointInteraction. The hotspot interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality.The relevant classes are:

2.4.3.2. Graphic Order Interaction

A graphic order interaction is a graphic interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to impose an ordering on the areas (hotspots). The order hotspot interaction should only be used when the spatial relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, order-interaction should be used instead with separate material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate all defined area(s) of the image. The order hotspot interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and ordered cardinality.The relevant classes are:

2.4.3.3. Graphic Associate Interaction

A graphic associate interaction is a graphic interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to associate the areas (hotspots) with each other. The graphic associate interaction should only be used when the graphical relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, associateInteraction should be used instead with separate Material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate all defined area(s) of the image. The graphicAssociateInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type pair and either single or multiple cardinality. The relevant classes are:

2.4.3.4. Graphic Gap Match Interaction

A graphic gap-match interaction is a graphical interaction with a set of gaps that are defined as areas (hotspots) of the graphic image and an additional set of gap choices that are defined outside the image. The candidate must associate the gap choices with the gaps in the image and be able to review the image with the gaps filled in context, as indicated by their choices. Care should be taken when designing these interactions to ensure that the gaps in the image are a suitable size to receive the required gap choices. It must be clear to the candidate which hotspot each choice has been associated with. When associated, choices must appear wholly inside the gaps if at all possible and, where overlaps are required, should not hide each other completely. If the candidate indicates the association by positioning the choice over the gap (e.g. drag and drop) the system should 'snap' it to the nearest position that satisfies these requirements. The graphic-gap-match-interaction must be bound to a response variable with base-type 'directedPair' and multiple cardinality. The choices represent the source of the pairing and the gaps in the image (the hotspots) the targets. Unlike the simple gap-match-interaction, each gap can have several choices associated with it if desired, furthermore, the same choice may be associated with an associable-hotspot multiple times, in which case the corresponding directed pair appears multiple times in the value of the response variable. The relevant classes are:

2.4.3.5. Select Point Interaction

Like hotspotInteraction, a select point interaction is a graphic interaction. The candidate's task is to select one or more points. The associated response may have an areaMapping that scores the response on the basis of comparing it against predefined areas but the delivery engine must not indicate these areas of the image. Only the actual point(s) selected by the candidate shall be indicated. The select point interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of point and single or multiple cardinality. The relevant class is:

2.4.3.6. Position Object Interaction

The position object interaction consists of a single image which must be positioned on another graphic image (the stage) by the candidate. Like selectPointInteraction, the associated response may have an areaMapping that scores the response on the basis of comparing it against predefined areas but the delivery engine must not indicate these areas of the stage. Only the actual position(s) selected by the candidate shall be indicated. The position object interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of point and single or multiple cardinality. The point records the coordinates, with respect to the stage, of the centre point of the image being positioned. The relevant classes are:

2.4.4. Miscellaneous Interactions

The set of miscellaneous interactions are:

2.4.4.1. Slider Interaction

The slider interaction presents the candidate with a control for selecting a numerical value between a lower and upper bound. It must be bound to a response variable with single cardinality with a base-type of either integer or float. The relevant class is:

2.4.4.2. Media Interaction

The media interaction allows more control over the way the candidate interacts with a time-based media object and allows the number of times the media object was experienced to be reported in the value of the associated response variable, which must be of base-type integer and single cardinality. The relevant class is:

2.4.4.3. Drawing Interaction

The drawing interaction allows the candidate to use a common set of drawing tools to modify a given graphical image (the canvas). It must be bound to a response variable with base-type file and single cardinality. The result is a file in the same format as the original image. The relevant class is:

2.4.4.4. Upload Interaction

The upload interaction allows the candidate to upload a pre-prepared file representing their response. It must be bound to a response variable with base-type file and single cardinality. The relevant class is:

2.4.4.5. Custom Interaction

NOTE THAT THIS IS A DEPRECATED FEATURE. Instead, implementations should make use of Portable Custom Interactions (PCIs).

Custom interactions can be used by a delivery engine to support interactions not defined in the QTI specification, however such extensions have no defined inter-operability between delivery engines. As Portable Custom Interactions are portable between delivery engines they are preferred over the use of Custom Interaction. The relevant class is:

2.4.4.6. Portable Custiom Interaction (PCI)

The PCI provides a way to use new custom interaction types in QTI who's implementation is portable between QTI delivery engines [PCI, 20]. A PCI is implemented as a dynamically loadable Javascript module (which may have dependent modules) which may be developed by a third party, included into a QTI content package which includes items using that custom interaction type and dynamically loaded into any delivery engine supporting the QTI PCI Application Programming Interface. The relevant class is:

2.4.5. Alternative Ways to End an Attempt

The end-attempt interaction is a special type of interaction which allows item authors to provide the candidate with control over the way in which the candidate terminates an attempt. The candidate can use the interaction to terminate the attempt (triggering response processing) immediately, typically to request a hint. It must be bound to a response variable with base-type boolean and single cardinality.

If the candidate invokes response processing using an end-attempt interaction then the associated response variable is set to true. If response processing is invoked in any other way, either through a different end-attempt interaction or through the default method for the delivery engine, then the associated response variable is set to false. The default value of the response variable is always ignored. The relevant class is:

2.5. Response Processing

Response processing is the process by which the Delivery Engine assigns outcomes based on the candidate's responses. The state representation for the response processing is shown in Figure 2.2. The outcomes may be used to provide feedback to the candidate. Feedback is either provided immediately following the end of the candidate's attempt or it is provided at some later time, perhaps as part of a summary report on the item session.

State diagram of the response processing.

Figure 2.2 - The state diagram for response processing.

The end of an attempt, and therefore response processing, must only take place in direct response to a user action or in response to some expected event, such as the end of a test. An item session that enters the suspended state may have values for the response variables that have yet to be submitted for response processing.

For a Non-adaptive Item the values of the outcome variables are reset to their default values (or NULL if no default is given) before each invocation of response processing. However, although a Delivery Engine may invoke response processing multiple times for a Non-adaptive Item it must only report the first set of outcomes produced or limit the number of attempts to some predefined limit agreed outside the scope of this specification.

For an Adaptive Item the values of the outcome variables are not reset to their defaults. A Delivery Engine that supports Adaptive Items must allow the candidate to revise and submit their responses for response processing and must only report the last set of outcomes produced. Furthermore, it must present all applicable modal and integrated feedback to the candidate. Subsequent response processing may take into consideration the feedback seen by the candidate when updating the session outcomes. An adaptive item can signal to the delivery engine that the candidate has completed the interaction and no more attempts are to be allowed by setting the built-in outcome variable 'completionStatus' to completed.

2.5.1. Response Processing Templates

Response processing involves the application of a set of response rules, including the testing of response conditions and the evaluation of expressions involving the item variables. For delivery engines that are only designed to support very simple use cases the implementation of a system for carrying out this evaluation, conditional testing and processing may pose a barrier to the adoption of the specification.

To alleviate this problem, the implementation of generalized response processing is an optional feature. Engines that do not support it can instead implement a smaller number of standard response processors called response processing templates described below. These templates are described using the processing language defined in this specification and are distributed (in XML form) along with it. Delivery engines that support generalized response processing do not need to implement special mechanisms to support them as a template file can be parsed directly while processing the assessmentItem that refers to it.

Delivery engines that do not support generalized response processing but do support response processing mechanisms that go beyond the standard templates described below should, where possible, define templates of their own. Authors wishing to write items for those delivery engines can then refer to these custom templates. Publishing these custom templates will then ensure that these items can be used with delivery engines that do support generalized response processing.

There are six standard response processing templates available:

2.5.2. Generalized Response Resprocessing

The components for generalized response processing are shown in Figure 2.3.

Response processing composition.

Figure 2.3 - The components for the response processing.

The classes that are defined to provide the generalized processing are:

2.6. Modal Feedback

Modal feedback is shown to the candidate directly following response processing. The value of an outcome variable is used in conjunction with the 'show-hide' and 'identifier' attributes to determine whether or not the feedback is shown in a similar way to the non-modal feedback. The modal feedback is described using the classes:

2.7. Item Templates

Item templates are templates that can be used for producing large numbers of similar items. Such items are often called cloned items. Item templates can be used to produce items by special purpose Cloning Engines or, where delivery engines support them, be used directly to produce a dynamically chosen clone at the start of an item session.

Each item cloned from an item template is identical except for the values given to a set of template variables. A qti-assessment-item is therefore an item template if it contains one or more template declarations and a set of template processing rules for assigning them values.

A cloning engine that creates cloned items must assign a different identifier to each clone and record the values of the template variables used to create it. A report of an item session with such a clone can then be transformed into an equivalent report for the original item template by substituting the item template's identifier for the cloned item's identifier and adding the values of the template variables to the report. The class that supports template declaration is:

2.7.1. Using Template Variables in an Item's Body

Template variables can be referred to qti-printed-variable objects in the item body. The value of the template variable is used to create an appropriate run of text that is displayed. Template variables can also be used to conditionally control content through qti-template-block and qti-template-inline objects in a similar way to outcome variables with feedback. Finally, template variables can be used to control the visibility of choices in interactions. The set of template-based classes that support the use of template variables in an Item are (the set of interaction-related classes are not included in this list):

2.7.2. Using Template Variables in Operator Attributes Values

Some of the operators used in expressions have attributes to control their behaviour. The value of a template variable evaluated at the time the operator itself is evaluated, can be used as the value of some such attributes by using a reference to a template variable of the appropriate base-type and cardinality instead of a value from the value space of the attribute's target type. Attributes that support this type of attribute value substitution are declared with one of the following types:

When binding variable references as strings the variable's identifier must be enclosed in braces. For example, the string "{myVariable}" refers to the template variable with identifier myVariable. A references must match the identifier in a corresponding 'template declaration'.

2.7.3. Template Processing

Template processing consists of one or more TemplateRules that are followed by the cloning engine or delivery system in order to assign values to the template variables. Template processing is identical in form to response processing except that the purpose is to assign values to template variables, not outcome variables. The classes that provide template processing are:

2.8. Tests, Testparts and Sections

A test is represented by the AssessmentTest class. A test is a group of assessment-items with an associated set of rules that determine which of the items the candidate sees, in what order, and in what way the candidate interacts with them. The rules describe the valid paths through the test, when responses are submitted for response processing and when (if at all) feedback is to be given.

There are two constructs that are used to group togther Items: TestParts and Sections. A TestPart is used to divide a Test into parts that would normally be undertaken in separate test sessions. Whereas, a Section establishes groups of Items that have some common pedagogic testing objective. Sections are used to collect together Items which will then be presented to the learner. The order of presentation can be controlled using selection and ordering algorithms. A Test must have at lest one TestPart. A TestPart must have at least one Section. A Section may contain child Sections. A Section must contain at least one other Section or Item. The set of classes that realise the core test structures are:

Any Test, Section and/or Item or combination is exchanged as a '.zip' file. The format of this file is based upon the IMS Content Packaging v1.2 specification [CP-12]. See the QTI 3.0 ASI XSD Binding specification [QTI-BIND-30] for further details on how content packaging is used.

2.8.1. The Structure of a Test

For each test session, items and sub-sections are selected and arranged into order according to rules defined in the containing section. This process of selection and ordering defines a basic structure for each part of the test on a per-session basis. The paths that a candidate may take through this structure are then controlled by the mode settings for the test part and possibly by further pre-conditions or branch-rules evaluated during the test session itself. Figure 2.4 illustrates part of a test and the way the items are structured into sections and sub-sections.

The structure of a Test

Figure 2.4 - The structure of the test for selection and ordering.

Figure 2.5 illustrates a specific instance of the same test part after the application of selection and ordering rules. A rule in section S01 selects just one of S01A and S01B, a rule in S02 shuffles the order of the items contained by it and, finally, rules in S03 select 2 out of the 3 items it contains and shuffles the result.

Selection and ordering of the delivered Test.

Figure 2.5 - The delivered test after selection and ordering.

The classes that support selection and ordering are:

See Subsection 2.8.4 for information on how adaptive sequencing using the IMS CAT [CAT, 19] specification is achieved.

2.8.2. Navigation and Submission

This specification defines two ways in which the overall behaviour of each test part can be controlled: the navigation mode and the submission mode (both of which are characteristics on the TestPart class).

The navigation mode determines the general paths that the candidate may take. A qti-test-part in linear mode restricts the candidate to attempt each item in turn. Once the candidate moves on they are not permitted to return. A test-part in nonlinear mode removes this restriction - the candidate is free to navigate to any item in the test at any time. Test delivery systems are free to implement their own user interface elements to facilitate navigation provided they honour the navigation mode currently in effect. A test delivery system may implement nonlinear mode simply by providing a method to step forward or backwards through the qti-test-part.

The submission mode determines when the candidate's responses are submitted for response processing. A qti-test-part in individual mode requires the candidate to submit their responses on an item-by-item basis. In simultaneous mode the candidate's responses are all submitted together at the end of the qti-test-part.

The choice of submission mode determines the states through which each item's session can pass during the test. In simultaneous mode, response processing cannot take place until the qti-test-part is complete so each item session passes between the interacting and suspended states only. By definition the candidate can take one and only one attempt at each item and feedback cannot be seen during the test. Whether or not the candidate can return to review their responses and/or any item-level feedback after the test, is outside the scope of this specification. Simultaneous mode is typical of paper-based tests.

In individual mode response processing may take place during the test and the item session may pass through any of the states described in Items, subject to the item-session-control settings in force. Care should be taken when designing user interfaces for systems that support nonlinear navigation mode in combination with individual submission. With this combination candidates may change their responses for an item and then leave it in the suspended state by navigating to a different item in the same part of the test. Test delivery systems need to make it clear to candidates that there are unsubmitted responses (akin to unsaved changes in a traditional document editing system) at the end of the qti-test-part. A test delivery system may force candidates to submit or discard such responses before moving to a different item in individual mode if this is more appropriate.

2.8.3. Pre-conditions and Branching

Pre-conditions and branch rules are only applicable to parts of the test that are navigated in linear mode. In nonlinear mode they are ignored. The overarching test parts are effectively navigated in nonlinear mode and so can therefore have associated pre-conditions and branch rules.

2.8.3.1. Pre-conditions

Pre-conditions and branch rules are advanced concepts to enable adaptation within an assessment-test. A primary consideration has been to limit the complexity of supporting delivery engines while still enabling some items (or whole sections and test parts) to be skipped depending on the candidate's responses to items presented earlier in the test. The pre-condition functionality is provided through the attribute:

2.8.3.2. Branching

A branch-rule is a simple expression attached to a qti-assessment-item-ref, qti-assessment-section or qti-test-part that is evaluated after the item, section or part has been presented to the candidate. If the expression evaluates to true the test jumps forward to the item, section or part referred to by the target identifier. In the case of an item or section, the target must refer to an item or section in the same test-part that has not yet been presented. For qti-test-parts, the target must refer to another qti-test-part. The branching functionality is provided in the class:

The above definition restricts the navigation paths through a linear test part to being trees. In other words, cycles are not allowed. In most cases, repetition can be achieved by using a section that selects with-replacement up to a suitable upper bound of repitition in combination with a pre-condition or branch-rule that terminates the section early when (or if) a certain outcome has been achieved. This technique might be used in conjunction with one or more Item Templates to achieve drill and practice, for example. However, unbounded repetition is not supported.

2.8.4. Adaptive Sequencing using IMS CAT

The IMS CAT specification defines the adaptive sequencing of operations after an item attempt/submission as follows:

  1. The candidate completes the attempt, and response variable values are set;
  2. The delivery engine runs Response and Outcome processing;
  3. The delivery engine invokes the Submit Results endpoint of the CAT engine to determine the next item or stage in the adaptive section to be presented. The results sent to the CAT engine include the values set in the Step 2 processing, plus item results determined in response to attempts on previous items, but not sent to the CAT engine at that time. If there remain unpresented items in the stage, this step may be deferred until there are no more unpresented items, or the delivery engine opts to proceed to the next stage;
  4. The delivery engine "submits" the item. If it supports QTI Results Reporting, the delivery engine builds a results report, which merges the values of builtin and declared outcome variables with outcome variable values returned by the CAT engine in its Submit Results responses, and sends the report to a QTI Results Reporting endpoint. Otherwise, it does whatever "submission" means in the context of the particular delivery engine;
  5. The delivery engine adds the new items sent in the Submit Results response to the end of the section;
  6. The delivery engine presents the next item to the candidate.

For more details see the IMS CAT specification [CAT, 19].

2.8.5. Time Limits

In the context of a specific qti-assessment-test an item, or group of items, may be subject to a time constraint. This specification supports both minimum and maximum time constraints. The controlled time for a single item is simply the duration of the item session as defined by the builtin response variable duration. For qti-assessment-sections, qti-test-parts and whole qti-assessment-tests the time limits relate to the durations of all the item sessions plus any other time spent navigating that part of the test. In other words, the time includes time spent in states where no item is being interacted with, such as dedicated navigation screens.

The allow-late-submission attribute regulates whether a candidate's response that is beyond the max-time should still be accepted.

Minimum times are applicable to qti-assessment-sections and qti-assessment-items only when linear navigation mode is in effect.

The time spent on the test is recorded as if it were a built-in response variable called 'duration' declared at the test-level and of base-type duration and single cardinality. Similarly, time spent on test parts or sections are treated as built-in response variables declared within each respective scope. The values of these durations can be refered to during outcome-processing by using the variable name duration prefixed with the identifier of the part or section followed by the period character. See the variable expression for further information. Note that the durations may be changed depending on the relevant accessibility values in the Personal Needs & Preferences settings for the learner. The classes that realise the time limits are:

2.8.6. Rubric Blocks

A rubric block identifies part of the content that represents instructions (candidate instructions, scoring instructions, authoring instructions, etc.) to one or more of the actors that view the item in the context of their role. How that information is intended to be used is identified by the a use attribute. Although rubric blocks are defined as simpleBlocks they MUST NOT contain interactions but may contain template blocks. Rubric Blocks MUST NOT be nested within other Rubric Blocks.

2.9. Outcome Processing

Outcome processing takes place each time the candidate submits the responses for an item (when in individual submission mode) or a group of items (when in simultaneous submission mode). It happens after any (item level) response processing triggered by the submission. The values of the test's outcome variables are always reset to their defaults prior to carrying out the instructions described by the outcome rules. Because outcome processing occurs each time the candidate submits responses the resulting values of the test-level outcomes may be used to activate test-level feedback during the test or to control the behaviour of subsequent parts through the use of pre-conditions and branch rules. The structure of outcome processing is similar to that of response processing. The outcomes processing functionality is described in the classes:

2.10. Test-level Feedback

Test feedback is shown to the candidate either directly following outcome processing (during the test) or at the end of the test-part or assessment-test as appropriate (referred to as atEnd). The core functionality of a test feedback is defined using the classes:

2.11. Expressions

QTI contains a wide range of expressions used to support the response processing, outcomes processing and template processing capabilities. Expressions are used to assign values to variables and to control conditional actions in response, outcomes and template processing. An expression can be a simple reference to the value of an item variable, a constant value from one of the value sets defined by base-types or a hierarchical expression operator. Like item variables, each expression can also have the special value NULL. The expressions are grouped into two abstract classes:

2.11.1. Builtin General Expressions

There are several built-in general expressions for handling constants, random values and the values of the various item variables (response, outcome and template). These built-in expressions are realised using the classes:

2.11.1.1. BaseValue Expression

The simplest expression returns a single value from the set defined by the given base-type.

2.11.1.2. Variable Expression

This expression looks up the value of an item variable that has been declared in a corresponding variable declaration or is one of the built-in variables. The result has the base-type and cardinality declared for the variable subject to the type promotion of weighted outcomes.

During outcomes processing, values taken from an individual item session can be looked up by prefixing the name of the item variable with the identifier assigned to the item in the qti-assessment-item-ref, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 you would use a variable instance with identifier Q01.SCORE.

In adaptive tests that contain items that are allowed to be replaced (i.e. that have the with-replacement attribute set to "true"), the same item can be instantiated more than once. In order to access the outcome variable values of each instantiation, a number that denotes the instance's place in the sequence of the item's instantiation is inserted between the item variable identifier and the item variable, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 in its second instantiation you would use a variable instance, prefixed by the instantiation sequence number, prefixed by an identifier Q01.2.SCORE.

When looking up the value of a response variable it always takes the value assigned to it by the candidate's last submission. Unsubmitted responses are not available during expression evaluation.

The value of an item variable taken from an item instantiated multiple times from the same qti-assessment-item-ref (through the use of selection with-replacement) is taken from the last instance submitted if submission is simultaneous, otherwise it is undefined.

2.11.1.3. Default Expression

This expression looks up the declaration of an item variable and returns the associated qti-default-value or NULL if no default value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see qti-variable) may be used to obtain the default value from an individual item.

2.11.1.4. Correct Expression

This expression looks up the declaration of a response variable and returns the associated qti-correct-response or NULL if no correct value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see qti-variable) may be used to obtain the correct response from an individual item.

2.11.1.5. Map Response Exprssion

This expression looks up the value of a response variable and then transforms it using the associated mapping, which must have been declared. The result is a single float. If the response variable has single cardinality then the value returned is simply the mapped target value from the map. If the response variable has multiple or ordered cardinality then the value returned is the sum of the mapped target values. This expression cannot be applied to variables of record cardinality.

For example, if a mapping associates the identifiers {A,B,C,D} with the values {0,1,0.5,0} respectively then qti-map-response will map the single value 'C' to the numeric value 0.5 and the set of values {C,B} to the value 1.5.

If a container contains multiple instances of the same value then that value is counted once only. To continue the example above {B,B,C} would still map to 1.5 and not 2.5.

2.11.1.6. Map Response Point Expression

This expression looks up the value of a response variable that must be of base-type point, and transforms it using the associated qti-area-mapping. The transformation is similar to qti-map-response except that the points are tested against each area in turn. When mapping containers each area can be mapped once only. For example, if the candidate identified two points that both fall in the same area then the qti-mapped-value is still added to the calculated total just once.

2.11.1.7. Math Constant Expression

The result is a mathematical constant returned as a single float, e.g. Pi and e.

2.11.2. Expressions Used only in Outcomes Processing

There are several expressions for handling outcomes processing only. These expressions are realised using the classes:

2.11.2.1. Number Correct Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which the all defined response variables match their associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

2.11.2.2. Number Incorrect Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which at least one of the defined response variables does not match its associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined and have been attempted at least once are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

2.11.2.3. Number Presented Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once). In other words, items with which the user has interacted, whether or not they provided a response. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

2.11.2.4. Number Responded Expresson

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once) and for which a response was given. In other words, items for which at least one declared response has a value that differs from its declared default (typically NULL). The result is an integer with single cardinality.

2.11.2.5. Number Selected Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been selected for presentation to the candidate, regardless of whether the candidate has attempted them or not. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

2.11.2.6. Outcome Minimum Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the normal-minimum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. Items with no declared minimum are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

2.11.2.7. Outcome Maximum Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the normal-maximum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. If any of the items within the given subset have no declared maximum the result is NULL, otherwise the result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

2.11.2.8. Test Variables Expression

This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the value of a qti-item-variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered, all NULL values are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple. The base-type of the result is integer if all matching values have base-type integer, otherwise it is float and integer values are subject to type promotion.

2.11.3. Operators

Operators are a family of classes derived from expression that obtain their value (referred to as their result) either by modifying a single sub-expression or by combining two or more sub-expressions in a specified way. Operators never effect the values of itemVariables directly, in other words, there are no 'side effects'. All operators have a base-type and cardinality though these may be dependent on the sub-expression(s) they contain. The set of classes that realise these operators are:

2.11.3.1. AnyN Expression

The qti-any-N operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is true if at least min of the sub-expressions are true and at most max of the sub-expressions are true. If more than n - min sub-expressions are false (where n is the total number of sub-expressions) or more than max sub-expressions are true then the result is false. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL then it is possible that neither of these conditions is satisfied, in which case the operator results in NULL. For example, if min is 3 and max is 4 and the sub-expressions have values {true,true,false,NULL} then the operator results in NULL whereas {true,false,false,NULL} results in false and {true,true,true,NULL} results in true. The result NULL indicates that the correct value for the operator cannot be determined.

2.11.3.2. Custom Operator Expression

The custom operator provides an extension mechanism for defining operations not currently supported by this specification.

2.11.3.3. Equal Expression

The qti-equal operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two expressions are numerically equal and false if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.4. Equal Rounded Expression

The qti-equal-rounded operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two expressions are numerically equal after rounding and false if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.5. Field Value Expression

The identifier of the field to be selected. The qti-field-value operator takes a sub-expression with a record container value. The result is the value of the field with the specified field-identifier. If there is no field with that identifier then the result of the operator is NULL.

2.11.3.6. Index Expression

The qti-index operator takes a sub-expression with an ordered container value and any base-type. The result is the nth value of the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. The first value of a container has index 1, the second 2 and so on. n must be a positive integer. If n exceeds the number of values in the container (or the sub-expression is NULL) then the result of the index operator is NULL. If n is an identifier, it is the value of n at runtime that is used.

2.11.3.7. Inside Expression

The qti-inside operator takes a single sub-expression which must have a base-type of point. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the given point is inside the area defined by shape and coords. If the sub-expression is a container the result is true if any of the points are inside the area. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.8. Multiple Expression

The qti-multiple operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or multiple cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with multiple cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with multiple cardinality have their individual values added to the result: containers cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B and {C,D} the multiple operator results in {A,B,C,D}. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.9. Ordered Expression

The qti-ordered operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with ordered cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with ordered cardinality have their individual values added (in order) to the result: contains cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B, {C,D} the ordered operator results in {A,B,C,D}. Note that the ordered operator never results in an empty container. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.10. And Expression

The qti-and operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is true if all sub-expressions are true and false if any of them are false. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL and all others are true then the operator also results in NULL.

2.11.3.11. GCD Expression

The qti-gcd operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the greatest common divisor (gcd) of the argument values. If all the arguments are zero, the result is 0, gcd(0,0)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the gcd of random values. If some, but not all, of the arguments are zero, the result is the gcd of the non-zero arguments, gcd(0,n)=n if n!=0. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.12. LCM Expression

The qti-lcm operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the lowest common multiple (lcm) of the argument values. If any argument is zero, the result is 0, lcm(0,n)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the lcm of random values. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.13. Min Expression

The qti-min operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the smallest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to negative infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.14. Max Expression

The qti-max operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the greatest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to positive infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.15. Or Expression

The qti-or operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is true if any of the sub-expressions are true and false if all of them are false. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL and all the others are false then the operator also results in NULL.

2.11.3.16. Product Expression

The qti-product operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the product of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.17. Contains Expression

The qti-contains operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type and cardinality - either multiple or ordered. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the qti-container given by the first sub-expression contains the value given by the second sub-expression and false if it doesn't. Note that the qti-contains operator works differently depending on the cardinality of the two sub-expressions. For unordered containers the values are compared without regard for ordering, for example, [A,B,C] contains [C,A]. Note that [A,B,C] does not contain [B,B] but that [A,B,B,C] does. For ordered containers the second sub-expression must be a strict sub-sequence within the first. In other words, [A,B,C] does not contain [C,A] but it does contain [B,C].

If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL. Like the member operator, the contains operator should not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of float and must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

2.11.3.18. Delete Expression

The qti-delete operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type. The first sub-expression must have single cardinality and the second must be a multiple or ordered container. The result is a new container derived from the second sub-expression with all instances of the first sub-expression removed. For example, when applied to A and {B,A,C,A} the result is the container {B,C}. If either sub-expression is NULL the result of the operator is NULL. The restrictions that apply to the qti-member operator also apply to the qti-delete operator.

2.11.3.19. Divide Expression

The qti-divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression divided by the second expression. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

Item authors should make every effort to ensure that the value of the second expression is never 0, however, if it is zero or the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator should result in NULL.

2.11.3.20. Duration Expression

The qti-duration-gte operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and base-type duration. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first duration is longer (or equal, within the limits imposed by truncation as described above) than the second and false if it is shorter than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. See qti-duration-lt for more information about testing the equality of durations.

2.11.3.21. Duration LT Expression

The qti-duration-lt operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and base-type duration. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first duration is shorter than the second and false if it is longer than (or equal) to the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

There is no 'qti-duration-lte' or 'qti-duration-gt' because equality of duration is meaningless given the variable precision allowed by duration. Given that duration values are obtained by truncation rather than rounding it makes sense to test only less-than or greater-than-equal inequalities only. For example, if we want to determine if a candidate took less than 10 seconds to complete a task in a system that reports durations to a resolution of epsilon seconds (epsilon<1) then a value equal to 10 would cover all durations in the range [10,10+epsilon).

2.11.3.22. GT Expression

The qti-gt operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically greater than the second and false if it is less than or equal to the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NU

2.11.3.23. GTE Expression

The qti-gte operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically greater than or equal to the second and false if it is less than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.24. Integer Divide Expression

The qti-integer divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the first expression (x) divided by the second expression (y) rounded down to the greatest integer (i) such that i LTE (x/y). If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.25. Integer Modulus Expression

The qti-integer modulus operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the remainder when the first expression (x) is divided by the second expression (y). If z is the result of the corresponding qti-integer-divide operator then the result is x-z*y. If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.26. LT Expression

The qti-lt operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically less than the second and false if it is greater than or equal to the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.27. LTE Expression

The qti-lte operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically less than or equal to the second and false if it is greater than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.28. Match Expression

The qti-match operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type and cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two expressions represent the same value and false if they do not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

The qti-match operator must not be confused with broader notions of equality such as numerical equality. To avoid confusion, the qti-match operator should not be used to compare subexpressions with base-types of float and must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

2.11.3.29. Member Expression

The qti-member operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type. The first sub-expression must have single cardinality and the second must be a multiple or ordered container. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the value given by the first sub-expression is in the container defined by the second sub-expression. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL. The member operator should not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of float because of the poorly defined comparison of values. It must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

2.11.3.30. Power Expression

The qti-power operator takes 2 sub-expression which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression raised to the power of the second. If either or the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator shall result in NULL.

2.11.3.31. Subtract Expression

The qti-subtract operator takes 2 sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float or, if both sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the first value minus the second. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.32. ContainerSize Expression

The qti-container-size operator takes a sub-expression with any base-type and either multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is an integer giving the number of values in the sub-expression, in other words, the size of the container. If the sub-expression is NULL the result is 0. This operator can be used for determining how many choices were selected in a multiple-response qti-choice-interaction, for example.

2.11.3.33. Integer to Float Expression

The qti-integer-to-float conversion operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is a value of base-type float with the same numeric value. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.34. IsNull Expression

The qti-is-null operator takes a sub-expression with any base-type and cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the sub-expression is NULL and false otherwise. Note that empty containers and empty strings are both treated as NULL.

2.11.3.35. Not Expression

The qti-not operator takes a single sub-expression with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value obtained by the logical negation of the sub-expression's value. If the sub-expression is NULL then the qti-not operator also results in NULL.

2.11.3.36. Random Expression

The qti-random operator takes a sub-expression with a multiple or ordered container value and any base-type. The result is a single value randomly selected from the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. If the sub-expression is NULL then the result is also NULL.

2.11.3.37. Round Expression

The qti-round operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by rounding the value of the sub-expression. The result is the integer n for all input values in the range [n-0.5,n+0.5). In other words, 6.8 and 6.5 both round up to 7, 6.49 rounds down to 6 and -6.5 rounds up to -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

2.11.3.38. Truncate Expression

The qti-truncate operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by truncating the value of the sub-expression towards zero. For example, the value 6.8 becomes 6 and the value -6.8 becomes -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

2.11.3.39. Math Operator Expression

The qti-math-operator operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and have numerical base-types. The trigonometric functions, sin, cos and tan, take one argument in radians, which evaluates to a single float. Other functions take one numerical argument. Further functions might take more than one numerical argument, e.g. atan2 (two argument arc tan). The result is a single float, except for the functions signum, floor and ceil, which return a single integer. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions falls outside the natural domain of the function called by qti-math-operator, e.g. log(0) or asin(2), then the result is NULL.

The reciprocal trigonometric functions also follow these rules:

The reciprocal trigonometric and hyperbolic functions also follow these rules:

The function atan2 also follows these rules:

2.11.3.40. Sum Expression

The qti-sum operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the sum of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.41. Pattern Match Expression

The qti-pattern-match operator takes a sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the sub-expression matches the regular expression given by pattern and false if it doesn't. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.42. Repeat Expression

The qti-repeat operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions, all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality and the same base-type. The result is an ordered container having the same base-type as its sub-expressions. The container is filled sequentially by evaluating each sub-expression in turn and adding the resulting single values to the container, iterating this process qti-number-repeats times in total. If qti-number-repeats refers to a variable whose value is less than 1, the value of the whole expression is NULL. Any sub-expressions evaluating to NULL are ignored. If all sub-expressions are NULL then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.43. RoundTo Expression

The qti-round-to operator takes one sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a single float with the value nearest to that of the expression's value such that when converted to a decimal string it represents the expression rounded by the specified rounding method to the specified precision. If the sub-expression is NULL, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL.

When rounding to n significant figures, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting from the first non-zero digit from the left in the number. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded.

When rounding to n decimal places, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting to the right from the decimal point. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded.

2.11.3.44. Stats Operator Expression

The qti-stats-operator operator takes 1 sub-expression which is a container of multiple or ordered cardinality and has a numerical base-type. The result is a single float. If the sub-expression or any value contained therein is NULL, the result is NULL. If any value contained in the sub-expression is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

2.11.3.45. String Match Expression

The qti-string-match operator takes two sub-expressions which must have single and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two strings match according to the comparison rules defined by the attributes below and false if they don't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

2.11.3.46. Substring Expression

The qti-substring operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have an effective base-type of string and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is a substring of the second expression and false if it isn't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL.

2.12. Items and Test Fragments

An Item Fragment is part of an item that is managed independently of the items that depend on it. Similarly, a Test Fragment is part of a test that is managed independently of the tests that depend on it. Fragments are packaged as separate resources and can be transported independently. A fragment may appear anywhere in the model where one of the following abstract classes may appear: flowStatic, inlineStatic, blockStatic, responseRule, sectionPart or outcomeRule. For example, an item fragment may be a division of the qti-item-body represented by an instance of the 'Div' class or a single interaction

Fragments are included using the Include mechanism (the actual form of implementation is dependent on the binding approach). The instance of include is treated as if it was actually an instance of the root element of the fragment referred to by the 'href' chracteristic of the 'Include' class. For the purposes of this specification, when using an XML binding, the xpointer mechanism defined by the XInclude specification MUST NOT be used. Also, all included fragments must be treated as parsed xml.

This technique is similar to the inclusion of media objects (using object) but allows the inclusion of data that conforms to this specification, specifically, it allows the inclusion of interactions, static content, processing rules or, at test level whole sections, to be included from externally defined fragments.

When including externally defined fragments the content of the fragment must satisfy the requirements of the specification in the context of the item in which it is being included. For example, interactions included from fragments must be correctly bound to response variables declared in the items. Item and Test fragments are supported using the classes:

2.13. The Accessibility Features

There are three accessibility features that are supported by QTI 3.0:

2.13.1. Alternative Accessibility Content Functionality

QTI 3.0 provides a rich set of accessibility annotation capabilities. These are derived from the functionality originally defined in [APIP, 14]. There are four components to the accessibility content annotation:

The alternative content supplied to realise accessibility needs is always optional content. The alternative content can be defined for the following classes:

Examples of how to use these alternative content features are given in the QTI Implementation Guide document [QTI-BPIG-30].

2.13.2. Support for Speech Synthesis Markup Language

The Speech Synthesis Markup Language Specification is designed to provide a rich, XML-based markup language for assisting the generation of synthetic speech in Web and other applications. The essential role of the markup language is to provide authors of synthesizable content a standard way to control aspects of speech such as pronunciation, volume, pitch, rate, etc. across different synthesis-capable platforms.

SSML functionality is provided through the SSMLGroup class that is imported. The SSML tags that are supported are 'p', 's', 'say-as', 'phoneme', 'sub', 'voice', 'emphasis', 'break', 'prosody' 'mark', 'audio' and 'speak'. SSML anotations are supplied through the following classes:

Further information on SSMLv1.1 is available in [SSML, 10]. An example of how to use SSML is given in the QTI Implementation Guide document [QTI-BPIG-30].

2.13.3. Support for WAI-ARIA

The Accessible Rich Internet Applications (ARIA) specification from W3C [ARIA, 14], [WAI-ARIA, 17], [WAI-ARIA, 21] provides an ontology of roles, states, and properties that define accessible user interface elements and can be used to improve the accessibility and interoperability of web content and applications. These semantics are designed to allow an author to properly convey user interface behaviors and structural information to assistive technologies in document-level markup. In QTI the ARIA characteristics are used on the following classes:

These classes are used to define the HTML and the QTI Interactions. The subset of the possible set of ARIA features that are supported in QTI is:

Further information on WAI-ARIA 1.0, 1.1 and 1.2 is available in [ARIA, 14], [WAI-ARIA, 17], [WAI-ARIA, 21] respectively. An example of how to use ARIA is given in the QTI Best Practices document [QTI-BPIG-30].

2.14. The Internationalization Features

The internationalization features supported in QTI 3.0 are:

2.14.1. Support for Bidirectional Text

For different languages the text is presented and read either from 'left-to-right' or 'right-to-left'. The corresponding rendering must take into account word and character spacing and justification. The classes that enable the bi-directional text layout support are:

2.14.2. Support for Ruby

Ruby allows one or more spans of phrasing content to be marked with ruby annotations. Ruby annotations are short runs of text presented alongside base text, primarily used in East Asian typography as a guide for pronunciation or to include other annotations. In Japanese, this form of typography is also known as furigana. Ruby text can appear on either side, and sometimes both sides, of the base text, and it is possible to control its position using CSS. A more complete introduction to ruby can be found in the Use Cases and Exploratory Approaches for Ruby Markup document as well as in CSS Ruby Module Level 1. [RUBYUC, 13] [CSSRUBY, 15]. The classes that enable the Ruby support are:

2.14.3. Support for Alternative Languages

There are explicit methods for indicating multiple or alternative languages for content. For alternate language variants, there are two major implementations of delivery when using the variants. In the first use case, delivery systems determine the preferred language (variant) of the candidate, then present only the requested variant content during the assessment session. In the second use case, the delivery system presents the variant requested, as well as the original language variant of the item, and allows the candidate to switch back and forth between the two language variants during the assessment session.

A QTI Package is used to establish the link between the original Item and variants (including those that for the alternative language. See the QTI implementation Guide [QTI-BPIG-30] for more details on the use of variants to support Items with alternative languages.

toc | top

3. Root Attribute Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the Root attributes (the root name for the instances that can be exchanged) used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.3. The root attributes are:

3.1 "qti-assessment-item" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-assessment-item" root attribute is shown in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Description of the "qti-assessment-item" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-item
Data Type AssessmentItem
Description This is the root element for the exchange of items. The qti-assessment-item may reference any required content stimuli contained within a qti-assessment-stimulus. The exchange of a single qti-assessment-item instance is permitted.

3.2 "qti-assessment-section" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-assessment-section" root attribute is shown in Table 3.2.

Table 3.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-section
Data Type AssessmentSection
Description This is the root element for the exchange of sections. A qti-assessment-section can contain any order and hierarchy of contained/referenced qti-assessment-sections and referenced qti-assessment-items. The qti-assessment-items can only be referenced from within a qti-assessment-section i.e. they cannot be contained in the same instance as the qti-assessment-section. The exchange of a single root qti-assessment-section instance is permitted but any number of contained qti-assessment-sections can also be exchanged.

3.3 "qti-assessment-stimulus" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-assessment-stimulus" root attribute is shown in Table 3.3.

Table 3.3 Description of the "qti-assessment-stimulus" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-stimulus
Data Type AssessmentStimulus
Description This is the root element for the exchange of stimuli i.e. content that is to be shared and referenced by multiple items. This allows the stimulus content to be managed as a separate first class object. The exchange of a single qti-assessment-stimulus instance is permitted.

3.4 "qti-assessment-test" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-assessment-test" root attribute is shown in Table 3.4.

Table 3.4 Description of the "qti-assessment-test" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-test
Data Type AssessmentTest
Description This is the root element for the exchange of tests, quizzes, etc. The test must contain at least one test part which in turn must contain, or reference, at least one qti-assessment-section. The associated qti-assessment-items can only be referenced from within a qti-assessment-section and cannot be contained in the same instance as the qti-assessment-test. The exchange of a single qti-assessment-test instance is permitted.

3.5 "qti-outcome-declaration" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-outcome-declaration" root attribute is shown in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-declaration
Data Type OutcomeDeclaration
Description This is the root element for the declaration of set an outcome variable either as within a qti-assessment-item or as separate resource in a QTI content package. The ability to define outcome variables as top level objects is to enable the allocation of curriculum standards metadata (including CASE competency identifiers) to an outcome variable via the QTI content package.

3.6 "qti-response-processing" Root Attribute Description

The definition of the "qti-response-processing" root attribute is shown in Table 3.6.

Table 3.6 Description of the "qti-response-processing" root attribute.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-processing
Data Type ResponseProcessing
Description This root element is used to enable the definition of response processing templates either as within a qti-assessment-item or as separate resource in a QTI content package. These templates can then be used to define common response processing patterns to be used by Items.

toc | top

4. Root Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the Root data classes (the first class objects that can be exchanged using the data model) used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

4.1 AssessmentItem Root Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentItem" root class is shown in Figure 4.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.1.

UML diagram of the AssessmentItem class.

Figure 4.1 - AssessmentItem class definitions.

Table 4.1 Description of the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentItem
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An assessment item encompasses the information that is presented to a candidate and information about how to score the item. Scoring takes place when candidate responses are transformed into outcomes by response processing rules. It is sometimes desirable to have several different items that appear the same to the candidate but which are scored differently. In this specification, these are distinct items by definition and must therefore have distinct identifiers. To help facilitate the exchange of items that share significant parts of their presentation this specification supports the inclusion of separately managed item fragments (see Item and Test Fragments) in the qti-item-body.

4.1.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.1

Table 4.1.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The principle identifier of the item. If an identifier is assigned in the corresponding item's resource metadata (see QTI Metadata [QTI-MD-BIND-30] for more information) then the two MUST be the same. When an Item is referenced using a 'qti-assesasment-item-ref' the values of the two 'identifier' characteristics MUST be the same. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

4.1.2 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.2

Table 4.1.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The title of a qti-assessment-item is intended to enable the item to be selected in situations where the full text of the qti-item-body is not available, for example when a candidate is browsing a set of items to determine the order in which to attempt them. Therefore, delivery engines may reveal the title to candidates at any time but are not required to do so. Note that if the accompanying packaging metadata for this resource includes the title then these two MUST be the same (see QTI Metadata [QTI-MD-BIND-30] for more information).

4.1.3 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.3

Table 4.1.3 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human readable label that can be used to describe the Item.

4.1.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.4

Table 4.1.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default language for the Item. Natural language identifiers as defined by [BCP 47].

4.1.5 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.5

Table 4.1.5 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-name
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool name characteristic allows the tool creating the item to identify itself. Other processing systems may use this information to interpret the content of application specific data, such as labels on the elements of the item's qti-item-body.

4.1.6 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.6

Table 4.1.6 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-version
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool version characteristic allows the tool creating the item to identify its version. This value must only be interpreted in the context of the tool-name.

4.1.7 "adaptive" Characteristic Description

The description of the "adaptive" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.7

Table 4.1.7 Description of the "adaptive" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name adaptive
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Denotes the adaptive nature of the Item. Items are classified as either Adaptive or Non-adaptive. The value for this characteristic MAY change how outcome variables are handled.

4.1.8 "time-dependent" Characteristic Description

The description of the "time-dependent" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.8

Table 4.1.8 Description of the "time-dependent" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name time-dependent
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Denotes if the Item must be answered within some defined time limit.

4.1.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.9

Table 4.1.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

4.1.10 "qti-context-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.10.

Table 4.1.10 Description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-context-declaration
Data Type ContextDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This allows globally scoped varables to be defined. These variable can be used within template processing, response processing and outcomes processing. An implementation MUST support the global variable "QTI_CONTEXT" with record cardinality and this record MUST have predefined fields 'candidateIdentifier', 'testIdentifier' and 'environmentIdentifier'. The built-in QTI_CONTEXT variable must be fully resolved prior to any further processing.

4.1.11 "qti-response-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.11.

Table 4.1.11 Description of the "qti-response-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-declaration
Data Type ResponseDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the set of response variable declarations that are associated with the Item. Response variables are only relevant within the context of the parent Item (Subsection 2.11.2 explains how this context is achieved if this variable is referenced external to the Item).

4.1.12 "qti-outcome-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.12.

Table 4.1.12 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-declaration
Data Type OutcomeDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the set of outcome variable declarations that are associated with the Item. Outcome variables are only relevant within the parent Item and so every declared variable must be referenced in the corresponding outcomes processing.

4.1.13 "qti-template-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.13.

Table 4.1.13 Description of the "qti-template-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-declaration
Data Type TemplateDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the set of template variable declarations that are associated with the Item. Template variables are only relevant within the parent Item and so every declared variable must be referenced in the corresponding template processing.

4.1.14 "qti-template-processing" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.14.

Table 4.1.14 Description of the "qti-template-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-processing
Data Type TemplateProcessing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The template processing rules that are used for this Item. These rules are embedded within the ItemBody.

4.1.15 "qti-assessment-stimulus-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-stimulus-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.15.

Table 4.1.15 Description of the "qti-assessment-stimulus-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-stimulus-ref
Data Type AssessmentStimulusRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of identifier references to the stimulus content that should be associated with the Item. Each identifier must resolve to some AssessmentStimulus object that has been associated with the Item.

4.1.16 "qti-companion-materials-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-companion-materials-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.16.

Table 4.1.16 Description of the "qti-companion-materials-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-companion-materials-info
Data Type CompanionMaterialsInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This identifies the set of companion materials that should be used when answering the questions presented during the assessment. A number of different types of materials can be required in various combinations.

4.1.17 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.17.

Table 4.1.17 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of external style sheets that are associated with the Item. The order of definition is significant.

4.1.18 "qti-item-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-item-body" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.18.

Table 4.1.18 Description of the "qti-item-body" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-item-body
Data Type ItemBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The item body for the Item. The qti-item-body contains the text, graphics, media objects and interactions that describe the item's content and information about how it is structured.

4.1.19 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.19.

Table 4.1.19 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the alternative accessibility content that is defined to enable the range of supported accessibility options to reconfigure the assessment content. This content augments the original content that is defined for the associated QTI feature.

4.1.20 "qti-response-processing" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.20.

Table 4.1.20 Description of the "qti-response-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-processing
Data Type ResponseProcessing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The response processing rules that are used for this Item. These rules may either be embedded within the qti-item-body or a reference to some external response processing template may be supplied. If both embedded rules and a template reference are supplied then the internal rules take precedence.

4.1.21 "qti-modal-feedback" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-modal-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class is given in Table 4.1.21.

Table 4.1.21 Description of the "qti-modal-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentItem" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-modal-feedback
Data Type ModalFeedback
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The Modal feedback that is to be shown to the candidate directly following response processing.

4.2 AssessmentSection Root Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentSection" root class is shown in Figure 4.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.2.

UML diagram of the AssessmentSection class.

Figure 4.2 - AssessmentSection class definitions.

Table 4.2 Description of the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentSection
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An assessment section groups together individual item references and/or sub-sections. A section can be composed of any hierarchy/combination of items and sections. A section can only reference an item using a qti-assessment-item-ref object but it may contain or reference other sections. The grouping of the sections/items depends upon the nature of the parent section i.e. each section can be used for different grouping criteria e.g. organizational, pedagogic, etc.

4.2.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.1

Table 4.2.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier for the Section. The identifier of the section or item reference must be unique within the test and must not be the identifier of any testPart. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

4.2.2 "required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.2

Table 4.2.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If a child element is required it must appear (at least once) in the selection. It is an error if a section contains a selection rule that selects fewer child elements than the number of required elements it contains.

4.2.3 "fixed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.3

Table 4.2.3 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fixed
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If a child element is fixed it must never be shuffled. When used in combination with a selection rule fixed elements do not have their position fixed until after selection has taken place. For example, selecting 3 elements from {A,B,C,D} without replacement might result in the selection {A,B,C}. If the section is subject to shuffling but B is fixed then permutations such as {A,C,B} are not allowed whereas permutations like {C,B,A} are.

4.2.4 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.4

Table 4.2.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The title of the section is intended to enable the section to be selected in situations where the contents of the section are not available, for example when a candidate is browsing a test. Therefore, delivery engines may reveal the title to candidates at any time during the test but are not required to do so.

4.2.5 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.5

Table 4.2.5 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, this has a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

4.2.6 "visible" Characteristic Description

The description of the "visible" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.6

Table 4.2.6 Description of the "visible" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name visible
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description A visible section is one that is identifiable by the candidate. For example, delivery engines might provide a hierarchical view of the test to aid navigation. In such a view, a visible section would be a visible node in the hierarchy. Conversely, an invisible section is one that is not visible to the candidate - the child elements of an invisible section appear to the candidate as if they were part of the parent section (or testPart). The visibility of a section does not affect the visibility of its child elements. The visibility of each section is determined solely by the value of its own visible attribute.

4.2.7 "keep-together" Characteristic Description

The description of the "keep-together" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.7

Table 4.2.7 Description of the "keep-together" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name keep-together
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An invisible section with a parent that is subject to shuffling can specify whether or not its children, which will appear to the candidate as if they were part of the parent, are shuffled as a block or mixed up with the other children of the parent section.

4.2.8 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.8

Table 4.2.8 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

4.2.9 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.9.

Table 4.2.9 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-pre-condition
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of conditions evaluated during the test, that determine if the item or section is to be skipped (in nonlinear mode, pre-conditions are ignored). The order of the conditions is significant.

4.2.10 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.10.

Table 4.2.10 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-branch-rule
Data Type BranchRule
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of rules, evaluated during the test, for setting an alternative target as the next item or section (in nonlinear mode, branch rules are ignored).

4.2.11 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.11.

Table 4.2.11 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-item-session-control
Data Type ItemSessionControl
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Parameters used to control the allowable states of each item session (may be overridden at sub-section or item level).

4.2.12 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.12.

Table 4.2.12 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-time-limits
Data Type TimeLimits
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Optionally controls the amount of time a candidate is allowed for this section.

4.2.13 "adaptive" Attribute Description

The description of the "adaptive" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.13.

Table 4.2.13 Description of the "adaptive" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name adaptive
Data Type Adaptive
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the adaptive features of a Section to be defined. The adaptive features are based upon: 1) the use of a set of predefined algorithms to control the selection and ordering of the child sections and/or items; 2) the use of a separate sequencing engine based upon the IMS Computer Adaptive Testing (CAT) specification [CAT, 19].

4.2.14 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.14.

Table 4.2.14 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rubric-block
Data Type TestRubricBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Section rubric is presented to the candidate with each item contained (directly or indirectly) by the section. As sections are nestable the rubric presented for each item is the concatenation of the rubric blocks from the top-most section down to the item's immediately enclosing section.

4.2.15 "sectionPart" Attribute Description

The description of the "sectionPart" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class is given in Table 4.2.15.

Table 4.2.15 Description of the "sectionPart" attribute for the "AssessmentSection" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sectionPart
Data Type SectionPart
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the definition of the set of assessment-item-refs, assessment-section-refs and assessment sections to be included as children of the parent assessment section. Sections group together individual item references and/or sub-sections.

4.3 AssessmentStimulus Root Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is shown in Figure 4.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.3.

UML diagram of the AssessmentStimulus class.

Figure 4.3 - AssessmentStimulus class definitions.

Table 4.3 Description of the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentStimulus
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An assessment stimulus object is the used to enable content to be shared by several Assessment Items. The key feature is that this shared stimulus content must be supplied in the same context for each of the Assessment Items that make use of it. The assessment stimulus approach provides a mechanism to allow the stimulus content to be managed independently.

4.3.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.1

Table 4.3.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier for the Stimulus. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

4.3.2 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.2

Table 4.3.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The title of the stimulus is intended to enable the stimulus to be selected in situations where the contents are not available, for example when an author is browsing a repository.

4.3.3 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.3

Table 4.3.3 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human readable label that can be used to describe the Stimulus.

4.3.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.4

Table 4.3.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default language for the Stimulus. Natural language identifiers as defined by [BCP 47].

4.3.5 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.5

Table 4.3.5 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-name
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool name characteristic allows the tool creating the stimulus to identify itself. Other processing systems may use this information to interpret the content of application specific data, such as labels on the elements of the stimulus's stimulus body.

4.3.6 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.6

Table 4.3.6 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-version
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool version characteristic allows the tool creating the item to identify its version. This value must only be interpreted in the context of the tool-name.

4.3.7 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.7

Table 4.3.7 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulus" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

4.3.8 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.8.

Table 4.3.8 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of external style sheets that are associated with the Stimulus. The order of definition is significant.

4.3.9 "qti-stimulus-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stimulus-body" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.9.

Table 4.3.9 Description of the "qti-stimulus-body" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stimulus-body
Data Type StimulusBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The stimulus body for the Stimulus. The stimulus body contains the text, graphics, media objects and interactions that describe the simulus's content and information about how it is structured.

4.3.10 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class is given in Table 4.3.10.

Table 4.3.10 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "AssessmentStimulus" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility information that is to be associated with the content in the stimulus body.

4.4 AssessmentTest Root Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentTest" root class is shown in Figure 4.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.4.

UML diagram of the AssessmentTest class.

Figure 4.4 - AssessmentTest class definitions.

Table 4.4 Description of the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentTest
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An assessment test is a group of assessmentItems with an associated set of rules that determine which of the items the candidate sees, in what order, and in what way the candidate interacts with them. The rules describe the valid paths through the test, when responses are submitted for response processing and when (if at all) feedback is to be given. Assessment tests are composed of one or more test parts.

4.4.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.1

Table 4.4.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier for the Test. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively. When the test resource has metadata supplied in the QTI content package, the unique identifier supplied in that metadata MUST be the same as for the 'qti-assessment-test' instance (see QTI Metadata [QTI-MD-BIND-30] for more information).

4.4.2 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.2

Table 4.4.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The title of an assessment test is intended to enable the test to be selected outside of any test session. Therefore, delivery engines may reveal the title to candidates at any time, but are not required to do so. If the 'title' attribute in IEEE LOM is used it must match the value of this attribute.

4.4.3 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.3

Table 4.4.3 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, this has a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

4.4.4 "tool-name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.4

Table 4.4.4 Description of the "tool-name" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-name
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool name characteristic allows the tool creating the test to identify itself. Other processing systems may use this information to interpret the content of application specific data, such as labels on the elements of the test rubric.

4.4.5 "tool-version" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.5

Table 4.4.5 Description of the "tool-version" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tool-version
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The tool version characteristic allows the tool creating the test to identify its version. This value must only be interpreted in the context of the tool name.

4.4.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.6

Table 4.4.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentTest" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

4.4.7 "qti-context-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.7.

Table 4.4.7 Description of the "qti-context-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-context-declaration
Data Type ContextDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This allows globally scoped varables to be defined. These variable can be used within template processing, response processing and outcomes processing. An implementation MUST support the global variable "QTI_CONTEXT" with record cardinality and this reciord MUST have predefined fields 'candidateIdentifier', 'testIdentifier' and 'environmentIdentifier'. The built-in QTI_CONTEXT variable must be fully resolved prior to any further processing.

4.4.8 "qti-outcome-declaration" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.8.

Table 4.4.8 Description of the "qti-outcome-declaration" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-declaration
Data Type OutcomeDeclaration
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Each test has an associated set of outcomes. The values of these outcomes are set by the test's outcome processing rules.

4.4.9 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.9.

Table 4.4.9 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-time-limits
Data Type TimeLimits
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Optionally controls the amount of time a candidate is allowed for the entire test.

4.4.10 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.10.

Table 4.4.10 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Used to associate an external stylesheet with an assessment test.

4.4.11 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.11.

Table 4.4.11 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rubric-block
Data Type TestRubricBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Test rubric is presented to the candidate at the start of each test. This information is applicable to all of the test-parts. Rubric block content is conditional, and intended to be presented only to the specific actors referenced in the "view" attribute of the qti-rubric-block node. You must include at least one of the following actors in the view attribute: author, candidate, proctor, scorer, testConstructor, tutor. Note that the use of candidate as the actor is meant to indicate the candidate is presented this content at runtime, and that it is also often used for the other actors to know what content is presented to the candidate, so it is commonly presented to the other actors as well.

4.4.12 "qti-test-part" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-test-part" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.12.

Table 4.4.12 Description of the "qti-test-part" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-test-part
Data Type TestPart
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description Each test is divided into one or more parts which may in turn be divided into sections, sub-sections and so on. A test part represents a major division of the test and is used to control the basic mode parameters that apply to all sections and sub-sections within that part.

4.4.13 "qti-outcome-processing" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.13.

Table 4.4.13 Description of the "qti-outcome-processing" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-processing
Data Type OutcomeProcessing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The set of rules used for calculating the values of the test outcomes.

4.4.14 "qti-test-feedback" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class is given in Table 4.4.14.

Table 4.4.14 Description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "AssessmentTest" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-test-feedback
Data Type TestFeedback
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Contains the test-level feedback controlled by the test outcomes.

4.5 OutcomeDeclaration Root Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is shown in Figure 4.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.5.

UML diagram of the OutcomeDeclaration class.

Figure 4.5 - OutcomeDeclaration class definitions.

Table 4.5 Description of the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeDeclaration
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Outcome variables are declared by outcome declarations. Their value is set either from a default given in the declaration itself or by a responseRule during responseProcessing. Items that declare a numeric outcome variable representing the candidate's overall performance on the item should use the outcome name 'SCORE' for the variable. SCORE needs to be a float. Items that declare a maximum score (in multiple response choice interactions, for example) should do so by declaring the 'MAXSCORE' variable. MAXSCORE needs to be a float. Items or tests that want to make the fact that the candidate scored above a predefined threshold available as a variable should use the 'PASSED' variable. PASSED needs to be a boolean. At runtime, outcome variables are instantiated as part of an item session. Their values may be initialized with a default value and/or set during responseProcessing. If no default value is given in the declaration then the outcome variable is initialized to NULL unless the outcome is of a numeric type (integer or float) in which case it is initialized to 0. Declared outcomes with numeric types should indicate their range of possible values using normalMaximum and normalMinimum, especially if this range differs from [0,1].

4.5.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.1

Table 4.5.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifiers of the built-in session variables are reserved. They are completionStatus, numAttempts and duration. All item variables declared in an item share the same namespace. Different items have different namespaces. When an outcome variable definition is defined as its own resource, this declaration MUST be used for mapping to the associated academic standards or competency definitions only.

4.5.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.2

Table 4.5.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cardinality
Data Type CardinalityEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { multiple | ordered | record | single }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each variable is either single valued or multi-valued. Multi-valued variables are referred to as containers and come in ordered, unordered and record types. See the cardinality enumerated vocabulary for more information.

4.5.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.3

Table 4.5.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The value space from which the variable's value can be drawn (or in the case of containers, from which the individual values are drawn) is identified with a base-type. The base-type selects one of a small set of predefined types that are considered to have atomic values within the runtime data model. Variables with record cardinality have no base-type.

4.5.4 "view" Characteristic Description

The description of the "view" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.4

Table 4.5.4 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name view
Data Type ViewEnum
Value Space A list from an enumerated value set of: { author | candidate | proctor | scorer | testConstructor | tutor }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The intended audience for an outcome variable can be set with the view attribute. If no view is specified the outcome is treated as relevant to all views. Complex items, such as adaptive items or complex templates, may declare outcomes that are of no interest to the candidate at all, but are merely used to hold intermediate values or other information useful during the item or test session. Such variables should be declared with a view of author (for item outcomes) or testConstructor (for test outcomes). Systems may exclude outcomes from result reports on the basis of their declared view if appropriate. Where more than one class of user should be able to view an outcome variable the view attribute should contain a comma delimited list.

4.5.5 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.5

Table 4.5.5 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name interpretation
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human interpretation of the variable's value.

4.5.6 "long-interpretation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "long-interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.6

Table 4.5.6 Description of the "long-interpretation" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name long-interpretation
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional link to an extended interpretation of the outcome variable's value.

4.5.7 "normal-maximum" Characteristic Description

The description of the "normal-maximum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.7

Table 4.5.7 Description of the "normal-maximum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name normal-maximum
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The normalMaximum characteristic optionally defines the maximum magnitude of numeric outcome variables, it must be a positive value. If given, the outcome's value can be divided by normalMaximum and then truncated (if necessary) to obtain a normalized score in the range [-1.0,1.0]. normalMaximum has no affect on responseProcessing or the values that the outcome variable itself can take.

4.5.8 "normal-minimum" Characteristic Description

The description of the "normal-minimum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.8

Table 4.5.8 Description of the "normal-minimum" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name normal-minimum
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The normalMinimum characteristic optionally defines the minimum value of numeric outcome variables, it may be negative.

4.5.9 "mastery-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mastery-value" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.9

Table 4.5.9 Description of the "mastery-value" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mastery-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The masteryValue characteristic optionally defines a value for numeric outcome variables above which the aspect being measured is considered to have been mastered by the candidate.

4.5.10 "external-scored" Characteristic Description

The description of the "external-scored" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.10

Table 4.5.10 Description of the "external-scored" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name external-scored
Data Type ExternalScoredEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { externalMachine | human }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This identifies whether or not the value for this outcome is produced by human or by machine scoring.

4.5.11 "variable-identifier-ref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "variable-identifier-ref" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.11

Table 4.5.11 Description of the "variable-identifier-ref" characteristic for the "OutcomeDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name variable-identifier-ref
Data Type UniqueIdentifierRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the identifier for an external variable that will be used to provide the external scoring value.

4.5.12 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.12.

Table 4.5.12 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default-value
Data Type DefaultValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default outcome value to be used when no matching table entry is found (supplied as either a 'qti-match-table' or 'qti-interpolation-table'). If omitted, the NULL value is used.

4.5.13 "lookupTable" Attribute Description

The description of the "lookupTable" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class is given in Table 4.5.13.

Table 4.5.13 Description of the "lookupTable" attribute for the "OutcomeDeclaration" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name lookupTable
Data Type LookupTable
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An abstract attribute to create a lookup table from a numeric source value to a single outcome value in the declared value set. A lookup table works in the reverse sense to the similar mapping as it defines how a source numeric value is transformed into the outcome value, whereas a (response) mapping defines how the response value is mapped onto a target numeric value.

4.6 ResponseProcessing Root Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseProcessing" root class is shown in Figure 4.6 and the accompanying definition in Table 4.6.

UML diagram of the ResponseProcessing class.

Figure 4.6 - ResponseProcessing class definitions.

Table 4.6 Description of the "ResponseProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseProcessing
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents None (Root Class)
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Response processing is the process by which the Delivery Engine assigns outcomes based on the candidate's responses. The outcomes may be used to provide feedback to the candidate. Feedback is either provided immediately following the end of the candidate's attempt or it is provided at some later time, perhaps as part of a summary report on the item session. The end of an attempt, and therefore response processing, must only take place in direct response to a user action or in response to some expected event, such as the end of a test. An item session that enters the suspended state may have values for the response variables that have yet to be submitted for response processing.

4.6.1 "template" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" root class is given in Table 4.6.1

Table 4.6.1 Description of the "template" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If a template identifier is given it may be used to locate an externally defined responseProcessing template. The rules obtained from the external template may be used instead of the rules defined within the item itself, though if both are given the internal rules are still preferred.

4.6.2 "template-location" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-location" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" root class is given in Table 4.6.2

Table 4.6.2 Description of the "template-location" characteristic for the "ResponseProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-location
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description In practice, the template attribute may well contain a URN or the URI of a template stored on a remote web server, such as the standard response processing templates defined by this specification. When processing an assessmentItem tools working offline will not be able to obtain the template from a URN or remote URI. The template-location attribute provides an alternative URI, typically a relative URI to be resolved relative to the location of the qti-assessment-item itself, that can be used to obtain a copy of the response processing template. If a delivery system is able to determine the correct behaviour from the template identifier alone the template-location should be ignored. For example, a delivery system may have built-in procedures for handling the standard templates defined above.

4.6.3 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessing" root class is given in Table 4.6.3.

Table 4.6.3 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessing" root class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name responseRuleGroup
Data Type ResponseRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that provides the selection of the constructs that can be used to compose a response rule group. This allows arbitrarily complex response processing rules to be constructed for the processing of the responses to the presented item interactions.

toc | top

5. Data Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the data classes used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

5.1 A Class Description

The data model for the "A" class is shown in Figure 5.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.1.

UML diagram of the A class.

Figure 5.1 - A class definitions.

Table 5.1 Description of the "A" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name A
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'a' tag and is used to identifiy a link. If the 'a' tag has an href attribute, then it represents a hyperlink (a hypertext anchor) labeled by its contents. If the a element has no href attribute, then the element represents a placeholder for where a link might otherwise have been placed, if it had been relevant, consisting of just the element's contents.

5.1.1 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "A" class is given in Table 5.1.1.

Table 5.1.1 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "A" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The URL for the hyperlink.

5.1.2 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "A" class is given in Table 5.1.2.

Table 5.1.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "A" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If present, this gives the MIME type of the linked resource. It is purely advisory. The value must be a valid MIME type. User agents must not consider the type attribute authoritative.

5.1.3 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "A" class is given in Table 5.1.3.

Table 5.1.3 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "A" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineGroup
Data Type InlineGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of the inline content (inline content as defined for HTML). Any combination of the inline content is permitted.

5.2 ARIABase Class Description

The data model for the "ARIABase" class is shown in Figure 5.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.2.

UML diagram of the ARIABase class.

Figure 5.2 - ARIABase class definitions.

Table 5.2 Description of the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ARIABase
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a base class for all of the ARIA characteristics for a non-empty instance. It is from this container that all of the other non-empty classes inherit their set of ARIA capabilities. This set of characteristics is taken from the Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) specification [ARIA, 14], [WAI-ARIA, 17] and [WAI-ARIA, 21]. This specification provides an ontology of roles, states, and properties that define accessible user interface elements and can be used to improve the accessibility and interoperability of web content and applications. These semantics are designed to allow an author to properly convey user interface behaviors and structural information to assistive technologies in document-level markup.

5.2.1 "role" Characteristic Description

The description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.1.

Table 5.2.1 Description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name role
Data Type ARIARoleValue
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { article | columnheader | definition | document | group | heading | img | list | listitem | math | note | presentation | region | row | rowgroup | rowheader | separator | toolbar | button | checkbox | gridcell | link | log | option | radio | slider | spinbutton | status | tab | tabpanel | textbox | timer | listbox | radiogroup | tablist | complementary | contentinfo | alert | alertdialog | application | banner | combobox | dialog | form | grid | main | marquee | menu | menubar | menuitem | menuitemcheckbox | menuitemradio | navigation | progressbar | scrollbar | search | tooltip | tree | treegrid | treeitem | searchbox | switch | term | figure | code | time | subscript | superscript | meter | generic | insertion | deletion | strong | emphasis }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the ARIA role. Roles are defined and described by their characteristics. Characteristics define the structural function of a role, such as what a role is, concepts behind it, and what instances the role can or must contain.

5.2.2 "aria-controls" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.2.

Table 5.2.2 Description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-controls
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. This identifies the element (or elements) whose contents or presence are controlled by the current element.

5.2.3 "aria-describedby" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.3.

Table 5.2.3 Description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-describedby
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the element (or elements) that describes the object.

5.2.4 "aria-flowto" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.4.

Table 5.2.4 Description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-flowto
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the next element (or elements) in an alternate reading order of content which, at the user's discretion, allows assistive technology to override the general default of reading in document source order.

5.2.5 "aria-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.5.

Table 5.2.5 Description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines a string value that labels the current element (see related 'aria-labelledby'). The purpose of 'aria-label' is the same as that of 'aria-labelledby'. It provides the user with a recognizable name of the object.

5.2.6 "aria-labelledby" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.6.

Table 5.2.6 Description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-labelledby
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the tag (or tags) that labels the current element (see related 'aria-label' and 'aria-describedby'). The purpose of 'aria-labelledby' is the same as that of 'aria-label'. It provides the user with a recognizable name of the object. The most common accessibility API mapping for a label is the accessible name property. If the label text is visible on screen, authors SHOULD use 'aria-labelledby' and SHOULD NOT use 'aria-label'. Use 'aria-label' only if the interface is such that it is not possible to have a visible label on the screen. As required by the text alternative computation, user agents give precedence to 'aria-labelledby' over 'aria-label' when computing the accessible name property. The 'aria-labelledby' attribute is similar to 'aria-describedby' in that both reference other elements to calculate a text alternative, but a label should be concise, where a description is intended to provide more verbose information.

5.2.7 "aria-level" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.7.

Table 5.2.7 Description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-level
Data Type ARIALevelInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the hierarchical level of an element within a structure. This can be applied inside trees to tree items, to headings inside a document, to nested grids, nested tablists and to other structural items that may appear inside a container or participate in an ownership hierarchy. The value for 'aria-level' is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

5.2.8 "aria-live" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.8.

Table 5.2.8 Description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-live
Data Type ARIALiveValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { off | polite | assertive }
Default = "off".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that an element will be updated, and describes the types of updates the user agents, assistive technologies, and user can expect from the live region. The values of this attribute are expressed in degrees of importance. When regions are specified as polite, assistive technologies will notify users of updates but generally do not interrupt the current task, and updates take low priority. When regions are specified as assertive, assistive technologies will immediately notify the user, and could potentially clear the speech queue of previous updates.

5.2.9 "aria-orientation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.9.

Table 5.2.9 Description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-orientation
Data Type ARIAOrientationValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { vertical | horizontal }
Default = "horizontal".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element and orientation is horizontal or vertical.

5.2.10 "aria-owns" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.10.

Table 5.2.10 Description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-owns
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (see related 'aria-controls'). The value of the 'aria-owns' attribute is a space-separated list of IDREFS that reference one or more elements in the document by ID.

5.2.11 "aria-hidden" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.11.

Table 5.2.11 Description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-hidden
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element is exposed to an accessibility API.

5.2.12 "aria-activedescendant" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.12.

Table 5.2.12 Description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-activedescendant
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the currently active element when DOM focus is on a composite widget, textbox, group, or application. This property provides an alternative method of managing focus for interactive elements that may contain multiple focusable descendants, such as menus, grids, and toolbars.

5.2.13 "aria-atomic" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.13.

Table 5.2.13 Description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-atomic
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether assistive technologies will present all, or only parts of, the changed region based on the change notifications defined by the 'aria-relevant' attribute.

5.2.14 "aria-autocomplete" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.14.

Table 5.2.14 Description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-autocomplete
Data Type ARIAAutoCompleteEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { inline | list | both | none }
Default = "none".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether inputting text could trigger display of one or more predictions of the user's intended value for an input and specifies how predictions would be presented if they are made. The 'aria-autocomplete' property describes the type of interaction model a textbox, searchbox, or combobox employs when dynamically helping users complete text input. It distinguishes between two models: the inline model (aria-autocomplete='inline') that presents a value completion prediction inside the text input and the list model (aria-autocomplete='list') that presents a collection of possible values in a separate element that pops up adjacent to the text input. It is possible for an input to offer both models at the same time (aria-autocomplete='both').

5.2.15 "aria-busy" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.15.

Table 5.2.15 Description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-busy
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates an element is being modified and that assistive technologies MAY want to wait until the modifications are complete before exposing them to the user. The default value of 'aria-busy' is false for all elements. When 'aria-busy' is true for an element, assistive technologies MAY ignore changes to content owned by that element and then process all changes made during the busy period as a single, atomic update when 'aria-busy' becomes false.

5.2.16 "aria-checked" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.16.

Table 5.2.16 Description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-checked
Data Type ARIACheckedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | mixed | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current "checked" state of checkboxes, radio buttons, and other widgets. See related 'aria-pressed' and 'aria-selected'. The 'aria-checked' attribute indicates whether the element is checked (true), unchecked (false), or represents a group of other elements that have a mixture of checked and unchecked values (mixed). Most inputs only support values of true and false, but the mixed value is supported by certain tri-state inputs such as a checkbox or menuitemcheckbox. The mixed value is not supported on radio, menuitemradio, switch or any element that inherits from these in the taxonomy, and user agents MUST treat a mixed value as equivalent to false for those roles.

5.2.17 "aria-disabled" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.17.

Table 5.2.17 Description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-disabled
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. Indicates that the element is perceivable but disabled, so it is not editable or otherwise operable. See related 'aria-hidden' and 'aria-readonly'. For example, irrelevant options in a radio group may be disabled. Disabled elements might not receive focus from the tab order. For some disabled elements, applications might choose not to support navigation to descendants. In addition to setting the 'aria-disabled' attribute, authors SHOULD change the appearance (grayed out, etc.) to indicate that the item has been disabled. The state of being disabled applies to the current element and all focusable descendant elements of the element on which the 'aria-disabled' attribute is applied.

5.2.18 "aria-expanded" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.18.

Table 5.2.18 Description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-expanded
Data Type ARIAExpandedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element, or another grouping element it controls, is currently expanded or collapsed. For example, this indicates whether a portion of a tree is expanded or collapsed. In other instances, this may be applied to page sections to mark expandable and collapsible regions that are flexible for managing content density. Simplifying the user interface by collapsing sections may improve usability for all, including those with cognitive or developmental disabilities. If the element with the 'aria-expanded' attribute controls the expansion of another grouping container that is not 'owned by' the element, the author SHOULD reference the container by using the 'aria-controls' attribute.

5.2.19 "aria-haspopup" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.19.

Table 5.2.19 Description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-haspopup
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the availability and type of interactive popup element, such as menu or dialog, that can be triggered by an element. A popup element usually appears as a block of content that is on top of other content. Authors MUST ensure that the role of the element that serves as the container for the popup content is menu, listbox, tree, grid, or dialog, and that the value of aria-haspopup matches the role of the popup container. For the popup element to be keyboard accessible, authors SHOULD ensure that the element that can trigger the popup is focusable, that there is a keyboard mechanism for opening the popup, and that the popup element manages focus of all its descendants.

5.2.20 "aria-invalid" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.20.

Table 5.2.20 Description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-invalid
Data Type ARIAInvalidEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | grammar | spelling }
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the entered value does not conform to the format expected by the application. See related 'aria-errormessage'. If the value is computed to be invalid or out-of-range, the application author SHOULD set this attribute to true. User agents SHOULD inform the user of the error. Application authors SHOULD provide suggestions for corrections if they are known. When the user attempts to submit data involving a field for which 'aria-required' is true, authors MAY use the 'aria-invalid' attribute to signal there is an error. However, if the user has not attempted to submit the form, authors SHOULD NOT set the 'aria-invalid' attribute on required widgets simply because the user has not yet entered data. For future expansion, the 'aria-invalid' attribute is an enumerated type. Any value not recognized in the list of allowed values MUST be treated by user agents as if the value true had been provided. If the attribute is not present, or its value is false, or its value is an empty string, the default value of false applies.

5.2.21 "aria-multiline" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.21.

Table 5.2.21 Description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-multiline
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether a text box accepts multiple lines of input or only a single line.

5.2.22 "aria-multiselectable" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.22.

Table 5.2.22 Description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-multiselectable
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that the user may select more than one item from the current selectable descendants. Authors SHOULD ensure that selected descendants have the 'aria-selected' attribute set to true, and selectable descendant have the 'aria-selected' attribute set to false. Authors SHOULD NOT use the 'aria-selected' attribute on descendants that are not selectable.

5.2.23 "aria-posinset" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.23.

Table 5.2.23 Description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-posinset
Data Type ARIALevelInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines an element's number or position in the current set of listitems or treeitems. It is not required if all elements in the set are present in the DOM. If all items in a set are present in the document structure, it is not necessary to set this attribute, as the user agent can automatically calculate the set size and position for each item. However, if only a portion of the set is present in the document structure at a given moment, this property is needed to provide an explicit indication of an element's position.

5.2.24 "aria-pressed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.24.

Table 5.2.24 Description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-pressed
Data Type ARIAPressedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | mixed | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current 'pressed' state of toggle buttons. See related 'aria-checked' and 'aria-selected'. Toggle buttons require a full press-and-release cycle to change their value. Activating it once changes the value to true, and activating it another time changes the value back to false. A value of mixed means that the values of more than one item controlled by the button do not all share the same value. If the attribute is not present, the button is not a toggle button. The aria-pressed attribute is similar but not identical to the 'aria-checked' attribute. Operating systems support pressed on buttons and checked on checkboxes.

5.2.25 "aria-readonly" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.25.

Table 5.2.25 Description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-readonly
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that the element is not editable, but is otherwise operable (see related 'aria-disabled'). This means the user can read but not set the value of the widget. Readonly elements are relevant to the user, and application authors SHOULD NOT restrict navigation to the element or its focusable descendants. Other actions such as copying the value of the element are also supported. This is in contrast to disabled elements, to which applications might not allow user navigation to descendants.

5.2.26 "aria-relevant" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.26.

Table 5.2.26 Description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-relevant
Data Type ARIARelevantList
Value Space A list from an enumerated value set of: { additions | removals | text | all | additions text }
Default = "additions text".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates what notifications the user agent will trigger when the accessibility tree within a live region is modified (see related 'aria-atomic'). The attribute is represented as a space delimited list of the following values: additions, removals, text; or a single catch-all value all. This is used to describe semantically meaningful changes, as opposed to merely presentational ones. For example, nodes that are removed from the top of a log are merely removed for purposes of creating room for other entries, and the removal of them does not have meaning. However, in the case of a buddy list, removal of a buddy name indicates that they are no longer online, and this is a meaningful event. In that case 'aria-relevant' will be set to all. When the 'aria-relevant' attribute is not provided, the default value, additions text, indicates that text modifications and node additions are relevant, but that node removals are irrelevant.

5.2.27 "aria-required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.27.

Table 5.2.27 Description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that user input is required on the element before a form may be submitted.

5.2.28 "aria-selected" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.28.

Table 5.2.28 Description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-selected
Data Type ARIASelectedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current 'selected' state of various widgets. See related 'aria-checked' and 'aria-pressed'. This attribute is used with single-selection and multiple-selection widgets. Any explicit assignment of 'aria-selected' takes precedence over the implicit selection based on focus.

5.2.29 "aria-setsize" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.29.

Table 5.2.29 Description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-setsize
Data Type Integer (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the number of items in the current set of listitems or treeitems. Not required if all elements in the set are present in the DOM (see related 'aria-posinset'). This property is marked on the members of a set, not the container element that collects the members of the set. To orient the user by saying an element is "item X out of Y," the assistive technologies would use X equal to the aria-posinset attribute and Y equal to the 'aria-setsize' attribute. If all items in a set are present in the document structure, it is not necessary to set this property, as the user agent can automatically calculate the set size and position for each item. However, if only a portion of the set is present in the document structure at a given moment (in order to reduce document size), this property is needed to provide an explicit indication of set size. Authors MUST set the value of 'aria-setsize' to an integer equal to the number of items in the set. If the total number of items is unknown, authors SHOULD set the value of 'aria-setsize' to -1.

5.2.30 "aria-sort" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.30.

Table 5.2.30 Description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-sort
Data Type ARIASortEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ascending | descending | none | other }
Default = "none".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates if items in a table or grid are sorted in ascending or descending order. Authors SHOULD only apply this property to table headers or grid headers. If the property is not provided, there is no defined sort order. For each table or grid, authors SHOULD apply 'aria-sort' to only one header at a time.

5.2.31 "aria-valuemax" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.31.

Table 5.2.31 Description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuemax
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the maximum allowed value for a range widget. Authors MUST ensure the value of 'aria-valuemax' is greater than or equal to the value of 'aria-valuemin'. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for 'aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'.

5.2.32 "aria-valuemin" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.32.

Table 5.2.32 Description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuemin
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the minimum allowed value for a range widget. Authors MUST ensure the value of 'aria-valuemin' is less than or equal to the value of 'aria-valuemax'. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for 'aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'.

5.2.33 "aria-valuenow" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.33.

Table 5.2.33 Description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuenow
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the current value for a range widget (see related 'aria-valuetext'). This property is used, for example, on a range widget such as a slider or progress bar. If the current value is not known (for example, an indeterminate progress bar), the author SHOULD NOT set the 'aria-valuenow' attribute. If the 'aria-valuenow' attribute is absent, no information is implied about the current value. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for 'aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'. The value of 'aria-valuenow' is a decimal number. If the range is a set of numeric values, then aria-valuenow is one of those values.

5.2.34 "aria-valuetext" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.34.

Table 5.2.34 Description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuetext
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the human readable text alternative of 'aria-valuenow' for a range widget. This property is used, for example, on a range widget such as a slider or progress bar. If the 'aria-valuetext' attribute is set, authors SHOULD also set the 'aria-valuenow' attribute, unless that value is unknown (for example, on an indeterminate progressbar). Authors SHOULD only set the 'aria-valuetext' attribute when the rendered value cannot be meaningfully represented as a number. For example, a slider may have rendered values of small, medium, and large. In this case, the values of 'aria-valuenow' could range from 1 through 3, which indicate the position of each value in the value space, but the 'aria-valuetext' would be one of the strings: small, medium, or large. If the aria-valuetext attribute is absent, the assistive technologies will rely solely on the 'aria-valuenow' attribute for the current value. If 'aria-valuetext' is specified, assistive technologies SHOULD render that value instead of the value of 'aria-valuenow'.

5.2.35 "aria-modal" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.35.

Table 5.2.35 Description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-modal
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates whether an element is modal when displayed. This attribute is used to indicate that the presence of a 'modal' element precludes usage of other content on the page.

5.2.36 "aria-current" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.36.

Table 5.2.36 Description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-current
Data Type ARIACurrentEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { page | step | location | date | time | true | false | undefined }
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates the element that represents the current item within a container or set of related elements. It has an enumerated type. Any value not included in the list of allowed values SHOULD be treated by assistive technologies as if the value true had been provided. If the attribute is not present or its value is an empty string or undefined, the default value of 'false' applies and the 'aria-current' state MUST NOT be exposed by user agents or assistive technologies.

5.2.37 "aria-placeholder" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.37.

Table 5.2.37 Description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-placeholder
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines a short hint (a word or short phrase) intended to aid the user with data entry when the control has no value. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

5.2.38 "aria-colcount" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.38.

Table 5.2.38 Description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colcount
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the total number of columns in a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colindex'.

5.2.39 "aria-rowcount" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.39.

Table 5.2.39 Description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowcount
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the total number of rows in a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowindex'.

5.2.40 "aria-colindex" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.40.

Table 5.2.40 Description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colindex
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines an element's column index or position with respect to the total number of columns within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colcount' and 'aria-colspan'.

5.2.41 "aria-rowindex" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.41.

Table 5.2.41 Description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowindex
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines an element's row index or position with respect to the total number of rows within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowcount' and 'aria-rowspan'.

5.2.42 "aria-colspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.42.

Table 5.2.42 Description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colspan
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the number of columns spanned by a cell or gridcell within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colindex' and 'aria-rowspan'.

5.2.43 "aria-rowspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.43.

Table 5.2.43 Description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowspan
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the number of rows spanned by a cell or gridcell within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowndex' and 'aria-colspan'.

5.2.44 "aria-keyshortcuts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-keyshortcuts" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.44.

Table 5.2.44 Description of the "aria-keyshortcuts" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-keyshortcuts
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates keyboard shortcuts that an author has implemented to activate or give focus to an element. The value of the 'aria-keyshortcuts' attribute is a space-delimited list of keyboard shortcuts that can be pressed to activate a command or textbox widget. The keys defined in the shortcuts represent the physical keys pressed and not the actual characters generated. Each keyboard shortcut consists of one or more tokens delimited by the plus sign ('+') representing zero or more modifier keys and exactly one non-modifier key that must be pressed simultaneously to activate the given shortcut.

5.2.45 "aria-roledescription" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.45.

Table 5.2.45 Description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-roledescription
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines a human-readable, author-localized description for the role of an element.

5.2.46 "aria-errormessage" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.46.

Table 5.2.46 Description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-errormessage
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Identifies the element that provides an error message for the object. See related 'aria-invalid' and 'aria-describedby'. This attribute references another element that contains custom error message text.

5.2.47 "aria-details" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class is given in Table 5.2.47.

Table 5.2.47 Description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-details
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Identifies the element that provides a detailed, extended description for the object. See related 'aria-describedby'. The 'aria-details' attribute references a single element that provides more detailed information than would normally be provided by 'aria-describedby'.

5.3 AdaptiveSelection Class Description

The data model for the "AdaptiveSelection" class is shown in Figure 5.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.3.

UML diagram of the AdaptiveSelection class.

Figure 5.3 - AdaptiveSelection class definitions.

Table 5.3 Description of the "AdaptiveSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AdaptiveSelection
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the set of data that is to be supplied to a Computer Adaptive Testing (CAT) engine. This information is required when a CAT engine is to be used to determine which items are to be supplied next. The details for this data is defined in the IMS Computer Adaptive Testing 1.0 specification [CAT, 19] which defines the API to the CAT engine. When using an extenal CAT engine there are implementation issues that MUST be addressed to ensure consistent behavior with other QTI features such as Selection, Ordering, Branching, etc.

5.3.1 "qti-adaptive-engine-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-adaptive-engine-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class is given in Table 5.3.1.

Table 5.3.1 Description of the "qti-adaptive-engine-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-adaptive-engine-ref
Data Type AdaptiveHref
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the URI for the file that contains the data about the target adaptive engine. This data format and contents are proprietary to the adaptive engine.

5.3.2 "qti-adaptive-settings-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-adaptive-settings-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class is given in Table 5.3.2.

Table 5.3.2 Description of the "qti-adaptive-settings-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-adaptive-settings-ref
Data Type AdaptiveHref
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the URI for the file that contains the settings data for the adaptive engine. This data format and contents are proprietary to the adaptive engine.

5.3.3 "qti-usagedata-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-usagedata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class is given in Table 5.3.3.

Table 5.3.3 Description of the "qti-usagedata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-usagedata-ref
Data Type AdaptiveHref
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the URI for the file that contains the Usage Data information for the Item. This data conforms to the IMS QTI Usage Data 1.0 specification [QTI-UD-30].

5.3.4 "qti-metadata-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-metadata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class is given in Table 5.3.4.

Table 5.3.4 Description of the "qti-metadata-ref" attribute for the "AdaptiveSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-metadata-ref
Data Type AdaptiveHref
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the URI for the file that contains the QTI Metadata information for the Item. This data conforms to the IMS QTI Metadata 1.0 specification [QTI-MD-BIND-30].

5.4 AnyN Class Description

The data model for the "AnyN" class is shown in Figure 5.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.4.

UML diagram of the AnyN class.

Figure 5.4 - AnyN class definitions.

Table 5.4 Description of the "AnyN" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AnyN
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is one of the expression functions. The 'anyN' operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is true if at least min of the sub-expressions are true and at most max of the sub-expressions are true. If more than n - min sub-expressions are false (where n is the total number of sub-expressions) or more than max sub-expressions are true then the result is false. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL then it is possible that neither of these conditions is satisfied, in which case the operator results in NULL. For example, if min is 3 and max is 4 and the sub-expressions have values {true,true,false,NULL} then the operator results in NULL whereas {true,false,false,NULL} results in false and {true,true,true,NULL} results in true. The result NULL indicates that the correct value for the operator cannot be determined.

5.4.1 "min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min" characteristic for the "AnyN" class is given in Table 5.4.1.

Table 5.4.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "AnyN" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The minimum number of sub-expressions that must be true.

5.4.2 "max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max" characteristic for the "AnyN" class is given in Table 5.4.2.

Table 5.4.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "AnyN" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The maximum number of sub-expressions that must be true.

5.4.3 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "AnyN" class is given in Table 5.4.3.

Table 5.4.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "AnyN" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that allows any combination of QTI expressions to be inserted. There must be a least one child expression.

5.5 AreaMapping Class Description

The data model for the "AreaMapping" class is shown in Figure 5.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.5.

UML diagram of the AreaMapping class.

Figure 5.5 - AreaMapping class definitions.

Table 5.5 Description of the "AreaMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AreaMapping
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A special class used to create a mapping from a source set of point values to a target set of float values. When mapping containers, the result is the sum of the mapped values from the target set. See mapResponsePoint for details. The attributes have the same meaning as the similarly named attributes on mapping.

5.5.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class is given in Table 5.5.1.

Table 5.5.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lower-bound
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The lower bound on the value.

5.5.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class is given in Table 5.5.2.

Table 5.5.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name upper-bound
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The upper bound on the value.

5.5.3 "default-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class is given in Table 5.5.3.

Table 5.5.3 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default value.

5.5.4 "qti-area-map-entry" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-area-map-entry" attribute for the "AreaMapping" class is given in Table 5.5.4.

Table 5.5.4 Description of the "qti-area-map-entry" attribute for the "AreaMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-area-map-entry
Data Type AreaMapEntry
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The map is defined by a set of areaMapEntries, each of which maps an area of the coordinate space onto a single float. When mapping points each area is tested in turn, with those listed first taking priority in the case where areas overlap and a point falls in the intersection

5.6 AssessmentItemRef Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is shown in Figure 5.6 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.6.

UML diagram of the AssessmentItemRef class.

Figure 5.6 - AssessmentItemRef class definitions.

Table 5.6 Description of the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentItemRef
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Items are incorporated into the test by reference and not by direct aggregation. Note that the identifier of the reference need not have any meaning outside the test. In particular it is not required to be unique in the context of any catalog, or be represented in the item's metadata.

5.6.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.1.

Table 5.6.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the item being referenced. Note that an AssessmentItem may be referenced more than once in an AssessmentTest.

5.6.2 "required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.2.

Table 5.6.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If a child element is required it must appear (at least once) in the selection. It is in error if a section contains a selection rule that selects fewer child elements than the number of required elements it contains.

5.6.3 "fixed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.3.

Table 5.6.3 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fixed
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If a child element is fixed it must never be shuffled. When used in combination with a selection rule fixed elements do not have their position fixed until after selection has taken place. For example, selecting 3 elements from {A,B,C,D} without replacement might result in the selection {A,B,C}. If the section is subject to shuffling but B is fixed then permutations such as {A,C,B} are not allowed whereas permutations like {C,B,A} are permitted.

5.6.4 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.4.

Table 5.6.4 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, this has a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.6.5 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.5.

Table 5.6.5 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The URI used to refer to the item's file (e.g., elsewhere in the same content package). There is no requirement that this be unique. A test may refer to the same item multiple times within a test. Note however that each reference must have a unique identifier.

5.6.6 "category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "category" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.6.

Table 5.6.6 Description of the "category" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Items can optionally be assigned to one or more categories. Categories are used to allow custom sets of item outcomes to be aggregated during outcomes processing.

5.6.7 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.7.

Table 5.6.7 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.6.8 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.8.

Table 5.6.8 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-pre-condition
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of conditions evaluated during the test, that determine if the item or section is to be skipped (in nonlinear mode, pre-conditions are ignored).

5.6.9 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.9.

Table 5.6.9 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-branch-rule
Data Type BranchRule
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of rules, evaluated during the test, for setting an alternative target as the next item or section (in nonlinear mode, branch rules are ignored).

5.6.10 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.10.

Table 5.6.10 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-item-session-control
Data Type ItemSessionControl
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Parameters used to control the allowable states of each item session.

5.6.11 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.11.

Table 5.6.11 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-time-limits
Data Type TimeLimits
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Optionally controls the amount of time a candidate is allowed for this item.

5.6.12 "qti-variable-mapping" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-variable-mapping" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.12.

Table 5.6.12 Description of the "qti-variable-mapping" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-variable-mapping
Data Type VariableMapping
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Variable mappings are used to alter the name of an item outcome for the purposes of this test.

5.6.13 "qti-weight" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-weight" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.13.

Table 5.6.13 Description of the "qti-weight" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-weight
Data Type Weight
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Weights allow custom values to be defined for scaling an item's outcomes.

5.6.14 "qti-template-default" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-default" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class is given in Table 5.6.14.

Table 5.6.14 Description of the "qti-template-default" attribute for the "AssessmentItemRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-default
Data Type TemplateDefault
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description A template default is used to alter the default value of a template variable declared by the item based on an expression evaluated at test-level. See templateDefault for more information.

5.7 AssociableHotspot Class Description

The data model for the "AssociableHotspot" class is shown in Figure 5.7 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.7.

UML diagram of the AssociableHotspot class.

Figure 5.7 - AssociableHotspot class definitions.

Table 5.7 Description of the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssociableHotspot
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is used to define the hotspots that are associated with the features in the 'graphicAssociateInteraction' and 'graphicGapMatchInteraction' interactions.

5.7.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.1.

Table 5.7.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the hotspot. This identifier must not be used by any other hotspot or item variable.

5.7.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.2.

Table 5.7.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the templateElement is controlled by the value of the variable.

5.7.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.3.

Table 5.7.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the hotspot is controlled. If set to show then the hotspot is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the hotspot. If set to hide then the hotspot is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the hotspot's identifier.

5.7.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.4.

Table 5.7.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-group
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to identify the set of entities that can be matched with this hotspot. This is used to enable the author to constrain the set of objects that can be matched with the target hotspot. This is a list of the identifiers for the objects that can be matched with this hotspot.

5.7.5 "shape" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.5.

Table 5.7.5 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shape
Data Type ShapeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { circle | default | ellipse | poly | rect }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The shape of the hotspot.

5.7.6 "coords" Characteristic Description

The description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.6.

Table 5.7.6 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name coords
Data Type Coords
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The size and position of the hotspot, interpreted in conjunction with the shape.

5.7.7 "hotspot-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.7.

Table 5.7.7 Description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name hotspot-label
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative text for this (hot) area of the image, if specified it must be treated in the same way as alternative text for img. For hidden hotspots this label is ignored.

5.7.8 "match-max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.8.

Table 5.7.8 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-max
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The maximum number of choices this choice may be associated with. If match-max is 0 there is no restriction.

5.7.9 "match-min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class is given in Table 5.7.9.

Table 5.7.9 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "AssociableHotspot" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-min
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices this choice must be associated with to form a valid response. If match-min is 0 then the candidate is not required to associate this choice with any others at all. match-min must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by match-max.

5.8 AssociateInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "AssociateInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.8 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.8.

UML diagram of the AssociateInteraction class.

Figure 5.8 - AssociateInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.8 Description of the "AssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssociateInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description An Associate Interaction is a blockInteraction that presents candidates with a number of choices and allows them to create associations between them. The associateInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type pair and either single or multiple cardinality.

5.8.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.8.1.

Table 5.8.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is 'true' then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.8.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.8.2.

Table 5.8.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of associations that the candidate is allowed to make. If max-associations is 0 then there is no restriction. If max-associations is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.8.3 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.8.3.

Table 5.8.3 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "AssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of associations that the candidate is required to make to form a valid response. If min-associations is 0 then the candidate is not required to make any associations. min-associations must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-associations.

5.8.4 "qti-simple-associable-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "AssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.8.4.

Table 5.8.4 Description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "AssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-simple-associable-choice
Data Type SimpleAssociableChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description An ordered set of choices.

5.9 Audio Class Description

The data model for the "Audio" class is shown in Figure 5.9 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.9.

UML diagram of the Audio class.

Figure 5.9 - Audio class definitions.

Table 5.9 Description of the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Audio
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The 'audio' tag is an HTML5 feature. An audio tag represents a sound or audio stream. Content may be provided inside the audio tag. User agents should not show this content to the user; it is intended for older Web browsers which do not support audio, so that legacy audio plugins can be tried, or to show text to the users of these older browsers informing them of how to access the audio contents.

5.9.1 "src" Characteristic Description

The description of the "src" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.1.

Table 5.9.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name src
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'src' content characteristic on media tags gives the address of the media resource (video, audio) to show. The attribute, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

5.9.2 "crossorigin" Characteristic Description

The description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.2.

Table 5.9.2 Description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name crossorigin
Data Type CORSSettingsEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { anonymous | use-credentials }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The crossorigin content characteristic on media tags is a CORS settings attribute.

5.9.3 "preload" Characteristic Description

The description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.3.

Table 5.9.3 Description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name preload
Data Type PreLoadValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { none | auto | metadata }
Default = "metadata".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The preload characteristic is an enumerated value. The characteristic can be changed even once the media resource is being buffered or played; the descriptions in the table below are to be interpreted with that in mind.

5.9.4 "autoplay" Characteristic Description

The description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.4.

Table 5.9.4 Description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name autoplay
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'autoplay' characteristic is a boolean. When present, the user agent (as described in the algorithm described herein) will automatically begin playback of the media resource as soon as it can do so without stopping.

5.9.5 "mediagroup" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.5.

Table 5.9.5 Description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mediagroup
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'mediagroup' content characteristic on media elements can be used to link multiple media tags together by implicitly creating a MediaController. The value is text; media tags with the same value are automatically linked by the user agent.

5.9.6 "loop" Characteristic Description

The description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.6.

Table 5.9.6 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name loop
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'loop' characteristic is a boolean that, if specified, indicates that the media tag is to seek back to the start of the media resource upon reaching the end.

5.9.7 "muted" Characteristic Description

The description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.7.

Table 5.9.7 Description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name muted
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'muted' characteristic on media tags is a boolean that controls the default state of the audio output of the media resource, potentially overriding user preferences. When a media tag is created, if it has a muted characteristic specified, the user agent must mute the media tag's audio output, overriding any user preference.

5.9.8 "controls" Characteristic Description

The description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.8.

Table 5.9.8 Description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name controls
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'controls' characteristic is a boolean. If present, it indicates that the author has not provided a scripted controller and would like the user agent to provide its own set of controls.

5.9.9 "source" Attribute Description

The description of the "source" attribute for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.9.

Table 5.9.9 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name source
Data Type Source
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The 'source' tag allows authors to specify multiple alternative media resources for audio tags.

5.9.10 "track" Attribute Description

The description of the "track" attribute for the "Audio" class is given in Table 5.9.10.

Table 5.9.10 Description of the "track" attribute for the "Audio" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name track
Data Type Track
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The track tag allows authors to specify explicit external timed text tracks for the audio tags.

5.10 BDI Class Description

The data model for the "BDI" class is shown in Figure 5.10 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.10.

UML diagram of the BDI class.

Figure 5.10 - BDI class definitions.

Table 5.10 Description of the "BDI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BDI
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The 'bdi' tag is an HTML5 feature. This defines the content for defining bidirectional content. The bdi tag represents a span of text that is to be isolated from its surroundings for the purposes of bidirectional text formatting.

5.10.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "BDI" class is given in Table 5.10.1.

Table 5.10.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "BDI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child. It is used to denote the permitted flow content i.e. the permitted set of HTML children.

5.11 BDO Class Description

The data model for the "BDO" class is shown in Figure 5.11 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.11.

UML diagram of the BDO class.

Figure 5.11 - BDO class definitions.

Table 5.11 Description of the "BDO" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BDO
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables the HTML 'bdo' tag. The 'bdo' tag represents explicit text directionality formatting control for its children. It allows authors to override the Unicode bidirectional algorithm by explicitly specifying a direction override. Authors must specify the dir attribute on this tag, with the value ltr to specify a left-to-right override and with the value rtl to specify a right-to-left override. The auto value must not be specified.

5.11.1 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "BDO" class is given in Table 5.11.1.

Table 5.11.1 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "BDO" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The title for the content. This is used to provide advisory information for the tag.

5.11.2 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "BDO" class is given in Table 5.11.2.

Table 5.11.2 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "BDO" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the insertion of the inline content (as defined in HTML).

5.12 BR Class Description

The data model for the "BR" class is shown in Figure 5.12 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.12.

UML diagram of the BR class.

Figure 5.12 - BR class definitions.

Table 5.12 Description of the "BR" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BR
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'br' tag. The 'br' tag represents a line break.This tag has no children.

5.13 BaseHTML5Flow Class Description

The data model for the "BaseHTML5Flow" class is shown in Figure 5.13 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.13.

UML diagram of the BaseHTML5Flow class.

Figure 5.13 - BaseHTML5Flow class definitions.

Table 5.13 Description of the "BaseHTML5Flow" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseHTML5Flow
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the base class for the HTML5 tags that support a large range of child HTML and QTI interaction tags. This set of child tags are used to create a coherent flow of content.

5.13.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Flow" class is given in Table 5.13.1.

Table 5.13.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Flow" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child. It is used to denote the permitted flow content i.e. the permitted set of HTML and other children.

5.14 BaseHTML5Phrasing Class Description

The data model for the "BaseHTML5Phrasing" class is shown in Figure 5.14 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.14.

UML diagram of the BaseHTML5Phrasing class.

Figure 5.14 - BaseHTML5Phrasing class definitions.

Table 5.14 Description of the "BaseHTML5Phrasing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseHTML5Phrasing
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class is used to enable the complex capabilities of the 'ruby' tag. Ruby annotations are short runs of text presented alongside base text, primarily used in East Asian typography as a guide for pronunciation or to include other annotations.

5.14.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Phrasing" class is given in Table 5.14.1.

Table 5.14.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "BaseHTML5Phrasing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name phrasingContentModel
Data Type PhrasingContentModelHTML5
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This enables the entry of the HTML5 content that is to be used for the Ruby content.

5.15 BasePromptInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.15 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.15.

UML diagram of the BasePromptInteraction class.

Figure 5.15 - BasePromptInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.15 Description of the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BasePromptInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The BasePromptInteraction is the base class for the QTI interactions that support a Prompt. This also consists of a set of children characteristics.

5.15.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.1.

Table 5.15.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag.

5.15.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.2.

Table 5.15.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.15.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.3.

Table 5.15.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.15.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.4.

Table 5.15.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.15.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.5.

Table 5.15.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.15.6 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.6.

Table 5.15.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Base (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional URI used to change the base for resolving relative URI for the scope of this object. Particular care needs to be taken when resolving relative URI included as part of an Item Fragment. See Item and Test Fragments for more information.

5.15.7 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.7.

Table 5.15.7 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name response-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable associated with the interaction.

5.15.8 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.8.

Table 5.15.8 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.15.9 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.9.

Table 5.15.9 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.15.10 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.10.

Table 5.15.10 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.15.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.11.

Table 5.15.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.15.12 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "BasePromptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.15.12.

Table 5.15.12 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "BasePromptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-prompt
Data Type Prompt
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is an optional prompt that can be used to guide the learner. A prompt must not contain any nested interactions. A prompt is NOT the same as the actual question construct.

5.16 BaseSequence Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequence" class is shown in Figure 5.16 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.16.

UML diagram of the BaseSequence class.

Figure 5.16 - BaseSequence class definitions.

Table 5.16 Description of the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequence
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The BaseSequence class provides the base characteristics for some of the HTML tag and QTI interactions.

5.16.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.1.

Table 5.16.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag.

5.16.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.2.

Table 5.16.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.16.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.3.

Table 5.16.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.16.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.4.

Table 5.16.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.16.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.5.

Table 5.16.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.16.6 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.6.

Table 5.16.6 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.16.7 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.7.

Table 5.16.7 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.16.8 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.8.

Table 5.16.8 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.16.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class is given in Table 5.16.9.

Table 5.16.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequence" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.17 BaseSequenceEmpty Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is shown in Figure 5.17 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.17.

UML diagram of the BaseSequenceEmpty class.

Figure 5.17 - BaseSequenceEmpty class definitions.

Table 5.17 Description of the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequenceEmpty
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This class provides the base characteristics for some of the HTML tag and QTI interactions which MUST NOT have any child tags.

5.17.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.1.

Table 5.17.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag.

5.17.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.2.

Table 5.17.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.17.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.3.

Table 5.17.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.17.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.4.

Table 5.17.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.17.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.5.

Table 5.17.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.17.6 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.6.

Table 5.17.6 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.17.7 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.7.

Table 5.17.7 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.17.8 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.8.

Table 5.17.8 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.17.9 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class is given in Table 5.17.9.

Table 5.17.9 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.18 BaseSequenceFull Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is shown in Figure 5.18 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.18.

UML diagram of the BaseSequenceFull class.

Figure 5.18 - BaseSequenceFull class definitions.

Table 5.18 Description of the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequenceFull
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The BaseSequenceFull class provides the base characteristics for some of the QTI interactions that support the full set of base characteristics.

5.18.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.1.

Table 5.18.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag.

5.18.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.2.

Table 5.18.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.18.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.3.

Table 5.18.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.18.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.4.

Table 5.18.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.18.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.5.

Table 5.18.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.18.6 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.6.

Table 5.18.6 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name response-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable associated with the interaction.

5.18.7 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.7.

Table 5.18.7 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Base (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional URI used to change the base for resolving relative URI for the scope of this object. Particular care needs to be taken when resolving relative URI included as part of an Item Fragment. See Item and Test Fragments (Section 2) for more information.

5.18.8 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.8.

Table 5.18.8 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.18.9 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.9.

Table 5.18.9 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.18.10 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.10.

Table 5.18.10 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.18.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class is given in Table 5.18.11.

Table 5.18.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceFull" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.19 BaseSequenceRIdent Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is shown in Figure 5.19 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.19.

UML diagram of the BaseSequenceRIdent class.

Figure 5.19 - BaseSequenceRIdent class definitions.

Table 5.19 Description of the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequenceRIdent
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The BaseSequenceRIdent class provides the base characteristics (as per the BaseSequence plus 'rident') for some of the QTI interactions.

5.19.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.1.

Table 5.19.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag. This must be unique otherwise features such as the APIP accessibilty text cannot be supplied as an alternative.

5.19.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.2.

Table 5.19.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.19.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.3.

Table 5.19.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.19.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.4.

Table 5.19.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.19.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.5.

Table 5.19.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.19.6 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.6.

Table 5.19.6 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name response-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable associated with the interaction.

5.19.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.7.

Table 5.19.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.19.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.8.

Table 5.19.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.19.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.9.

Table 5.19.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.19.10 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class is given in Table 5.19.10.

Table 5.19.10 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceRIdent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.20 BaseSequenceXBase Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is shown in Figure 5.20 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.20.

UML diagram of the BaseSequenceXBase class.

Figure 5.20 - BaseSequenceXBase class definitions.

Table 5.20 Description of the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequenceXBase
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The BaseSequenceXBase class provides the base characteristics (as per the BaseSequence plus 'base') for some of the HTML tags and QTI interactions.

5.20.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.1.

Table 5.20.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag. This must be unique otherwise features such as the APIP accessibilty text cannot be supplied as an alternative.

5.20.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.2.

Table 5.20.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.20.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.3.

Table 5.20.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.20.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.4.

Table 5.20.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.20.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.5.

Table 5.20.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion characteristics must also be provided.

5.20.6 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.6.

Table 5.20.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Base (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional URI used to change the base for resolving relative URI for the scope of this object. Particular care needs to be taken when resolving relative URI included as part of an Item Fragment. See Item and Test Fragments (Section 2) for more information.

5.20.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.7.

Table 5.20.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.20.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.8.

Table 5.20.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.20.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.9.

Table 5.20.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.20.10 "data-ssml" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-ssml" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.10.

Table 5.20.10 Description of the "data-ssml" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-ssml
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the container for the equivalent JSON value that is to be passed to the SSML processor.

5.20.11 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class is given in Table 5.20.11.

Table 5.20.11 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBase" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.21 BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty Class Description

The data model for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is shown in Figure 5.21 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.21.

UML diagram of the BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty class.

Figure 5.21 - BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty class definitions.

Table 5.21 Description of the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is the base class for the HTML features and some QTI interactions that have no children elements i.e. must be empty. This consists of a set of child characteristics.

5.21.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.1.

Table 5.21.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the HTML tag.

5.21.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.2.

Table 5.21.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Every HTML tag may have a class characteristic specified. If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.21.3 "lang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.3.

Table 5.21.3 Description of the "lang" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the preferred approach for identifying the primary language for an element. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the characteristic to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.21.4 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.4.

Table 5.21.4 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This approach is deprecated: instead, the 'lang' characteristic SHOULD be used. This characteristic specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's characteristics that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the attribute to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

5.21.5 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.5.

Table 5.21.5 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion attributes must also be provided.

5.21.6 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.6.

Table 5.21.6 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Base (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional URI used to change the base for resolving relative URI for the scope of this object. Particular care needs to be taken when resolving relative URI included as part of an Item Fragment. See Item and Test Fragments for more information.

5.21.7 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.7.

Table 5.21.7 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the element's text directionality.

5.21.8 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.8.

Table 5.21.8 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.21.9 "data-qti-suppress-tts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.9.

Table 5.21.9 Description of the "data-qti-suppress-tts" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-qti-suppress-tts
Data Type SuppressTTSEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { computer-read-aloud | screen-reader | all }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is used to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. Sub-elements should NOT contradict higher-level elements on whether the content should be read or not read out loud. The use of this characteristic should NOT be interpreted as meaning that the content should be visually hidden from the candidate.

5.21.10 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class is given in Table 5.21.10.

Table 5.21.10 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "BaseSequenceXBaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.22 BlockQuote Class Description

The data model for the "BlockQuote" class is shown in Figure 5.22 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.22.

UML diagram of the BlockQuote class.

Figure 5.22 - BlockQuote class definitions.

Table 5.22 Description of the "BlockQuote" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BlockQuote
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This defines the content of the 'blockquote' HTML tag. The 'blockquote' tag represents content that is quoted from another source, optionally with a citation which must be within a footer or cite element, and optionally with in-line changes such as annotations and abbreviations. Content inside a blockquote other than citations and in-line changes must be quoted from another source, whose address, if it has one, may be cited in the cite attribute. The content of a blockquote may be abbreviated, may have context added or may have annotations. Any such additions or changes to quoted text must be indicated in the text (at the text level). This may mean the use of notational conventions or explicit remarks, such as "emphasis mine".

5.22.1 "cite" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cite" characteristic for the "BlockQuote" class is given in Table 5.22.1.

Table 5.22.1 Description of the "cite" characteristic for the "BlockQuote" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cite
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the 'cite' characteristic is present, it must be a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces. To obtain the corresponding citation link, the value of the attribute must be resolved relative to the element. User agents may allow users to follow such citation links, but they are primarily intended for private use (e.g. by server-side scripts collecting statistics about a site's use of quotations), not for readers.

5.22.2 "flowContent" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "BlockQuote" class is given in Table 5.22.2.

Table 5.22.2 Description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "BlockQuote" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContent
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of HTML block content.

5.23 BranchRule Class Description

The data model for the "BranchRule" class is shown in Figure 5.23 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.23.

UML diagram of the BranchRule class.

Figure 5.23 - BranchRule class definitions.

Table 5.23 Description of the "BranchRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BranchRule
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A branch-rule is a simple expression attached to an assessment-item-ref, assessment-section or test-part that is evaluated after the item, section or part has been presented to the candidate. If the expression evaluates to 'true' the test jumps forward to the item, section or part referred to by the target identifier. In the case of an item or section, the target must refer to an item or section in the same test-part that has not yet been presented. For test-parts, the target must refer to another test-part.

5.23.1 "target" Characteristic Description

The description of the "target" characteristic for the "BranchRule" class is given in Table 5.23.1.

Table 5.23.1 Description of the "target" characteristic for the "BranchRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name target
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The following values are reserved and have special meaning when used as a target identifier: EXIT_SECTION jumps over all the remaining children of the current section to the item (or section) immediately following it; EXIT_TESTPART finishes the current test-part immediately and EXIT_TEST finishes the entire assessment-test immediately.

5.23.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "BranchRule" class is given in Table 5.23.2.

Table 5.23.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "BranchRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of a single QTI expression function.

5.24 Calculator Class Description

The data model for the "Calculator" class is shown in Figure 5.24 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.24.

UML diagram of the Calculator class.

Figure 5.24 - Calculator class definitions.

Table 5.24 Description of the "Calculator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Calculator
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the information about the calculator that is required/permitted for use by the learner undertaking the assessment.

5.24.1 "qti-calculator-type" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-calculator-type" attribute for the "Calculator" class is given in Table 5.24.1.

Table 5.24.1 Description of the "qti-calculator-type" attribute for the "Calculator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-calculator-type
Data Type CalculatorTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { basic | standard | scientific | graphing }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The definition of the set of permitted calculators for use with the assessment. This is from an enumerated vocabulary.

5.24.2 "qti-description" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Calculator" class is given in Table 5.24.2.

Table 5.24.2 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Calculator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-description
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides for a human readable description of the functionality/capability of the calculator that is available to the learner.

5.24.3 "qti-calculator-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-calculator-info" attribute for the "Calculator" class is given in Table 5.24.3.

Table 5.24.3 Description of the "qti-calculator-info" attribute for the "Calculator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-calculator-info
Data Type ItemFileInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This refers to the access to the calculator itself that is permitted/required for use in the assessment. The calculator is available at the location identified by a URI.

5.25 Caption Class Description

The data model for the "Caption" class is shown in Figure 5.25 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.25.

UML diagram of the Caption class.

Figure 5.25 - Caption class definitions.

Table 5.25 Description of the "Caption" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Caption
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Provides the HTML 'caption' tag functionality. The 'caption' tag represents the title of the table that is its parent, if it has a parent and that is a 'table' tag. The caption tag takes part in the table model. When a table tag is the only content in a figure tag other than the figcaption, the caption tag should be omitted in favor of the figcaption. A caption can introduce context for a table, making it significantly easier to understand.

5.25.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "Caption" class is given in Table 5.25.1.

Table 5.25.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "Caption" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the inline content (as defined in HTML) to be included.

5.26 Card Class Description

The data model for the "Card" class is shown in Figure 5.26 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.26.

UML diagram of the Card class.

Figure 5.26 - Card class definitions.

Table 5.26 Description of the "Card" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Card
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A data structure within a catalog which contains dormant HTML content or a resource reference for a specific support/feature. A card may also contain multiple CardEntry containers. For example, you might have multiple CardEntry nodes for different language versions of a particular support.

5.26.1 "support" Characteristic Description

The description of the "support" characteristic for the "Card" class is given in Table 5.26.1.

Table 5.26.1 Description of the "support" characteristic for the "Card" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name support
Data Type SupportEnumExt
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): SupportExtString (Derived-type), SupportEnum (Enumeration)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This attribute names either pre-defined supports or a custom-named support. The named support will indicate for whom the dormant content is intended. Use only one card for any particular named support in a catalog.

5.26.2 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "Card" class is given in Table 5.26.2.

Table 5.26.2 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "Card" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The language for the content to be presented via the HTML.

5.26.3 "cardSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "cardSelection" attribute for the "Card" class is given in Table 5.26.3.

Table 5.26.3 Description of the "cardSelection" attribute for the "Card" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name cardSelection
Data Type CardSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This abstract attribute enables the content to be supplied as either the HTML5 content itself or as a set of file references (these files MUST be contained in the corresponding QTI content package).

5.26.4 "qti-card-entry" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-card-entry" attribute for the "Card" class is given in Table 5.26.4.

Table 5.26.4 Description of the "qti-card-entry" attribute for the "Card" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-card-entry
Data Type CardEntry
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The card entry itself. Each card entry provides a different resource where an attribute (often custom attributes) on the card entry element declares the difference between the resources, and where the attribute value aligns with a specific preference/need from the candidate's PNP (or an assessment program's settings).

5.27 CardEntry Class Description

The data model for the "CardEntry" class is shown in Figure 5.27 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.27.

UML diagram of the CardEntry class.

Figure 5.27 - CardEntry class definitions.

Table 5.27 Description of the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CardEntry
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A content container within a catalog card. Each instance of a CardEntry provides a different resource where an attribute (often custom attributes) on the CardEntry element declares the difference between the resources, and where the attribute value aligns with a specific preference/need from the candidate's PNP (or an assessment program's settings). For example, there could be multiple CardEntry nodes for different language versions for a particular support.

5.27.1 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class is given in Table 5.27.1.

Table 5.27.1 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The language for the content to be presented via the HTML.

5.27.2 "default" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class is given in Table 5.27.2.

Table 5.27.2 Description of the "default" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An attribute that denotes whether the particular card is the default content for the support (listed in the Card attribute). If the CardEntry attribute values do not identify the proper content for a candidate, use the content designated as default. Only one of the CardEntry instances can have a default designation.

5.27.3 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class is given in Table 5.27.3.

Table 5.27.3 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.27.4 "qti-html-content" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardEntry" class is given in Table 5.27.4.

Table 5.27.4 Description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-html-content
Data Type HTMLContent
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The HTML content that is to be used for the alternative content supplied by the card entry

5.27.5 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardEntry" class is given in Table 5.27.5.

Table 5.27.5 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-file-href
Data Type FileHrefCard
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of links to the files that contain the alternative content.

5.28 Catalog Class Description

The data model for the "Catalog" class is shown in Figure 5.28 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.28.

UML diagram of the Catalog class.

Figure 5.28 - Catalog class definitions.

Table 5.28 Description of the "Catalog" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Catalog
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A container of content or resource references that is outside the content body node. A catalog holds support-specific dormant content that can be made active (a part of the perceivable content presented to the candidate) based on the candidate's PNP information (or an assessment program's settings). A catalog is referenced from a specific portion of the content body by a specific, unique identifier, which matches the catalog's identifier. A catalog contains one or more "cards", each of which address a specific support/feature.

5.28.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "Catalog" class is given in Table 5.28.1.

Table 5.28.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "Catalog" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier used to locate the catalog from a data-catalog-idref.

5.28.2 "qti-card" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-card" attribute for the "Catalog" class is given in Table 5.28.2.

Table 5.28.2 Description of the "qti-card" attribute for the "Catalog" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-card
Data Type Card
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The set of cards that constitute that catalog.

5.29 CatalogInfo Class Description

The data model for the "CatalogInfo" class is shown in Figure 5.29 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.29.

UML diagram of the CatalogInfo class.

Figure 5.29 - CatalogInfo class definitions.

Table 5.29 Description of the "CatalogInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CatalogInfo
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container that holds one or more catalogs and their content. Content inside CatalogInfo is considered "dormant" and is not included for delivery to candidates by default. A candidate's profile (or assessment program settings) will indicate whether the candidate should be presented any of the possible supports included within the CatalogInfo.

5.29.1 "qti-catalog" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog" attribute for the "CatalogInfo" class is given in Table 5.29.1.

Table 5.29.1 Description of the "qti-catalog" attribute for the "CatalogInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog
Data Type Catalog
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The set of catalogs that constitute that alternative content.

5.30 ChoiceInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.30 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.30.

UML diagram of the ChoiceInteraction class.

Figure 5.30 - ChoiceInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.30 Description of the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ChoiceInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The choice interaction presents a set of choices to the candidate. The candidate's task is to select one or more of the choices, up to a maximum of max-choices. The interaction is always initialized with no choices selected. The ChoiceInteraction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality.

5.30.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.1.

Table 5.30.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is 'true' then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.30.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.2.

Table 5.30.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of choices that the candidate is allowed to select. If max-choices is 0 then there is no restriction. If max-choices is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.30.3 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.3.

Table 5.30.3 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate is required to select to form a valid response. If min-choices is 0 then the candidate is not required to select any choices. min-choices must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-choices.

5.30.4 "orientation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.4.

Table 5.30.4 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name orientation
Data Type OrientationEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { horizontal | vertical }
Default = "vertical".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The orientation characteristic provides a hint to rendering systems that the choices have an inherent vertical or horizontal interpretation.

5.30.5 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.5.

Table 5.30.5 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-choices constraint.

5.30.6 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.6.

Table 5.30.6 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-choices constraint.

5.30.7 "qti-simple-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "ChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.30.7.

Table 5.30.7 Description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "ChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-simple-choice
Data Type SimpleChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an ordered list of the choices that are displayed to the user. The order is the order of the choices presented to the user unless shuffle is true.

5.31 Col Class Description

The data model for the "Col" class is shown in Figure 5.31 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.31.

UML diagram of the Col class.

Figure 5.31 - Col class definitions.

Table 5.31 Description of the "Col" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Col
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description Provides the functionality of the HTML 'col' tag. If a 'col' tag has a parent and that is a colgroup tag that itself has a parent that is a table tag, then the col tag represents one or more columns in the column group represented by that colgroup. The tag may have a span content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero. The col tag and its span attribute take part in the table model.

5.31.1 "span" Characteristic Description

The description of the "span" characteristic for the "Col" class is given in Table 5.31.1.

Table 5.31.1 Description of the "span" characteristic for the "Col" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name span
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Defines the number of columns spanned by the 'col' tag.

5.32 ColGroup Class Description

The data model for the "ColGroup" class is shown in Figure 5.32 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.32.

UML diagram of the ColGroup class.

Figure 5.32 - ColGroup class definitions.

Table 5.32 Description of the "ColGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ColGroup
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Provides the functionality of the HTML 'colgroup' tag. The colgroup element represents a group of one or more columns in the table that is its parent, if it has a parent and that is a table element. If the colgroup element contains no col elements, then the element may have a span content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero. The colgroup element and its span attribute take part in the table model.

5.32.1 "span" Characteristic Description

The description of the "span" characteristic for the "ColGroup" class is given in Table 5.32.1.

Table 5.32.1 Description of the "span" characteristic for the "ColGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name span
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Defnes the number of columns spanned by the colgroup.

5.32.2 "col" Attribute Description

The description of the "col" attribute for the "ColGroup" class is given in Table 5.32.2.

Table 5.32.2 Description of the "col" attribute for the "ColGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name col
Data Type Col
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This enables the set of 'col' tag children to be entered.

5.33 CompanionMaterialsInfo Class Description

The data model for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is shown in Figure 5.33 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.33.

UML diagram of the CompanionMaterialsInfo class.

Figure 5.33 - CompanionMaterialsInfo class definitions.

Table 5.33 Description of the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CompanionMaterialsInfo
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the information about the companion materials that are available to a learner undertaking the assessment.

5.33.1 "qti-calculator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-calculator" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.1.

Table 5.33.1 Description of the "qti-calculator" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-calculator
Data Type Calculator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of calculators available as part of the assessment.

5.33.2 "qti-rule" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rule" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.2.

Table 5.33.2 Description of the "qti-rule" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rule
Data Type Rule
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of rules available as part of the assessment.

5.33.3 "qti-protractor" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-protractor" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.3.

Table 5.33.3 Description of the "qti-protractor" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-protractor
Data Type Protractor
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of protractors available as part of the assessment.

5.33.4 "qti-digital-material" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-digital-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.4.

Table 5.33.4 Description of the "qti-digital-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-digital-material
Data Type ItemFileInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of digital materials available as part of the assessment.

5.33.5 "qti-physical-material" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-physical-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.5.

Table 5.33.5 Description of the "qti-physical-material" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-physical-material
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The details for the set of physical mayterials to be made available as part of the assessment.

5.33.6 "extensions" Attribute Description

The description of the "extensions" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class is given in Table 5.33.6.

Table 5.33.6 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "CompanionMaterialsInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extensions
Data Type Namespace (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags must be new tags and not reused tags available in QTI ASI.

5.34 ContextDeclaration Class Description

The data model for the "ContextDeclaration" class is shown in Figure 5.34 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.34.

UML diagram of the ContextDeclaration class.

Figure 5.34 - ContextDeclaration class definitions.

Table 5.34 Description of the "ContextDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ContextDeclaration
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Context variables, variables declared by context declarations, are global in scope in the information model. Context variables may be referenced in template processing, in response processing, and in outcome processing. Context variables are typically used to inject the "context" under which an item or test session is operating. There is one built-in context variable named "QTI_CONTEXT" with record cardinality. The built-in QTI_CONTEXT variable must be fully resolved prior to any further processing.

5.34.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.34.1.

Table 5.34.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifiers of the context variables. All item variables declared in an item share the same namespace. Different items have different namespaces.

5.34.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.34.2.

Table 5.34.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cardinality
Data Type CardinalityEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { multiple | ordered | record | single }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each context variable is either single valued or multi-valued. Multi-valued variables are referred to as containers and come in ordered, unordered and record types.

5.34.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.34.3.

Table 5.34.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ContextDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The value space from which the variable's value can be drawn (or in the case of containers, from which the individual values are drawn) is identified with a base-type. The base-type selects one of a small set of predefined types that are considered to have atomic values within the runtime data model. Variables with record cardinality have no base-type.

5.34.4 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ContextDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.34.4.

Table 5.34.4 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ContextDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default-value
Data Type DefaultValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional default value for the variable. The point at which a variable is set to its default value varies depending on the type of context variable.

5.35 CorrectResponse Class Description

The data model for the "CorrectResponse" class is shown in Figure 5.35 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.35.

UML diagram of the CorrectResponse class.

Figure 5.35 - CorrectResponse class definitions.

Table 5.35 Description of the "CorrectResponse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CorrectResponse
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class is used to define, as part of the response declaration, the values(s) for the correct response.

5.35.1 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "CorrectResponse" class is given in Table 5.35.1.

Table 5.35.1 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "CorrectResponse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name interpretation
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human readable interpretation of the correct value.

5.35.2 "qti-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "CorrectResponse" class is given in Table 5.35.2.

Table 5.35.2 Description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "CorrectResponse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-value
Data Type Value
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The order of the values is signficant only when the response is of ordered cardinality.

5.36 CustomInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "CustomInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.36 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.36.

UML diagram of the CustomInteraction class.

Figure 5.36 - CustomInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.36 Description of the "CustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CustomInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The qti-custom-interaction provides an opportunity for extensibility of this specification to include support for interactions not currently documented, using methods that are proprietary for the supplier. The use of this interaction is deprecated in favor of qti-portable-custom-interaction [PCI, 20].

5.36.1 "extension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.36.1.

Table 5.36.1 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name extension
Data Type NamespaceLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of characteristics to be entered to support the definition of the custom interaction(s).

5.36.2 "extension" Attribute Description

The description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.36.2.

Table 5.36.2 Description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extension
Data Type AnyTypeLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags can be new tags and reused tags already available in QTI ASI. Note that this class is used to support the definition of all of the types of custom interactions used in the content.

5.37 CustomOperator Class Description

The data model for the "CustomOperator" class is shown in Figure 5.37 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.37.

UML diagram of the CustomOperator class.

Figure 5.37 - CustomOperator class definitions.

Table 5.37 Description of the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CustomOperator
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The custom operator provides an extension mechanism for defining operations not currently supported by this specification. It has been suggested that customOperator might be used to help link processing rules defined by this specification to instances of web-service based processing engines. For example, a web-service which offered automated marking of free text responses. Implementors experimenting with this approach are encouraged to share information about their solutions to help determine the best way to achieve this type of processing.

5.37.1 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class is given in Table 5.37.1.

Table 5.37.1 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The class characteristic allows simple sub-classes to be named. The definition of a sub-class is tool specific and may be inferred from toolName and toolVersion.

5.37.2 "definition" Characteristic Description

The description of the "definition" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class is given in Table 5.37.2.

Table 5.37.2 Description of the "definition" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name definition
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A URI that identifies the definition of the custom operator in the global namespace.

5.37.3 "extension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class is given in Table 5.37.3.

Table 5.37.3 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name extension
Data Type NamespaceLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description In addition to the class and definition characteristic, sub-classes may add any number of characteristics of their own.

5.37.4 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class is given in Table 5.37.4.

Table 5.37.4 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the entry of any number of QTI expressions to form the basis of the functional capability of the custom operator.

5.37.5 "extension" Attribute Description

The description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class is given in Table 5.37.5.

Table 5.37.5 Description of the "extension" attribute for the "CustomOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extension
Data Type NamespaceLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags must be new tags and not reused tags available in QTI ASI. Note that this class is used to support the definition of all of the types of custom interactions used in the content.

5.38 DD Class Description

The data model for the "DD" class is shown in Figure 5.38 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.38.

UML diagram of the DD class.

Figure 5.38 - DD class definitions.

Table 5.38 Description of the "DD" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DD
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The 'dd' tag is a part of the HTML content. The 'dd' tag represents the description, definition, or value, part of a term-description group in a description list ('dl' tag).

5.38.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DD" class is given in Table 5.38.1.

Table 5.38.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DD" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the HTML-defined flow content to be added as children of the 'dd' tag.

5.39 DL Class Description

The data model for the "DL" class is shown in Figure 5.39 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.39.

UML diagram of the DL class.

Figure 5.39 - DL class definitions.

Table 5.39 Description of the "DL" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DL
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Denotes the 'dl' HTML tag. The 'dl' tag represents an association list consisting of zero or more name-value groups (a description list). A name-value group consists of one or more names ('dt' tags) followed by one or more values ('dd' tags), ignoring any nodes other than 'dt' and 'dd' tags. Within a single 'dl' tag, there should not be more than one 'dt' tag for each name.

5.39.1 "dlSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "dlSelection" attribute for the "DL" class is given in Table 5.39.1.

Table 5.39.1 Description of the "dlSelection" attribute for the "DL" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dlSelection
Data Type DLSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the HTML-defined flow content and block content to be added as children of the 'dl' tag.

5.40 DT Class Description

The data model for the "DT" class is shown in Figure 5.40 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.40.

UML diagram of the DT class.

Figure 5.40 - DT class definitions.

Table 5.40 Description of the "DT" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DT
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The 'dt' tag is a part of the HTML content. The 'dt' tag represents the term, or name, part of a term-description group in a description list (dl element).

5.40.1 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "DT" class is given in Table 5.40.1.

Table 5.40.1 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "DT" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineGroup
Data Type InlineGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that is used to enable the insertion of any combination of the tags defined as HTML inline content.

5.41 DefaultValue Class Description

The data model for the "DefaultValue" class is shown in Figure 5.41 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.41.

UML diagram of the DefaultValue class.

Figure 5.41 - DefaultValue class definitions.

Table 5.41 Description of the "DefaultValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DefaultValue
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Defines the default value of the associated response, outcome and template variable.

5.41.1 "interpretation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "DefaultValue" class is given in Table 5.41.1.

Table 5.41.1 Description of the "interpretation" characteristic for the "DefaultValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name interpretation
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human readable interpretation of the default value.

5.41.2 "qti-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "DefaultValue" class is given in Table 5.41.2.

Table 5.41.2 Description of the "qti-value" attribute for the "DefaultValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-value
Data Type Value
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The default value(s). The order of the values is significant only if the variable being set has ordered cardinality.

5.42 Details Class Description

The data model for the "Details" class is shown in Figure 5.42 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.42.

UML diagram of the Details class.

Figure 5.42 - Details class definitions.

Table 5.42 Description of the "Details" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Details
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'details' tag (a new tag added in HTML5). This tag creates a disclosure widget in which information is visible only when the widget is toggled into an 'open' state.

5.42.1 "open" Characteristic Description

The description of the "open" characteristic for the "Details" class is given in Table 5.42.1.

Table 5.42.1 Description of the "open" characteristic for the "Details" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name open
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Sets or returns whether the details should be visible (open=true) to the user, or not.

5.42.2 "summary" Attribute Description

The description of the "summary" attribute for the "Details" class is given in Table 5.42.2.

Table 5.42.2 Description of the "summary" attribute for the "Details" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name summary
Data Type BaseHTML5Phrasing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This specifies a summary, caption, or legend for a 'details' tag disclosure box. Clicking the 'summary' conent toggles the state of the parent 'details' open and closed.

5.42.3 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Details" class is given in Table 5.42.3.

Table 5.42.3 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Details" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child. It is used to denote the permitted flow content i.e. the permitted set of HTML children.

5.43 Div Class Description

The data model for the "Div" class is shown in Figure 5.43 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.43.

UML diagram of the Div class.

Figure 5.43 - Div class definitions.

Table 5.43 Description of the "Div" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Div
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'div' tag. The div tag has no special meaning at all. It represents its children. It can be used with the class, lang, and title characteristics to mark up semantics common to a group of consecutive elements. Authors are strongly encouraged to view the div tag as an element of last resort, for when no other element is suitable. Use of more appropriate elements instead of the div element leads to better accessibility for readers and easier maintainability for authors.

5.43.1 "divSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "divSelection" attribute for the "Div" class is given in Table 5.43.1.

Table 5.43.1 Description of the "divSelection" attribute for the "Div" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name divSelection
Data Type DivSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the selection of an arbitrary number and ordering of the permitted children for a 'div tag' (see the associated abstract data-type definition).

5.44 DrawingInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "DrawingInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.44 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.44.

UML diagram of the DrawingInteraction class.

Figure 5.44 - DrawingInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.44 Description of the "DrawingInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DrawingInteraction
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The drawing interaction allows the candidate to use a common set of drawing tools to modify a given graphical image (the canvas). It must be bound to a response variable with base-type file and single cardinality. The result is a file in the same format as the original image. The use of 'object' to include the background image is deprecated and the use of either 'picture' or 'img' is preferred.

5.44.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class is given in Table 5.44.1.

Table 5.44.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the canvas on which the drawing takes place is given as an object which must be of an image type, as specified by the type attribute. Use of this property is deprecated.

5.44.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class is given in Table 5.44.2.

Table 5.44.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the canvas on which the drawing takes place is provided using the HTML 'img' tag.

5.44.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class is given in Table 5.44.3.

Table 5.44.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "DrawingInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the canvas on which the drawing takes place is provided using the HTML 'picture' tag.

5.45 EndAttemptInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.45 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.45.

UML diagram of the EndAttemptInteraction class.

Figure 5.45 - EndAttemptInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.45 Description of the "EndAttemptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name EndAttemptInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The end attempt interaction is a special type of interaction which allows item authors to provide the candidate with control over the way in which the candidate terminates an attempt. The candidate can use the interaction to terminate the attempt (triggering response processing) immediately, typically to request a hint. It must be bound to a response variable with base-type boolean and single cardinality. If the candidate invokes response processing using an endAttemptInteraction then the associated response variable is set to 'true'. If response processing is invoked in any other way, either through a different endAttemptInteraction or through the default method for the delivery engine, then the associated response variable is set to 'false'. The default value of the response variable is always ignored.

5.45.1 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.45.1.

Table 5.45.1 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name response-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable associated with the interaction.

5.45.2 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.45.2.

Table 5.45.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The string that should be displayed to the candidate as a prompt for ending the attempt using this interaction. This should be short, preferably one word. A typical value would be "Hint". For example, in a graphical environment it would be presented as the label on a button that, when pressed, ends the attempt.

5.45.3 "count-attempt" Characteristic Description

The description of the "count-attempt" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class is given in Table 5.45.3.

Table 5.45.3 Description of the "count-attempt" characteristic for the "EndAttemptInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name count-attempt
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Defines the number of attempts that a user can make using the 'endAttemptInteraction' mechanism (this can be used to limit the number of hints, etc.).

5.46 Equal Class Description

The data model for the "Equal" class is shown in Figure 5.46 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.46.

UML diagram of the Equal class.

Figure 5.46 - Equal class definitions.

Table 5.46 Description of the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Equal
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The equal operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the two expressions are numerically equal and 'false' if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

5.46.1 "tolerance-mode" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tolerance-mode" characteristic for the "Equal" class is given in Table 5.46.1.

Table 5.46.1 Description of the "tolerance-mode" characteristic for the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tolerance-mode
Data Type ToleranceModeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { absolute | exact | relative }
Default = "exact".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description When comparing two floating point numbers for equality it is often desirable to have a tolerance to ensure that spurious errors in scoring are not introduced by rounding errors. The tolerance mode determines whether the comparison is done exactly, using an absolute range or a relative range.

5.46.2 "tolerance" Characteristic Description

The description of the "tolerance" characteristic for the "Equal" class is given in Table 5.46.2.

Table 5.46.2 Description of the "tolerance" characteristic for the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name tolerance
Data Type ToleranceList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type), Double (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the tolerance mode is absolute or relative then the tolerance must be specified. The tolerance consists of two positive numbers, t0 and t1, that define the lower and upper bounds. If only one value is given it is used for both. In absolute mode the result of the comparison is true if the value of the second expression, y is within the following range defined by the first value, x: x-t0,x+t1. In relative mode, t0 and t1 are treated as percentages and the following range is used instead: x*(1-t0/100),x*(1+t1/100).

5.46.3 "include-lower-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-lower-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class is given in Table 5.46.3.

Table 5.46.3 Description of the "include-lower-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-lower-bound
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Controls whether or not the lower bound is included in the comparison.

5.46.4 "include-upper-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-upper-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class is given in Table 5.46.4.

Table 5.46.4 Description of the "include-upper-bound" characteristic for the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-upper-bound
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Controls whether or not the upper bound is included in the comparison.

5.46.5 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Equal" class is given in Table 5.46.5.

Table 5.46.5 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Equal" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the two required QTI expressions to be identifed.

5.47 EqualRounded Class Description

The data model for the "EqualRounded" class is shown in Figure 5.47 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.47.

UML diagram of the EqualRounded class.

Figure 5.47 - EqualRounded class definitions.

Table 5.47 Description of the "EqualRounded" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name EqualRounded
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The equalRounded operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the two expressions are numerically equal after rounding and 'false' if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

5.47.1 "rounding-mode" Characteristic Description

The description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class is given in Table 5.47.1.

Table 5.47.1 Description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name rounding-mode
Data Type RoundingModeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { decimalPlaces | significantFigures }
Default = "significantFigures".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Numbers are rounded to a given number of significantFigures or decimalPlaces.

5.47.2 "figures" Characteristic Description

The description of the "figures" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class is given in Table 5.47.2.

Table 5.47.2 Description of the "figures" characteristic for the "EqualRounded" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name figures
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The number of figures to round to. If roundingMode= 'significantFigures', the value of figures must be a non-zero positive integer. If roundingMode='decimalPlaces', the value of figures must be an integer greater than or equal to zero. For example, if significantFigures mode is used with figures=3, and the values are 3.175 and 3.183, the result is 'true', but for 3.175 and 3.1749, the result is 'false'; if decimalPlaces mode is used with figures=2, 1.68572 and 1.69 the result is 'true', but for 1.68572 and 1.68432, the result is 'false'.

5.47.3 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "EqualRounded" class is given in Table 5.47.3.

Table 5.47.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "EqualRounded" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the two required QTI expressions to be identifed.

5.48 ExtendedTextInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.48 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.48.

UML diagram of the ExtendedTextInteraction class.

Figure 5.48 - ExtendedTextInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.48 Description of the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ExtendedTextInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description An Extended Text Interaction is a block interaction that allows the candidate to enter an extended amount of text. The qti-extended-text-interaction must be bound to a response variable of single, multiple, ordered or record cardinality. If the response variable has record cardinality the fields in the record must be 'stringValue', 'floatValue', etc. Otherwise it ust have a base-type of string, integer or float. When bound to response variable with single cardinality a single string of text is required from the candidate. When bound to a response variable with multiple or ordered cardinality several separate text strings may be required.

5.48.1 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.1.

Table 5.48.1 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "10".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the string interaction is bound to a numeric response variable then the base attribute must be used to set the number base in which to interpret the value entered by the candidate.

5.48.2 "string-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.2.

Table 5.48.2 Description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name string-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the string interaction is bound to a numeric response variable then the actual string entered by the candidate can also be captured by binding the interaction to a second response variable (of base-type string).

5.48.3 "expected-length" Characteristic Description

The description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.3.

Table 5.48.3 Description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name expected-length
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The expected-length characteristic provides a hint to the candidate as to the expected overall length of the desired response measured in number of characters. A Delivery Engine should use the value of this characteristic to set the size of the response box, where applicable. This is not a validity constraint.

5.48.4 "pattern-mask" Characteristic Description

The description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.4.

Table 5.48.4 Description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name pattern-mask
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If given, the pattern-mask specifies a regular expression that the candidate's response must match in order to be considered valid. The regular expression language used is defined in Appendix F of [XSCHEMA, 01]. Care is needed to ensure that the format of the required input is clear to the candidate, especially when validity checking of responses is required for progression through a test. This could be done by providing an illustrative sample response in the prompt, for example.

5.48.5 "placeholder-text" Characteristic Description

The description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.5.

Table 5.48.5 Description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name placeholder-text
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description In visual environments, string interactions are typically represented by empty boxes into which the candidate writes or types. However, in speech based environments it is helpful to have some placeholder text that can be used to vocalize the interaction. Delivery engines should use the value of this attribute (if provided) instead of their default placeholder text when this is required. Implementors should be aware of the issues concerning the use of default values described in the section on Response Variables.

5.48.6 "max-strings" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.6.

Table 5.48.6 Description of the "max-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-strings
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The max-strings characteristic is required when the interaction is bound to a response variable that is a container. A Delivery Engine must use the value of this attribute to control the maximum number of separate strings accepted from the candidate. When multiple strings are accepted, expected-length applies to each string.

5.48.7 "min-strings" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.7.

Table 5.48.7 Description of the "min-strings" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-strings
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The min-strings attribute specifies the minimum number separate (non-empty) strings required from the candidate to form a valid response. If min-strings is 0 then the candidate is not required to enter any strings at all. min-strings must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-strings. If the interaction is not bound to a container then there is a special case in which min-strings may be 1. In this case the candidate must enter a non-empty string to form a valid response. More complex constraints on the form of the string can be controlled with the pattern-mask attribute.

5.48.8 "expected-lines" Characteristic Description

The description of the "expected-lines" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.8.

Table 5.48.8 Description of the "expected-lines" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name expected-lines
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The expected-lines characteristic provides a hint to the candidate as to the expected number of lines of input required. A line is expected to have about 72 characters. A Delivery Engine should use the value of this attribute to set the size of the response box, where applicable. This is not a validity constraint.

5.48.9 "format" Characteristic Description

The description of the "format" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.9.

Table 5.48.9 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name format
Data Type TextFormatEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { plain | preformatted | xhtml }
Default = "plain".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Used to control the format of the text entered by the candidate. This characteristic affects the way the value of the associated response variable should be interpreted by response processing engines and also controls the way it should be captured in the delivery engine.

5.48.10 "data-patternmask-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.48.10.

Table 5.48.10 Description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "ExtendedTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-patternmask-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the pattern mask constraints.

5.49 FeedbackBlock Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.49 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.49.

UML diagram of the FeedbackBlock class.

Figure 5.49 - FeedbackBlock class definitions.

Table 5.49 Description of the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class is used to define the feedback content that can be presented to the learner. A feedback element that forms part of a Non-adaptive Item must not contain an interaction object, either directly or indirectly. When an interaction is contained in a hidden feedback element it must also be hidden. The candidate must not be able to set or update the value of the associated response variables. Feedback elements can be embedded inside each other, with one exception: qti-feedback-inline cannot contain qti-feedback-block elements.

5.49.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.1.

Table 5.49.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of an outcome variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the feedback is controlled by assigning a value (or values) to this outcome variable during response processing.

5.49.2 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.2.

Table 5.49.2 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the feedback in conjunction with the show-hide attribute.

5.49.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.3.

Table 5.49.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the feedback element is controlled. If set to show then the feedback is hidden by default and shown only if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier characteristic. If set to hide then the feedback is shown by default and hidden if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier characteristic.

5.49.4 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.4.

Table 5.49.4 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This allows the identification of the set of CSS stylesheets that may be used to define the presentation styling of the feedback. Stylesheet should be used carefully as not all implementations will support and/or permit their use.

5.49.5 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.5.

Table 5.49.5 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type FeedbackContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Within this tag is all of the orginal content that MAY be supplied for the feedback.

5.49.6 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.49.6.

Table 5.49.6 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "FeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Within this tag is all of the optional alternative accessibility content that MAY be supplied for the feedback.

5.50 FeedbackContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.50 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.50.

UML diagram of the FeedbackContentBody class.

Figure 5.50 - FeedbackContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.50 Description of the "FeedbackContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the HTML-based content to be presented as part of the feedback process in Items (excluding modal feedback and inline feedback). This wrapper was added as part of the QTI 3.0 revision.

5.50.1 "feedbackBlockStatic" Attribute Description

The description of the "feedbackBlockStatic" attribute for the "FeedbackContentBody" class is given in Table 5.50.1.

Table 5.50.1 Description of the "feedbackBlockStatic" attribute for the "FeedbackContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name feedbackBlockStatic
Data Type FeedbackBlockStatic
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This abstract property enables the detailed static block content for the feedback.

5.51 FeedbackFlowContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackFlowContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.51 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.51.

UML diagram of the FeedbackFlowContentBody class.

Figure 5.51 - FeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.51 Description of the "FeedbackFlowContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackFlowContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the HTML-based content to be presented as part of the feedback process in Items (modal feedback mode only). This wrapper was added as part of the QTI 3.0 revision.

5.51.1 "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowContentBody" class is given in Table 5.51.1.

Table 5.51.1 Description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name feedbackFlowStaticGroup
Data Type FeedbackFlowStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This abstract property enables the detailed static flow block for the feedback.

5.52 FeedbackInline Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackInline" class is shown in Figure 5.52 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.52.

UML diagram of the FeedbackInline class.

Figure 5.52 - FeedbackInline class definitions.

Table 5.52 Description of the "FeedbackInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackInline
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is feedback that is presented as inline content. Inline feedback that forms part of a Non-adaptive Item must not contain an interaction object, either directly or indirectly. When an interaction is contained in a hidden feedback it must also be hidden. The candidate must not be able to set or update the value of the associated response variables. Feedback can be embedded inside each other, with one exception: qti-feedback-inline cannot contain feedback block elements.

5.52.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class is given in Table 5.52.1.

Table 5.52.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of an outcome variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the feedback element is controlled by assigning a value (or values) to this outcome variable during response processing.

5.52.2 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class is given in Table 5.52.2.

Table 5.52.2 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the feedback in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.52.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class is given in Table 5.52.3.

Table 5.52.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "FeedbackInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the feedback element is controlled. If set to show then the feedback is hidden by default and shown only if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier characteristic. If set to hide then the feedback is shown by default and hidden if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier characteristic.

5.52.4 "feedbackInlineGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "feedbackInlineGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackInline" class is given in Table 5.52.4.

Table 5.52.4 Description of the "feedbackInlineGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name feedbackInlineGroup
Data Type FeedbackInlineGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the actual inline content to be placed.

5.53 FieldValue Class Description

The data model for the "FieldValue" class is shown in Figure 5.53 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.53.

UML diagram of the FieldValue class.

Figure 5.53 - FieldValue class definitions.

Table 5.53 Description of the "FieldValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FieldValue
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is a QTI expression. The field value operator takes a sub-expression with a record container value. The result is the value of the field with the specified field-identifier. If there is no field with that identifier then the result of the operator is NULL.

5.53.1 "field-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "FieldValue" class is given in Table 5.53.1.

Table 5.53.1 Description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "FieldValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name field-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the field to be selected.

5.53.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "FieldValue" class is given in Table 5.53.2.

Table 5.53.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "FieldValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the insertion of the required child expression.

5.54 Figure Class Description

The data model for the "Figure" class is shown in Figure 5.54 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.54.

UML diagram of the Figure class.

Figure 5.54 - Figure class definitions.

Table 5.54 Description of the "Figure" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Figure
Class Type Container [ Unordered , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This defines the permitted content for the HTML5 'figure' tag. The 'figure' tag represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained (like a complete sentence) and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.

5.54.1 "figcaption" Attribute Description

The description of the "figcaption" attribute for the "Figure" class is given in Table 5.54.1.

Table 5.54.1 Description of the "figcaption" attribute for the "Figure" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name figcaption
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The optional 'figcaption' that can be either the first or last child. This provides the caption for the figure.

5.54.2 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Figure" class is given in Table 5.54.2.

Table 5.54.2 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "Figure" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child. It is used to denote the permitted flow content i.e. the permitted set of HTML children.

5.55 Gap Class Description

The data model for the "Gap" class is shown in Figure 5.55 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.55.

UML diagram of the Gap class.

Figure 5.55 - Gap class definitions.

Table 5.55 Description of the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Gap
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This defines the gap structure that must only appear within a 'gapMatchInteraction'.

5.55.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class is given in Table 5.55.1.

Table 5.55.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the gap. This identifier must not be used by any other gap or item variable.

5.55.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class is given in Table 5.55.2.

Table 5.55.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the gap. When a gap is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.55.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "Gap" class is given in Table 5.55.3.

Table 5.55.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the gap is controlled. If set to show then the gap is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the gap. If set to hide then the gap is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the gap's identifier.

5.55.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "Gap" class is given in Table 5.55.4.

Table 5.55.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-group
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to identify the set of entities that can be matched with this gap. This is used to enable the author to constrain the set of objects (images and text) that can be matched with the target gap. This is a list of the identifiers for the objects that can be matched with this gap.

5.55.5 "required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "required" characteristic for the "Gap" class is given in Table 5.55.5.

Table 5.55.5 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "Gap" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If true then this gap must be filled by the candidate in order to form a valid response to the interaction.

5.56 GapImg Class Description

The data model for the "GapImg" class is shown in Figure 5.56 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.56.

UML diagram of the GapImg class.

Figure 5.56 - GapImg class definitions.

Table 5.56 Description of the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GapImg
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A gap image contains a single image object to be inserted into a gap by the candidate.

5.56.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.1.

Table 5.56.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the gap image. This identifier must not be used by any other image or item variable.

5.56.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.2.

Table 5.56.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the image. When the image is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.56.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.3.

Table 5.56.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the image is controlled. If set to 'show' then the text is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the image is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the image's identifier.

5.56.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.4.

Table 5.56.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-group
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to identify the set of entities that can be matched with this gap image. This is used to enable the author to constrain the set of objects (image) that can be matched with the target gapImage. This is a list of the identifiers for the objects that can be matched with this gap image.

5.56.5 "match-max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.5.

Table 5.56.5 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-max
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The maximum number of choices this choice may be associated with. If match-max is 0 there is no restriction.

5.56.6 "match-min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.6.

Table 5.56.6 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-min
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of gaps this choice must be associated with to form a valid response. If match-min is 0 then the candidate is not required to associate this choice with any gaps at all. match-min must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by match-max.

5.56.7 "object-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "object-label" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.7.

Table 5.56.7 Description of the "object-label" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name object-label
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional label for the image object to be inserted.

5.56.8 "top" Characteristic Description

The description of the "top" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.8.

Table 5.56.8 Description of the "top" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name top
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the 'Y' co-ordinate of the top left corner of the image i.e. the value for the top.

5.56.9 "left" Characteristic Description

The description of the "left" characteristic for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.9.

Table 5.56.9 Description of the "left" characteristic for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name left
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the 'X' co-ordinate of the top left corner of the image i.e. the value for the left.

5.56.10 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.10.

Table 5.56.10 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the required image to be used. Use of the 'object' tag is deprecated.

5.56.11 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.11.

Table 5.56.11 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the required image to be used located using the HTML 'img' tag.

5.56.12 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "GapImg" class is given in Table 5.56.12.

Table 5.56.12 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GapImg" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the required image to be used located using the HTML 'picture' tag.

5.57 GapMatchInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.57 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.57.

UML diagram of the GapMatchInteraction class.

Figure 5.57 - GapMatchInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.57 Description of the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GapMatchInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description A gap match interaction is a block interaction that contains a number gaps that the candidate can fill from an associated set of choices. The candidate must be able to review the content with the gaps filled in context, as indicated by their choices. The GapMatchInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type directedPair and either single or multiple cardinality, depending on the number of gaps. The choices represent the source of the pairing and gaps the targets. Each gap can have at most one choice associated with it. The maximum occurrence of the choices is controlled by the match-max characteristic of GapChoice.

5.57.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.1.

Table 5.57.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is 'true' then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices (not the gaps) are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.57.2 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.2.

Table 5.57.2 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of associations that the candidate is required to make to form a valid response. If min-associations is 0 then the candidate is not required to make any associations. min-associations must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-associations.

5.57.3 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.3.

Table 5.57.3 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of associations that the candidate is allowed to make. If max-associations is 0 then there is no restriction. If max-associations is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.57.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.4.

Table 5.57.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-associations constraint.

5.57.5 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.5.

Table 5.57.5 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-associations constraint.

5.57.6 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.6.

Table 5.57.6 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-choices-container-width
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The gap choices container width in pixels. Example: data-choices-container-width="100".

5.57.7 "gapChoice" Attribute Description

The description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.7.

Table 5.57.7 Description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name gapChoice
Data Type GapChoice
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute to allow the definition of an ordered list of choices for filling the gaps. There may be fewer choices than gaps if required.

5.57.8 "blockStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.57.8.

Table 5.57.8 Description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "GapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockStaticGroup
Data Type BlockStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the entry of the content of the interaction is simply a piece of content that contains the gaps. If the block contains more than one gap then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.58 GapText Class Description

The data model for the "GapText" class is shown in Figure 5.58 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.58.

UML diagram of the GapText class.

Figure 5.58 - GapText class definitions.

Table 5.58 Description of the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GapText
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A simple run of text to be inserted into a gap by the user, may be subject to variable value substitution with qti-printed-variable.

5.58.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.1.

Table 5.58.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the gap text. This identifier must not be used by any other text or item variable.

5.58.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.2.

Table 5.58.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the text. When the text is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.58.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.3.

Table 5.58.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the text is controlled. If set to 'show' then the text is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the text is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the text's identifier.

5.58.4 "match-group" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.4.

Table 5.58.4 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-group
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to identify the set of entities that can be matched with this qti-gap-text. This is used to enable the author to constrain the set of objects (text) that can be matched with the target qti-gap-text. This is a list of the identifiers for the objects that can be matched with this qti-gap-text.

5.58.5 "match-max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.5.

Table 5.58.5 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-max
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The maximum number of choices this choice may be associated with. If match-max is 0 there is no restriction.

5.58.6 "match-min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.6.

Table 5.58.6 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-min
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of gaps this choice must be associated with to form a valid response. If match-min is 0 then the candidate is not required to associate this choice with any gaps at all. match-min must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by match-max.

5.58.7 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "GapText" class is given in Table 5.58.7.

Table 5.58.7 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "GapText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineChoiceGroup
Data Type InlineChoiceGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the inline content to be added including the HTML inline content.

5.59 GraphicAssociateInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.59 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.59.

UML diagram of the GraphicAssociateInteraction class.

Figure 5.59 - GraphicAssociateInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.59 Description of the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicAssociateInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description A graphic associate interaction is a graphic interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to associate the areas (hotspots) with each other. The graphic associate interaction should only be used when the graphical relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, associateInteraction should be used instead with separate Material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate all defined area(s) of the image. The graphicAssociateInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type pair and either single or multiple cardinality.

5.59.1 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.59.1.

Table 5.59.1 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of associations that the candidate is required to make to form a valid response. If minAssociations is 0 then the candidate is not required to make any associations. minAssociations must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by maxAssociations.

5.59.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.59.2.

Table 5.59.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of associations that the candidate is allowed to make. If maxAssociations is 0 there is no restriction. If maxAssociations is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.59.3 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.59.3.

Table 5.59.3 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name imageSelection
Data Type GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the required base graphical image to be positioned.

5.59.4 "qti-associable-hotspot" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class is given in Table 5.59.4.

Table 5.59.4 Description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-associable-hotspot
Data Type AssociableHotspot
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The hotspots that define the choices that are to be associated by the candidate. If the delivery system does not support pointer-based selection then the order in which the choices are given must be the order in which they are offered to the candidate for selection. For example, the 'tab order' in simple keyboard navigation.

5.60 GraphicGapMatchInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.60 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.60.

UML diagram of the GraphicGapMatchInteraction class.

Figure 5.60 - GraphicGapMatchInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.60 Description of the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicGapMatchInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A graphic gap-match interaction is a graphical interaction with a set of gaps that are defined as areas (hotspots) of the graphic image and an additional set of gap choices that are defined outside the image. The candidate must associate the gap choices with the gaps in the image and be able to review the image with the gaps filled in context, as indicated by their choices. Care should be taken when designing these interactions to ensure that the gaps in the image are a suitable size to receive the required gap choices. It must be clear to the candidate which hotspot each choice has been associated with. When associated, choices must appear wholly inside the gaps if at all possible and, where overlaps are required, should not hide each other completely. If the candidate indicates the association by positioning the choice over the gap (e.g. drag and drop) the system should 'snap' it to the nearest position that satisfies these requirements. The graphicGapMatchInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type directedPair and multiple cardinality. The choices represent the source of the pairing and the gaps in the image (the hotspots) the targets. Unlike the simple gapMatchInteraction, each gap can have several choices associated with it if desired, furthermore, the same choice may be associated with an associableHotspot multiple times, in which case the corresponding directed pair appears multiple times in the value of the response variable.

5.60.1 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.1.

Table 5.60.1 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of associations that the candidate is required to make to form a valid response. If min-associations is 0 then the candidate is not required to make any associations. min-associations must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-associations.

5.60.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.2.

Table 5.60.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of associations that the candidate is allowed to make. If max-associations is 0 then there is no restriction. If max-associations is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.60.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.3.

Table 5.60.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-associations constraint.

5.60.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.4.

Table 5.60.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-associations constraint.

5.60.5 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.5.

Table 5.60.5 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-choices-container-width
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The gap choices container width in pixels. Example: data-choices-container-width="100".

5.60.6 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.6.

Table 5.60.6 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-prompt
Data Type Prompt
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional prompt for the interaction.

5.60.7 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.7.

Table 5.60.7 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name imageSelection
Data Type GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The associated image which is given as an image using one of three HTML tags. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated.

5.60.8 "gapChoice" Attribute Description

The description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.8.

Table 5.60.8 Description of the "gapChoice" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name gapChoice
Data Type GapChoice
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child that allows the insertion of the choices that are used to fill the gaps in a gapMatchInteraction are either simple runs of text or single image objects, both derived from gapChoice.

5.60.9 "qti-associable-hotspot" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.60.9.

Table 5.60.9 Description of the "qti-associable-hotspot" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-associable-hotspot
Data Type AssociableHotspot
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The hotspots that define the gaps that are to be filled by the candidate. If the delivery system does not support pointer-based selection then the order in which the gaps is given must be the order in which they are offered to the candidate for selection. For example, the 'tab order' in simple keyboard navigation. The default hotspot must not be defined.

5.61 GraphicOrderInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.61 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.61.

UML diagram of the GraphicOrderInteraction class.

Figure 5.61 - GraphicOrderInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.61 Description of the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicOrderInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A graphic order interaction is a graphic interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to impose an ordering on the areas (hotspots). The order hotspot interaction should only be used when the spacial relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, orderInteraction should be used instead with separate material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate all defined area(s) of the image. The order hotspot interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and ordered cardinality.

5.61.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.61.1.

Table 5.61.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate must select and order to form a valid response to the interaction. If specified, min-choices must be 1 or greater but must not exceed the number of choices available. If unspecified, all of the choices must be ordered and max-choices is ignored.

5.61.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.61.2.

Table 5.61.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of choices that the candidate may select and order when responding to the interaction. Used in conjunction with min-choices, if specified, max-choices must be greater than or equal to min-choices and must not exceed the number of choices available. If unspecified, all of the choices may be ordered.

5.61.3 "qti-prompt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.61.3.

Table 5.61.3 Description of the "qti-prompt" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-prompt
Data Type Prompt
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional prompt for the interaction.

5.61.4 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.61.4.

Table 5.61.4 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name imageSelection
Data Type GraphicOrderInteractionSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the required base graphical image to be positioned. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated.

5.61.5 "qti-hotspot-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.61.5.

Table 5.61.5 Description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hotspot-choice
Data Type HotspotChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The hotspots that define the choices that are to be ordered by the candidate. If the delivery system does not support pointer-based selection then the order in which the choices are given must be the order in which they are offered to the candidate for selection. For example, the 'tab order' in simple keyboard navigation.

5.62 HR Class Description

The data model for the "HR" class is shown in Figure 5.62 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.62.

UML diagram of the HR class.

Figure 5.62 - HR class definitions.

Table 5.62 Description of the "HR" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HR
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'hr' tag. The 'hr' tag represents a paragraph-level thematic break, e.g. a scene change in a story, or a transition to another topic within a section of a reference book. This tag has no children.

5.63 HTMLContent Class Description

The data model for the "HTMLContent" class is shown in Figure 5.63 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.63.

UML diagram of the HTMLContent class.

Figure 5.63 - HTMLContent class definitions.

Table 5.63 Description of the "HTMLContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HTMLContent
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the content in HTML format.

5.63.1 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class is given in Table 5.63.1.

Table 5.63.1 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The language for the content to be presented via the HTML.

5.63.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class is given in Table 5.63.2.

Table 5.63.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "HTMLContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.63.3 "htmlContentFlow" Attribute Description

The description of the "htmlContentFlow" attribute for the "HTMLContent" class is given in Table 5.63.3.

Table 5.63.3 Description of the "htmlContentFlow" attribute for the "HTMLContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name htmlContentFlow
Data Type HTMLContentFlow
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the HTML5 content to be included in the alternative content.

5.64 HTMLText Class Description

The data model for the "HTMLText" class is shown in Figure 5.64 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.64.

UML diagram of the HTMLText class.

Figure 5.64 - HTMLText class definitions.

Table 5.64 Description of the "HTMLText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HTMLText
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the content for text-based HTML tags e.g. 'pre', 'p', 'h1', 'h2', etc.

5.64.1 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "HTMLText" class is given in Table 5.64.1.

Table 5.64.1 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "HTMLText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineGroup
Data Type InlineGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of HTML inline content.

5.65 HotText Class Description

The data model for the "HotText" class is shown in Figure 5.65 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.65.

UML diagram of the HotText class.

Figure 5.65 - HotText class definitions.

Table 5.65 Description of the "HotText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HotText
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A HotText area is used within the content of an hotTextInteraction to provide the individual choices. It must not contain any nested interactions or other hottext areas. When a hottext choice is hidden (by the value of an associated template variable) the content of the choice must still be presented to the candidate as if it were simply part of the surrounding material. In the case of hottext, the effect of hiding the choice is simply to make the run of text unselectable by the candidate.

5.65.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class is given in Table 5.65.1.

Table 5.65.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the hottext choice. This identifier must not be used by any other hottext choice or item variable.

5.65.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class is given in Table 5.65.2.

Table 5.65.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the choice. When a choice is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.65.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotText" class is given in Table 5.65.3.

Table 5.65.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the hot text choice is controlled. If set to 'show' then the choice is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the choice is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the choice's identifier.

5.65.4 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "HotText" class is given in Table 5.65.4.

Table 5.65.4 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "HotText" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineChoiceGroup
Data Type InlineChoiceGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the insertion of of the permitted inline content (includng the HTML tags).

5.66 HotTextInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "HotTextInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.66 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.66.

UML diagram of the HotTextInteraction class.

Figure 5.66 - HotTextInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.66 Description of the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HotTextInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The HotText Interaction presents a set of choices to the candidate represented as selectable runs of text embedded within a surrounding context, such as a simple passage of text. Like choiceInteraction, the candidate's task is to select one or more of the choices, up to a maximum of max-choices. The interaction is initialized from the qti-default-value of the associated response variable, a NULL value indicating that no choices are selected (the usual case). The qti-hottext-interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality.

5.66.1 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.66.1.

Table 5.66.1 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of choices that can be selected by the candidate. If match-choices is 0 there is no restriction. If max-choices is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.66.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.66.2.

Table 5.66.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate is required to select to form a valid response. If min-choices is 0 then the candidate is not required to select any choices. min-choices must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-choices.

5.66.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.66.3.

Table 5.66.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-choices constraint.

5.66.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.66.4.

Table 5.66.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description the custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-choices constraint.

5.66.5 "blockStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "HotTextInteraction" class is given in Table 5.66.5.

Table 5.66.5 Description of the "blockStaticGroup" attribute for the "HotTextInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockStaticGroup
Data Type BlockStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the definition of the content of the interaction that is simply a piece of content, such as a simple passage of text, that contains the hottext areas.

5.67 HotspotChoice Class Description

The data model for the "HotspotChoice" class is shown in Figure 5.67 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.67.

UML diagram of the HotspotChoice class.

Figure 5.67 - HotspotChoice class definitions.

Table 5.67 Description of the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HotspotChoice
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The definition of a hotspot choices that can be selected by the candidate. If the delivery system does not support pointer-based selection then the order in which the choices are given must be the order in which they are offered to the candidate for selection. For example, the 'tab order' in simple keyboard navigation. If hotspots overlap then those listed first hide overlapping hotspots that appear later. The default hotspot, if defined, must appear last.

5.67.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.1.

Table 5.67.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the choice. This identifier must not be used by any other choice or item variable.

5.67.2 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.2.

Table 5.67.2 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the template feature is controlled by the value of the variable.

5.67.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.3.

Table 5.67.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The showHide attribute determins how the visbility of the choice is controlled. If set to show then the choice is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to hide then the choice is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the choice's identifier.

5.67.4 "shape" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shape" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.4.

Table 5.67.4 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shape
Data Type ShapeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { circle | default | ellipse | poly | rect }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The shape of the hotspot.

5.67.5 "coords" Characteristic Description

The description of the "coords" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.5.

Table 5.67.5 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name coords
Data Type Coords
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The size and position of the hotspot, interpreted in conjunction with the shape.

5.67.6 "hotspot-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class is given in Table 5.67.6.

Table 5.67.6 Description of the "hotspot-label" characteristic for the "HotspotChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name hotspot-label
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative text for this (hot) area of the image, if specified it must be treated in the same way as alternative text for 'img'. For hidden hotspots this label is ignored.

5.68 HotspotInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "HotspotInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.68 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.68.

UML diagram of the HotspotInteraction class.

Figure 5.68 - HotspotInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.68 Description of the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HotspotInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description A hotspot interaction is a graphical interaction with a corresponding set of choices that are defined as areas of the graphic image. The candidate's task is to select one or more of the areas (hotspots). The hotspot interaction should only be used when the spacial relationship of the choices with respect to each other (as represented by the graphic image) is important to the needs of the item. Otherwise, choiceInteraction should be used instead with separate material for each option. The delivery engine must clearly indicate the selected area(s) of the image and may also indicate the unselected areas as well. Interactions with hidden hotspots are achieved with the selectPointInteraction. The hotspot interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single or multiple cardinality.

5.68.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.1.

Table 5.68.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate is required to select to form a valid response. If min-choices is 0 then the candidate is not required to select any choices. min-choices must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-choices.

5.68.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.2.

Table 5.68.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of choices that the candidate is allowed to select. If max-choices is 0 there is no restriction. If max-choices is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.68.3 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.3.

Table 5.68.3 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-choices constraint.

5.68.4 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.4.

Table 5.68.4 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-choices constraint.

5.68.5 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.5.

Table 5.68.5 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name imageSelection
Data Type HotspotInteractionSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the required base image upon which the hotspots are superposed. The use of the 'object' tag to include the background image is deprecated.

5.68.6 "qti-hotspot-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class is given in Table 5.68.6.

Table 5.68.6 Description of the "qti-hotspot-choice" attribute for the "HotspotInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hotspot-choice
Data Type HotspotChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The hotspots that define the choices that can be selected by the candidate. If the delivery system does not support pointer-based selection then the order in which the choices are given must be the order in which they are offered to the candidate for selection. For example, the 'tab order' in simple keyboard navigation. If hotspots overlap then those listed first hide overlapping hotspots that appear later. The default hotspot, if defined, must appear last.

5.69 Img Class Description

The data model for the "Img" class is shown in Figure 5.69 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.69.

UML diagram of the Img class.

Figure 5.69 - Img class definitions.

Table 5.69 Description of the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Img
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This provides the HTML 'img' tag content capability.

5.69.1 "src" Characteristic Description

The description of the "src" characteristic for the "Img" class is given in Table 5.69.1.

Table 5.69.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name src
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The address (URI) for the image.

5.69.2 "alt" Characteristic Description

The description of the "alt" characteristic for the "Img" class is given in Table 5.69.2.

Table 5.69.2 Description of the "alt" characteristic for the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name alt
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The replacement text for use when images are not available

5.69.3 "longdesc" Characteristic Description

The description of the "longdesc" characteristic for the "Img" class is given in Table 5.69.3.

Table 5.69.3 Description of the "longdesc" characteristic for the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name longdesc
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The address for a resource that contains the long description of the image.

5.69.4 "height" Characteristic Description

The description of the "height" characteristic for the "Img" class is given in Table 5.69.4.

Table 5.69.4 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name height
Data Type Length
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The vertical dimension for the image.

5.69.5 "width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "width" characteristic for the "Img" class is given in Table 5.69.5.

Table 5.69.5 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Img" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name width
Data Type Length
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The horizontal dimension for the image.

5.70 IncrementSI Class Description

The data model for the "IncrementSI" class is shown in Figure 5.70 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.70.

UML diagram of the IncrementSI class.

Figure 5.70 - IncrementSI class definitions.

Table 5.70 Description of the "IncrementSI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IncrementSI
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the information about the protractor defined in terms of SI units.

5.70.1 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class is given in Table 5.70.1.

Table 5.70.1 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minor-increment
Data Type RadialSIValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minor increment, SI units, for the protractor.

5.70.2 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class is given in Table 5.70.2.

Table 5.70.2 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementSI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-major-increment
Data Type RadialSIValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The major increment, SI units, for the protractor.

5.71 IncrementUS Class Description

The data model for the "IncrementUS" class is shown in Figure 5.71 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.71.

UML diagram of the IncrementUS class.

Figure 5.71 - IncrementUS class definitions.

Table 5.71 Description of the "IncrementUS" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IncrementUS
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the information about the protractor defined in terms of US units.

5.71.1 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class is given in Table 5.71.1.

Table 5.71.1 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minor-increment
Data Type RadialUSValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minor increment, US units, for the protractor.

5.71.2 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class is given in Table 5.71.2.

Table 5.71.2 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "IncrementUS" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-major-increment
Data Type RadialUSValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The major increment, US units, for the protractor.

5.72 Index Class Description

The data model for the "Index" class is shown in Figure 5.72 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.72.

UML diagram of the Index class.

Figure 5.72 - Index class definitions.

Table 5.72 Description of the "Index" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Index
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The index operator takes a sub-expression with an ordered container value and any base-type. The result is the nth value of the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. The first value of a container has index 1, the second 2 and so on. 'n' must be a positive integer. If 'n' exceeds the number of values in the container (or the sub-expression is NULL) then the result of the index operator is NULL. If 'n' is an identifier, it is the value of 'n' at runtime that is used.

5.72.1 "n" Characteristic Description

The description of the "n" characteristic for the "Index" class is given in Table 5.72.1.

Table 5.72.1 Description of the "n" characteristic for the "Index" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name n
Data Type IntOrIdentifier
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type), Int (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Identification of the index ordinal value required.

5.72.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Index" class is given in Table 5.72.2.

Table 5.72.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Index" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of the QTI expression.

5.73 InlineChoice Class Description

The data model for the "InlineChoice" class is shown in Figure 5.73 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.73.

UML diagram of the InlineChoice class.

Figure 5.73 - InlineChoice class definitions.

Table 5.73 Description of the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineChoice
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A simple run of text to be displayed to the user, may be subject to variable value substitution with printedVariable.

5.73.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class is given in Table 5.73.1.

Table 5.73.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the choice. This identifier must not be used by any other choice or item variable.

5.73.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class is given in Table 5.73.2.

Table 5.73.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fixed
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If fixed is true for a choice then the position of this choice within the interaction must not be changed by the delivery engine even if the immediately enclosing interaction supports the shuffling of choices. If no value is specified then the choice is free to be shuffled. In Item Templates, the visibility of choices can be controlled by setting the value(s) of an associated template variable during template processing. For information about item templates see Item Templates.

5.73.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class is given in Table 5.73.3.

Table 5.73.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the choice. When a choice is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.73.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class is given in Table 5.73.4.

Table 5.73.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The showHide characteristic determines how the visibility of the choice is controlled. If set to 'show' then the choice is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the choice is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the choice's identifier.

5.73.5 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "InlineChoice" class is given in Table 5.73.5.

Table 5.73.5 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "InlineChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineChoiceGroup
Data Type InlineChoiceGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class to enable the insertion of the line content i.e. inline HTML content and other QTI-specific features.

5.74 InlineChoiceInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.74 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.74.

UML diagram of the InlineChoiceInteraction class.

Figure 5.74 - InlineChoiceInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.74 Description of the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineChoiceInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An inline choice is an inline Interaction that presents the user with a set of choices, each of which is a simple piece of text. The candidate's task is to select one of the choices. Unlike the choiceInteraction, the delivery engine must allow the candidate to review their choice within the context of the surrounding text. The inlineChoiceInteraction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of identifier and single cardinality only.

5.74.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.1.

Table 5.74.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is true then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.74.2 "required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "required" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.2.

Table 5.74.2 Description of the "required" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If 'true' then a choice must be selected by the candidate in order to form a valid response to the interaction.

5.74.3 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.3.

Table 5.74.3 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate is required to select to form a valid response. If min-choices is 0 then the candidate is not required to select any choices.

5.74.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.4.

Table 5.74.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-choices constraint.

5.74.5 "data-prompt" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-prompt" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.5.

Table 5.74.5 Description of the "data-prompt" characteristic for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-prompt
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom text to be rendered by the delivery platform when the selection element is in an unselected state.

5.74.6 "qti-label" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-label" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.6.

Table 5.74.6 Description of the "qti-label" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-label
Data Type Label
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This enables an annotation label to be defined. This is use to provide a visible label of the choice.

5.74.7 "qti-inline-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-inline-choice" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class is given in Table 5.74.7.

Table 5.74.7 Description of the "qti-inline-choice" attribute for the "InlineChoiceInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-inline-choice
Data Type InlineChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the creation of complex content. This is the ordered list of the choices that are displayed to the user. The order is the order of the choices presented to the user unless shuffle is true.

5.75 Inside Class Description

The data model for the "Inside" class is shown in Figure 5.75 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.75.

UML diagram of the Inside class.

Figure 5.75 - Inside class definitions.

Table 5.75 Description of the "Inside" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Inside
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The inside operator takes a single sub-expression which must have a base-type of 'point'. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the given point is inside the area defined by shape and coords. If the sub-expression is a container the result is 'true' if any of the points are inside the area. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

5.75.1 "shape" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shape" characteristic for the "Inside" class is given in Table 5.75.1.

Table 5.75.1 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "Inside" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shape
Data Type ShapeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { circle | default | ellipse | poly | rect }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The shape of the area.

5.75.2 "coords" Characteristic Description

The description of the "coords" characteristic for the "Inside" class is given in Table 5.75.2.

Table 5.75.2 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "Inside" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name coords
Data Type Coords
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The size and position of the area, interpreted in conjunction with the shape. The coords type provides the coordinates that determine the size and location of an area defined by a corresponding shape. The coordinates themselves are an ordered list of lengths (as defined in [XHTML, 10]). The interpretation of each length value is dependent on the value of the associated shape as follows. (a) rect: left-x, top-y, right-x, bottom-y; (b) circle: center-x, center-y, radius. Note. When the radius value is a percentage value, user agents should calculate the final radius value based on the associated object's width and height. The radius should be the smaller value of the two; (c) poly: x1, y1, x2, y2, ..., xN, yN. The first x and y coordinate pair and the last should be the same to close the polygon. When these coordinate values are not the same, user agents should infer an additional coordinate pair to close the polygon; (d) ellipse: center-x, center-y, h-radius, v-radius. Note that the ellipse shape is deprecated as it is not defined by XHTML; (e) default: no coordinates should be given.

5.75.3 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Inside" class is given in Table 5.75.3.

Table 5.75.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Inside" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the required QTI expression to be identified.

5.76 InteractionMarkup Class Description

The data model for the "InteractionMarkup" class is shown in Figure 5.76 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.76.

UML diagram of the InteractionMarkup class.

Figure 5.76 - InteractionMarkup class definitions.

Table 5.76 Description of the "InteractionMarkup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InteractionMarkup
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the HTML-based markup that is to be used in the associated PCI [PCI, 20].

5.76.1 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class is given in Table 5.76.1.

Table 5.76.1 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowStaticGroup
Data Type FlowStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The abstract attribute that enables the flow static content to be supplied to the PCI.

5.76.2 "template" Attribute Description

The description of the "template" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class is given in Table 5.76.2.

Table 5.76.2 Description of the "template" attribute for the "InteractionMarkup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name template
Data Type Template
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The HTML5 'template' tag.

5.77 InteractionModules Class Description

The data model for the "InteractionModules" class is shown in Figure 5.77 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.77.

UML diagram of the InteractionModules class.

Figure 5.77 - InteractionModules class definitions.

Table 5.77 Description of the "InteractionModules" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InteractionModules
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The set of interaction configuration settings to be used by the PCI. These settings are defined with respect to the set of JavaScript library modules.

5.77.1 "primary-configuration" Characteristic Description

The description of the "primary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class is given in Table 5.77.1.

Table 5.77.1 Description of the "primary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name primary-configuration
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "modules/module_resolution.js".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Provides a URL which is a reference to a JSON configuration file which describes the PCI module configuration to use for this interaction instance. Relative URLs indicate relative paths in the QTI content package. If no value is supplied a value of "modules/module_resolution.js" should be applied.

5.77.2 "secondary-configuration" Characteristic Description

The description of the "secondary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class is given in Table 5.77.2.

Table 5.77.2 Description of the "secondary-configuration" characteristic for the "InteractionModules" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name secondary-configuration
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "modules/fallback_module_resolution.js".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Provides a URL which is a reference to a JSON configuration file which describes the PCI module configuration to use for this interaction instance. Relative URLs indicate relative paths in the QTI content package. If no value is supplied a value of "modules/module_resolution.js" should be applied.

5.77.3 "qti-interaction-module" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-interaction-module" attribute for the "InteractionModules" class is given in Table 5.77.3.

Table 5.77.3 Description of the "qti-interaction-module" attribute for the "InteractionModules" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-interaction-module
Data Type InteractionModule
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description Provides the id of a Javascript module that the PCI API will attempt to dynamically load and inject into the PCI module. By default the id will be resolved via the module configuration files loaded in the parent qti-interaction-modules element. If primary-path and/or fallback-path are provided they can be used to override the module configuration file with a particular location to load the module from. The id may also be used by the loaded modules to refer to the other modules loaded for this interaction.

5.78 InterpolationTable Class Description

The data model for the "InterpolationTable" class is shown in Figure 5.78 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.78.

UML diagram of the InterpolationTable class.

Figure 5.78 - InterpolationTable class definitions.

Table 5.78 Description of the "InterpolationTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InterpolationTable
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An interpolationTable transforms a source float (or integer) by finding the first interpolationTableEntry with a sourceValue that is less than or equal to (subject to includeBoundary) the source value. For example, an interpolation table can be used to map a raw numeric score onto an identifier representing a grade. It may also be used to implement numeric transformations such as those from a simple raw score to a value on a calibrated scale.

5.78.1 "default-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTable" class is given in Table 5.78.1.

Table 5.78.1 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default-value
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default outcome value to be used when no matching tabel entry is found. If omitted, the NULL value is used.

5.78.2 "qti-interpolation-table-entry" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-interpolation-table-entry" attribute for the "InterpolationTable" class is given in Table 5.78.2.

Table 5.78.2 Description of the "qti-interpolation-table-entry" attribute for the "InterpolationTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-interpolation-table-entry
Data Type InterpolationTableEntry
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is the set of interpolation table entries that constitute the interpolation table.

5.79 ItemBody Class Description

The data model for the "ItemBody" class is shown in Figure 5.79 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.79.

UML diagram of the ItemBody class.

Figure 5.79 - ItemBody class definitions.

Table 5.79 Description of the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ItemBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The item body contains the text, graphics, media objects and interactions that describe the item's content and information about how it is structured. The body is presented by combining it with stylesheet information, either explicitly or implicitly using the default style rules of the delivery or authoring system. The body must be presented to the candidate when the associated item session is in the interacting state. In this state, the candidate must be able to interact with each of the visible interactions and therefore set or update the values of the associated response variables. The body may be presented to the candidate when the item session is in the closed or review state. In these states, although the candidate's responses should be visible, the interactions must be disabled so as to prevent the candidate from setting or updating the values of the associated response variables. Finally, the body may be presented to the candidate in the solution state, in which case the correct values of the response variables must be visible and the associated interactions disabled. The content model employed by this specification uses many concepts taken directly from [XHTML, 10]. In effect, this part of the specification defines a profile of XHTML. Only some of the elements defined in XHTML are allowable in an assessmentItem and of those that are, some have additional constraints placed on their attributes. Only those elements from XHTML that are explicitly defined within this specification can be used. See XHTML Elements for details. Finally, this specification defines some new elements which are used to represent the interactions and to control the display of Integrated Feedback and content restricted to one or more of the defined content views.

5.79.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.1.

Table 5.79.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'id' of a body element must be unique within the item. This is used to enable reference links for other features e.g. APIP accessibility.

5.79.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.2.

Table 5.79.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Classes can be assigned to individual body elements. Multiple class names can be given. These class names identify the element as being a member of the listed classes. Membership of a class can be used by authoring systems to distinguish between content objects that are not differentiated by this specification. Typically, this information is used to apply different formatting based on definitions in an associated stylesheet, but can also be used for user interface designs that go beyond.

5.79.3 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.3.

Table 5.79.3 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The main language of the element. This characteristic is optional and will usually be inherited from the enclosing element.

5.79.4 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.4.

Table 5.79.4 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label characteristic provides authoring systems with a mechanism for labelling elements of the content model with application specific data. If an item uses labels then values for the associated toolName and toolVersion attributes must also be provided.

5.79.5 "dir" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dir" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.5.

Table 5.79.5 Description of the "dir" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dir
Data Type DIR
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ltr | rtl | auto }
Default = "auto".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies the directionality of the text within the itemBody as a whole.

5.79.6 "data-catalog-idref" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.6.

Table 5.79.6 Description of the "data-catalog-idref" characteristic for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-catalog-idref
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to provide the 'identifier' of an alternative content catalog. The associated 'catalog' MUST be supplied in the same 'assessmentItem' definition.

5.79.7 "itemBodySelect" Attribute Description

The description of the "itemBodySelect" attribute for the "ItemBody" class is given in Table 5.79.7.

Table 5.79.7 Description of the "itemBodySelect" attribute for the "ItemBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name itemBodySelect
Data Type ItemBodySelect
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the complex content for the Item be be constructed. This content consists of the rubric block(s), HTML block tags and QTI interactions.

5.80 ItemFileInfo Class Description

The data model for the "ItemFileInfo" class is shown in Figure 5.80 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.80.

UML diagram of the ItemFileInfo class.

Figure 5.80 - ItemFileInfo class definitions.

Table 5.80 Description of the "ItemFileInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ItemFileInfo
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for information about an external file that contains information to be made available to the learner.

5.80.1 "mime-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class is given in Table 5.80.1.

Table 5.80.1 Description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mime-type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The mime-type for the file.

5.80.2 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class is given in Table 5.80.2.

Table 5.80.2 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "ItemFileInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A human readable label/short description for the file.

5.80.3 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class is given in Table 5.80.3.

Table 5.80.3 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-file-href
Data Type FileHref
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the URI for the associated content file.

5.80.4 "qti-resource-icon" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-resource-icon" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class is given in Table 5.80.4.

Table 5.80.4 Description of the "qti-resource-icon" attribute for the "ItemFileInfo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-resource-icon
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The URL for the associated icon image for the resource. This file MUST be contained within the correponding QTI content package.

5.81 LI Class Description

The data model for the "LI" class is shown in Figure 5.81 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.81.

UML diagram of the LI class.

Figure 5.81 - LI class definitions.

Table 5.81 Description of the "LI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name LI
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Provides the HTML 'li' tag functionality. The 'li' tag represents a list item. If its parent tag is an 'ol' or 'ul', then the tag is an item of the parent tag's list, as defined for those elements. Otherwise, the list item has no defined list-related relationship to any other 'li' tag. If the parent element is an 'ol' tag, then the 'li' tag has an ordinal value.

5.81.1 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "LI" class is given in Table 5.81.1.

Table 5.81.1 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "LI" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the HTML-defined flow content to be added as children of the 'li' tag.

5.82 Label Class Description

The data model for the "Label" class is shown in Figure 5.82 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.82.

UML diagram of the Label class.

Figure 5.82 - Label class definitions.

Table 5.82 Description of the "Label" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Label
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This allows the creation of human readable labels that will be placed close to the associated displayed content artefacts. These labels are used with inline choice interactions.

5.82.1 "inlineChoiceGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "Label" class is given in Table 5.82.1.

Table 5.82.1 Description of the "inlineChoiceGroup" attribute for the "Label" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineChoiceGroup
Data Type InlineChoiceGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the inline content to be entered including the HTML inline tags.

5.83 Logic0toMany Class Description

The data model for the "Logic0toMany" class is shown in Figure 5.83 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.83.

UML diagram of the Logic0toMany class.

Figure 5.83 - Logic0toMany class definitions.

Table 5.83 Description of the "Logic0toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Logic0toMany
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the combination of the zero or more child expressions (see the ExpressionGroup abstract class for the details on the permitted expressions).

5.83.1 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic0toMany" class is given in Table 5.83.1.

Table 5.83.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic0toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the unbounded set of child expressions to be identified (see the abstract class ExpressionGroup for the set of permitted expressions).

5.84 Logic1toMany Class Description

The data model for the "Logic1toMany" class is shown in Figure 5.84 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.84.

UML diagram of the Logic1toMany class.

Figure 5.84 - Logic1toMany class definitions.

Table 5.84 Description of the "Logic1toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Logic1toMany
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the combination of the one or more child expressions (see the ExpressionGroup abstract class for the details on the permitted expressions).

5.84.1 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic1toMany" class is given in Table 5.84.1.

Table 5.84.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Logic1toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the set of child expressions to be identified (see the abstract class ExpressionGroup for the set of permitted expressions).

5.85 LogicPair Class Description

The data model for the "LogicPair" class is shown in Figure 5.85 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.85.

UML diagram of the LogicPair class.

Figure 5.85 - LogicPair class definitions.

Table 5.85 Description of the "LogicPair" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name LogicPair
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the combination of the two child expressions (see the ExpressionGroup abstract class for the details on the permitted expressions).

5.85.1 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicPair" class is given in Table 5.85.1.

Table 5.85.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicPair" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the set of child expressions to be identified (see the abstract class ExpressionGroup for the set of permitted expressions).

5.86 LogicSingle Class Description

The data model for the "LogicSingle" class is shown in Figure 5.86 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.86.

UML diagram of the LogicSingle class.

Figure 5.86 - LogicSingle class definitions.

Table 5.86 Description of the "LogicSingle" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name LogicSingle
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the combination of the single child expression (see the ExpressionGroup abstract class for the details on the permitted expressions).

5.86.1 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicSingle" class is given in Table 5.86.1.

Table 5.86.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "LogicSingle" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the child expression to be identified (see the abstract class ExpressionGroup for the set of permitted expressions).

5.87 LookupOutcomeValue Class Description

The data model for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class is shown in Figure 5.87 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.87.

UML diagram of the LookupOutcomeValue class.

Figure 5.87 - LookupOutcomeValue class definitions.

Table 5.87 Description of the "LookupOutcomeValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name LookupOutcomeValue
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The lookupOutcomeValue rule sets the value of an outcome variable to the value obtained by looking up the value of the associated expression in the lookupTable associated with the outcome's declaration.

5.87.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class is given in Table 5.87.1.

Table 5.87.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the outcome variable to be set.

5.87.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class is given in Table 5.87.2.

Table 5.87.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "LookupOutcomeValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the single expression to be defined. An expression which must have single cardinality and an effective base-type of either integer, float or duration. Integer type is required when the associated table is a matchTable.

5.88 Mapping Class Description

The data model for the "Mapping" class is shown in Figure 5.88 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.88.

UML diagram of the Mapping class.

Figure 5.88 - Mapping class definitions.

Table 5.88 Description of the "Mapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Mapping
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A special class used to create a mapping from a source set of any base-type (except file and duration) to a single 'float'. Note that mappings from values of base-type 'float' should be avoided due to the difficulty of matching floating point values, see the match operator for more details. When mapping containers the result is the sum of the mapped values from the target set. See the MapResponse class for details.

5.88.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class is given in Table 5.88.1.

Table 5.88.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lower-bound
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The lower bound for the result of mapping a container. If unspecified there is no lower-bound.

5.88.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class is given in Table 5.88.2.

Table 5.88.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "Mapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name upper-bound
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The upper bound for the result of mapping a container. If unspecified there is no upper-bound.

5.88.3 "default-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "Mapping" class is given in Table 5.88.3.

Table 5.88.3 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "Mapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default value from the target set to be used when no explicit mapping for a source value is given.

5.88.4 "qti-map-entry" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-map-entry" attribute for the "Mapping" class is given in Table 5.88.4.

Table 5.88.4 Description of the "qti-map-entry" attribute for the "Mapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-map-entry
Data Type MapEntry
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The map is defined by a set of mapEntries, each of which maps a single value from the source set onto a single float.

5.89 MatchInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "MatchInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.89 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.89.

UML diagram of the MatchInteraction class.

Figure 5.89 - MatchInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.89 Description of the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MatchInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description A match interaction is a blockInteraction that presents candidates with two sets of choices and allows them to create associates between pairs of choices in the two sets, but not between pairs of choices in the same set. Further restrictions can still be placed on the allowable associations using the match-max characteristic of the choices. The matchInteraction must be bound to a response variable with base-type 'directedPair' and either single or multiple cardinality.

5.89.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.1.

Table 5.89.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is 'true' then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.89.2 "max-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.2.

Table 5.89.2 Description of the "max-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of associations that the candidate is allowed to make. If max-associations is 0 then there is no restriction. If max-associations is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.89.3 "min-associations" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.3.

Table 5.89.3 Description of the "min-associations" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-associations
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of associations that the candidate is required to make to form a valid response. If min-associations is 0 then the candidate is not required to make any associations. min-associations must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-associations.

5.89.4 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.4.

Table 5.89.4 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-associations constraint.

5.89.5 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.5.

Table 5.89.5 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-associations constraint.

5.89.6 "data-first-column-header" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-first-column-header" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.6.

Table 5.89.6 Description of the "data-first-column-header" characteristic for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-first-column-header
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom text to be rendered in the top-left header cell of the table (headings must be visible).

5.89.7 "qti-simple-match-set" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-simple-match-set" attribute for the "MatchInteraction" class is given in Table 5.89.7.

Table 5.89.7 Description of the "qti-simple-match-set" attribute for the "MatchInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-simple-match-set
Data Type SimpleMatchSet
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description The two sets of choices, the first set defines the source choices and the second set the targets.

5.90 MatchTable Class Description

The data model for the "MatchTable" class is shown in Figure 5.90 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.90.

UML diagram of the MatchTable class.

Figure 5.90 - MatchTable class definitions.

Table 5.90 Description of the "MatchTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MatchTable
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A matchTable transforms a source integer by finding the first qti-match-table-entry with an exact match to the source.

5.90.1 "default-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "MatchTable" class is given in Table 5.90.1.

Table 5.90.1 Description of the "default-value" characteristic for the "MatchTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default-value
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The default outcome value to be used when no matching table entry is found. If omitted, the NULL value is used.

5.90.2 "qti-match-table-entry" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-match-table-entry" attribute for the "MatchTable" class is given in Table 5.90.2.

Table 5.90.2 Description of the "qti-match-table-entry" attribute for the "MatchTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-match-table-entry
Data Type MatchTableEntry
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The set of MatchTableEntry allow the definition of each entry in the table.

5.91 MathOperator Class Description

The data model for the "MathOperator" class is shown in Figure 5.91 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.91.

UML diagram of the MathOperator class.

Figure 5.91 - MathOperator class definitions.

Table 5.91 Description of the "MathOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MathOperator
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The mathOperator operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and have numerical base-types. The trigonometric functions, sin, cos and tan, take one argument in radians, which evaluates to a single float. Other functions take one numerical argument. Further functions might take more than one numerical argument, e.g. atan2 (two argument arc tan). The result is a single float, except for the functions signum, floor and ceil, which return a single integer. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions falls outside the natural domain of the function called by mathOperator, e.g. log(0) or asin(2), then the result is NULL.

5.91.1 "name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathOperator" class is given in Table 5.91.1.

Table 5.91.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name name
Data Type MathOperatorNameEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { sin | cos | tan | sec | csc | cot | asin | acos | atan | atan2 | asec | acsc | acot | sinh | cosh | tanh | sech | csch | coth | log | ln | exp | abs | signum | floor | ceil | toDegrees | toRadians }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the name of the math operator (this is from an enumerated list).

5.91.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "MathOperator" class is given in Table 5.91.2.

Table 5.91.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "MathOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The mathOperator operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and have numerical base-types. The trigonometric functions, sin, cos and tan, take one argument in radians, which evaluates to a single float. Other functions take one numerical argument. Further functions might take more than one numerical argument, e.g. atan2 (two argument arc tan). The result is a single float, except for the functions signum, floor and ceil, which return a single integer. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions falls outside the natural domain of the function called by mathOperator, e.g. log(0) or asin(2), then the result is NULL. See Subsection 2.12 for the set of associated rules.

5.92 MediaInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "MediaInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.92 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.92.

UML diagram of the MediaInteraction class.

Figure 5.92 - MediaInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.92 Description of the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MediaInteraction
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The Media Interaction allows more control over the way the candidate interacts with a time-based media object and allows the number of times the media object was experienced to be reported in the value of the associated response variable, which must be of base-type integer and single cardinality.

5.92.1 "autostart" Characteristic Description

The description of the "autostart" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.1.

Table 5.92.1 Description of the "autostart" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name autostart
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The autostart characteristic determines if the media object should begin as soon as the candidate starts the attempt (true) or if the media object should be started under the control of the candidate (false).

5.92.2 "min-plays" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.2.

Table 5.92.2 Description of the "min-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-plays
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The min-plays attribute indicates that the media object should be played a minimum number of times by the candidate. The techniques required to enforce this will vary from system to system, in some systems it may not be possible at all. By default there is no minimum. Failure to play the media object the minimum number of times constitutes an invalid response.

5.92.3 "max-plays" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.3.

Table 5.92.3 Description of the "max-plays" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-plays
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The max-plays attribute indicates that the media object can be played at most max-plays times - it must not be possible for the candidate to play the media object more than max-play times. A value of 0 (the default) indicates that there is no limit.

5.92.4 "loop" Characteristic Description

The description of the "loop" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.4.

Table 5.92.4 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name loop
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The loop attribute is used to set continuous play mode. In continuous play mode, once the media object has started to play it should play continuously (subject to max-plays).

5.92.5 "coords" Characteristic Description

The description of the "coords" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.5.

Table 5.92.5 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name coords
Data Type Coords
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This provides the coordinates that determine the size and location of an area defined by a corresponding rectange as defined by: left-x, top-y, right-x, bottom-y.

5.92.6 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.6.

Table 5.92.6 Description of the "object" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The media object itself.

5.92.7 "audio" Attribute Description

The description of the "audio" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.7.

Table 5.92.7 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name audio
Data Type Audio
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion audio (as per the HTML5 tag).of

5.92.8 "video" Attribute Description

The description of the "video" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class is given in Table 5.92.8.

Table 5.92.8 Description of the "video" attribute for the "MediaInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name video
Data Type Video
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of a video (as per the HTML5 tag).

5.93 ModalFeedback Class Description

The data model for the "ModalFeedback" class is shown in Figure 5.93 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.93.

UML diagram of the ModalFeedback class.

Figure 5.93 - ModalFeedback class definitions.

Table 5.93 Description of the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ModalFeedback
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Modal feedback is shown to the candidate directly following response processing. The value of an outcome variable is used in conjunction with the showHide and identifier characteristics to determine whether or not the feedback is shown. The content of the modalFeedback must not contain any interactions.

5.93.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.1.

Table 5.93.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of an outcome variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the feedback is controlled by assigning a value (or values) to this outcome variable during responseProcessing.

5.93.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.2.

Table 5.93.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the feedbackElement is controlled. If set to 'show' then the feedback is hidden by default and shown only if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier attribute. If set to 'hide' then the feedback is shown by default and hidden if the associated outcome variable matches, or contains, the value of the identifier characteristic.

5.93.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.3.

Table 5.93.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the feedback in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.93.4 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.4.

Table 5.93.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Delivery engines are not required to present the title to the candidate but may do so, for example as the title of a modal pop-up window.

5.93.5 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.5.

Table 5.93.5 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.93.6 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.6.

Table 5.93.6 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Permits the identification of the stylesheets that are to be use to define the styling of the content.

5.93.7 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.7.

Table 5.93.7 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type FeedbackFlowContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The container for the original content that MAY be presented for the model feedback.

5.93.8 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class is given in Table 5.93.8.

Table 5.93.8 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "ModalFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The container for the alternative accessible content that MAY be presented for the model feedback.

5.94 NumericLogic1toMany Class Description

The data model for the "NumericLogic1toMany" class is shown in Figure 5.94 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.94.

UML diagram of the NumericLogic1toMany class.

Figure 5.94 - NumericLogic1toMany class definitions.

Table 5.94 Description of the "NumericLogic1toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name NumericLogic1toMany
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the combination of the one or more child numeric expressions (see the NumericExpressionGroup abstract class for the details on the permitted expressions).

5.94.1 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "NumericLogic1toMany" class is given in Table 5.94.1.

Table 5.94.1 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "NumericLogic1toMany" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type NumericExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is the abstract attribute that enables the set of child numeric expressions to be identified (see the abstract class NumericExpressionGroup for the set of permitted expressions).

5.95 OUL Class Description

The data model for the "OUL" class is shown in Figure 5.95 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.95.

UML diagram of the OUL class.

Figure 5.95 - OUL class definitions.

Table 5.95 Description of the "OUL" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OUL
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Provides the HTML 'ol' and 'ul' tag functionalities. These provide the ordered and unordered list capability. The 'ol' tag represents a list of items, where the items have been intentionally ordered, such that changing the order would change the meaning of the document. The 'ul' tags have no expicit order relationship. The items of the list are the 'li' child nodes.

5.95.1 "li" Attribute Description

The description of the "li" attribute for the "OUL" class is given in Table 5.95.1.

Table 5.95.1 Description of the "li" attribute for the "OUL" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name li
Data Type LI
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The list of child 'li' tags i.e. the HTML 'li' tags. This is the content list.

5.96 Object Class Description

The data model for the "Object" class is shown in Figure 5.96 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.96.

UML diagram of the Object class.

Figure 5.96 - Object class definitions.

Table 5.96 Description of the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Object
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the representation for the HTML 'object' tag.

5.96.1 "data" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data" characteristic for the "Object" class is given in Table 5.96.1.

Table 5.96.1 Description of the "data" characteristic for the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The data characteristic provides a URI for locating the data associated with the object.

5.96.2 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "Object" class is given in Table 5.96.2.

Table 5.96.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The Mime-type for the object.

5.96.3 "width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "width" characteristic for the "Object" class is given in Table 5.96.3.

Table 5.96.3 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name width
Data Type Length
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The width of the canvas for the object.

5.96.4 "height" Characteristic Description

The description of the "height" characteristic for the "Object" class is given in Table 5.96.4.

Table 5.96.4 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name height
Data Type Length
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The height of the canvas for the object.

5.96.5 "objectFlowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "objectFlowGroup" attribute for the "Object" class is given in Table 5.96.5.

Table 5.96.5 Description of the "objectFlowGroup" attribute for the "Object" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name objectFlowGroup
Data Type ObjectFlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An abstract attribute that enables the relevant complex content/parameters for the object to be defined.

5.97 OrderInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "OrderInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.97 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.97.

UML diagram of the OrderInteraction class.

Figure 5.97 - OrderInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.97 Description of the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OrderInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description In an Order Interaction the candidate's task is to reorder the choices, the order in which the choices are displayed initially is significant. By default the candidate's task is to order all of the choices but a subset of the choices can be requested using the max-choices and min-choices attributes. When specified the candidate must select a subset of the choices and impose an ordering on them.

5.97.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.1.

Table 5.97.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the shuffle characteristic is 'true' then the delivery engine must randomize the order in which the choices are initially presented, subject to the value of the fixed attribute of each choice.

5.97.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.2.

Table 5.97.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices that the candidate must select and order to form a valid response to the interaction. If specified, min-choices must be '1' or greater but must not exceed the number of choices available. If unspecified, all of the choices must be ordered and max-choices is ignored.'

5.97.3 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.3.

Table 5.97.3 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of choices that the candidate may select and order when responding to the interaction. Used in conjunction with min-choices, if specified, max-choices must be greater than or equal to min-choices and must not exceed the number of choices available. If unspecified, all of the choices may be ordered.

5.97.4 "orientation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.4.

Table 5.97.4 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name orientation
Data Type OrientationEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { horizontal | vertical }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The orientation attribute provides a hint to rendering systems that the ordering has an inherent vertical or horizontal interpretation.

5.97.5 "data-min-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.5.

Table 5.97.5 Description of the "data-min-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-min-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the min-choices constraint.

5.97.6 "data-max-selections-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.6.

Table 5.97.6 Description of the "data-max-selections-message" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-max-selections-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the max-choices constraint.

5.97.7 "data-choices-container-width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.7.

Table 5.97.7 Description of the "data-choices-container-width" characteristic for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-choices-container-width
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The ordering choices container width in pixels. Example: data-choices-container-width="100".

5.97.8 "qti-simple-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "OrderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.97.8.

Table 5.97.8 Description of the "qti-simple-choice" attribute for the "OrderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-simple-choice
Data Type SimpleChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description An ordered list of the choices that are displayed to the user. The order is the initial order of the choices presented to the user unless shuffle is true.

5.98 Ordering Class Description

The data model for the "Ordering" class is shown in Figure 5.98 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.98.

UML diagram of the Ordering class.

Figure 5.98 - Ordering class definitions.

Table 5.98 Description of the "Ordering" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Ordering
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The ordering class specifies the rule used to arrange the child elements of a section following selection. If no ordering rule is given, assume that the elements are to be ordered in the order in which they are defined. A sub-section is always treated as a single block for selection but the way it is treated when shuffling depends on its visibility. A visible sub-section is always treated as a single block but an invisible sub-section is only treated as a single block if its keep-together characteristic is 'true'. Otherwise, the child elements of the invisible sub-section are mixed into the parent's selection prior to shuffling. The ordering class also provides an opportunity for extensions to this specification to include support for more complex ordering algorithms. The selection and ordering rules define a sequence of items for each instance of the test. The sequence starts with the first item of the first section of the first test part and continues through to the last item of the last section of the last test part. This sequence is constant throughout the test. Normally this is the logical sequence perceived by the candidate but the use of pre-conditions and/or branch-rules can affect the specific path taken. The use of selection with replacement enables two or more instances of an item referred to by the same assessment-item-ref to appear in the sequence of items for a test. It is therefore an error to make such an item the target of a branch-rule. Furthermore, when reporting test results the sequence number of each item must also be reported to avoid ambiguity. See QTI Results Reporting [QTI-RR-30]. The ordering class also provides an opportunity for extensions to this specification to include support for more complex ordering algorithms.

5.98.1 "shuffle" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "Ordering" class is given in Table 5.98.1.

Table 5.98.1 Description of the "shuffle" characteristic for the "Ordering" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shuffle
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If 'true' causes the order of the child elements to be randomized. If 'false' uses the order in which the child elements are defined.

5.98.2 "extension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Ordering" class is given in Table 5.98.2.

Table 5.98.2 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Ordering" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name extension
Data Type Namespace (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is an extension point. It allows new proprietary characteristics to be defined and used for the ordering. The extension mechanism is dependent on the form of binding.

5.98.3 "extensions" Attribute Description

The description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Ordering" class is given in Table 5.98.3.

Table 5.98.3 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Ordering" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extensions
Data Type NamespaceLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags may be new tags and reused QTI ASI tags. Note that this class can be used to use proprietary ordering algorithms.

5.99 OutcomeCondition Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeCondition" class is shown in Figure 5.99 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.99.

UML diagram of the OutcomeCondition class.

Figure 5.99 - OutcomeCondition class definitions.

Table 5.99 Description of the "OutcomeCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeCondition
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables the 'If..Then..Else' rules to be defined for the outcome processing. If the expression given in a outcomeIf or outcomeElseIf evaluates to 'true' then the sub-rules contained within it are followed and any following outcomeElseIf or outcomeElse parts are ignored for this outcome condition. If the expression given in a outcomeIf or outcomeElseIf does not evaluate to 'true' then consideration passes to the next outcomeElseIf or, if there are no more outcomeElseIf parts then the sub-rules of the outcomeElse are followed (if specified).

5.99.1 "qti-outcome-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class is given in Table 5.99.1.

Table 5.99.1 Description of the "qti-outcome-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-if
Data Type OutcomeIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description A outcomeIf part, this must occur, consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following outcomeElseIf or outcomeElse parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.99.2 "qti-outcome-else-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-else-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class is given in Table 5.99.2.

Table 5.99.2 Description of the "qti-outcome-else-if" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-else-if
Data Type OutcomeIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An outcomeElseIf part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following outcomeElseIf or outcomeElse parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.99.3 "qti-outcome-else" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-else" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class is given in Table 5.99.3.

Table 5.99.3 Description of the "qti-outcome-else" attribute for the "OutcomeCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-else
Data Type OutcomeElse
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the 'Else' part of the 'If..Then..Else' clause. There may be only one 'else' clause.

5.100 OutcomeElse Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeElse" class is shown in Figure 5.100 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.100.

UML diagram of the OutcomeElse class.

Figure 5.100 - OutcomeElse class definitions.

Table 5.100 Description of the "OutcomeElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeElse
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the else part of the 'if..then..elseif..else' structure for outcomes processing.

5.100.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

The description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeElse" class is given in Table 5.100.1.

Table 5.100.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name outcomeRule
Data Type OutcomeRule
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that allow the insertion of the outcome rules that are compositions of a set of QTI tags such as 'setOutcomeValue', outcomeCondition', etc. The Outcome rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

5.101 OutcomeIf Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeIf" class is shown in Figure 5.101 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.101.

UML diagram of the OutcomeIf class.

Figure 5.101 - OutcomeIf class definitions.

Table 5.101 Description of the "OutcomeIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeIf
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An outcomeIf part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following outcomeElseIf or outcomeElse parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.101.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class is given in Table 5.101.1.

Table 5.101.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the expression for the 'If' clause to be defined.

5.101.2 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

The description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class is given in Table 5.101.2.

Table 5.101.2 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name outcomeRule
Data Type OutcomeRule
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the set of outcome processing rules that define the 'If' clause to be entered.

5.102 OutcomeProcessing Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeProcessing" class is shown in Figure 5.102 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.102.

UML diagram of the OutcomeProcessing class.

Figure 5.102 - OutcomeProcessing class definitions.

Table 5.102 Description of the "OutcomeProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeProcessing
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Outcome processing takes place each time the candidate submits the responses for an item (when in individual submission mode) or a group of items (when in simultaneous submission mode). It happens after any (item level) response processing triggered by the submission. The values of the test's outcome variables are always reset to their defaults prior to carrying out the instructions described by the outcomeRules. Because outcome processing happens each time the candidate submits responses the resulting values of the test-level outcomes may be used to activate test-level feedback during the test or to control the behaviour of subsequent parts through the use of preConditions and branchRules. The structure of outcome processing is similar to that or responseProcessing.

5.102.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

The description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessing" class is given in Table 5.102.1.

Table 5.102.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name outcomeRule
Data Type OutcomeRule
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the declaration of the set of outcome rules. Outcome rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

5.103 OutcomeProcessingFragment Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeProcessingFragment" class is shown in Figure 5.103 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.103.

UML diagram of the OutcomeProcessingFragment class.

Figure 5.103 - OutcomeProcessingFragment class definitions.

Table 5.103 Description of the "OutcomeProcessingFragment" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeProcessingFragment
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description An outcomeProcessingFragment is a simple group of outcomeRules which are grouped together in order to allow them to be managed as a separate resource. It should not be used for any other purpose.

5.103.1 "outcomeRule" Attribute Description

The description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessingFragment" class is given in Table 5.103.1.

Table 5.103.1 Description of the "outcomeRule" attribute for the "OutcomeProcessingFragment" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name outcomeRule
Data Type OutcomeRule
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the declaration of the set of outcome rules. Outcome rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

5.104 PatternMatch Class Description

The data model for the "PatternMatch" class is shown in Figure 5.104 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.104.

UML diagram of the PatternMatch class.

Figure 5.104 - PatternMatch class definitions.

Table 5.104 Description of the "PatternMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PatternMatch
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The patternMatch operator takes a sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the sub-expression matches the regular expression given by pattern and 'false' if it does not. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

5.104.1 "pattern" Characteristic Description

The description of the "pattern" characteristic for the "PatternMatch" class is given in Table 5.104.1.

Table 5.104.1 Description of the "pattern" characteristic for the "PatternMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name pattern
Data Type StringOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type), EncVariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The syntax for the regular expression language is as defined in Appendix F of [XSCHEMA, 01].

5.104.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "PatternMatch" class is given in Table 5.104.2.

Table 5.104.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "PatternMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the required QTI expression to be identified.

5.105 Picture Class Description

The data model for the "Picture" class is shown in Figure 5.105 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.105.

UML diagram of the Picture class.

Figure 5.105 - Picture class definitions.

Table 5.105 Description of the "Picture" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Picture
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'picture' tag (a new tag added in HTML5).

5.105.1 "source" Attribute Description

The description of the "source" attribute for the "Picture" class is given in Table 5.105.1.

Table 5.105.1 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Picture" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name source
Data Type Source
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The 'source' tag allows authors to specify multiple alternative media resources for the picture images.

5.105.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "Picture" class is given in Table 5.105.2.

Table 5.105.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "Picture" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The 'img' tag is used to provide backward compatibility for browsers that do not support the 'picture' tag, or if none of the 'source' tags matched.

5.106 PortableCustomInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.106 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.106.

UML diagram of the PortableCustomInteraction class.

Figure 5.106 - PortableCustomInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.106 Description of the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PortableCustomInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description This container enables the placement of PCIs in the assessment activity. The supplied information enables the launch and collection of state information from the actual PCI as defined by the PCI specification [PCI, 20]. PCIs MUST be used instead of custom interactions (the latter have been deprecated).

5.106.1 "custom-interaction-type-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "custom-interaction-type-identifier" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.1.

Table 5.106.1 Description of the "custom-interaction-type-identifier" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name custom-interaction-type-identifier
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This identifies the particular custom interaction type this qti-portable-custom-interaction-instance represents. It is recommended that a Federated Content URN [RFC 4198] is used as the value of this URI to prevent namespace collisions across implementations.

5.106.2 "module" Characteristic Description

The description of the "module" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.2.

Table 5.106.2 Description of the "module" characteristic for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name module
Data Type NCName (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This optional characteristic may be used to provide the Module Id which would be passed at runtime to the PCI API to dynamically load the Javascript module which implements the functionality of this custom interaction. If this characteristic is provided the qti-interaction-modules child attribute is not required, if omitted then the modules child element is mandatory.

5.106.3 "qti-interaction-modules" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-interaction-modules" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.3.

Table 5.106.3 Description of the "qti-interaction-modules" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-interaction-modules
Data Type InteractionModules
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the set of interaction modules for use with the PCI. Can specify the PCI module configuration (primary configuration) to apply for normal load of Javascript modules implementing the PCI and an alternate (fallback) configuration to apply if the normal load fails. Providing a fallback configuration can be especially valuable where the primary configuration loads the modules from an internet location (e.g. from a content delivery network) rather than a package a fallback configuration may be provided which loads the modules from the QTI content package for use in secure browser configurations which may not allow access to external URLs.

5.106.4 "qti-interaction-markup" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-interaction-markup" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.4.

Table 5.106.4 Description of the "qti-interaction-markup" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-interaction-markup
Data Type InteractionMarkup
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The optional markup that can be rendered as part of the PCI presentation. Any markup provided as the contents of this element will be made available by the delivery engine to the PCI module at runtime which the module can choose to make use of when rendering the portable custom interaction. In particular it may contain a template element which would not be allowed elsewhere in QTI documents which may include markup not stamped into the DOM by browser by default, and which would require activation by the Javascript code of the module.

5.106.5 "qti-template-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.5.

Table 5.106.5 Description of the "qti-template-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-variable
Data Type TemplateUniqueIDRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This allows an item author to bind a template variable to the PCI instance so that the delivery engine will provide the value of that variable to the PCI module on module initialization.

5.106.6 "qti-context-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-context-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class is given in Table 5.106.6.

Table 5.106.6 Description of the "qti-context-variable" attribute for the "PortableCustomInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-context-variable
Data Type ContextUniqueIDRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This allows an item author to bind a context variable to the PCI instance so that the delivery engine will provide the value of that variable to the PCI module on module initialization.

5.107 PositionObjectInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.107 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.107.

UML diagram of the PositionObjectInteraction class.

Figure 5.107 - PositionObjectInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.107 Description of the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PositionObjectInteraction
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The position object interaction consists of a single image which must be positioned on another graphic image (the stage) by the candidate. Like selectPointInteraction, the associated response may have an areaMapping that scores the response on the basis of comparing it against predefined areas but the delivery engine must not indicate these areas of the stage. Only the actual position(s) selected by the candidate shall be indicated. The position object interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of point and single or multiple cardinality. The point records the coordinates, with respect to the stage, of the centre point of the image being positioned.

5.107.1 "center-point" Characteristic Description

The description of the "center-point" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.1.

Table 5.107.1 Description of the "center-point" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name center-point
Data Type IntegerList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): Int (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The centre-point attribute defines the point on the image being positioned that is to be treated as the centre as an offset from the top-left corner of the image in horizontal, vertical order. By default this is the centre of the image's bounding rectangle. The stage on which the image is to be positioned may be shared amongst several position object interactions and is therefore defined in a class of its own: positionObjectStage.

5.107.2 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.2.

Table 5.107.2 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of positions that the image must be placed to form a valid response to the interaction. If specified, min-choices must be 1 or greater but must not exceed the limit imposed by max-choices.

5.107.3 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.3.

Table 5.107.3 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The maximum number of positions (on the stage) that the image can be placed. If max-choices is 0 there is no limit. If max-choices is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.107.4 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.4.

Table 5.107.4 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image, required, to be positioned on the stage by the candidate. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and either the 'img or 'picture' tags SHOULD be used.

5.107.5 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.5.

Table 5.107.5 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image, supplied using the HTML 'img' tag, required to be positioned on the stage by the candidate.

5.107.6 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class is given in Table 5.107.6.

Table 5.107.6 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image, supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag, required to be positioned on the stage by the candidate.

5.108 PositionObjectStage Class Description

The data model for the "PositionObjectStage" class is shown in Figure 5.108 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.108.

UML diagram of the PositionObjectStage class.

Figure 5.108 - PositionObjectStage class definitions.

Table 5.108 Description of the "PositionObjectStage" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PositionObjectStage
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the content frame for the positionObjectInteraction(s).

5.108.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class is given in Table 5.108.1.

Table 5.108.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the unique identifier that is used by other tags to reference this tag e.g. by the APIP accessibility annotations [APIP, 14].

5.108.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class is given in Table 5.108.2.

Table 5.108.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "PositionObjectStage" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.108.3 "imageSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class is given in Table 5.108.3.

Table 5.108.3 Description of the "imageSelection" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name imageSelection
Data Type PositionObjectStageSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image to be used as a stage onto which individual positionObjectInteractions allow the candidate to place their objects. The use of the 'object' tag for identification of the image is deprecated.

5.108.4 "qti-position-object-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-position-object-interaction" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class is given in Table 5.108.4.

Table 5.108.4 Description of the "qti-position-object-interaction" attribute for the "PositionObjectStage" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-position-object-interaction
Data Type PositionObjectInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description The set of ordered positionObjectInteractions that are used to create the item.

5.109 Prompt Class Description

The data model for the "Prompt" class is shown in Figure 5.109 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.109.

UML diagram of the Prompt class.

Figure 5.109 - Prompt class definitions.

Table 5.109 Description of the "Prompt" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Prompt
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables an author to define the prompt for the question. The way in which the prompt is displayed depends upon the rendering system. The prompt should not be used to contain the actual root of the question.

5.109.1 "promptStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "promptStaticGroup" attribute for the "Prompt" class is given in Table 5.109.1.

Table 5.109.1 Description of the "promptStaticGroup" attribute for the "Prompt" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name promptStaticGroup
Data Type PromptStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex content that can be used to express the prompt.

5.110 Protractor Class Description

The data model for the "Protractor" class is shown in Figure 5.110 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.110.

UML diagram of the Protractor class.

Figure 5.110 - Protractor class definitions.

Table 5.110 Description of the "Protractor" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Protractor
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the information about the permitted characteristics of the protractor companion material.

5.110.1 "qti-description" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Protractor" class is given in Table 5.110.1.

Table 5.110.1 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Protractor" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-description
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides for a human readable description of the functionality/capability of the protractor that is available to the learner.

5.110.2 "qti-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-increment" attribute for the "Protractor" class is given in Table 5.110.2.

Table 5.110.2 Description of the "qti-increment" attribute for the "Protractor" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-increment
Data Type IncrementSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that provides selection of the type of increment information. The choice is between SI or US based units.

5.111 Q Class Description

The data model for the "Q" class is shown in Figure 5.111 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.111.

UML diagram of the Q class.

Figure 5.111 - Q class definitions.

Table 5.111 Description of the "Q" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Q
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the content definition for the HTML 'q' tag. The q element represents some phrasing content quoted from another source. Quotation punctuation (such as quotation marks) that is quoting the contents of the tag must not appear immediately before, after, or inside q tags; they will be inserted into the rendering by the user agent. Content inside a 'q' tag must be quoted from another source, whose address, if it has one, may be cited in the cite attribute. The source may be fictional, as when quoting characters in a novel or screenplay. The 'q' tag must not be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements. The use of 'q' tags to mark up quotations is entirely optional; using explicit quotation punctuation without 'q' tags is just as correct.

5.111.1 "cite" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cite" characteristic for the "Q" class is given in Table 5.111.1.

Table 5.111.1 Description of the "cite" characteristic for the "Q" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cite
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the 'cite' characteristic is present, it must be a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces. To obtain the corresponding citation link, the value of the attribute must be resolved relative to the element. User agents may allow users to follow such citation links, but they are primarily intended for private use (e.g. by server-side scripts collecting statistics about a site's use of quotations), not for readers.

5.111.2 "inlineGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "Q" class is given in Table 5.111.2.

Table 5.111.2 Description of the "inlineGroup" attribute for the "Q" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineGroup
Data Type InlineGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of HTML inline content.

5.112 RTC Class Description

The data model for the "RTC" class is shown in Figure 5.112 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.112.

UML diagram of the RTC class.

Figure 5.112 - RTC class definitions.

Table 5.112 Description of the "RTC" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RTC
Class Type Container [ Selection , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This feature is a part of the HTML5 Ruby annotation. The 'rtc' tag marks a ruby text container for ruby text components in a ruby annotation. When it is the child of a ruby tag it doesn't represent anything itself, but its parent ruby tag uses it as part of determining what it represents. An rtc tag that is not a child of a ruby tag represents the same thing as its children.

5.112.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "RTC" class is given in Table 5.112.1.

Table 5.112.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "RTC" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name phrasingContentModel
Data Type PhrasingContentModelHTML5
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that defines the permitted content for the 'rtc' tag. This content is collectively termed 'Phrasing'. Phrasing content is the text of the document, as well as tags that mark up that text at the intra-paragraph level. Runs of phrasing content form paragraphs.

5.112.2 "rt" Attribute Description

The description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTC" class is given in Table 5.112.2.

Table 5.112.2 Description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTC" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rt
Data Type BaseHTML5Phrasing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the 'rt' Ruby tag within the 'rtc' Ruby tag. This tag can be intermingled with the associated 'Phrasing' content.

5.113 Repeat Class Description

The data model for the "Repeat" class is shown in Figure 5.113 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.113.

UML diagram of the Repeat class.

Figure 5.113 - Repeat class definitions.

Table 5.113 Description of the "Repeat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Repeat
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is a QTI expression function. The repeat operator takes one or more sub-expressions, all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality and the same base-type. The result is an ordered container having the same base-type as its sub-expressions. The container is filled sequentially by evaluating each sub-expression in turn and adding the resulting single values to the container, iterating this process number-repeats times in total. If number-repeats refers to a variable whose value is less than 1, the value of the whole expression is NULL. Any sub-expressions evaluating to NULL are ignored. If all sub-expressions are NULL then the result is NULL.

5.113.1 "number-repeats" Characteristic Description

The description of the "number-repeats" characteristic for the "Repeat" class is given in Table 5.113.1.

Table 5.113.1 Description of the "number-repeats" characteristic for the "Repeat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name number-repeats
Data Type IntOrIdentifier
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type), Int (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines the number of iterations applied to the processing of the contents.

5.113.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Repeat" class is given in Table 5.113.2.

Table 5.113.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Repeat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of an arbitrary set of child expressions. There must be at least one expression.

5.114 ResponseCondition Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseCondition" class is shown in Figure 5.114 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.114.

UML diagram of the ResponseCondition class.

Figure 5.114 - ResponseCondition class definitions.

Table 5.114 Description of the "ResponseCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseCondition
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables the 'If..Then..Else' rules to be defined for the response processing. If the expression given in a responseIf or responseElseIf evaluates to 'true' then the sub-rules contained within it are followed and any following responseElseIf or responseElse parts are ignored for this response condition. If the expression given in a responseIf or responseElseIf does not evaluate to 'true' then consideration passes to the next responseElseIf or, if there are no more responseElseIf parts then the sub-rules of the responseElse are followed (if specified).

5.114.1 "qti-response-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class is given in Table 5.114.1.

Table 5.114.1 Description of the "qti-response-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-if
Data Type ResponseIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description A qti-response-if part, this must occur, consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following qti-response-else-if or qti-response-else parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.114.2 "qti-response-else-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-else-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class is given in Table 5.114.2.

Table 5.114.2 Description of the "qti-response-else-if" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-else-if
Data Type ResponseIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description A qti-response-else-if part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following qti-response-else-if or qti-response-else parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.114.3 "qti-response-else" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-else" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class is given in Table 5.114.3.

Table 5.114.3 Description of the "qti-response-else" attribute for the "ResponseCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-else
Data Type ResponseElse
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the 'Else' part of the 'If..Then..Else' clause. There may be only one 'else' clause.

5.115 ResponseDeclaration Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is shown in Figure 5.115 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.115.

UML diagram of the ResponseDeclaration class.

Figure 5.115 - ResponseDeclaration class definitions.

Table 5.115 Description of the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseDeclaration
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Response variables are declared by response declarations and bound to interactions in the itemBody. Each response variable declared may be bound to one and only one interaction. At runtime, response variables are instantiated as part of an item session. Their values are always initialized to NULL (no value) regardless of whether or not a default value is given in the declaration. A response variable with a NULL value indicates that the candidate has not offered a response, either because they have not attempted the item at all or because they have attempted it and chosen not to provide a response. If a default value has been provided for a response variable then the variable is set to this value at the start of the first attempt. If the candidate never attempts the item, in other words, the item session passes straight from the initial state to the closed state without going through the interacting state, then the response variable remains NULL and the default value is never used.

5.115.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.1.

Table 5.115.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifiers of the built-in session variables are reserved. They are completionStatus, numAttempts and duration. All item variables declared in an item share the same namespace. Different items have different namespaces.

5.115.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.2.

Table 5.115.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cardinality
Data Type CardinalityEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { multiple | ordered | record | single }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each variable is either single valued or multi-valued. Multi-valued variables are referred to as containers and come in ordered, unordered and record types. See cardinality for more information.

5.115.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.3.

Table 5.115.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The value space from which the variable's value can be drawn (or in the case of containers, from which the individual values are drawn) is identified with a base-type. The base-type selects one of a small set of predefined types that are considered to have atomic values within the runtime data model. Variables with record cardinality have no base-type.

5.115.4 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.4.

Table 5.115.4 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default-value
Data Type DefaultValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional default value for the variable. The point at which a variable is set to its default value varies depending on the type of item variable.

5.115.5 "qti-correct-response" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-correct-response" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.5.

Table 5.115.5 Description of the "qti-correct-response" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-correct-response
Data Type CorrectResponse
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description A response declaration may assign an optional correctResponse. This value may indicate the only possible value of the response variable to be considered correct or merely just a correct value. For responses that are being measured against a more complex scale than correct/incorrect this value should be set to the (or an) optimal value. Finally, for responses for which no such optimal value is defined the correctResponse must be omitted. If a delivery system supports the display of a solution then it should display the correct values of responses (where defined) to the candidate. When correct values are displayed they must be clearly distinguished from the candidate's own responses (which may be hidden completely if necessary).

5.115.6 "qti-mapping" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.6.

Table 5.115.6 Description of the "qti-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-mapping
Data Type Mapping
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The mapping provides a mapping from the set of base values to a set of numeric values for the purposes of response processing. See the MapResponse class for information on how to use the mapping.

5.115.7 "qti-area-mapping" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-area-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.115.7.

Table 5.115.7 Description of the "qti-area-mapping" attribute for the "ResponseDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-area-mapping
Data Type AreaMapping
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The qti-area-mapping, which may only be present in declarations of variables with base-type point, provides an alternative form of mapping which tests against areas of the coordinate space instead of mapping single values i.e. single points.

5.116 ResponseElse Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseElse" class is shown in Figure 5.116 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.116.

UML diagram of the ResponseElse class.

Figure 5.116 - ResponseElse class definitions.

Table 5.116 Description of the "ResponseElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseElse
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the 'Else' clause of the 'If..Then..Else' for the response processing functionality. If the expression given in a responseIf or responseElseIf evaluates to 'true' then the sub-rules contained within it are followed and any following responseElseIf or responseElse parts are ignored for this response condition. If the expression given in a responseIf or responseElseIf does not evaluate to 'true' then consideration passes to the next responseElseIf or, if there are no more responseElseIf parts then the sub-rules of the responseElse are followed (if specified).

5.116.1 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseElse" class is given in Table 5.116.1.

Table 5.116.1 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name responseRuleGroup
Data Type ResponseRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the set of response rules that define the clause to be entered.

5.117 ResponseIf Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseIf" class is shown in Figure 5.117 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.117.

UML diagram of the ResponseIf class.

Figure 5.117 - ResponseIf class definitions.

Table 5.117 Description of the "ResponseIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseIf
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the 'If' and 'ElseIf' clauses of the 'If..Then..Else' for the response processing functionality. A responseIf part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is 'true' then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following responseElseIf or responseElse parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.117.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class is given in Table 5.117.1.

Table 5.117.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the expression for the 'if' clause to be defined.

5.117.2 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class is given in Table 5.117.2.

Table 5.117.2 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name responseRuleGroup
Data Type ResponseRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the set of response rules that define the 'If' clause to be entered.

5.118 ResponseProcessingFragment Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseProcessingFragment" class is shown in Figure 5.118 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.118.

UML diagram of the ResponseProcessingFragment class.

Figure 5.118 - ResponseProcessingFragment class definitions.

Table 5.118 Description of the "ResponseProcessingFragment" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseProcessingFragment
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A responseProcessingFragment is a simple group of responseRules which are grouped together in order to allow them to be managed as a separate resource. It should not be used for any other purpose. Note that a response processing template allows a system to carry out response processing without having to parse the individual response processing rules. On the other hand, a responseProcessing element containing a reference to an externally defined response processing fragment must be parsed to determine the actions to carry out.

5.118.1 "responseRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessingFragment" class is given in Table 5.118.1.

Table 5.118.1 Description of the "responseRuleGroup" attribute for the "ResponseProcessingFragment" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name responseRuleGroup
Data Type ResponseRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the set of response rules that define the response proessing fragment to be entered.

5.119 RoundTo Class Description

The data model for the "RoundTo" class is shown in Figure 5.119 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.119.

UML diagram of the RoundTo class.

Figure 5.119 - RoundTo class definitions.

Table 5.119 Description of the "RoundTo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RoundTo
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The roundTo operator takes one sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a single float with the value nearest to that of the expression's value such that when converted to a decimal string it represents the expression rounded by the specified rounding method to the specified precision. If the sub-expression is NULL, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. When rounding to n significant figures, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting from the first non-zero digit from the left in the number. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded. When rounding to n decimal places, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting to the right from the decimal point. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded.

5.119.1 "rounding-mode" Characteristic Description

The description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class is given in Table 5.119.1.

Table 5.119.1 Description of the "rounding-mode" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name rounding-mode
Data Type RoundingModeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { decimalPlaces | significantFigures }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Numbers are rounded to a given number of significantFigures or decimalPlaces.

5.119.2 "figures" Characteristic Description

The description of the "figures" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class is given in Table 5.119.2.

Table 5.119.2 Description of the "figures" characteristic for the "RoundTo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name figures
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The number of figures to round to. If rounding-mode= "significantFigures", the value of figures must be a non-zero positive integer. If rounding-mode="decimalPlaces", the value of figures must be an integer greater than or equal to zero.

5.119.3 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "RoundTo" class is given in Table 5.119.3.

Table 5.119.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "RoundTo" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that allows the required QTI expression to be supplied.

5.120 RubricBlock Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.120 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.120.

UML diagram of the RubricBlock class.

Figure 5.120 - RubricBlock class definitions.

Table 5.120 Description of the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the rubric block content. A rubric block identifies part of the content that represents instructions to one or more of the actors that view the item. Although rubric blocks are defined as simpleBlocks they must not contain interactions but may contain template blocks. Rubric Blocks MUST NOT be nested within other Rubric Blocks.

5.120.1 "use" Characteristic Description

The description of the "use" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.120.1.

Table 5.120.1 Description of the "use" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name use
Data Type UseEnumExt
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): UseExtensionString (Derived-type), UseEnum (Enumeration)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The purpose for which the rubric is intended to be used. As a reading passage for multiple items, or instructions for a particular section, for example.

5.120.2 "view" Characteristic Description

The description of the "view" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.120.2.

Table 5.120.2 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name view
Data Type ViewEnum
Value Space A list from an enumerated value set of: { author | candidate | proctor | scorer | testConstructor | tutor }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The views in which the rubric block's content are to be shown.

5.120.3 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.120.3.

Table 5.120.3 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The stylesheet is used to format just the contents of the rubricBlock.

5.120.4 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.120.4.

Table 5.120.4 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type RubricBlockContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The content that be MAY presented as the rubric block is contained by this attribute.

5.120.5 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.120.5.

Table 5.120.5 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility content that be MAY presented as the rubric block is contained by this attribute.

5.121 RubricBlockContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlockContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.121 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.121.

UML diagram of the RubricBlockContentBody class.

Figure 5.121 - RubricBlockContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.121 Description of the "RubricBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlockContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for all of the content to be presented as the rubric block (excluding that used in template blocks), including all of the HTML-based content.

5.121.1 "contentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentBody" class is given in Table 5.121.1.

Table 5.121.1 Description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name contentModel
Data Type RubricBlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This abstract attribute is the container for the content that MAY be presented for the rubric block.

5.122 RubricBlockTemplateBlock Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.122 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.122.

UML diagram of the RubricBlockTemplateBlock class.

Figure 5.122 - RubricBlockTemplateBlock class definitions.

Table 5.122 Description of the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlockTemplateBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the rubric content that is used in the context of template block content.

5.122.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.1.

Table 5.122.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the templateElement is controlled by the value of the variable.

5.122.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.2.

Table 5.122.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide and identifier characteristics determine how the visibility of the template content is controlled in the same way as the similarly named show-hide and identifier characteristics of feedback content.

5.122.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.3.

Table 5.122.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the template content in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.122.4 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.4.

Table 5.122.4 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The stylesheet is used to format just the contents of the rubricBlock.

5.122.5 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.5.

Table 5.122.5 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The root element for the content that be MAY presented as the rubric block.

5.122.6 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.122.6.

Table 5.122.6 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility content that be MAY presented as the rubric block is contained by this attribute.

5.123 RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.123 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.123.

UML diagram of the RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody class.

Figure 5.123 - RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.123 Description of the "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for all of the content to be presented in template-based rubric blocks, including all of the HTML-based content.

5.123.1 "rtBlockContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "rtBlockContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" class is given in Table 5.123.1.

Table 5.123.1 Description of the "rtBlockContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rtBlockContentModel
Data Type RubricTemplateBlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This abstract attribute is the container for the content that MAY be presented for the template-based rubric blocks.

5.124 RubricBlockTemplateInline Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class is shown in Figure 5.124 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.124.

UML diagram of the RubricBlockTemplateInline class.

Figure 5.124 - RubricBlockTemplateInline class definitions.

Table 5.124 Description of the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlockTemplateInline
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the rubric content that is used in the context of a template inline content.

5.124.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.124.1.

Table 5.124.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the templateElement is controlled by the value of the variable.

5.124.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.124.2.

Table 5.124.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide and identifier characteristics determine how the visibility of the template content is controlled in the same way as the similarly named show-hide and identifier characteristics of feedback content.

5.124.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.124.3.

Table 5.124.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the template content in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.124.4 "rtInlineStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "rtInlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.124.4.

Table 5.124.4 Description of the "rtInlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "RubricBlockTemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rtInlineStaticGroup
Data Type RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that enables the complex content to be defined.

5.125 Ruby Class Description

The data model for the "Ruby" class is shown in Figure 5.125 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.125.

UML diagram of the Ruby class.

Figure 5.125 - Ruby class definitions.

Table 5.125 Description of the "Ruby" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Ruby
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This feature is a part of the HTML5 Ruby annotation. The ruby tag allows one or more spans of phrasing content to be marked with ruby annotations. Ruby annotations are short runs of text presented alongside base text, primarily used in East Asian typography as a guide for pronunciation or to include other annotations. In Japanese, this form of typography is also known as furigana. Ruby text can appear on either side, and sometimes both sides, of the base text, and it is possible to control its position using CSS.

5.125.1 "rubySelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "rubySelection" attribute for the "Ruby" class is given in Table 5.125.1.

Table 5.125.1 Description of the "rubySelection" attribute for the "Ruby" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rubySelection
Data Type RubySelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the Ruby annotation to be composed of any combination of HTML5 Phrasing content and combinations of 'rp', 'rt' and 'rtc' tags.

5.126 Rule Class Description

The data model for the "Rule" class is shown in Figure 5.126 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.126.

UML diagram of the Rule class.

Figure 5.126 - Rule class definitions.

Table 5.126 Description of the "Rule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Rule
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the information about the rule that is permitted/required for use in the assessment. The rule is defined in terms of SI or US units.

5.126.1 "qti-description" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Rule" class is given in Table 5.126.1.

Table 5.126.1 Description of the "qti-description" attribute for the "Rule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-description
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides for a human readable description of the functionality/capability of the rule that is available to the learner.

5.126.2 "qti-rule-system" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rule-system" attribute for the "Rule" class is given in Table 5.126.2.

Table 5.126.2 Description of the "qti-rule-system" attribute for the "Rule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rule-system
Data Type RuleSystemSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that provides selection of the type of increment information for the rule. The choice is between SI or US based units.

5.127 SIRuleSystem Class Description

The data model for the "SIRuleSystem" class is shown in Figure 5.127 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.127.

UML diagram of the SIRuleSystem class.

Figure 5.127 - SIRuleSystem class definitions.

Table 5.127 Description of the "SIRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SIRuleSystem
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the information about the rule that is permitted/required for use in the assessment. The rule is defined in terms of SI units.

5.127.1 "qti-minimum-length" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.127.1.

Table 5.127.1 Description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minimum-length
Data Type Integer (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The minimum length of the rule (using the units defined for the major increments).

5.127.2 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.127.2.

Table 5.127.2 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minor-increment
Data Type SILinearValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minor increment, SI units, for the rule.

5.127.3 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.127.3.

Table 5.127.3 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "SIRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-major-increment
Data Type SILinearValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The major increment, SI units, for the rule.

5.128 SelectPointInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.128 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.128.

UML diagram of the SelectPointInteraction class.

Figure 5.128 - SelectPointInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.128 Description of the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SelectPointInteraction
Class Type Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are: The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description Like hotspotInteraction, a select point interaction is a graphic interaction. The candidate's task is to select one or more points. The associated response may have an areaMapping that scores the response on the basis of comparing it against predefined areas but the delivery engine must not indicate these areas of the image. Only the actual point(s) selected by the candidate shall be indicated. The select point interaction must be bound to a response variable with a base-type of point and single or multiple cardinality.

5.128.1 "min-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is given in Table 5.128.1.

Table 5.128.1 Description of the "min-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of points that the candidate is required to select to form a valid response. If min-choices is 0 then the candidate is not required to select any points. min-choices must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by max-choices.

5.128.2 "max-choices" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is given in Table 5.128.2.

Table 5.128.2 Description of the "max-choices" characteristic for the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-choices
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is interpreted as the maximum number of points that the candidate is allowed to select. If max-choices is 0 there is no restriction. If max-choices is greater than 1 (or 0) then the interaction must be bound to a response with multiple cardinality.

5.128.3 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is given in Table 5.128.3.

Table 5.128.3 Description of the "object" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each select point interaction has an associated image which MAY be given as an object that must be of an image type, as specified by the type characteristic. The use of this HTML tag is deprecated.

5.128.4 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is given in Table 5.128.4.

Table 5.128.4 Description of the "img" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each select point interaction has an associated image which MAY be given using the HTML 'img' tag.

5.128.5 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class is given in Table 5.128.5.

Table 5.128.5 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "SelectPointInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each select point interaction has an associated image which MAY be given using the HTML 'picture' tag.

5.129 Selection Class Description

The data model for the "Selection" class is shown in Figure 5.129 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.129.

UML diagram of the Selection class.

Figure 5.129 - Selection class definitions.

Table 5.129 Description of the "Selection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Selection
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The selection class specifies the rules used to select the child elements of a section for each test session. If no selection rules are given it must be assumed that all elements are to be selected. The selection class also provides an opportunity for extensions to this specification to include support for more complex selection algorithms.

5.129.1 "select" Characteristic Description

The description of the "select" characteristic for the "Selection" class is given in Table 5.129.1.

Table 5.129.1 Description of the "select" characteristic for the "Selection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name select
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The number of child elements to be selected. Sub-sections always count as 1, regardless of how many child elements they have and whether or not they are visible. The number of children to select may exceed the number of child elements defined only if with-replacement is true.

5.129.2 "with-replacement" Characteristic Description

The description of the "with-replacement" characteristic for the "Selection" class is given in Table 5.129.2.

Table 5.129.2 Description of the "with-replacement" characteristic for the "Selection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name with-replacement
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description When selecting child elements each element is normally eligible for selection once only. In other words, when selecting 3 elements from {A,B,C,D} the possible outcomes are {A,B,C}, {A,B,D}, {A,C,D}, and {B,C,D}. By setting 'with-replacement' to 'true' each element becomes eligible for selection multiple times. Selecting 3 nodes from {A,B,C,D} can then result in combinations such as {A,A,A}, {A,A,B} etc.

5.129.3 "extension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Selection" class is given in Table 5.129.3.

Table 5.129.3 Description of the "extension" characteristic for the "Selection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name extension
Data Type Namespace (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is an extension point. It allows new proprietary characteristics to be defined and used for the ordering. The extension mechanism is dependent on the form of binding.

5.129.4 "extensions" Attribute Description

The description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Selection" class is given in Table 5.129.4.

Table 5.129.4 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Selection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extensions
Data Type NamespaceLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags must be new tags i.e. not reused QTI ASI tags.

5.130 SetValue Class Description

The data model for the "SetValue" class is shown in Figure 5.130 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.130.

UML diagram of the SetValue class.

Figure 5.130 - SetValue class definitions.

Table 5.130 Description of the "SetValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SetValue
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The setValue rule sets the value of a variable (response, outcome or template) to the value obtained from the associated expression. A variable can be updated with reference to a previously assigned value, in other words, the variable being set may appear in the expression where it takes the value previously assigned to it. Special care is required when using the numeric base-types because floating point values can not be assigned to integer variables and vice-versa. The truncate, round or integerToFloat operators must be used to achieve numeric type conversion.

5.130.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SetValue" class is given in Table 5.130.1.

Table 5.130.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SetValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the variable to be set.

5.130.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "SetValue" class is given in Table 5.130.2.

Table 5.130.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "SetValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute to provide the mandatory expresson to be identified. The expression which must have an effective base-type and cardinality that matches the base-type and cardinality of the outcome variable being set.

5.131 SimpleAssociableChoice Class Description

The data model for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is shown in Figure 5.131 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.131.

UML diagram of the SimpleAssociableChoice class.

Figure 5.131 - SimpleAssociableChoice class definitions.

Table 5.131 Description of the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SimpleAssociableChoice
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an ordered set of choices for the set.

5.131.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.1.

Table 5.131.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the choice. This identifier must not be used by any other choice or item variable.

5.131.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.2.

Table 5.131.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fixed
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If fixed is 'true' for a choice then the position of this choice within the interaction must not be changed by the delivery engine even if the immediately enclosing interaction supports the shuffling of choices. If no value is specified then the choice is free to be shuffled. In Item Templates, the visibility of choices can be controlled by setting the value(s) of an associated template variable during template processing. For information about item templates see Item Templates (Section 2).

5.131.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.3.

Table 5.131.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the choice. When a choice is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.131.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.4.

Table 5.131.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the choice is controlled. If set to 'show' then the choice is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the choice is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the choice's identifier.

5.131.5 "match-group" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.5.

Table 5.131.5 Description of the "match-group" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-group
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is used to identify the set of entities that can be matched with this choice. This is used to enable the author to constrain the set of objects that can be matched with the target choice. This is a list of the identifiers for the objects that can be matched with this choice.

5.131.6 "match-max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.6.

Table 5.131.6 Description of the "match-max" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-max
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The maximum number of choices this choice may be associated with. If match-max is 0 then there is no restriction.

5.131.7 "match-min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.7.

Table 5.131.7 Description of the "match-min" characteristic for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name match-min
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minimum number of choices this choice must be associated with to form a valid response. If match-min is 0 then the candidate is not required to associate this choice with any others at all. match-min must be less than or equal to the limit imposed by match-max.

5.131.8 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class is given in Table 5.131.8.

Table 5.131.8 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleAssociableChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowStaticGroup
Data Type FlowStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child that allows the insertion of the content. AssociableChoice is a choice that contains flowStatic objects, it must not contain nested interactions.

5.132 SimpleChoice Class Description

The data model for the "SimpleChoice" class is shown in Figure 5.132 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.132.

UML diagram of the SimpleChoice class.

Figure 5.132 - SimpleChoice class definitions.

Table 5.132 Description of the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SimpleChoice
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A simpleChoice is a choice that contains flowStatic objects. A simpleChoice must not contain any nested interactions.

5.132.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class is given in Table 5.132.1.

Table 5.132.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the choice. This identifier must not be used by any other choice or item variable.

5.132.2 "fixed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class is given in Table 5.132.2.

Table 5.132.2 Description of the "fixed" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fixed
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If fixed is 'true' for a choice then the position of this choice within the interaction must not be changed by the delivery engine even if the immediately enclosing interaction supports the shuffling of choices. If no value is specified then the choice is free to be shuffled. In Item Templates, the visibility of choices can be controlled by setting the value(s) of an associated template variable during template processing. For information about item templates see Item Templates (Section 2).

5.132.3 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class is given in Table 5.132.3.

Table 5.132.3 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be either single of multiple cardinality. When the associated interaction is part of an Item Template the value of the identified template variable is used to control the visibility of the choice. When a choice is hidden it is not selectable and its content is not visible to the candidate unless otherwise stated.

5.132.4 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class is given in Table 5.132.4.

Table 5.132.4 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the choice is controlled. If set to 'show' then the choice is hidden by default and shown only if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the identifier of the choice. If set to 'hide' then the choice is shown by default and hidden if the associated template variable matches, or contains, the choice's identifier.

5.132.5 "flowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleChoice" class is given in Table 5.132.5.

Table 5.132.5 Description of the "flowStaticGroup" attribute for the "SimpleChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowStaticGroup
Data Type FlowStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child that is used to enable the inclusion of HTML flow content that includes support for feedback and template-base content.

5.133 SimpleMatchSet Class Description

The data model for the "SimpleMatchSet" class is shown in Figure 5.133 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.133.

UML diagram of the SimpleMatchSet class.

Figure 5.133 - SimpleMatchSet class definitions.

Table 5.133 Description of the "SimpleMatchSet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SimpleMatchSet
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the ordered set of choices for the match set.

5.133.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class is given in Table 5.133.1.

Table 5.133.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier to allow links to other structures e.g. alternative APIP accessibility annotations.

5.133.2 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class is given in Table 5.133.2.

Table 5.133.2 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "SimpleMatchSet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.133.3 "qti-simple-associable-choice" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "SimpleMatchSet" class is given in Table 5.133.3.

Table 5.133.3 Description of the "qti-simple-associable-choice" attribute for the "SimpleMatchSet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-simple-associable-choice
Data Type SimpleAssociableChoice
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An ordered set of choices for the set.

5.134 SliderInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "SliderInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.134 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.134.

UML diagram of the SliderInteraction class.

Figure 5.134 - SliderInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.134 Description of the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SliderInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The Slider Interaction presents the candidate with a control for selecting a numerical value between a lower and upper bound. It must be bound to a response variable with single cardinality with a base-type of either integer or float. Note that a slider interaction does not have a default or initial position except where specified by a default value for the associated response variable. The currently selected value, if any, must be clearly indicated to the candidate. Because a slider interaction does not have a default or initial position, except where specified by a default value for the associated response variable, it is difficult to distinguish between an intentional response that corresponds to the slider's initial position and a NULL response. As a workaround, sliderInteraction items have to either a) not count NULL responses (i.e. count all responses as intentional) or b) include a 'skip' button and count its activation combined with a RESPONSE variable that is equal to the slider's initial position as a NULL response.

5.134.1 "lower-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.1.

Table 5.134.1 Description of the "lower-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name lower-bound
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description If the associated response variable is of type integer then the lower-bound must be rounded down to the greatest integer less than or equal to the value given.

5.134.2 "upper-bound" Characteristic Description

The description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.2.

Table 5.134.2 Description of the "upper-bound" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name upper-bound
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description If the associated response variable is of type integer then the upper-bound must be rounded up to the least integer greater than or equal to the value given.

5.134.3 "step" Characteristic Description

The description of the "step" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.3.

Table 5.134.3 Description of the "step" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name step
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Default = "1.0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The steps that the control moves in. For example, if the lower-bound and upper-bound are [0,10] and step is 2 then the response would be constrained to the set of values {0,2,4,6,8,10}. If the response variable is bound to an integer, and the step attribute is not declared, the default step is 1. If the response variable is bound to a float, and the step attribute is not declared, the slider is assumed to operate on an approximately continuous scale.

5.134.4 "step-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "step-label" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.4.

Table 5.134.4 Description of the "step-label" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name step-label
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description By default, sliders are labelled only at their ends. The step-label attribute controls whether or not each step on the slider should also be labelled. It is unlikely that delivery engines will be able to guarantee to label steps so this attribute should be treated only as request.

5.134.5 "orientation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.5.

Table 5.134.5 Description of the "orientation" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name orientation
Data Type OrientationEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { horizontal | vertical }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The orientation attribute provides a hint to rendering systems that the slider is being used to indicate the value of a quantity with an inherent vertical or horizontal interpretation. For example, an interaction that is used to indicate the value of height might set the orientation to vertical to indicate that rendering it horizontally could spuriously increase the difficulty of the item.

5.134.6 "reverse" Characteristic Description

The description of the "reverse" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class is given in Table 5.134.6.

Table 5.134.6 Description of the "reverse" characteristic for the "SliderInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name reverse
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The reverse attribute provides a hint to rendering systems that the slider is being used to indicate the value of a quantity for which the normal sense of the upper and lower bounds is reversed. For example, an interaction that is used to indicate a depth below sea level might specify both a vertical orientation and set reverse.

5.135 Source Class Description

The data model for the "Source" class is shown in Figure 5.135 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.135.

UML diagram of the Source class.

Figure 5.135 - Source class definitions.

Table 5.135 Description of the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Source
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The 'source' tag is an HTML5 feature. The source tag allows authors to specify multiple alternative media resources for media tags. It does not represent anything on its own.

5.135.1 "src" Characteristic Description

The description of the "src" characteristic for the "Source" class is given in Table 5.135.1.

Table 5.135.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name src
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'src' characteristic gives the address of the media resource. The value must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. This characteristic must be present.

5.135.2 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "Source" class is given in Table 5.135.2.

Table 5.135.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'type' characteristic gives the type of the media resource, to help the user agent determine if it can play this media resource before fetching it. If specified, its value must be a valid MIME type.

5.135.3 "srcset" Characteristic Description

The description of the "srcset" characteristic for the "Source" class is given in Table 5.135.3.

Table 5.135.3 Description of the "srcset" characteristic for the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name srcset
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'srcset' attribute specifies the URL of the image to use in different situations. This attribute is required when 'source' is used in 'picture'.

5.135.4 "media" Characteristic Description

The description of the "media" characteristic for the "Source" class is given in Table 5.135.4.

Table 5.135.4 Description of the "media" characteristic for the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name media
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Accepts any valid media query that would normally be defined in a CSS.

5.135.5 "sizes" Characteristic Description

The description of the "sizes" characteristic for the "Source" class is given in Table 5.135.5.

Table 5.135.5 Description of the "sizes" characteristic for the "Source" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name sizes
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies image sizes for different page layouts.

5.136 StatsOperator Class Description

The data model for the "StatsOperator" class is shown in Figure 5.136 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.136.

UML diagram of the StatsOperator class.

Figure 5.136 - StatsOperator class definitions.

Table 5.136 Description of the "StatsOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StatsOperator
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The statsOperator operator takes 1 sub-expression which is a container of multiple or ordered cardinality and has a numerical base-type. The result is a single float. If the sub-expression or any value contained therein is NULL, the result is NULL. If any value contained in the sub-expression is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

5.136.1 "name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "name" characteristic for the "StatsOperator" class is given in Table 5.136.1.

Table 5.136.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "StatsOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name name
Data Type StatsOperatorNameEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { mean | sampleVariance | sampleSD | popVariance | popSD }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the name of the statistical operator (this is from an enumerated list).

5.136.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "StatsOperator" class is given in Table 5.136.2.

Table 5.136.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "StatsOperator" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the insertion of the mandatory QTI expression.

5.137 StimulusBody Class Description

The data model for the "StimulusBody" class is shown in Figure 5.137 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.137.

UML diagram of the StimulusBody class.

Figure 5.137 - StimulusBody class definitions.

Table 5.137 Description of the "StimulusBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StimulusBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the content that is to be defined as the common stimulus in an Item cf. ItemBody. The stimulus body contains the text, graphics, media objects and interactions that describe the common content and information about how it is structured. The body is presented by combining it with stylesheet information, either explicitly or implicitly using the default style rules of the delivery or authoring system.

5.137.1 "selectStimulus" Attribute Description

The description of the "selectStimulus" attribute for the "StimulusBody" class is given in Table 5.137.1.

Table 5.137.1 Description of the "selectStimulus" attribute for the "StimulusBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name selectStimulus
Data Type SelectStimulusBody
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that is use to provide the core HTML/MathML content for the stimulus.

5.138 StringMatch Class Description

The data model for the "StringMatch" class is shown in Figure 5.138 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.138.

UML diagram of the StringMatch class.

Figure 5.138 - StringMatch class definitions.

Table 5.138 Description of the "StringMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StringMatch
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The stringMatch operator takes two sub-expressions which must have single and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two strings match according to the comparison rules defined by the attributes below and false if they don't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

5.138.1 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

The description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class is given in Table 5.138.1.

Table 5.138.1 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name case-sensitive
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Whether or not the match is to be carried out case sensitively.

5.138.2 "substring" Characteristic Description

The description of the "substring" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class is given in Table 5.138.2.

Table 5.138.2 Description of the "substring" characteristic for the "StringMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name substring
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This attribute is now deprecated, the substring operator should be used instead. If true, then the comparison returns true if the first string contains the second one, otherwise it returns true only if they match entirely.

5.138.3 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "StringMatch" class is given in Table 5.138.3.

Table 5.138.3 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "StringMatch" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the insertion of the two mandatory QTI expression i.e. the two strings being matched.

5.139 Substring Class Description

The data model for the "Substring" class is shown in Figure 5.139 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.139.

UML diagram of the Substring class.

Figure 5.139 - Substring class definitions.

Table 5.139 Description of the "Substring" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Substring
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The substring operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have an effective base-type of string and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is a substring of the second expression and false if it isn't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL.

5.139.1 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

The description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "Substring" class is given in Table 5.139.1.

Table 5.139.1 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "Substring" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name case-sensitive
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Used to control whether or not the substring is matched case sensitively. If 'true' then the match is case sensitive and, for example, "Hell" is not a substring of "Shell". If 'false' then the match is not case sensitive and "Hell" is a substring of "Shell".

5.139.2 "logic" Attribute Description

The description of the "logic" attribute for the "Substring" class is given in Table 5.139.2.

Table 5.139.2 Description of the "logic" attribute for the "Substring" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name logic
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [2]
Description The two required QTI expressions that provide the source string and the substring to be located in the full string.

5.140 TDH Class Description

The data model for the "TDH" class is shown in Figure 5.140 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.140.

UML diagram of the TDH class.

Figure 5.140 - TDH class definitions.

Table 5.140 Description of the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TDH
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class allows the defnition of the contents of the HTML 'td' and 'th' tags i.e. the table cells used within the table rows.

5.140.1 "headers" Characteristic Description

The description of the "headers" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.1.

Table 5.140.1 Description of the "headers" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name headers
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The header cells for this cell. This is a string consisting of an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, each of which must have the value of an ID of a 'th' tag taking part in the same table as the 'td' or 'th' tag.

5.140.2 "scope" Characteristic Description

The description of the "scope" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.2.

Table 5.140.2 Description of the "scope" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name scope
Data Type TableCellScopeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { col | colgroup | row | rowgroup }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Specifies which cells the header cell applies to.

5.140.3 "abbr" Characteristic Description

The description of the "abbr" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.3.

Table 5.140.3 Description of the "abbr" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name abbr
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Alternative label to use for the header cell when referencing the cell in other contexts.

5.140.4 "axis" Characteristic Description

The description of the "axis" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.4.

Table 5.140.4 Description of the "axis" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name axis
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The axis characteristic is used to categorize cells. This can be used to group related columns of information.

5.140.5 "rowspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "rowspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.5.

Table 5.140.5 Description of the "rowspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name rowspan
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The number of rows that the cell is to span.

5.140.6 "colspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "colspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.6.

Table 5.140.6 Description of the "colspan" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name colspan
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The number of columns that the cell is to span.

5.140.7 "align" Characteristic Description

The description of the "align" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.7.

Table 5.140.7 Description of the "align" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name align
Data Type AlignEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { left | center | right | justify | char }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The horizontal alignment of the content in the cell.

5.140.8 "valign" Characteristic Description

The description of the "valign" characteristic for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.8.

Table 5.140.8 Description of the "valign" characteristic for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name valign
Data Type ValignEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { bottom | middle | top | baseline }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The vertical alignment of the content in the cell.

5.140.9 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "TDH" class is given in Table 5.140.9.

Table 5.140.9 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "TDH" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child that allows the complex content of the cell to be defined i.e. HTML flow content (this includes the QTI interactions).

5.141 TR Class Description

The data model for the "TR" class is shown in Figure 5.141 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.141.

UML diagram of the TR class.

Figure 5.141 - TR class definitions.

Table 5.141 Description of the "TR" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TR
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This makes the HTML tag 'tr' available for the definition of tables.

5.141.1 "tableCellGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "tableCellGroup" attribute for the "TR" class is given in Table 5.141.1.

Table 5.141.1 Description of the "tableCellGroup" attribute for the "TR" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tableCellGroup
Data Type TableCellGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstact attribute that enables the table row to contain one or more 'th' or 'td' tags.

5.142 Table Class Description

The data model for the "Table" class is shown in Figure 5.142 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.142.

UML diagram of the Table class.

Figure 5.142 - Table class definitions.

Table 5.142 Description of the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Table
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the HTML 'table' tag functionality within the QTI context.

5.142.1 "summary" Characteristic Description

The description of the "summary" characteristic for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.1.

Table 5.142.1 Description of the "summary" characteristic for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name summary
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This allows a human readable summary of the Table to be provided.

5.142.2 "caption" Attribute Description

The description of the "caption" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.2.

Table 5.142.2 Description of the "caption" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name caption
Data Type Caption
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This allows the caption of the table to be supplied.

5.142.3 "col" Attribute Description

The description of the "col" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.3.

Table 5.142.3 Description of the "col" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name col
Data Type Col
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description If a table directly contains a col then it must not contain any colgroup elements.

5.142.4 "colgroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "colgroup" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.4.

Table 5.142.4 Description of the "colgroup" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name colgroup
Data Type ColGroup
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description If a table contains a colgroup it must not directly contain any col elements.

5.142.5 "thead" Attribute Description

The description of the "thead" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.5.

Table 5.142.5 Description of the "thead" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name thead
Data Type TablePart
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This permits the inclusion of the HTML 'thead' tag.

5.142.6 "tfoot" Attribute Description

The description of the "tfoot" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.6.

Table 5.142.6 Description of the "tfoot" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tfoot
Data Type TablePart
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This permits the inclusion of the HTML 'tfoot' tag.

5.142.7 "tbody" Attribute Description

The description of the "tbody" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.7.

Table 5.142.7 Description of the "tbody" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tbody
Data Type TablePart
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This permits the inclusion of the HTML 'tbody' tags.

5.142.8 "tr" Attribute Description

The description of the "tr" attribute for the "Table" class is given in Table 5.142.8.

Table 5.142.8 Description of the "tr" attribute for the "Table" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tr
Data Type TR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This enables the set of HTML 'tr' tags to be inserted as direct children of the 'table' element.

5.143 TablePart Class Description

The data model for the "TablePart" class is shown in Figure 5.143 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.143.

UML diagram of the TablePart class.

Figure 5.143 - TablePart class definitions.

Table 5.143 Description of the "TablePart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TablePart
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This allows the construction of the internal structures in the HTML Table tag, namely: the head, foot and body of the table.

5.143.1 "tr" Attribute Description

The description of the "tr" attribute for the "TablePart" class is given in Table 5.143.1.

Table 5.143.1 Description of the "tr" attribute for the "TablePart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tr
Data Type TR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This enables the set of HTML 'tr' tags to be inserted into the 'head', 'foot' and 'body' parts of the Table.

5.144 Template Class Description

The data model for the "Template" class is shown in Figure 5.144 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.144.

UML diagram of the Template class.

Figure 5.144 - Template class definitions.

Table 5.144 Description of the "Template" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Template
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the 'template' tag in HTML. This tag acts as an extension point for the HTML-based content.

5.144.1 "extensions" Attribute Description

The description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Template" class is given in Table 5.144.1.

Table 5.144.1 Description of the "extensions" attribute for the "Template" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name extensions
Data Type AnyTypeLax (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an extension point to enable any set of child tags to be entered. The child tags MAY be new tags and MAY be reused QTI ASI tags.

5.145 TemplateBlock Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.145 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.145.

UML diagram of the TemplateBlock class.

Figure 5.145 - TemplateBlock class definitions.

Table 5.145 Description of the "TemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description This class is used to define the block content structures that are available for the creation of Item templates. A qti-template-block must not contain any interactions, either directly or indirectly.

5.145.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.145.1.

Table 5.145.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the qti-template-block is controlled by the value of the variable.

5.145.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.145.2.

Table 5.145.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the qti-template-block is controlled in the same way as in the qti-feedback-block.

5.145.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class is given in Table 5.145.3.

Table 5.145.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the qti-template-block in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.146 TemplateBlockContent Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateBlockContent" class is shown in Figure 5.146 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.146.

UML diagram of the TemplateBlockContent class.

Figure 5.146 - TemplateBlockContent class definitions.

Table 5.146 Description of the "TemplateBlockContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateBlockContent
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This container class is used to define the common block content structures that are available for the creation of Item templates.

5.146.1 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class is given in Table 5.146.1.

Table 5.146.1 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The stylesheets used to format just the contents of the template block.

5.146.2 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class is given in Table 5.146.2.

Table 5.146.2 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type TemplateBlockContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The content that be MAY presented as the test template block is contained by this attribute.

5.146.3 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class is given in Table 5.146.3.

Table 5.146.3 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContent" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility content that be MAY presented as the template block is contained by this attribute.

5.147 TemplateBlockContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateBlockContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.147 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.147.

UML diagram of the TemplateBlockContentBody class.

Figure 5.147 - TemplateBlockContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.147 Description of the "TemplateBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateBlockContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for all of the content to be presented in the template block including all of the HTML-based content.

5.147.1 "fatBlockStatic" Attribute Description

The description of the "fatBlockStatic" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContentBody" class is given in Table 5.147.1.

Table 5.147.1 Description of the "fatBlockStatic" attribute for the "TemplateBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name fatBlockStatic
Data Type FeedandTempBlockStatic
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The abstract root for the template content which includes HTML5, other template blocks and feedback blocks.

5.148 TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.148 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.148.

UML diagram of the TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock class.

Figure 5.148 - TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock class definitions.

Table 5.148 Description of the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description This enables the Block content to be placed in template blocks. This structure is used to add constraints on how the block content can be used in recursive block templates.

5.148.1 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.148.1.

Table 5.148.1 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of an outcome variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the block content is controlled by assigning a value (or values) to this outcome variable during template Processing.

5.148.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.148.2.

Table 5.148.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the content is controlled in the same way as in the feedbackBlock/templateBlock.

5.148.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class is given in Table 5.148.3.

Table 5.148.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the content block in conjunction with the show-hide characteristc.

5.149 TemplateCondition Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateCondition" class is shown in Figure 5.149 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.149.

UML diagram of the TemplateCondition class.

Figure 5.149 - TemplateCondition class definitions.

Table 5.149 Description of the "TemplateCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateCondition
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class enables the definition of the template processing 'If..Then..Else' clause. If the expression given in the templateIf or templateElseIf evaluates to 'true' then the sub-rules contained within it are followed and any following templateElseIf or templateElse parts are ignored for this template condition. If the expression given in the templateIf or templateElseIf does not evaluate to 'true' then consideration passes to the next templateElseIf or, if there are no more templateElseIf parts then the sub-rules of the templateElse are followed (if specified).

5.149.1 "qti-template-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class is given in Table 5.149.1.

Table 5.149.1 Description of the "qti-template-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-if
Data Type TemplateIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description A qti-template-if part, this must occur, consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following qti-template-else-if or qti-template-else parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.149.2 "qti-template-else-if" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-else-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class is given in Table 5.149.2.

Table 5.149.2 Description of the "qti-template-else-if" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-else-if
Data Type TemplateIf
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description A qti-template-else-if part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following qti-template-else-if or qti-template-else parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.149.3 "qti-template-else" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-else" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class is given in Table 5.149.3.

Table 5.149.3 Description of the "qti-template-else" attribute for the "TemplateCondition" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-else
Data Type TemplateElse
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the 'Else' part of the 'If..Then..Else' clause. There may be only one 'else' clause.

5.150 TemplateConstraint Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateConstraint" class is shown in Figure 5.150 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.150.

UML diagram of the TemplateConstraint class.

Figure 5.150 - TemplateConstraint class definitions.

Table 5.150 Description of the "TemplateConstraint" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateConstraint
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A templateConstraint contains an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). If the expression is 'false' (including if the expression is NULL), the template variables are set to their default values and qti-template-processing is restarted; this happens repeatedly until the expression is 'true' or the maximum number of iterations is reached. In the event that the maximum number of iterations is reached, any default values provided for the variables during declaration are used. Processing then continues with the next qti-template-rrule after the qti-template-constraint, or finishes if there are no further qti-template-rrules. By using a qti-template-constraint, authors can ensure that the values of variables set during qti-template-processing satisfy the condition specified by the boolean expression. For example, two randomly selected numbers might be required which have no common factors. A qti-template-constraint may occur anywhere as a child of qti-template-processing. It may not be used as a child of any other element. Any number of qti-template-constraints may be used, though two or more consecutive qti-template-constraints could be combined using the 'and' element to combine their boolean expressions. The maximum number of times that the operations preceding the qti-template-constraint can be expected to be performed is assumed to be 100; implementations may permit more iterations, but there must be a finite maximum number of iterations. This prevents the occurrence of an endless loop. It is the responsibility of the author to provide default values for any variables assigned under a qti-template-constraint.

5.150.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateConstraint" class is given in Table 5.150.1.

Table 5.150.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateConstraint" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the required QTI expression to be identified.

5.151 TemplateDeclaration Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is shown in Figure 5.151 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.151.

UML diagram of the TemplateDeclaration class.

Figure 5.151 - TemplateDeclaration class definitions.

Table 5.151 Description of the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateDeclaration
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Template declarations declare item variables that are to be used specifically for the purposes of cloning items. They can have their value set only during templateProcessing. They are referred to within the itemBody in order to individualize the clone and possibly also within the responseProcessing rules if the cloning process affects the way the item is scored.

5.151.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.1.

Table 5.151.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifiers of the built-in session variables are reserved. They are completionStatus, numAttempts and duration. All Item variables declared in an item share the same namespace. Different items have different namespaces.

5.151.2 "cardinality" Characteristic Description

The description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.2.

Table 5.151.2 Description of the "cardinality" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name cardinality
Data Type CardinalityEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { multiple | ordered | record | single }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Each variable is either single valued or multi-valued. Multi-valued variables are referred to as containers and come in ordered, unordered and record types.

5.151.3 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.3.

Table 5.151.3 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The value space from which the variable's value can be drawn (or in the case of containers, from which the individual values are drawn) is identified with a base-type. The base-type selects one of a small set of predefined types that are considered to have atomic values within the runtime data model. Variables with record cardinality have no base-type.

5.151.4 "param-variable" Characteristic Description

The description of the "param-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.4.

Table 5.151.4 Description of the "param-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name param-variable
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic determines whether or not the template variable's value should be substituted for object parameter values that match its name.

5.151.5 "math-variable" Characteristic Description

The description of the "math-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.5.

Table 5.151.5 Description of the "math-variable" characteristic for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name math-variable
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic determines whether or not the template variable's value should be substituted for identifiers that match its name in MathML expressions. See Combining Template Variables and MathML (Section 2) for more information.

5.151.6 "qti-default-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateDeclaration" class is given in Table 5.151.6.

Table 5.151.6 Description of the "qti-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateDeclaration" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default-value
Data Type DefaultValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional default value for the template variable. The point at which a variable is set to its default value varies depending on the type of item variable.

5.152 TemplateDefault Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateDefault" class is shown in Figure 5.152 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.152.

UML diagram of the TemplateDefault class.

Figure 5.152 - TemplateDefault class definitions.

Table 5.152 Description of the "TemplateDefault" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateDefault
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The default value of a template variable in an item can be overridden based on the test context in which the template is instantiated. The value is obtained by evaluating an expression defined within the reference to the item at test level and which may therefore depend on the values of variables taken from other items in the test or from outcomes defined at test level itself. For consistent results it is vital that the expression is evaluated at the correct time. When the assessmentItemRef occurs in a testPart navigated in linear mode the expression is evaluated immediately prior to the start of the first attempt, after any pre-conditions are evaluated and acted upon but before the templateProcessing rules of the item itself are followed. In nonlinear mode the expression is evaluated at the start of the testPart. In both cases, the timing is unaffected by the submissionMode in effect. Care needs to be taken to ensure that values of response variables are not used before they have been submitted and that outcome variables are not used before their values have been set by the corresponding response or outcomes processing steps. The facility of overriding template defaults allows item templates to be linked to other items (or templates) within a test. A candidate response from one item can be used directly to affect the presentation or even the behaviour of an item presented after it. However once the template is instantiated it operates independently - there is no dynamic link created between the items and no concept of a shared variable space between them.

5.152.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDefault" class is given in Table 5.152.1.

Table 5.152.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateDefault" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the template variable affected.

5.152.2 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateDefault" class is given in Table 5.152.2.

Table 5.152.2 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateDefault" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the identifiation of the required expression. An expression which must result in a value with base-type and cardinality matching the declaration of the associated variable's qti-template-declaration.

5.153 TemplateElse Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateElse" class is shown in Figure 5.153 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.153.

UML diagram of the TemplateElse class.

Figure 5.153 - TemplateElse class definitions.

Table 5.153 Description of the "TemplateElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateElse
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables the definition of the 'Else' clause of the 'If..Then..Else' rule construction when defining a template.

5.153.1 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateElse" class is given in Table 5.153.1.

Table 5.153.1 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateElse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name templateRuleGroup
Data Type TemplateRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the definition of the 'Else' clause.

5.154 TemplateIf Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateIf" class is shown in Figure 5.154 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.154.

UML diagram of the TemplateIf class.

Figure 5.154 - TemplateIf class definitions.

Table 5.154 Description of the "TemplateIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateIf
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This provides the 'If' and 'ElseIf' clauses of the 'If..Then..Else' for the template processing functionality. A qti-response-if part consists of an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality. For more information about the runtime data model employed see Expressions (Section 2). It also contains a set of sub-rules. If the expression is true then the sub-rules are processed, otherwise they are skipped (including if the expression is NULL) and the following qti-template-else-if or qti-template-else parts (if any) are considered instead.

5.154.1 "expressionGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class is given in Table 5.154.1.

Table 5.154.1 Description of the "expressionGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name expressionGroup
Data Type ExpressionGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the expression for the 'If' clause to be defined.

5.154.2 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class is given in Table 5.154.2.

Table 5.154.2 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateIf" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name templateRuleGroup
Data Type TemplateRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the set of template rules that define the 'If' clause to be entered.

5.155 TemplateInline Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateInline" class is shown in Figure 5.155 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.155.

UML diagram of the TemplateInline class.

Figure 5.155 - TemplateInline class definitions.

Table 5.155 Description of the "TemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateInline
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This enables the Inline content to be placed in templates. This structure is used to add constraints on how the inline content can be used in recursive templates.

5.155.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.155.1.

Table 5.155.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of a template variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality.

5.155.2 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.155.2.

Table 5.155.2 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Default = "show".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the content is controlled in the same way as in the qti-template-block.

5.155.3 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.155.3.

Table 5.155.3 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier characteristic, in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic, determines the visibility of the content block.

5.155.4 "inlineStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "TemplateInline" class is given in Table 5.155.4.

Table 5.155.4 Description of the "inlineStaticGroup" attribute for the "TemplateInline" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineStaticGroup
Data Type InlineStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract child that enables the complex content to be build upon HTML inline structures (interactions are not permitted).

5.156 TemplateProcessing Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateProcessing" class is shown in Figure 5.156 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.156.

UML diagram of the TemplateProcessing class.

Figure 5.156 - TemplateProcessing class definitions.

Table 5.156 Description of the "TemplateProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateProcessing
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Template processing consists of one or more templateRules that are followed by the cloning engine or delivery system in order to assign values to the template variables. Template processing is identical in form to responseProcessing except that the purpose is to assign values to template variables, not outcome variables.

5.156.1 "templateRuleGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateProcessing" class is given in Table 5.156.1.

Table 5.156.1 Description of the "templateRuleGroup" attribute for the "TemplateProcessing" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name templateRuleGroup
Data Type TemplateRuleGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the definition of the each of the template rules used to generate the values for the template variables.

5.157 TestFeedback Class Description

The data model for the "TestFeedback" class is shown in Figure 5.157 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.157.

UML diagram of the TestFeedback class.

Figure 5.157 - TestFeedback class definitions.

Table 5.157 Description of the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestFeedback
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This class is used to define the test-level feedback content that can be presented to the learner. It must not contain an interaction object, either directly or indirectly. Feedback elements can be embedded inside each other, with one exception: feedBackInline cannot contain feedbackBlock elements.

5.157.1 "access" Characteristic Description

The description of the "access" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.1.

Table 5.157.1 Description of the "access" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name access
Data Type TestFeedbackAccessEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { atEnd | during }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is used to define when the test feedback will be available. Test feedback is shown to the candidate either directly following outcome processing (during the test) or at the end of the qti-test-part or qti-assessment-test as appropriate (referred to as atEnd).

5.157.2 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.2.

Table 5.157.2 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of an outcome variable that must have a base-type of identifier and be of either single or multiple cardinality. The visibility of the test feedback is controlled by assigning a value (or values) to this outcome variable during Outcomes Processing.

5.157.3 "show-hide" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.3.

Table 5.157.3 Description of the "show-hide" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-hide
Data Type ShowHideEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { show | hide }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The show-hide characteristic determines how the visibility of the content is controlled in the same way as in the feedback block.

5.157.4 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.4.

Table 5.157.4 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier that determines the visibility of the test feedback in conjunction with the show-hide characteristic.

5.157.5 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.5.

Table 5.157.5 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Delivery engines are not required to present the title to the candidate but may do so, for example as the title of a modal pop-up window or sub-heading in a combined report.

5.157.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.6.

Table 5.157.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.157.7 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.7.

Table 5.157.7 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of external style sheets that are associated with the test feedback. The order of definition is significant.

5.157.8 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.8.

Table 5.157.8 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type TestFeedbackFlowContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This root element for the complex feedback content to be build upon HTML flow structures. This must not contain interactions.

5.157.9 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class is given in Table 5.157.9.

Table 5.157.9 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestFeedback" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility content that MAY be rendered as the test feedback.

5.158 TestFeedbackFlowContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.158 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.158.

UML diagram of the TestFeedbackFlowContentBody class.

Figure 5.158 - TestFeedbackFlowContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.158 Description of the "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestFeedbackFlowContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for the HTML-based content to be presented as part of the feedback process in Tests. This wrapper was added as part of the QTI 3.0 revision.

5.158.1 "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" class is given in Table 5.158.1.

Table 5.158.1 Description of the "feedbackFlowStaticGroup" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name feedbackFlowStaticGroup
Data Type TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This abstract property enables the detailed static flow block for the Test feedback.

5.159 TestPart Class Description

The data model for the "TestPart" class is shown in Figure 5.159 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.159.

UML diagram of the TestPart class.

Figure 5.159 - TestPart class definitions.

Table 5.159 Description of the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestPart
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A test is composed of one or more test parts. A test-part represents a major division of the test and is used to control the basic mode parameters that apply to all sections and sub-sections within that part.

5.159.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.1.

Table 5.159.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the test part must be unique within the test and must not be the identifier of any qti-assessment-section or qti-assessment-item-ref.

5.159.2 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.2.

Table 5.159.2 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The title of a qti-test-part is intended to enable the test-part to be selected outside of any test session. Therefore, delivery engines may reveal the title to candidates at any time, but are not required to do so.

5.159.3 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.3.

Table 5.159.3 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, this has a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

5.159.4 "navigation-mode" Characteristic Description

The description of the "navigation-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.4.

Table 5.159.4 Description of the "navigation-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name navigation-mode
Data Type NavigationModeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { linear | nonlinear }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The navigation mode determines the general paths that the candidate may take. A testPart in linear mode restricts the candidate to attempt each item in turn. Once the candidate moves on they are not permitted to return. A testPart in nonlinear mode removes this restriction - the candidate is free to navigate to any item in the test at any time. Test delivery systems are free to implement their own user interface elements to facilitate navigation provided they honour the navigation mode currently in effect. A test delivery system may implement nonlinear mode simply by providing a method to step forward or backwards through the test part.

5.159.5 "submission-mode" Characteristic Description

The description of the "submission-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.5.

Table 5.159.5 Description of the "submission-mode" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name submission-mode
Data Type SubmissionModeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { individual | simultaneous }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The submission mode determines when the candidate's responses are submitted for response processing. A testPart in individual mode requires the candidate to submit their responses on an item-by-item basis. In simultaneous mode the candidate's responses are all submitted together at the end of the testPart. The choice of submission mode determines the states through which each item's session can pass during the test. In simultaneous mode, response processing cannot take place until the testPart is complete so each item session passes between the interacting and suspended states only. By definition the candidate can take one and only one attempt at each item and feedback cannot be seen during the test. For this reason, adaptive items are not compatible with the simultaneous mode. Whether or not the candidate can return to review their responses and/or any item-level feedback after the test, is outside the scope of this specification. Simultaneous mode is typical of paper-based tests. In individual mode response processing may take place during the test and the item session may pass through any of the states described in Items, subject to the itemSessionControl settings in force. Care should be taken when designing user interfaces for systems that support nonlinear navigation mode in combination with individual submission. With this combination candidates may change their responses for an item and then leave it in the suspended state by navigating to a different item in the same part of the test. Test delivery systems need to make it clear to candidates that there are unsubmitted responses (akin to unsaved changes in a traditional document editing system) at the end of the test part. A test delivery system may force candidates to submit or discard such responses before moving to a different item in individual mode if this is more appropriate.

5.159.6 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.6.

Table 5.159.6 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

5.159.7 "qti-pre-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.7.

Table 5.159.7 Description of the "qti-pre-condition" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-pre-condition
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of conditions evaluated during the test, that determine if this part is to be skipped.

5.159.8 "qti-branch-rule" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.8.

Table 5.159.8 Description of the "qti-branch-rule" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-branch-rule
Data Type BranchRule
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description An optional set of rules, evaluated during the test, for setting an alternative target as the next part of the test.

5.159.9 "qti-item-session-control" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.9.

Table 5.159.9 Description of the "qti-item-session-control" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-item-session-control
Data Type ItemSessionControl
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Parameters used to control the allowable states of each item session in this part. These values may be overridden at section and item level.

5.159.10 "qti-time-limits" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.10.

Table 5.159.10 Description of the "qti-time-limits" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-time-limits
Data Type TimeLimits
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Optionally controls the amount of time a candidate is allowed for this part of the test.

5.159.11 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.11.

Table 5.159.11 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rubric-block
Data Type TestRubricBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Test rubric is presented to the candidate at the start of each test-part. This information is applicable to, only, the test-part in which it is defined. Rubric block content is conditional, and intended to be presented only to the specific actors referenced in the "view" attribute of the qti-rubric-block node. You must include at least one of the following actors in the view attribute: author, candidate, proctor, scorer, testConstructor, tutor. Note that the use of candidate as the actor is meant to indicate the candidate is presented this content at runtime, and that it is also often used for the other actors to know what content is presented to the candidate, so it is commonly presented to the other actors as well.

5.159.12 "assessmentSectionSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "assessmentSectionSelection" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.12.

Table 5.159.12 Description of the "assessmentSectionSelection" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name assessmentSectionSelection
Data Type AssessmentSectionSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract class that allows the set of child items and sections to be identified. The items contained in each testPart are arranged into sections and sub-sections.

5.159.13 "qti-test-feedback" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "TestPart" class is given in Table 5.159.13.

Table 5.159.13 Description of the "qti-test-feedback" attribute for the "TestPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-test-feedback
Data Type TestFeedback
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description Test-level feedback specific to this part of the test.

5.160 TestRubricBlock Class Description

The data model for the "TestRubricBlock" class is shown in Figure 5.160 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.160.

UML diagram of the TestRubricBlock class.

Figure 5.160 - TestRubricBlock class definitions.

Table 5.160 Description of the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestRubricBlock
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the test-level and section-level rubric block content. A rubric block identifies part of the content that represents instructions to one or more of the actors that view the test. Rubric Blocks MUST NOT be nested within other Rubric Blocks.

5.160.1 "view" Characteristic Description

The description of the "view" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.1.

Table 5.160.1 Description of the "view" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name view
Data Type ViewEnum
Value Space A list from an enumerated value set of: { author | candidate | proctor | scorer | testConstructor | tutor }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The views in which the rubric block's content are to be shown.

5.160.2 "use" Characteristic Description

The description of the "use" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.2.

Table 5.160.2 Description of the "use" characteristic for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name use
Data Type UseEnumExt
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): UseExtensionString (Derived-type), UseEnum (Enumeration)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Denotes how the content contained within the rubric block is intended to be used within sytems presenting the rubric block content.

5.160.3 "qti-stylesheet" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.3.

Table 5.160.3 Description of the "qti-stylesheet" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stylesheet
Data Type StyleSheet
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The stylesheets used to format just the contents of the test rubric block.

5.160.4 "qti-content-body" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.4.

Table 5.160.4 Description of the "qti-content-body" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-content-body
Data Type TestRubricBlockContentBody
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The content that be MAY presented as the test rubric block is contained by this attribute.

5.160.5 "qti-catalog-info" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.5.

Table 5.160.5 Description of the "qti-catalog-info" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-catalog-info
Data Type CatalogInfo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The alternative accessibility content that be MAY presented as the test rubric block is contained by this attribute.

5.160.6 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class is given in Table 5.160.6.

Table 5.160.6 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "TestRubricBlock" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

5.161 TestRubricBlockContentBody Class Description

The data model for the "TestRubricBlockContentBody" class is shown in Figure 5.161 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.161.

UML diagram of the TestRubricBlockContentBody class.

Figure 5.161 - TestRubricBlockContentBody class definitions.

Table 5.161 Description of the "TestRubricBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestRubricBlockContentBody
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the container for all of the content to be presented in the test-level rubric blocks. Most of this material is HTML-based content. Unlike RubricBlockContentBody, it does not allow for templates or printed variables.

5.161.1 "contentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentBody" class is given in Table 5.161.1.

Table 5.161.1 Description of the "contentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name contentModel
Data Type TestRubricBlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The flowed content that is to be presented as the test feedback.

5.162 TextEntryInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.162 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.162.

UML diagram of the TextEntryInteraction class.

Figure 5.162 - TextEntryInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.162 Description of the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TextEntryInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description A TextEntry Interaction is an inlineInteraction that obtains a simple piece of text from the candidate. Like inlineChoiceInteraction, the delivery engine must allow the candidate to review their choice within the context of the surrounding text. The textEntryInteraction must be bound to a response variable with single or record cardinality only. If the response variable has single cardinality the base-type must be one of string, integer or float; if it has record cardinality the permitted fields are 'stringValue', 'floatValue', etc.

5.162.1 "response-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.1.

Table 5.162.1 Description of the "response-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name response-identifier
Data Type UniqueIdentifierRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable associated with the interaction.

5.162.2 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.2.

Table 5.162.2 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "10".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the string interaction is bound to a numeric response variable then the base attribute must be used to set the number base in which to interpret the value entered by the candidate.

5.162.3 "string-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.3.

Table 5.162.3 Description of the "string-identifier" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name string-identifier
Data Type UniqueIdentifierRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the string interaction is bound to a numeric response variable then the actual string entered by the candidate can also be captured by binding the interaction to a second response variable (of base-type string).

5.162.4 "expected-length" Characteristic Description

The description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.4.

Table 5.162.4 Description of the "expected-length" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name expected-length
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The expected-length characteristic provides a hint to the candidate as to the expected overall length of the desired response measured in number of characters. A Delivery Engine should use the value of this attribute to set the size of the response box, where applicable. This is not a validity constraint.

5.162.5 "pattern-mask" Characteristic Description

The description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.5.

Table 5.162.5 Description of the "pattern-mask" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name pattern-mask
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If given, the pattern-mask specifies a regular expression that the candidate's response must match in order to be considered valid. The regular expression language used is defined in Appendix F of [XSCHEMA, 01]. Care is needed to ensure that the format of the required input is clear to the candidate, especially when validity checking of responses is required for progression through a test. This could be done by providing an illustrative sample response in the prompt, for example.

5.162.6 "placeholder-text" Characteristic Description

The description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.6.

Table 5.162.6 Description of the "placeholder-text" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name placeholder-text
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description In visual environments, string interactions are typically represented by empty boxes into which the candidate writes or types. However, in speech based environments it is helpful to have some placeholder text that can be used to vocalize the interaction. Delivery engines should use the value of this attribute (if provided) instead of their default placeholder text when this is required. Implementors should be aware of the issues concerning the use of default values described in the section on Response Variables.

5.162.7 "format" Characteristic Description

The description of the "format" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.7.

Table 5.162.7 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name format
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Used to control the format of the text entered by the candidate. This characteristic affects the way the value of the associated response variable should be interpreted by response processing engines and also controls the way it should be captured in the delivery engine.

5.162.8 "data-patternmask-message" Characteristic Description

The description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class is given in Table 5.162.8.

Table 5.162.8 Description of the "data-patternmask-message" characteristic for the "TextEntryInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name data-patternmask-message
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The custom message to be rendered by the delivery platform upon violation of the pattern mask constraints.

5.163 Track Class Description

The data model for the "Track" class is shown in Figure 5.163 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.163.

UML diagram of the Track class.

Figure 5.163 - Track class definitions.

Table 5.163 Description of the "Track" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Track
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The 'track' tag is an HTML5 feature. The track tag allows authors to specify explicit external timed text tracks for media elements. It does not represent anything on its own.

5.163.1 "kind" Characteristic Description

The description of the "kind" characteristic for the "Track" class is given in Table 5.163.1.

Table 5.163.1 Description of the "kind" characteristic for the "Track" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name kind
Data Type KindValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { subtitles | captions | descriptions | chapters | metadata }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'kind' characteristic is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords defined for this attribute. The keyword given in the first cell of each row maps to the state given in the second cell.

5.163.2 "src" Characteristic Description

The description of the "src" characteristic for the "Track" class is given in Table 5.163.2.

Table 5.163.2 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Track" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name src
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The 'src' characteristic gives the address of the text track data. The value must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. This attribute must be present.

5.163.3 "srclang" Characteristic Description

The description of the "srclang" characteristic for the "Track" class is given in Table 5.163.3.

Table 5.163.3 Description of the "srclang" characteristic for the "Track" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name srclang
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'srclang' characteristic gives the language of the text track data. The value must be a valid ]BCP 47] language tag. This attribute must be present if the tag's kind attribute is in the subtitles state.

5.163.4 "default" Characteristic Description

The description of the "default" characteristic for the "Track" class is given in Table 5.163.4.

Table 5.163.4 Description of the "default" characteristic for the "Track" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name default
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'default' is a boolean, which, if specified, indicates that the track is to be enabled if the user's preferences do not indicate that another track would be more appropriate.

5.164 USRuleSystem Class Description

The data model for the "USRuleSystem" class is shown in Figure 5.164 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.164.

UML diagram of the USRuleSystem class.

Figure 5.164 - USRuleSystem class definitions.

Table 5.164 Description of the "USRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name USRuleSystem
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The container for the information about the rule that is permitted/required for use in the assessment. The rule is defined in terms of US units.

5.164.1 "qti-minimum-length" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.164.1.

Table 5.164.1 Description of the "qti-minimum-length" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minimum-length
Data Type Integer (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The minimum length of the rule (using the units defined for the major increments).

5.164.2 "qti-minor-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.164.2.

Table 5.164.2 Description of the "qti-minor-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-minor-increment
Data Type USLinearValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The minor increment, US units, for the rule.

5.164.3 "qti-major-increment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class is given in Table 5.164.3.

Table 5.164.3 Description of the "qti-major-increment" attribute for the "USRuleSystem" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-major-increment
Data Type USLinearValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The major increment, US units, for the rule.

5.165 UploadInteraction Class Description

The data model for the "UploadInteraction" class is shown in Figure 5.165 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.165.

UML diagram of the UploadInteraction class.

Figure 5.165 - UploadInteraction class definitions.

Table 5.165 Description of the "UploadInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name UploadInteraction
Class Type Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The Upload Interaction allows the candidate to upload a pre-prepared file representing their response. It must be bound to a response variable with base-type file and single cardinality.

5.165.1 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "UploadInteraction" class is given in Table 5.165.1.

Table 5.165.1 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "UploadInteraction" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeTypeList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): MimeType (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The expected set of mime-types for the uploaded file.

5.166 Video Class Description

The data model for the "Video" class is shown in Figure 5.166 and the accompanying definition in Table 5.166.

UML diagram of the Video class.

Figure 5.166 - Video class definitions.

Table 5.166 Description of the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Video
Class Type Container [ Sequence , Mixed ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are: The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The 'video' tag is an HTML5 feature. A video tag is used for playing videos or movies, and audio files with captions.

5.166.1 "src" Characteristic Description

The description of the "src" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.1.

Table 5.166.1 Description of the "src" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name src
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'src' content characteristic on media tags gives the address of the media resource (video, audio) to show. The attribute, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

5.166.2 "crossorigin" Characteristic Description

The description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.2.

Table 5.166.2 Description of the "crossorigin" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name crossorigin
Data Type CORSSettingsEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { anonymous | use-credentials }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The crossorigin content characteristic on media tags is a CORS settings attribute.

5.166.3 "preload" Characteristic Description

The description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.3.

Table 5.166.3 Description of the "preload" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name preload
Data Type PreLoadValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { none | auto | metadata }
Default = "metadata".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The preload characteristic is an enumerated value. The attribute can be changed even once the media resource is being buffered or played; the descriptions in the table below are to be interpreted with that in mind.

5.166.4 "autoplay" Characteristic Description

The description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.4.

Table 5.166.4 Description of the "autoplay" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name autoplay
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'autoplay' characteristic is a boolean. When present, the user agent (as described in the algorithm described herein) will automatically begin playback of the media resource as soon as it can do so without stopping.

5.166.5 "mediagroup" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.5.

Table 5.166.5 Description of the "mediagroup" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mediagroup
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'mediagroup' content characteristic on media tags can be used to link multiple media elements together by implicitly creating a MediaController. The value is text; media elements with the same value are automatically linked by the user agent.

5.166.6 "loop" Characteristic Description

The description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.6.

Table 5.166.6 Description of the "loop" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name loop
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'loop' characteristic is a boolean that, if specified, indicates that the media tag is to seek back to the start of the media resource upon reaching the end.

5.166.7 "muted" Characteristic Description

The description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.7.

Table 5.166.7 Description of the "muted" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name muted
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'muted' characteristic on media tags is a boolean that controls the default state of the audio output of the media resource, potentially overriding user preferences. When a media tag is created, if it has a muted attribute specified, the user agent must mute the media element's audio output, overriding any user preference.

5.166.8 "controls" Characteristic Description

The description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.8.

Table 5.166.8 Description of the "controls" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name controls
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'controls' characteristic is a boolean. If present, it indicates that the author has not provided a scripted controller and would like the user agent to provide its own set of controls.

5.166.9 "poster" Characteristic Description

The description of the "poster" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.9.

Table 5.166.9 Description of the "poster" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name poster
Data Type URL
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'poster' characteristic gives the address of an image file that the user agent can show while no video data is available. The characteristic, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

5.166.10 "width" Characteristic Description

The description of the "width" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.10.

Table 5.166.10 Description of the "width" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name width
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'width' characteristic defines the width of the video content in CSS pixels.

5.166.11 "height" Characteristic Description

The description of the "height" characteristic for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.11.

Table 5.166.11 Description of the "height" characteristic for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name height
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'height' characteristic defines the width of the video content in CSS pixels.

5.166.12 "source" Attribute Description

The description of the "source" attribute for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.12.

Table 5.166.12 Description of the "source" attribute for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name source
Data Type Source
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The 'source' tag allows authors to specify multiple alternative media resources for video elements.

5.166.13 "track" Attribute Description

The description of the "track" attribute for the "Video" class is given in Table 5.166.13.

Table 5.166.13 Description of the "track" attribute for the "Video" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name track
Data Type Track
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The track tag allows authors to specify explicit external timed text tracks for the video tags.

toc | top

6. Abstract Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the abstract data classes used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

6.1 Adaptive Class Description

The data model for the "Adaptive" class is shown in Figure 6.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.1

UML diagram of the Adaptive class.

Figure 6.1 - Adaptive class definitions.

Table 6.1 Description of the "Adaptive" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Adaptive
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description In QTI 3.0 support has been added for the use of an external service to enable adaptive selection based upon the IMS Computer Adaoptive Testing 1.0 specification [CAT, 19]. This abstract class makes this new feature available as an alternative to the use of the approach based upon selection and ordering.

6.1.1 "qti-adaptive-selection" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-adaptive-selection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class is given in Table 6.1.1.

Table 6.1.1 Description of the "qti-adaptive-selection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-adaptive-selection
Data Type AdaptiveSelection
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This attribute enables the inclusion of the details to drive the use of the external adaptive selection service using CAT [CAT, 19]. This is a new capability added in QTI 3.0.

6.1.2 "selectOrderSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "selectOrderSelection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class is given in Table 6.1.2.

Table 6.1.2 Description of the "selectOrderSelection" attribute for the "Adaptive" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name selectOrderSelection
Data Type SelectOrderSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute to enable the inclusion of the use of the selection and ordering approach for adaptive sequencing.

6.2 AssessmentSectionSelection Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.2

UML diagram of the AssessmentSectionSelection class.

Figure 6.2 - AssessmentSectionSelection class definitions.

Table 6.2 Description of the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentSectionSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the selection of a qti-assessment-section or a qti-assessment-section-ref (a pointer to a qti-assessment-section). This is used in the context of a 'qti-test-part'.

6.2.1 "qti-assessment-section" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class is given in Table 6.2.1.

Table 6.2.1 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-section
Data Type AssessmentSection
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Makes the choice for a qti-assessment-section available.

6.2.2 "qti-assessment-section-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class is given in Table 6.2.2.

Table 6.2.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "AssessmentSectionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-section-ref
Data Type AssessmentSectionRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Makes the choice for a 'qti-assessment-section-ref' available.

6.3 BlockContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "BlockContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.3

UML diagram of the BlockContentModel class.

Figure 6.3 - BlockContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.3 Description of the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BlockContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the HTML block content tags to be used (this includes those that QTI also supports HTML5). Each use of this class allows the use of one of the tags so complex content is constructed by iterated use of this class.

6.3.1 "pre" Attribute Description

The description of the "pre" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.1.

Table 6.3.1 Description of the "pre" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pre
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'pre' tag for block content.

6.3.2 "h1" Attribute Description

The description of the "h1" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.2.

Table 6.3.2 Description of the "h1" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h1
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h1' tag for block content.

6.3.3 "h2" Attribute Description

The description of the "h2" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.3.

Table 6.3.3 Description of the "h2" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h2
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h2' tag for block content.

6.3.4 "h3" Attribute Description

The description of the "h3" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.4.

Table 6.3.4 Description of the "h3" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h3
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h3' tag for block content.

6.3.5 "h4" Attribute Description

The description of the "h4" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.5.

Table 6.3.5 Description of the "h4" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h4
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h4' tag for block content.

6.3.6 "h5" Attribute Description

The description of the "h5" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.6.

Table 6.3.6 Description of the "h5" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h5
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h5' tag for block content.

6.3.7 "h6" Attribute Description

The description of the "h6" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.7.

Table 6.3.7 Description of the "h6" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h6
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h6' tag for block content.

6.3.8 "p" Attribute Description

The description of the "p" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.8.

Table 6.3.8 Description of the "p" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name p
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'p' tag for block content.

6.3.9 "address" Attribute Description

The description of the "address" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.9.

Table 6.3.9 Description of the "address" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name address
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'address' tag for block content.

6.3.10 "dl" Attribute Description

The description of the "dl" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.10.

Table 6.3.10 Description of the "dl" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dl
Data Type DL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'dl' tag for block content.

6.3.11 "ol" Attribute Description

The description of the "ol" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.11.

Table 6.3.11 Description of the "ol" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ol
Data Type OUL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'ol' tag for block content.

6.3.12 "ul" Attribute Description

The description of the "ul" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.12.

Table 6.3.12 Description of the "ul" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ul
Data Type OUL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'ul' tag for block content.

6.3.13 "hr" Attribute Description

The description of the "hr" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.13.

Table 6.3.13 Description of the "hr" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name hr
Data Type HR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'hr' tag for block content.

6.3.14 "blockquote" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.14.

Table 6.3.14 Description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockquote
Data Type BlockQuote
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'blockquote' tag for block content.

6.3.15 "table" Attribute Description

The description of the "table" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.15.

Table 6.3.15 Description of the "table" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name table
Data Type Table
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'table' tag for block content.

6.3.16 "div" Attribute Description

The description of the "div" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.16.

Table 6.3.16 Description of the "div" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name div
Data Type Div
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'div' tag for block content.

6.3.17 "article" Attribute Description

The description of the "article" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.17.

Table 6.3.17 Description of the "article" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name article
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'article' tag for block content.

6.3.18 "aside" Attribute Description

The description of the "aside" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.18.

Table 6.3.18 Description of the "aside" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name aside
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'aside' tag for block content.

6.3.19 "audio" Attribute Description

The description of the "audio" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.19.

Table 6.3.19 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name audio
Data Type Audio
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'audio' tag for block content.

6.3.20 "figure" Attribute Description

The description of the "figure" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.20.

Table 6.3.20 Description of the "figure" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name figure
Data Type Figure
Value Space Container [ Unordered ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'figure' tag for block content.

6.3.21 "footer" Attribute Description

The description of the "footer" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.21.

Table 6.3.21 Description of the "footer" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name footer
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'footer' tag for block content.

6.3.22 "header" Attribute Description

The description of the "header" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.22.

Table 6.3.22 Description of the "header" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name header
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'header' tag for block content.

6.3.23 "nav" Attribute Description

The description of the "nav" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.23.

Table 6.3.23 Description of the "nav" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name nav
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'nav' tag for block content.

6.3.24 "section" Attribute Description

The description of the "section" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.24.

Table 6.3.24 Description of the "section" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name section
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'section' tag for block content.

6.3.25 "video" Attribute Description

The description of the "video" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.3.25.

Table 6.3.25 Description of the "video" attribute for the "BlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name video
Data Type Video
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'video' tag for block content.

6.4 BlockGroup Class Description

The data model for the "BlockGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.4

UML diagram of the BlockGroup class.

Figure 6.4 - BlockGroup class definitions.

Table 6.4 Description of the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BlockGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract class that is used to enable the insertion of content including HTML block content and the QTI interactions.

6.4.1 "qti-position-object-stage" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.1.

Table 6.4.1 Description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-position-object-stage
Data Type PositionObjectStage
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the 'positionObjectStage' feature from QTI.

6.4.2 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.2.

Table 6.4.2 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-custom-interaction
Data Type CustomInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the custom interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.3 "qti-portable-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.3.

Table 6.4.3 Description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-portable-custom-interaction
Data Type PortableCustomInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the portable custom interaction feature as defined in [PCI, 20].

6.4.4 "qti-drawing-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.4.

Table 6.4.4 Description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-drawing-interaction
Data Type DrawingInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the drawing interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.5 "qti-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.5.

Table 6.4.5 Description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap-match-interaction
Data Type GapMatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the gapMatch interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.6 "qti-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.6.

Table 6.4.6 Description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-match-interaction
Data Type MatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the match interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.7 "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.7.

Table 6.4.7 Description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction
Data Type GraphicGapMatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicGapMatch interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.8 "qti-hotspot-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.8.

Table 6.4.8 Description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hotspot-interaction
Data Type HotspotInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the hotspot interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.9 "qti-graphic-order-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.9.

Table 6.4.9 Description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-order-interaction
Data Type GraphicOrderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicOrder interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.10 "qti-select-point-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.10.

Table 6.4.10 Description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-select-point-interaction
Data Type SelectPointInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the selectPoint interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.11 "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.11.

Table 6.4.11 Description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-associate-interaction
Data Type GraphicAssociateInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicAssociate interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.12 "qti-slider-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.12.

Table 6.4.12 Description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-slider-interaction
Data Type SliderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the slider interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.13 "qti-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.13.

Table 6.4.13 Description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-choice-interaction
Data Type ChoiceInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the choice interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.14 "qti-media-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.14.

Table 6.4.14 Description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-media-interaction
Data Type MediaInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the media interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.15 "qti-hottext-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.15.

Table 6.4.15 Description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext-interaction
Data Type HotTextInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the hottext interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.16 "qti-order-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.16.

Table 6.4.16 Description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-order-interaction
Data Type OrderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the order interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.17 "qti-extended-text-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.17.

Table 6.4.17 Description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-extended-text-interaction
Data Type ExtendedTextInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the extendedText interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.18 "qti-upload-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.18.

Table 6.4.18 Description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-upload-interaction
Data Type UploadInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the upload interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.19 "qti-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.19.

Table 6.4.19 Description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-associate-interaction
Data Type AssociateInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the associate interaction feature from QTI.

6.4.20 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.20.

Table 6.4.20 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-block
Data Type FeedbackBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the block feedback content.

6.4.21 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.21.

Table 6.4.21 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the block template content.

6.4.22 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.22.

Table 6.4.22 Description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.4.23 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.23.

Table 6.4.23 Description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.4.24 "blockContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class is given in Table 6.4.24.

Table 6.4.24 Description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockContentModel
Data Type BlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclsion of the HTML block content.

6.5 BlockStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.5

UML diagram of the BlockStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.5 - BlockStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.5 Description of the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BlockStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class. It is similar to the 'Block' class that excludes interactions. It enables the construction of complex HTML content with other QTI tags.

6.5.1 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.5.1.

Table 6.5.1 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-block
Data Type FeedbackBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the insertion of feedback blocks i.e. information that is to be used as feedback.

6.5.2 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.5.2.

Table 6.5.2 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the insertion of template blocks i.e. content that will be used to create templates.

6.5.3 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.5.3.

Table 6.5.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.5.4 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.5.4.

Table 6.5.4 Description of the "include" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.5.5 "blockContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.5.5.

Table 6.5.5 Description of the "blockContentModel" attribute for the "BlockStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockContentModel
Data Type BlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of arbitrary HTML block content tags e.g. 'pre', 'h1', etc.

6.6 CardSelection Class Description

The data model for the "CardSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.6 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.6

UML diagram of the CardSelection class.

Figure 6.6 - CardSelection class definitions.

Table 6.6 Description of the "CardSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name CardSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class is used to enable the optional provision of either the actual HTML context for the accessibility content card or a set of links to files containing that content.

6.6.1 "qti-html-content" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardSelection" class is given in Table 6.6.1.

Table 6.6.1 Description of the "qti-html-content" attribute for the "CardSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-html-content
Data Type HTMLContent
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The HTML content that is to be used for the alternative content.

6.6.2 "qti-file-href" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardSelection" class is given in Table 6.6.2.

Table 6.6.2 Description of the "qti-file-href" attribute for the "CardSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-file-href
Data Type FileHrefCard
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The set of links to the files that contain the alternative content.

6.7 DLSelection Class Description

The data model for the "DLSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.7 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.7

UML diagram of the DLSelection class.

Figure 6.7 - DLSelection class definitions.

Table 6.7 Description of the "DLSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DLSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that provides the selection between the 'dd' and 'dt' HTML tags as part of the HTML list content capability.

6.7.1 "dd" Attribute Description

The description of the "dd" attribute for the "DLSelection" class is given in Table 6.7.1.

Table 6.7.1 Description of the "dd" attribute for the "DLSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dd
Data Type DD
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the HTML 'dd' tag as one of the choices.

6.7.2 "dt" Attribute Description

The description of the "dt" attribute for the "DLSelection" class is given in Table 6.7.2.

Table 6.7.2 Description of the "dt" attribute for the "DLSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dt
Data Type DT
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the HTML 'dt' tag as one of the choices.

6.8 DivSelection Class Description

The data model for the "DivSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.8 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.8

UML diagram of the DivSelection class.

Figure 6.8 - DivSelection class definitions.

Table 6.8 Description of the "DivSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DivSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the HTML 'div' tag to contain content based upn the 'positionObjectStage' and the HTML flow content.

6.8.1 "qti-position-object-stage" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "DivSelection" class is given in Table 6.8.1.

Table 6.8.1 Description of the "qti-position-object-stage" attribute for the "DivSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-position-object-stage
Data Type PositionObjectStage
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the 'positionObjectStage' HTML layout control as one of the selections.

6.8.2 "flowGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DivSelection" class is given in Table 6.8.2.

Table 6.8.2 Description of the "flowGroup" attribute for the "DivSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowGroup
Data Type FlowGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the HTML flow content to be used.

6.9 ExpressionGroup Class Description

The data model for the "ExpressionGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.9 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.9

UML diagram of the ExpressionGroup class.

Figure 6.9 - ExpressionGroup class definitions.

Table 6.9 Description of the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ExpressionGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that makes the set of QTI expressions/operators available to define the associated response and/or outcome and/or template processing.

6.9.1 "qti-and" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-and" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.1.

Table 6.9.1 Description of the "qti-and" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-and
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the logic 'and' operation across one or more other operators. The and operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is true if all sub-expressions are true and false if any of them are false. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL and all others are true then the operator also results in NULL.

6.9.2 "qti-gt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.2.

Table 6.9.2 Description of the "qti-gt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gt
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'greater than' function on the enclosed expression. The gt operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically greater than the second and false if it is less than or equal to the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.3 "qti-not" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-not" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.3.

Table 6.9.3 Description of the "qti-not" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-not
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the logic 'not' operation on the enclosed expression. The not operator takes a single sub-expression with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value obtained by the logical negation of the sub-expression's value. If the sub-expression is NULL then the not operator also results in NULL.

6.9.4 "qti-lt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.4.

Table 6.9.4 Description of the "qti-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lt
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'less than' function on the enclosed expression.

6.9.5 "qti-gte" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.5.

Table 6.9.5 Description of the "qti-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gte
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'greater than or equal' function on the enclosed expression. The gte operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the first expression is numerically greater than or equal to the second and false if it is less than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.6 "qti-lte" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.6.

Table 6.9.6 Description of the "qti-lte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lte
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'less than or equal' function on the enclosed expression. The lte operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the first expression is numerically less than or equal to the second and 'false' if it is greater than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.7 "qti-or" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-or" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.7.

Table 6.9.7 Description of the "qti-or" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-or
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the logic 'or' operation across one or more other operators. The or operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is 'true' if any of the sub-expressions are 'true' and 'false' if all of them are 'false'. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL and all the others are false then the operator also results in NULL.

6.9.8 "qti-sum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.8.

Table 6.9.8 Description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-sum
Data Type NumericLogic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'sum' function on the enclosed set of expressions. The sum operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the sum of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.9 "qti-duration-lt" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-duration-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.9.

Table 6.9.9 Description of the "qti-duration-lt" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-duration-lt
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The durationLT operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and base-type duration. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the first duration is shorter than the second and 'false' if it is longer than (or equal) to the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. There is no 'durationLTE' or 'durationGT' because equality of duration is meaningless given the variable precision allowed by duration. Given that duration values are obtained by truncation rather than rounding it makes sense to test only less-than or greater-than-equal inequalities only. For example, if we want to determine if a candidate took less than 10 seconds to complete a task in a system that reports durations to a resolution of epsilon seconds (epsilon less than 1) then a value equal to 10 would cover all durations in the range [10,10+epsilon).

6.9.10 "qti-duration-gte" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-duration-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.10.

Table 6.9.10 Description of the "qti-duration-gte" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-duration-gte
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The durationGTE operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and base-type duration. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the first duration is longer (or equal, within the limits imposed by truncation as described above) than the second and 'false' if it is shorter than the second. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. See durationLT for more information about testing the equality of durations.

6.9.11 "qti-subtract" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.11.

Table 6.9.11 Description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-subtract
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The subtract operator takes 2 sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float or, if both sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the first value minus the second. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.12 "qti-divide" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.12.

Table 6.9.12 Description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-divide
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression divided by the second expression. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL. Item authors should make every effort to ensure that the value of the second expression is never 0, however, if it is zero or the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator should result in NULL.

6.9.13 "qti-multiple" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.13.

Table 6.9.13 Description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-multiple
Data Type Logic0toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The multiple operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or multiple cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with multiple cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with multiple cardinality have their individual values added to the result: containers cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B and {C,D} the multiple operator results in {A,B,C,D}. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

6.9.14 "qti-ordered" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.14.

Table 6.9.14 Description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-ordered
Data Type Logic0toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The ordered operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with ordered cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with ordered cardinality have their individual values added (in order) to the result: contains cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B, {C,D} the ordered operator results in {A,B,C,D}. Note that the ordered operator never results in an empty container. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

6.9.15 "qti-custom-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.15.

Table 6.9.15 Description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-custom-operator
Data Type CustomOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The custom operator provides an extension mechanism for defining operations not currently supported by this specification.

6.9.16 "qti-random" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.16.

Table 6.9.16 Description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The random operator takes a sub-expression with a multiple or ordered container value and any base-type. The result is a single value randomly selected from the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. If the sub-expression is NULL then the result is also NULL.

6.9.17 "qti-substring" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-substring" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.17.

Table 6.9.17 Description of the "qti-substring" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-substring
Data Type Substring
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The substring operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have an effective base-type of string and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the first expression is a substring of the second expression and 'false' if it isn't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL.

6.9.18 "qti-equal-rounded" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-equal-rounded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.18.

Table 6.9.18 Description of the "qti-equal-rounded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-equal-rounded
Data Type EqualRounded
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The equalRounded operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the two expressions are numerically equal after rounding and 'false' if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.19 "qti-null" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.19.

Table 6.9.19 Description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-null
Data Type Empty (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Null is a simple expression that returns the NULL value - the null value is treated as if it is of any desired base-type.

6.9.20 "qti-delete" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.20.

Table 6.9.20 Description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-delete
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The delete operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type. The first sub-expression must have single cardinality and the second must be a multiple or ordered container. The result is a new container derived from the second sub-expression with all instances of the first sub-expression removed. For example, when applied to A and {B,A,C,A} the result is the container {B,C}. If either sub-expression is NULL the result of the operator is NULL. The restrictions that apply to the member operator also apply to the delete operator.

6.9.21 "qti-match" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.21.

Table 6.9.21 Description of the "qti-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-match
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The match operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type and cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the two expressions represent the same value and 'false' if they do not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. The match operator must not be confused with broader notions of equality such as numerical equality. To avoid confusion, the match operator should not be used to compare subexpressions with base-types of float and must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

6.9.22 "qti-index" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.22.

Table 6.9.22 Description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-index
Data Type Index
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The index operator takes a sub-expression with an ordered container value and any base-type. The result is the nth value of the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. The first value of a container has index 1, the second 2 and so on. 'n' must be a positive integer. If 'n' exceeds the number of values in the container (or the sub-expression is NULL) then the result of the index operator is NULL. If 'n' is an identifier, it is the value of 'n' at runtime that is used.

6.9.23 "qti-power" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.23.

Table 6.9.23 Description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-power
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The power operator takes 2 sub-expression which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression raised to the power of the second. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator shall result in NULL.

6.9.24 "qti-equal" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-equal" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.24.

Table 6.9.24 Description of the "qti-equal" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-equal
Data Type Equal
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The equal operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have single cardinality and have a numerical base-type. The result is a single boolean with a value of true if the two expressions are numerically equal and false if they are not. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.25 "qti-contains" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-contains" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.25.

Table 6.9.25 Description of the "qti-contains" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-contains
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The contains operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type and cardinality - either multiple or ordered. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the container given by the first sub-expression contains the value given by the second sub-expression and 'false' if it does not. Note that the contains operator works differently depending on the cardinality of the two sub-expressions. For unordered containers the values are compared without regard for ordering, for example, [A,B,C] contains [C,A]. Note that [A,B,C] does not contain [B,B] but that [A,B,B,C] does. For ordered containers the second sub-expression must be a strict sub-sequence within the first. In other words, [A,B,C] does not contain [C,A] but it does contain [B,C]. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL. Like the member operator, the contains operator should not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of float and must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

6.9.26 "qti-container-size" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.26.

Table 6.9.26 Description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-container-size
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The containerSize operator takes a sub-expression with any base-type and either multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is an integer giving the number of values in the sub-expression, in other words, the size of the container. If the sub-expression is NULL the result is 0. This operator can be used for determining how many choices were selected in a multiple-response choiceInteraction, for example.

6.9.27 "qti-correct" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.27.

Table 6.9.27 Description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-correct
Data Type Correct
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the declaration of a response variable and returns the associated correctResponse or NULL if no correct value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the correct response from an individual item.

6.9.28 "qti-default" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.28.

Table 6.9.28 Description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default
Data Type Default
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the declaration of an itemVariable and returns the associated defaultValue or NULL if no default value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the default value from an individual item.

6.9.29 "qti-any-n" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-any-n" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.29.

Table 6.9.29 Description of the "qti-any-n" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-any-n
Data Type AnyN
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The anyN operator takes one or more sub-expressions each with a base-type of boolean and single cardinality. The result is a single boolean which is 'true' if at least min of the sub-expressions are 'true' and at most max of the sub-expressions are 'true'. If more than n - min sub-expressions are 'false' (where n is the total number of sub-expressions) or more than max sub-expressions are 'true' then the result is 'false'. If one or more sub-expressions are NULL then it is possible that neither of these conditions is satisfied, in which case the operator results in NULL. For example, if min is 3 and max is 4 and the sub-expressions have values {true,true,false,NULL} then the operator results in NULL whereas {true,false,false,NULL} results in false and {true,true,true,NULL} results in 'true'. The result NULL indicates that the correct value for the operator cannot be determined.

6.9.30 "qti-integer-divide" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.30.

Table 6.9.30 Description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-divide
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the first expression (x) divided by the second expression (y) rounded down to the greatest integer (i) such that i LTE (x/y). If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.31 "qti-integer-modulus" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.31.

Table 6.9.31 Description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-modulus
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer modulus operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the remainder when the first expression (x) is divided by the second expression (y). If z is the result of the corresponding integerDivide operator then the result is x-z*y. If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.32 "qti-is-null" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-is-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.32.

Table 6.9.32 Description of the "qti-is-null" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-is-null
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The isNull operator takes a sub-expression with any base-type and cardinality. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the sub-expression is NULL and 'false' otherwise. Note that empty containers and empty strings are both treated as NULL.

6.9.33 "qti-member" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-member" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.33.

Table 6.9.33 Description of the "qti-member" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-member
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The member operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type. The first sub-expression must have single cardinality and the second must be a multiple or ordered container. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the value given by the first sub-expression is in the container defined by the second sub-expression. If either sub-expression is NULL then the result of the operator is NULL. The member operator should not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of float because of the poorly defined comparison of values. It must not be used on sub-expressions with a base-type of duration.

6.9.34 "qti-product" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.34.

Table 6.9.34 Description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-product
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The product operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the product of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.35 "qti-round" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.35.

Table 6.9.35 Description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-round
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The round operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by rounding the value of the sub-expression. The result is the integer n for all input values in the range [n-0.5,n+0.5). In other words, 6.8 and 6.5 both round up to 7, 6.49 rounds down to 6 and -6.5 rounds up to -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

6.9.36 "qti-truncate" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.36.

Table 6.9.36 Description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-truncate
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The truncate operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by truncating the value of the sub-expression towards zero. For example, the value 6.8 becomes 6 and the value -6.8 becomes -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

6.9.37 "qti-field-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.37.

Table 6.9.37 Description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-field-value
Data Type FieldValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The field-value operator takes a sub-expression with a record container value. The result is the value of the field with the specified fieldIdentifier. If there is no field with that identifier then the result of the operator is NULL.

6.9.38 "qti-random-integer" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.38.

Table 6.9.38 Description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random-integer
Data Type RandomInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Selects a random integer from the specified range [min,max] satisfying min + step * n for some integer n. For example, with min=2, max=11 and step=3 the values {2,5,8,11} are possible.

6.9.39 "qti-random-float" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.39.

Table 6.9.39 Description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random-float
Data Type RandomFloat
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Selects a random float from the specified range [min,max].

6.9.40 "qti-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.40.

Table 6.9.40 Description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-variable
Data Type Variable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the value of an itemVariable that has been declared in a corresponding variableDeclaration or is one of the built-in variables. The result has the base-type and cardinality declared for the variable subject to the type promotion of weighted outcomes. During outcomes processing, values taken from an individual item session can be looked up by prefixing the name of the item variable with the identifier assigned to the item in the assessmentItemRef, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 you would use a variable instance with identifier Q01.SCORE. In adaptive tests that contain items that are allowed to be replaced (i.e. that have the withReplacement attribute set to "true"), the same item can be instantiated more than once. In order to access the outcome variable values of each instantiation, a number that denotes the instance's place in the sequence of the item's instantiation is inserted between the item variable identifier and the item variable, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 in its second instantiation you would use a variable instance, prefixed by the instantiation sequence number, prefixed by an identifier Q01.2.SCORE. When looking up the value of a response variable it always takes the value assigned to it by the candidate's last submission. Unsubmitted responses are not available during expression evaluation. The value of an item variable taken from an item instantiated multiple times from the same assessmentItemRef (through the use of selection withReplacement) is taken from the last instance submitted if submission is simultaneous, otherwise it is undefined.

6.9.41 "qti-test-variables" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.41.

Table 6.9.41 Description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-test-variables
Data Type TestVariables
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the value of an itemVariable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered, all NULL values are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type as specified below.

6.9.42 "qti-integer-to-float" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.42.

Table 6.9.42 Description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-to-float
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer to float conversion operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is a value of base type float with the same numeric value. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.43 "qti-inside" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-inside" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.43.

Table 6.9.43 Description of the "qti-inside" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-inside
Data Type Inside
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The inside operator takes a single sub-expression which must have a base-type of point. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the given point is inside the area defined by shape and coords. If the sub-expression is a container the result is 'true' if any of the points are inside the area. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.44 "qti-base-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.44.

Table 6.9.44 Description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-base-value
Data Type BaseValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The simplest expression returns a single value from the set defined by the given base-type.

6.9.45 "qti-pattern-match" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-pattern-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.45.

Table 6.9.45 Description of the "qti-pattern-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-pattern-match
Data Type PatternMatch
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The patternMatch operator takes a sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the sub-expression matches the regular expression given by pattern and 'false' if it does not. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.46 "qti-map-response-point" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.46.

Table 6.9.46 Description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-map-response-point
Data Type MapResponse
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mapResponsePoint expression looks up the value of a response variable that must be of base-type point, and transforms it using the associated areaMapping. The transformation is similar to mapResponse except that the points are tested against each area in turn. When mapping containers each area can be mapped once only. For example, if the candidate identified two points that both fall in the same area then the mappedValue is still added to the calculated total just once.

6.9.47 "qti-map-response" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.47.

Table 6.9.47 Description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-map-response
Data Type MapResponse
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the value of a response variable and then transforms it using the associated mapping, which must have been declared. The result is a single float. If the response variable has single cardinality then the value returned is simply the mapped target value from the map. If the response variable has multiple or ordered cardinality then the value returned is the sum of the mapped target values. This expression cannot be applied to variables of record cardinality. For example, if a mapping associates the identifiers {A,B,C,D} with the values {0,1,0.5,0} respectively then mapResponse will map the single value 'C' to the numeric value 0.5 and the set of values {C,B} to the value 1.5. If a container contains multiple instances of the same value then that value is counted once only. To continue the example above {B,B,C} would still map to 1.5 and not 2.5.

6.9.48 "qti-string-match" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-string-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.48.

Table 6.9.48 Description of the "qti-string-match" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-string-match
Data Type StringMatch
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The stringMatch operator takes two sub-expressions which must have single and a base-type of string. The result is a single boolean with a value of 'true' if the two strings match according to the comparison rules and 'false' if they don't. If either sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.9.49 "qti-repeat" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.49.

Table 6.9.49 Description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-repeat
Data Type Repeat
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The repeat operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions, all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality and the same base-type. The result is an ordered container having the same base-type as its sub-expressions. The container is filled sequentially by evaluating each sub-expression in turn and adding the resulting single values to the container, iterating this process number-repeats times in total. If number-repeats refers to a variable whose value is less than 1, the value of the whole expression is NULL. Any sub-expressions evaluating to NULL are ignored. If all sub-expressions are NULL then the result is NULL.

6.9.50 "qti-round-to" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.50.

Table 6.9.50 Description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-round-to
Data Type RoundTo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The roundTo operator takes one sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a single float with the value nearest to that of the expression's value such that when converted to a decimal string it represents the expression rounded by the specified rounding method to the specified precision. If the sub-expression is NULL, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. When rounding to n significant figures, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting from the first non-zero digit from the left in the number. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded. When rounding to n decimal places, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting to the right from the decimal point. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded.

6.9.51 "qti-lcm" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.51.

Table 6.9.51 Description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lcm
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lcm operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the lowest common multiple (lcm) of the argument values. If any argument is zero, the result is 0, lcm(0,n)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the lcm of random values. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.9.52 "qti-gcd" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.52.

Table 6.9.52 Description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gcd
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The gcd operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the greatest common divisor (gcd) of the argument values. If all the arguments are zero, the result is 0, gcd(0,0)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the gcd of random values. If some, but not all, of the arguments are zero, the result is the gcd of the non-zero arguments, gcd(0,n)=n if n not equal to 0. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.9.53 "qti-min" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.53.

Table 6.9.53 Description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-min
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The min operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the smallest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to negative infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.9.54 "qti-max" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.54.

Table 6.9.54 Description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-max
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The max operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the greatest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to positive infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.9.55 "qti-math-constant" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.55.

Table 6.9.55 Description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-math-constant
Data Type MathConstant
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The result is a mathematical constant returned as a single float, e.g. Pi and e.

6.9.56 "qti-stats-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.56.

Table 6.9.56 Description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stats-operator
Data Type StatsOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The statsOperator operator takes 1 sub-expression which is a container of multiple or ordered cardinality and has a numerical base-type. The result is a single float. If the sub-expression or any value contained therein is NULL, the result is NULL. If any value contained in the sub-expression is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.9.57 "qti-math-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.57.

Table 6.9.57 Description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-math-operator
Data Type MathOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mathOperator operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and have numerical base-types. The trigonometric functions, sin, cos and tan, take one argument in radians, which evaluates to a single float. Other functions take one numerical argument. Further functions might take more than one numerical argument, e.g. atan2 (two argument arc tan). The result is a single float, except for the functions signum, floor and ceil, which return a single integer. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions falls outside the natural domain of the function called by mathOperator, e.g. log(0) or asin(2), then the result is NULL. See Subsection 2.12 for the set of associated rules.

6.9.58 "qti-number-correct" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.58.

Table 6.9.58 Description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-correct
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-correct expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which the all defined response variables match their associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.9.59 "qti-number-incorrect" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.59.

Table 6.9.59 Description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-incorrect
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-incorrect expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which at least one of the defined response variables does not match its associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined and have been attempted at least once are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.9.60 "qti-number-presented" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.60.

Table 6.9.60 Description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-presented
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-presented expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once). In other words, items with which the user has interacted, whether or not they provided a response. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.9.61 "qti-number-responded" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.61.

Table 6.9.61 Description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-responded
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-responded expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once) and for which a response was given. In other words, items for which at least one declared response has a value that differs from its declared default (typically NULL). The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.9.62 "qti-number-selected" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.62.

Table 6.9.62 Description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-selected
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-selected expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been selected for presentation to the candidate, regardless of whether the candidate has attempted them or not. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.9.63 "qti-outcome-minimum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.63.

Table 6.9.63 Description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-minimum
Data Type OutcomeMinMax
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the qti-normal-minimum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. Items with no declared minimum are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

6.9.64 "qti-outcome-maximum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.9.64.

Table 6.9.64 Description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "ExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-maximum
Data Type OutcomeMinMax
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the qti-normal-maximum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. If any of the items within the given subset have no declared maximum the result is NULL, otherwise the result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

6.10 FeedandTempBlockStatic Class Description

The data model for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is shown in Figure 6.10 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.10

UML diagram of the FeedandTempBlockStatic class.

Figure 6.10 - FeedandTempBlockStatic class definitions.

Table 6.10 Description of the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedandTempBlockStatic
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables complex content for Template Blocks based upon static content.

6.10.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.1.

Table 6.10.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.10.2 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.2.

Table 6.10.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.10.3 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.3.

Table 6.10.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.10.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.4.

Table 6.10.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of template block content in the recursive structure.

6.10.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.5.

Table 6.10.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of template inline content in the recursive structure.

6.10.6 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.6.

Table 6.10.6 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-block
Data Type TemplateBlockFeedbackBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of feedback block content in the recursive structure.

6.10.7 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.7.

Table 6.10.7 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of feedback inline content in the recursive structure.

6.10.8 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.10.8.

Table 6.10.8 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedandTempBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.11 FeedbackBlockStatic Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is shown in Figure 6.11 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.11

UML diagram of the FeedbackBlockStatic class.

Figure 6.11 - FeedbackBlockStatic class definitions.

Table 6.11 Description of the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackBlockStatic
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the FeedbackBlock class to include any sequence of content based upon the blockGroup, inline content, inline templates, inline feedback and printedVariables.

6.11.1 "blockGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.11.1.

Table 6.11.1 Description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockGroup
Data Type BlockGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of block content, based upon QTI interactions, from the abstract class BlockGroup.

6.11.2 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.11.2.

Table 6.11.2 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attrbute that enables the insertion of inline content as defined by HTML.

6.11.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.11.3.

Table 6.11.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template inline structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.11.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.11.4.

Table 6.11.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of feedback inline structures i.e. to identify feedback-based information.

6.11.5 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class is given in Table 6.11.5.

Table 6.11.5 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackBlockStatic" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.12 FeedbackFlowStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.12 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.12

UML diagram of the FeedbackFlowStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.12 - FeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.12 Description of the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackFlowStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to enable the content to be defined for Modal feedback.

6.12.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.1.

Table 6.12.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.12.2 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.2.

Table 6.12.2 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext
Data Type HotText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines a hottext area that is used within the content of an hottextInteraction to provide the individual choices. It must not contain any nested interactions or other hottext areas.

6.12.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.3.

Table 6.12.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template inline structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.12.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.4.

Table 6.12.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template block structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.12.5 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.5.

Table 6.12.5 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.12.6 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.6.

Table 6.12.6 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.12.7 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.12.7.

Table 6.12.7 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.13 FeedbackInlineGroup Class Description

The data model for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.13 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.13

UML diagram of the FeedbackInlineGroup class.

Figure 6.13 - FeedbackInlineGroup class definitions.

Table 6.13 Description of the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FeedbackInlineGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class. It is the container for the content for the inline feedback.

6.13.1 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.13.1.

Table 6.13.1 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of inline content as defined by HTML.

6.13.2 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.13.2.

Table 6.13.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.13.3 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.13.3.

Table 6.13.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.13.4 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.13.4.

Table 6.13.4 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template inline structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.13.5 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.13.5.

Table 6.13.5 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FeedbackInlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.14 FlowContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "FlowContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.14 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.14

UML diagram of the FlowContentModel class.

Figure 6.14 - FlowContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.14 Description of the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FlowContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to define HTML flow content (not includng QTI interactions). These are tags that can appear inside list items, table cells, etc. which includes block-type and inline-type elements.

6.14.1 "pre" Attribute Description

The description of the "pre" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.1.

Table 6.14.1 Description of the "pre" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pre
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'pre' tag for block content.

6.14.2 "h1" Attribute Description

The description of the "h1" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.2.

Table 6.14.2 Description of the "h1" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h1
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h1' tag for block content.

6.14.3 "h2" Attribute Description

The description of the "h2" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.3.

Table 6.14.3 Description of the "h2" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h2
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h2' tag for block content.

6.14.4 "h3" Attribute Description

The description of the "h3" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.4.

Table 6.14.4 Description of the "h3" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h3
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h3' tag for block content.

6.14.5 "h4" Attribute Description

The description of the "h4" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.5.

Table 6.14.5 Description of the "h4" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h4
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h4' tag for block content.

6.14.6 "h5" Attribute Description

The description of the "h5" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.6.

Table 6.14.6 Description of the "h5" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h5
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h5' tag for block content.

6.14.7 "h6" Attribute Description

The description of the "h6" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.7.

Table 6.14.7 Description of the "h6" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name h6
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'h6' tag for block content.

6.14.8 "p" Attribute Description

The description of the "p" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.8.

Table 6.14.8 Description of the "p" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name p
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'p' tag for block content.

6.14.9 "address" Attribute Description

The description of the "address" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.9.

Table 6.14.9 Description of the "address" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name address
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'address' tag for block content.

6.14.10 "dl" Attribute Description

The description of the "dl" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.10.

Table 6.14.10 Description of the "dl" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dl
Data Type DL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'dl' tag for block content.

6.14.11 "ol" Attribute Description

The description of the "ol" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.11.

Table 6.14.11 Description of the "ol" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ol
Data Type OUL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'ol' tag for block content.

6.14.12 "ul" Attribute Description

The description of the "ul" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.12.

Table 6.14.12 Description of the "ul" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ul
Data Type OUL
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'ul' tag for block content.

6.14.13 "br" Attribute Description

The description of the "br" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.13.

Table 6.14.13 Description of the "br" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name br
Data Type BR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'br' tag for block content.

6.14.14 "hr" Attribute Description

The description of the "hr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.14.

Table 6.14.14 Description of the "hr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name hr
Data Type HR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'hr' tag for block content.

6.14.15 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.15.

Table 6.14.15 Description of the "img" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'img' tag for block content.

6.14.16 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.16.

Table 6.14.16 Description of the "object" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'object' tag for block content.

6.14.17 "blockquote" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.17.

Table 6.14.17 Description of the "blockquote" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockquote
Data Type BlockQuote
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'blockquote' tag for block content.

6.14.18 "em" Attribute Description

The description of the "em" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.18.

Table 6.14.18 Description of the "em" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name em
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'em' tag for block content.

6.14.19 "a" Attribute Description

The description of the "a" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.19.

Table 6.14.19 Description of the "a" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name a
Data Type A
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'a' tag for block content.

6.14.20 "code" Attribute Description

The description of the "code" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.20.

Table 6.14.20 Description of the "code" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name code
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'code' tag for block content.

6.14.21 "span" Attribute Description

The description of the "span" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.21.

Table 6.14.21 Description of the "span" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name span
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'span' tag for block content.

6.14.22 "sub" Attribute Description

The description of the "sub" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.22.

Table 6.14.22 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sub
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'sub' tag for block content.

6.14.23 "acronym" Attribute Description

The description of the "acronym" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.23.

Table 6.14.23 Description of the "acronym" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name acronym
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'acronym' tag for block content.

6.14.24 "big" Attribute Description

The description of the "big" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.24.

Table 6.14.24 Description of the "big" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name big
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'big' tag for block content.

6.14.25 "tt" Attribute Description

The description of the "tt" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.25.

Table 6.14.25 Description of the "tt" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tt
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'tt' tag for block content.

6.14.26 "kbd" Attribute Description

The description of the "kbd" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.26.

Table 6.14.26 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name kbd
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'kbd' tag for block content.

6.14.27 "q" Attribute Description

The description of the "q" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.27.

Table 6.14.27 Description of the "q" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name q
Data Type Q
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'q' tag for block content.

6.14.28 "i" Attribute Description

The description of the "i" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.28.

Table 6.14.28 Description of the "i" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name i
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'i' tag for block content.

6.14.29 "dfn" Attribute Description

The description of the "dfn" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.29.

Table 6.14.29 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dfn
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'dfn' tag for block content.

6.14.30 "abbr" Attribute Description

The description of the "abbr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.30.

Table 6.14.30 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name abbr
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'abbr' tag for block content.

6.14.31 "strong" Attribute Description

The description of the "strong" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.31.

Table 6.14.31 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name strong
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'strong' tag for block content.

6.14.32 "sup" Attribute Description

The description of the "sup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.32.

Table 6.14.32 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sup
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'sup' tag for block content.

6.14.33 "var" Attribute Description

The description of the "var" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.33.

Table 6.14.33 Description of the "var" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name var
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'var' tag for block content.

6.14.34 "small" Attribute Description

The description of the "small" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.34.

Table 6.14.34 Description of the "small" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name small
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'small' tag for block content.

6.14.35 "samp" Attribute Description

The description of the "samp" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.35.

Table 6.14.35 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name samp
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'samp' tag for block content.

6.14.36 "b" Attribute Description

The description of the "b" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.36.

Table 6.14.36 Description of the "b" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name b
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'b' tag for block content.

6.14.37 "cite" Attribute Description

The description of the "cite" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.37.

Table 6.14.37 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name cite
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'cite' tag for block content.

6.14.38 "table" Attribute Description

The description of the "table" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.38.

Table 6.14.38 Description of the "table" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name table
Data Type Table
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'table' tag for block content.

6.14.39 "div" Attribute Description

The description of the "div" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.39.

Table 6.14.39 Description of the "div" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name div
Data Type Div
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'div' tag for block content.

6.14.40 "bdo" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdo" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.40.

Table 6.14.40 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdo
Data Type BDO
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML 'bdo' tag for block content.

6.14.41 "bdi" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdi" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.41.

Table 6.14.41 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdi
Data Type BDI
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'bdi' tag for block content.

6.14.42 "figure" Attribute Description

The description of the "figure" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.42.

Table 6.14.42 Description of the "figure" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name figure
Data Type Figure
Value Space Container [ Unordered ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'figure' tag for block content.

6.14.43 "audio" Attribute Description

The description of the "audio" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.43.

Table 6.14.43 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name audio
Data Type Audio
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'audio' tag for block content.

6.14.44 "video" Attribute Description

The description of the "video" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.44.

Table 6.14.44 Description of the "video" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name video
Data Type Video
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'video' tag for block content.

6.14.45 "article" Attribute Description

The description of the "article" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.45.

Table 6.14.45 Description of the "article" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name article
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'article' tag for block content.

6.14.46 "aside" Attribute Description

The description of the "aside" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.46.

Table 6.14.46 Description of the "aside" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name aside
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'aside' tag for block content.

6.14.47 "footer" Attribute Description

The description of the "footer" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.47.

Table 6.14.47 Description of the "footer" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name footer
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'footer' tag for block content.

6.14.48 "header" Attribute Description

The description of the "header" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.48.

Table 6.14.48 Description of the "header" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name header
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'header' tag for block content.

6.14.49 "label" Attribute Description

The description of the "label" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.49.

Table 6.14.49 Description of the "label" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name label
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'label' tag to be used.

6.14.50 "nav" Attribute Description

The description of the "nav" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.50.

Table 6.14.50 Description of the "nav" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name nav
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'nav' tag for block content.

6.14.51 "section" Attribute Description

The description of the "section" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.51.

Table 6.14.51 Description of the "section" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name section
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the use of the HTML5 'section' tag for block content.

6.14.52 "ruby" Attribute Description

The description of the "ruby" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.52.

Table 6.14.52 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ruby
Data Type Ruby
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'ruby' tag to be used.

6.14.53 "ssmlGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "ssmlGroup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.53.

Table 6.14.53 Description of the "ssmlGroup" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ssmlGroup
Data Type SSMLGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the SSML tags to be used.

6.14.54 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.54.

Table 6.14.54 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'picture' tag (a new tag added in HTML5).

6.14.55 "details" Attribute Description

The description of the "details" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class is given in Table 6.14.55.

Table 6.14.55 Description of the "details" attribute for the "FlowContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name details
Data Type Details
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the functionality of the HTML 'details' tag (a new tag added in HTML5).

6.15 FlowGroup Class Description

The data model for the "FlowGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.15 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.15

UML diagram of the FlowGroup class.

Figure 6.15 - FlowGroup class definitions.

Table 6.15 Description of the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FlowGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to define HTML flow content including the set of QTI interactions. These tags that can appear inside list items, table cells, etc. which includes block-type and inline-type elements.

6.15.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.1.

Table 6.15.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.15.2 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.2.

Table 6.15.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-block
Data Type FeedbackBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the feedback block content.

6.15.3 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.3.

Table 6.15.3 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext
Data Type HotText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines a hottext area that is used within the content. It must not contain any nested interactions or other hottext areas.

6.15.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.4.

Table 6.15.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the feedback inline content.

6.15.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.5.

Table 6.15.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template inline structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.15.6 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.6.

Table 6.15.6 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of template block structures i.e. to identify template-based information.

6.15.7 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.7.

Table 6.15.7 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.15.8 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.8.

Table 6.15.8 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.15.9 "qti-text-entry-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.9.

Table 6.15.9 Description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-text-entry-interaction
Data Type TextEntryInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the textEntry interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.10 "qti-inline-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.10.

Table 6.15.10 Description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-inline-choice-interaction
Data Type InlineChoiceInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the inlineChoice interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.11 "qti-end-attempt-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.11.

Table 6.15.11 Description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-end-attempt-interaction
Data Type EndAttemptInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the endAttempt interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.12 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.12.

Table 6.15.12 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-custom-interaction
Data Type CustomInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the custom interaction feature from QTI. This feature is deprecated.

6.15.13 "qti-portable-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.13.

Table 6.15.13 Description of the "qti-portable-custom-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-portable-custom-interaction
Data Type PortableCustomInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the portable custom interaction feature as defined in [PCI, 20].

6.15.14 "qti-drawing-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.14.

Table 6.15.14 Description of the "qti-drawing-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-drawing-interaction
Data Type DrawingInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the drawing interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.15 "qti-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.15.

Table 6.15.15 Description of the "qti-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap-match-interaction
Data Type GapMatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the gapMatch interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.16 "qti-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.16.

Table 6.15.16 Description of the "qti-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-match-interaction
Data Type MatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the match interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.17 "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.17.

Table 6.15.17 Description of the "qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-gap-match-interaction
Data Type GraphicGapMatchInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicGapMatch interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.18 "qti-hotspot-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.18.

Table 6.15.18 Description of the "qti-hotspot-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hotspot-interaction
Data Type HotspotInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the hotspot interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.19 "qti-graphic-order-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.19.

Table 6.15.19 Description of the "qti-graphic-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-order-interaction
Data Type GraphicOrderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicOrder interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.20 "qti-select-point-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.20.

Table 6.15.20 Description of the "qti-select-point-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-select-point-interaction
Data Type SelectPointInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the selectPoint interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.21 "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.21.

Table 6.15.21 Description of the "qti-graphic-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-graphic-associate-interaction
Data Type GraphicAssociateInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the graphicAssociate interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.22 "qti-slider-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.22.

Table 6.15.22 Description of the "qti-slider-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-slider-interaction
Data Type SliderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the slider interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.23 "qti-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.23.

Table 6.15.23 Description of the "qti-choice-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-choice-interaction
Data Type ChoiceInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the choice interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.24 "qti-media-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.24.

Table 6.15.24 Description of the "qti-media-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-media-interaction
Data Type MediaInteraction
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the media interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.25 "qti-hottext-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.25.

Table 6.15.25 Description of the "qti-hottext-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext-interaction
Data Type HotTextInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the hottext interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.26 "qti-order-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.26.

Table 6.15.26 Description of the "qti-order-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-order-interaction
Data Type OrderInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the order interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.27 "qti-extended-text-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.27.

Table 6.15.27 Description of the "qti-extended-text-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-extended-text-interaction
Data Type ExtendedTextInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the extendedText interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.28 "qti-upload-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.28.

Table 6.15.28 Description of the "qti-upload-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-upload-interaction
Data Type UploadInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the upload interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.29 "qti-associate-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.29.

Table 6.15.29 Description of the "qti-associate-interaction" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-associate-interaction
Data Type AssociateInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Enables the inclusion of the associate interaction feature from QTI.

6.15.30 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.15.30.

Table 6.15.30 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract child. It is used to denote the permitted flow content i.e. the permitted set of HTML children.

6.16 FlowStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.16 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.16

UML diagram of the FlowStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.16 - FlowStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.16 Description of the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FlowStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to enable the inclusion of HTML flow content that includes support for feedback and template-base content.

6.16.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.1.

Table 6.16.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.16.2 "qti-feedback-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.2.

Table 6.16.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-block
Data Type FeedbackBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the feedback block content.

6.16.3 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.3.

Table 6.16.3 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the feedback inline content.

6.16.4 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.4.

Table 6.16.4 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the template inline content.

6.16.5 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.5.

Table 6.16.5 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type TemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description To enable the inclusion of the template block content.

6.16.6 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.6.

Table 6.16.6 Description of the "math" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.16.7 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.7.

Table 6.16.7 Description of the "include" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.16.8 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.16.8.

Table 6.16.8 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "FlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.17 GapChoice Class Description

The data model for the "GapChoice" class is shown in Figure 6.17 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.17

UML diagram of the GapChoice class.

Figure 6.17 - GapChoice class definitions.

Table 6.17 Description of the "GapChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GapChoice
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract representation for the selection of either a GapText or a GapImg object.

6.17.1 "qti-gap-text" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap-text" attribute for the "GapChoice" class is given in Table 6.17.1.

Table 6.17.1 Description of the "qti-gap-text" attribute for the "GapChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap-text
Data Type GapText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Makes the selection for 'gapText' available.

6.17.2 "qti-gap-img" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap-img" attribute for the "GapChoice" class is given in Table 6.17.2.

Table 6.17.2 Description of the "qti-gap-img" attribute for the "GapChoice" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap-img
Data Type GapImg
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Makes the selection for 'gapImg' available.

6.18 GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.18 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.18

UML diagram of the GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection class.

Figure 6.18 - GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection class definitions.

Table 6.18 Description of the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the background image that is to be used for this interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and the use of either the 'img' or 'picture' is RECOMMENDED.

6.18.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.18.1.

Table 6.18.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is given as an object which must be of an image type, as specified by the type attribute. Use of this property is deprecated.

6.18.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.18.2.

Table 6.18.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'img' tag.

6.18.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.18.3.

Table 6.18.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicAssociateInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag.

6.19 GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.19 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.19

UML diagram of the GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection class.

Figure 6.19 - GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection class definitions.

Table 6.19 Description of the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the background image that is to be used for this interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and the use of either the 'img' or 'picture' is RECOMMENDED.

6.19.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.19.1.

Table 6.19.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is given as an object which must be of an image type, as specified by the type attribute. Use of this property is deprecated.

6.19.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.19.2.

Table 6.19.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'img' tag.

6.19.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.19.3.

Table 6.19.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicGapMatchInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag.

6.20 GraphicOrderInteractionSelection Class Description

The data model for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.20 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.20

UML diagram of the GraphicOrderInteractionSelection class.

Figure 6.20 - GraphicOrderInteractionSelection class definitions.

Table 6.20 Description of the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name GraphicOrderInteractionSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the background image that is to be used for this interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and the use of either the 'img' or 'picture' is RECOMMENDED.

6.20.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.20.1.

Table 6.20.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is given as an object which must be of an image type, as specified by the type attribute. Use of this property is deprecated.

6.20.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.20.2.

Table 6.20.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'img' tag.

6.20.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.20.3.

Table 6.20.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "GraphicOrderInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background is supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag.

6.21 HTMLContentFlow Class Description

The data model for the "HTMLContentFlow" class is shown in Figure 6.21 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.21

UML diagram of the HTMLContentFlow class.

Figure 6.21 - HTMLContentFlow class definitions.

Table 6.21 Description of the "HTMLContentFlow" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HTMLContentFlow
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class enables the inclusion of MathML3 or flowed HTML content.

6.21.1 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class is given in Table 6.21.1.

Table 6.21.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.21.2 "flowContent" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class is given in Table 6.21.2.

Table 6.21.2 Description of the "flowContent" attribute for the "HTMLContentFlow" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContent
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This enables the inclusion of the flowed HTML content (this uses another QTI 3.0 abstract class).

6.22 HotspotInteractionSelection Class Description

The data model for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.22 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.22

UML diagram of the HotspotInteractionSelection class.

Figure 6.22 - HotspotInteractionSelection class definitions.

Table 6.22 Description of the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name HotspotInteractionSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the background image that is to be used for this interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and the use of either the 'img' or 'picture' is RECOMMENDED.

6.22.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.22.1.

Table 6.22.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background for the hotspots is given as an object which must be of an image type, as specified by the type attribute. Use of this property is deprecated.

6.22.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.22.2.

Table 6.22.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background for the hotspots is supplied using the HTML 'img' tag.

6.22.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class is given in Table 6.22.3.

Table 6.22.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "HotspotInteractionSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image that acts as the background for the hotspots is supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag.

6.23 IncrementSelection Class Description

The data model for the "IncrementSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.23 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.23

UML diagram of the IncrementSelection class.

Figure 6.23 - IncrementSelection class definitions.

Table 6.23 Description of the "IncrementSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IncrementSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class is used to enable the inclusion of either the SI or the US based units for the protractor increments.

6.23.1 "qti-increment-si" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-increment-si" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class is given in Table 6.23.1.

Table 6.23.1 Description of the "qti-increment-si" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-increment-si
Data Type IncrementSI
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the information on the SI based units for the protractor increments.

6.23.2 "qti-increment-us" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-increment-us" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class is given in Table 6.23.2.

Table 6.23.2 Description of the "qti-increment-us" attribute for the "IncrementSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-increment-us
Data Type IncrementUS
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the information on the US based units for the protractor increments.

6.24 InlineChoiceGroup Class Description

The data model for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.24 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.24

UML diagram of the InlineChoiceGroup class.

Figure 6.24 - InlineChoiceGroup class definitions.

Table 6.24 Description of the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineChoiceGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables a simple run of text to be displayed to the user, may be subject to variable value substitution with printedVariable and may inlcude feedback and template-based content.

6.24.1 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.1.

Table 6.24.1 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of a printed variable to provided as part of the inline content.

6.24.2 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.2.

Table 6.24.2 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows feedback content to be presented as part of the inline content.

6.24.3 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.3.

Table 6.24.3 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows template content to be presented as part of the inline content.

6.24.4 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.4.

Table 6.24.4 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.24.5 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.5.

Table 6.24.5 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.24.6 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class is given in Table 6.24.6.

Table 6.24.6 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineChoiceGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract class that allows any combination of HTML inline content.

6.25 InlineContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "InlineContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.25 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.25

UML diagram of the InlineContentModel class.

Figure 6.25 - InlineContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.25 Description of the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables HTML inline content tags to be used to create the corresponding HTML content.

6.25.1 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.1.

Table 6.25.1 Description of the "img" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'img' tag to be used.

6.25.2 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.2.

Table 6.25.2 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'picture' tag to be used.

6.25.3 "br" Attribute Description

The description of the "br" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.3.

Table 6.25.3 Description of the "br" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name br
Data Type BR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'br' tag to be used.

6.25.4 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.4.

Table 6.25.4 Description of the "object" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'object' tag to be used.

6.25.5 "em" Attribute Description

The description of the "em" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.5.

Table 6.25.5 Description of the "em" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name em
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'em' tag to be used.

6.25.6 "a" Attribute Description

The description of the "a" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.6.

Table 6.25.6 Description of the "a" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name a
Data Type A
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'a' tag to be used.

6.25.7 "code" Attribute Description

The description of the "code" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.7.

Table 6.25.7 Description of the "code" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name code
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'code' tag to be used.

6.25.8 "span" Attribute Description

The description of the "span" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.8.

Table 6.25.8 Description of the "span" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name span
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'span' tag to be used.

6.25.9 "sub" Attribute Description

The description of the "sub" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.9.

Table 6.25.9 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sub
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'sub' tag to be used.

6.25.10 "acronym" Attribute Description

The description of the "acronym" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.10.

Table 6.25.10 Description of the "acronym" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name acronym
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'acronym' tag to be used.

6.25.11 "big" Attribute Description

The description of the "big" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.11.

Table 6.25.11 Description of the "big" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name big
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'big' tag to be used.

6.25.12 "tt" Attribute Description

The description of the "tt" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.12.

Table 6.25.12 Description of the "tt" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name tt
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'tt' tag to be used.

6.25.13 "kbd" Attribute Description

The description of the "kbd" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.13.

Table 6.25.13 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name kbd
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'kbd' tag to be used.

6.25.14 "q" Attribute Description

The description of the "q" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.14.

Table 6.25.14 Description of the "q" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name q
Data Type Q
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'q' tag to be used.

6.25.15 "i" Attribute Description

The description of the "i" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.15.

Table 6.25.15 Description of the "i" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name i
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'i' tag to be used.

6.25.16 "dfn" Attribute Description

The description of the "dfn" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.16.

Table 6.25.16 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dfn
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'dfn' tag to be used.

6.25.17 "abbr" Attribute Description

The description of the "abbr" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.17.

Table 6.25.17 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name abbr
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'abbr' tag to be used.

6.25.18 "strong" Attribute Description

The description of the "strong" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.18.

Table 6.25.18 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name strong
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'strong' tag to be used.

6.25.19 "sup" Attribute Description

The description of the "sup" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.19.

Table 6.25.19 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sup
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'sup' tag to be used.

6.25.20 "var" Attribute Description

The description of the "var" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.20.

Table 6.25.20 Description of the "var" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name var
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'var' tag to be used.

6.25.21 "small" Attribute Description

The description of the "small" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.21.

Table 6.25.21 Description of the "small" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name small
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'small' tag to be used.

6.25.22 "samp" Attribute Description

The description of the "samp" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.22.

Table 6.25.22 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name samp
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'samp' tag to be used.

6.25.23 "b" Attribute Description

The description of the "b" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.23.

Table 6.25.23 Description of the "b" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name b
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'b' tag to be used.

6.25.24 "cite" Attribute Description

The description of the "cite" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.24.

Table 6.25.24 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name cite
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'cite' tag to be used.

6.25.25 "bdo" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdo" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.25.

Table 6.25.25 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdo
Data Type BDO
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'bdo' tag to be used.

6.25.26 "bdi" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdi" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.26.

Table 6.25.26 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdi
Data Type BDI
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'bdi' tag to be used.

6.25.27 "label" Attribute Description

The description of the "label" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.27.

Table 6.25.27 Description of the "label" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name label
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'label' tag to be used.

6.25.28 "ruby" Attribute Description

The description of the "ruby" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.28.

Table 6.25.28 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ruby
Data Type Ruby
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the HTML 'ruby' tag to be used.

6.25.29 "ssml11Group" Attribute Description

The description of the "ssml11Group" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class is given in Table 6.25.29.

Table 6.25.29 Description of the "ssml11Group" attribute for the "InlineContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ssml11Group
Data Type SSMLGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the SSML tags to be used.

6.26 InlineGroup Class Description

The data model for the "InlineGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.26 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.26

UML diagram of the InlineGroup class.

Figure 6.26 - InlineGroup class definitions.

Table 6.26 Description of the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to define grouped inline content.

6.26.1 "qti-text-entry-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.1.

Table 6.26.1 Description of the "qti-text-entry-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-text-entry-interaction
Data Type TextEntryInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of a textEntry interaction.

6.26.2 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.2.

Table 6.26.2 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext
Data Type HotText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of hottext.

6.26.3 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.3.

Table 6.26.3 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of a printed variable to provided part of the inline content.

6.26.4 "qti-gap" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.4.

Table 6.26.4 Description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap
Data Type Gap
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of gap as part of the inline content.

6.26.5 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.5.

Table 6.26.5 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of inline feedback as part of the inline content.

6.26.6 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.6.

Table 6.26.6 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of inline template as part of the inline content.

6.26.7 "qti-inline-choice-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.7.

Table 6.26.7 Description of the "qti-inline-choice-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-inline-choice-interaction
Data Type InlineChoiceInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of an inlineChoice interaction.

6.26.8 "qti-end-attempt-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.8.

Table 6.26.8 Description of the "qti-end-attempt-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-end-attempt-interaction
Data Type EndAttemptInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of a endAttempt interaction.

6.26.9 "qti-custom-interaction" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.9.

Table 6.26.9 Description of the "qti-custom-interaction" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-custom-interaction
Data Type CustomInteraction
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Permits the insertion of a custom interaction.

6.26.10 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.10.

Table 6.26.10 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.26.11 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.11.

Table 6.26.11 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.26.12 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class is given in Table 6.26.12.

Table 6.26.12 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract class that allows any combination of HTML inline content.

6.27 InlineStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.27 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.27

UML diagram of the InlineStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.27 - InlineStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.27 Description of the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InlineStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the insertion of complex inline HTML content with some limited QTI tags i.e. 'gap', 'printedVariable', etc.

6.27.1 "qti-hottext" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.1.

Table 6.27.1 Description of the "qti-hottext" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-hottext
Data Type HotText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the insertion of QTI hottext content.

6.27.2 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.2.

Table 6.27.2 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of a printed variable to provide part of the inline content.

6.27.3 "qti-gap" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.3.

Table 6.27.3 Description of the "qti-gap" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gap
Data Type Gap
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the insertion of QTI 'gap' structures in the content.

6.27.4 "qti-feedback-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.4.

Table 6.27.4 Description of the "qti-feedback-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-feedback-inline
Data Type FeedbackInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows feedback content to be presented as part of the inline content.

6.27.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.5.

Table 6.27.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type TemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows template content to be presented as part of the inline content.

6.27.6 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.6.

Table 6.27.6 Description of the "math" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.27.7 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.7.

Table 6.27.7 Description of the "include" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.27.8 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.27.8.

Table 6.27.8 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "InlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract class that allows any combination of HTML inline content.

6.28 ItemBodySelect Class Description

The data model for the "ItemBodySelect" class is shown in Figure 6.28 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.28

UML diagram of the ItemBodySelect class.

Figure 6.28 - ItemBodySelect class definitions.

Table 6.28 Description of the "ItemBodySelect" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ItemBodySelect
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Within the assessmentItem, this enables the creation of the various ItemBody content structures based upon the 'rubricBlock' and the HTML block content.

6.28.1 "qti-rubric-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class is given in Table 6.28.1.

Table 6.28.1 Description of the "qti-rubric-block" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rubric-block
Data Type RubricBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the choice of the rubric block content for the ItemBody content.

6.28.2 "blockGroup" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class is given in Table 6.28.2.

Table 6.28.2 Description of the "blockGroup" attribute for the "ItemBodySelect" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockGroup
Data Type BlockGroup
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the choice of the HTML block content for the ItemBody content.

6.29 LookupTable Class Description

The data model for the "LookupTable" class is shown in Figure 6.29 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.29

UML diagram of the LookupTable class.

Figure 6.29 - LookupTable class definitions.

Table 6.29 Description of the "LookupTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name LookupTable
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the selection of the 'matchTable' and 'interpolation' table tags within an 'outcomeDeclaration'.

6.29.1 "qti-match-table" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-match-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class is given in Table 6.29.1.

Table 6.29.1 Description of the "qti-match-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-match-table
Data Type MatchTable
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the selection of the 'matchTable' entry.

6.29.2 "qti-interpolation-table" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-interpolation-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class is given in Table 6.29.2.

Table 6.29.2 Description of the "qti-interpolation-table" attribute for the "LookupTable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-interpolation-table
Data Type InterpolationTable
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the selection of the 'interpolationTable' entry.

6.30 NumericExpressionGroup Class Description

The data model for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.30 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.30

UML diagram of the NumericExpressionGroup class.

Figure 6.30 - NumericExpressionGroup class definitions.

Table 6.30 Description of the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name NumericExpressionGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that makes the set of QTI numeric expressions/operators available to define the associated response and/or outcome and/or template processing.

6.30.1 "qti-sum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.1.

Table 6.30.1 Description of the "qti-sum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-sum
Data Type NumericLogic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the 'sum' function on the enclosed set of expressions. The sum operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the sum of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.2 "qti-subtract" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.2.

Table 6.30.2 Description of the "qti-subtract" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-subtract
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The subtract operator takes 2 sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float or, if both sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the first value minus the second. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.3 "qti-divide" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.3.

Table 6.30.3 Description of the "qti-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-divide
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression divided by the second expression. If either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL. Item authors should make every effort to ensure that the value of the second expression is never 0, however, if it is zero or the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator should result in NULL.

6.30.4 "qti-multiple" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.4.

Table 6.30.4 Description of the "qti-multiple" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-multiple
Data Type Logic0toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The multiple operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or multiple cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with multiple cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with multiple cardinality have their individual values added to the result: containers cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B and {C,D} the multiple operator results in {A,B,C,D}. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

6.30.5 "qti-ordered" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.5.

Table 6.30.5 Description of the "qti-ordered" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-ordered
Data Type Logic0toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The ordered operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality. Although the sub-expressions may be of any base-type they must all be of the same base-type. The result is a container with ordered cardinality containing the values of the sub-expressions, sub-expressions with ordered cardinality have their individual values added (in order) to the result: contains cannot contain other containers. For example, when applied to A, B, {C,D} the ordered operator results in {A,B,C,D}. Note that the ordered operator never results in an empty container. All sub-expressions with NULL values are ignored. If no sub-expressions are given (or all are NULL) then the result is NULL.

6.30.6 "qti-custom-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.6.

Table 6.30.6 Description of the "qti-custom-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-custom-operator
Data Type CustomOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The custom operator provides an extension mechanism for defining operations not currently supported by this specification.

6.30.7 "qti-random" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.7.

Table 6.30.7 Description of the "qti-random" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The random operator takes a sub-expression with a multiple or ordered container value and any base-type. The result is a single value randomly selected from the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. If the sub-expression is NULL then the result is also NULL.

6.30.8 "qti-null" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.8.

Table 6.30.8 Description of the "qti-null" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-null
Data Type Empty (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Null is a simple expression that returns the NULL value - the null value is treated as if it is of any desired base-type.

6.30.9 "qti-delete" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.9.

Table 6.30.9 Description of the "qti-delete" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-delete
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The delete operator takes two sub-expressions which must both have the same base-type. The first sub-expression must have single cardinality and the second must be a multiple or ordered container. The result is a new container derived from the second sub-expression with all instances of the first sub-expression removed. For example, when applied to A and {B,A,C,A} the result is the container {B,C}. If either sub-expression is NULL the result of the operator is NULL. The restrictions that apply to the member operator also apply to the delete operator.

6.30.10 "qti-index" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.10.

Table 6.30.10 Description of the "qti-index" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-index
Data Type Index
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The index operator takes a sub-expression with an ordered container value and any base-type. The result is the nth value of the container. The result has the same base-type as the sub-expression but single cardinality. The first value of a container has index 1, the second 2 and so on. n must be a positive integer. If n exceeds the number of values in the container (or the sub-expression is NULL) then the result of the index operator is NULL. If 'n' is an identifier, it is the value of 'n' at runtime that is used.

6.30.11 "qti-power" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.11.

Table 6.30.11 Description of the "qti-power" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-power
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The power operator takes 2 sub-expression which both have single cardinality and numerical base-types. The result is a single float that corresponds to the first expression raised to the power of the second. If either or the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the resulting value is outside the value set defined by float (not including positive and negative infinity) then the operator shall result in NULL.

6.30.12 "qti-container-size" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.12.

Table 6.30.12 Description of the "qti-container-size" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-container-size
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The containerSize operator takes a sub-expression with any base-type and either multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is an integer giving the number of values in the sub-expression, in other words, the size of the container. If the sub-expression is NULL the result is 0. This operator can be used for determining how many choices were selected in a multiple-response choiceInteraction, for example.

6.30.13 "qti-correct" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.13.

Table 6.30.13 Description of the "qti-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-correct
Data Type Correct
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the declaration of a response variable and returns the associated correctResponse or NULL if no correct value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the correct response from an individual item.

6.30.14 "qti-default" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.14.

Table 6.30.14 Description of the "qti-default" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-default
Data Type Default
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the declaration of an itemVariable and returns the associated defaultValue or NULL if no default value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the default value from an individual item.

6.30.15 "qti-integer-divide" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.15.

Table 6.30.15 Description of the "qti-integer-divide" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-divide
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer divide operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the first expression (x) divided by the second expression (y) rounded down to the greatest integer (i) such that i LTE (x/y). If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.16 "qti-integer-modulus" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.16.

Table 6.30.16 Description of the "qti-integer-modulus" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-modulus
Data Type LogicPair
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer modulus operator takes 2 sub-expressions which both have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is the single integer that corresponds to the remainder when the first expression (x) is divided by the second expression (y). If z is the result of the corresponding integerDivide operator then the result is x-z*y. If y is 0, or if either of the sub-expressions is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.17 "qti-product" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.17.

Table 6.30.17 Description of the "qti-product" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-product
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The product operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer that corresponds to the product of the numerical values of the sub-expressions. If any of the sub-expressions are NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.18 "qti-round" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.18.

Table 6.30.18 Description of the "qti-round" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-round
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The round operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by rounding the value of the sub-expression. The result is the integer n for all input values in the range [n-0.5,n+0.5). In other words, 6.8 and 6.5 both round up to 7, 6.49 rounds down to 6 and -6.5 rounds up to -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

6.30.19 "qti-truncate" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.19.

Table 6.30.19 Description of the "qti-truncate" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-truncate
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The truncate operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a value of base-type integer formed by truncating the value of the sub-expression towards zero. For example, the value 6.8 becomes 6 and the value -6.8 becomes -6. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL. If the sub-expression is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF.

6.30.20 "qti-field-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.20.

Table 6.30.20 Description of the "qti-field-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-field-value
Data Type FieldValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The field-value operator takes a sub-expression with a record container value. The result is the value of the field with the specified fieldIdentifier. If there is no field with that identifier then the result of the operator is NULL.

6.30.21 "qti-random-integer" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.21.

Table 6.30.21 Description of the "qti-random-integer" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random-integer
Data Type RandomInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Selects a random integer from the specified range [min,max] satisfying min + step * n for some integer n. For example, with min=2, max=11 and step=3 the values {2,5,8,11} are possible.

6.30.22 "qti-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.22.

Table 6.30.22 Description of the "qti-variable" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-variable
Data Type Variable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the value of an itemVariable that has been declared in a corresponding variableDeclaration or is one of the built-in variables. The result has the base-type and cardinality declared for the variable subject to the type promotion of weighted outcomes (see below). During outcomes processing, values taken from an individual item session can be looked up by prefixing the name of the item variable with the identifier assigned to the item in the assessmentItemRef, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 you would use a variable instance with identifier Q01.SCORE. In adaptive tests that contain items that are allowed to be replaced (i.e. that have the withReplacement attribute set to "true"), the same item can be instantiated more than once. In order to access the outcome variable values of each instantiation, a number that denotes the instance's place in the sequence of the item's instantiation is inserted between the item variable identifier and the item variable, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 in its second instantiation you would use a variable instance, prefixed by the instantiation sequence number, prefixed by an identifier Q01.2.SCORE. When looking up the value of a response variable it always takes the value assigned to it by the candidate's last submission. Unsubmitted responses are not available during expression evaluation. The value of an item variable taken from an item instantiated multiple times from the same assessmentItemRef (through the use of selection withReplacement) is taken from the last instance submitted if submission is simultaneous, otherwise it is undefined.

6.30.23 "qti-test-variables" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.23.

Table 6.30.23 Description of the "qti-test-variables" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-test-variables
Data Type TestVariables
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the value of an itemVariable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered, all NULL values are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type as specified below.

6.30.24 "qti-integer-to-float" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.24.

Table 6.30.24 Description of the "qti-integer-to-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-integer-to-float
Data Type LogicSingle
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The integer to float conversion operator takes a single sub-expression which must have single cardinality and base-type integer. The result is a value of base type float with the same numeric value. If the sub-expression is NULL then the operator results in NULL.

6.30.25 "qti-base-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.25.

Table 6.30.25 Description of the "qti-base-value" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-base-value
Data Type BaseValue
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The simplest expression returns a single value from the set defined by the given base-type.

6.30.26 "qti-map-response-point" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.26.

Table 6.30.26 Description of the "qti-map-response-point" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-map-response-point
Data Type MapResponse
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mapResponsePoint expression looks up the value of a response variable that must be of base-type point, and transforms it using the associated areaMapping. The transformation is similar to mapResponse except that the points are tested against each area in turn. When mapping containers each area can be mapped once only. For example, if the candidate identified two points that both fall in the same area then the mappedValue is still added to the calculated total just once.

6.30.27 "qti-map-response" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.27.

Table 6.30.27 Description of the "qti-map-response" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-map-response
Data Type MapResponse
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression looks up the value of a response variable and then transforms it using the associated mapping, which must have been declared. The result is a single float. If the response variable has single cardinality then the value returned is simply the mapped target value from the map. If the response variable has multiple or ordered cardinality then the value returned is the sum of the mapped target values. This expression cannot be applied to variables of record cardinality. For example, if a mapping associates the identifiers {A,B,C,D} with the values {0,1,0.5,0} respectively then mapResponse will map the single value 'C' to the numeric value 0.5 and the set of values {C,B} to the value 1.5. If a container contains multiple instances of the same value then that value is counted once only. To continue the example above {B,B,C} would still map to 1.5 and not 2.5.

6.30.28 "qti-repeat" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.28.

Table 6.30.28 Description of the "qti-repeat" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-repeat
Data Type Repeat
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The repeat operator takes 0 or more sub-expressions, all of which must have either single or ordered cardinality and the same base-type. The result is an ordered container having the same base-type as its sub-expressions. The container is filled sequentially by evaluating each sub-expression in turn and adding the resulting single values to the container, iterating this process number-repeats times in total. If number-repeats refers to a variable whose value is less than 1, the value of the whole expression is NULL. Any sub-expressions evaluating to NULL are ignored. If all sub-expressions are NULL then the result is NULL.

6.30.29 "qti-round-to" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.29.

Table 6.30.29 Description of the "qti-round-to" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-round-to
Data Type RoundTo
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The roundTo operator takes one sub-expression which must have single cardinality and a numerical base-type. The result is a single float with the value nearest to that of the expression's value such that when converted to a decimal string it represents the expression rounded by the specified rounding method to the specified precision. If the sub-expression is NULL, then the result is NULL. If the sub-expression is INF, then the result is INF. If the sub-expression is -INF, then the result is -INF. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. When rounding to n significant figures, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting from the first non-zero digit from the left in the number. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded. When rounding to n decimal places, the deciding digit is the (n+1)th digit counting to the right from the decimal point. If the deciding digit is 5 or greater, the nth digit is increased by 1 and all digits to its right are discarded; if the deciding digit is less than 5, all digits to the right of the nth digit are discarded.

6.30.30 "qti-lcm" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.30.

Table 6.30.30 Description of the "qti-lcm" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lcm
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lcm operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the lowest common multiple (lcm) of the argument values. If any argument is zero, the result is 0, lcm(0,n)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the lcm of random values. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.30.31 "qti-gcd" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.31.

Table 6.30.31 Description of the "qti-gcd" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-gcd
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The gcd operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have base-type integer and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single integer equal in value to the greatest common divisor (gcd) of the argument values. If all the arguments are zero, the result is 0, gcd(0,0)=0; authors should beware of this in calculations which require division by the gcd of random values. If some, but not all, of the arguments are zero, the result is the gcd of the non-zero arguments, gcd(0,n)=n if n not equal to 0. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.30.32 "qti-min" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.32.

Table 6.30.32 Description of the "qti-min" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-min
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The min operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the smallest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to negative infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.30.33 "qti-max" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.33.

Table 6.30.33 Description of the "qti-max" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-max
Data Type Logic1toMany
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The max operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have numerical base-types and may have single, multiple or ordered cardinality. The result is a single float, or, if all sub-expressions are of integer type, a single integer, equal in value to the greatest of the argument values, i.e. the result is the argument closest to positive infinity. If the arguments have the same value, the result is that same value. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.30.34 "qti-math-constant" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.34.

Table 6.30.34 Description of the "qti-math-constant" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-math-constant
Data Type MathConstant
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The result is a mathematical constant returned as a single float, e.g. π and e.

6.30.35 "qti-stats-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.35.

Table 6.30.35 Description of the "qti-stats-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-stats-operator
Data Type StatsOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The statsOperator operator takes 1 sub-expression which is a container of multiple or ordered cardinality and has a numerical base-type. The result is a single float. If the sub-expression or any value contained therein is NULL, the result is NULL. If any value contained in the sub-expression is not a numerical value, then the result is NULL.

6.30.36 "qti-math-operator" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.36.

Table 6.30.36 Description of the "qti-math-operator" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-math-operator
Data Type MathOperator
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mathOperator operator takes 1 or more sub-expressions which all have single cardinality and have numerical base-types. The trigonometric functions, sin, cos and tan, take one argument in radians, which evaluates to a single float. Other functions take one numerical argument. Further functions might take more than one numerical argument, e.g. atan2 (two argument arc tan). The result is a single float, except for the functions signum, floor and ceil, which return a single integer. If any of the sub-expressions is NULL, the result is NULL. If any of the sub-expressions falls outside the natural domain of the function called by mathOperator, e.g. log(0) or asin(2), then the result is NULL. See Subsection 2.12 for the set of associated rules.

6.30.37 "qti-random-float" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.37.

Table 6.30.37 Description of the "qti-random-float" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-random-float
Data Type RandomFloat
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Selects a random float from the specified range [min,max].

6.30.38 "qti-number-correct" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.38.

Table 6.30.38 Description of the "qti-number-correct" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-correct
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-correct expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which the all defined response variables match their associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.30.39 "qti-number-incorrect" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.39.

Table 6.30.39 Description of the "qti-number-incorrect" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-incorrect
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-incorrect expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set, for which at least one of the defined response variables does not match its associated qti-correct-response. Only items for which all declared response variables have correct responses defined and have been attempted at least once are considered. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.30.40 "qti-number-presented" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.40.

Table 6.30.40 Description of the "qti-number-presented" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-presented
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-presented expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once). In other words, items with which the user has interacted, whether or not they provided a response. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.30.41 "qti-number-responded" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.41.

Table 6.30.41 Description of the "qti-number-responded" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-responded
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-responded expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been attempted (at least once) and for which a response was given. In other words, items for which at least one declared response has a value that differs from its declared default (typically NULL). The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.30.42 "qti-number-selected" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.42.

Table 6.30.42 Description of the "qti-number-selected" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-number-selected
Data Type Number
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The qti-number-selected expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, calculates the number of items in a given sub-set that have been selected for presentation to the candidate, regardless of whether the candidate has attempted them or not. The result is an integer with single cardinality.

6.30.43 "qti-outcome-minimum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.43.

Table 6.30.43 Description of the "qti-outcome-minimum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-minimum
Data Type OutcomeMinMax
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the qti-normal-minimum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. Items with no declared minimum are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

6.30.44 "qti-outcome-maximum" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class is given in Table 6.30.44.

Table 6.30.44 Description of the "qti-outcome-maximum" attribute for the "NumericExpressionGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-maximum
Data Type OutcomeMinMax
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the qti-normal-maximum value of an outcome variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered. If any of the items within the given subset have no declared maximum the result is NULL, otherwise the result has cardinality multiple and base-type float.

6.31 ObjectFlowGroup Class Description

The data model for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.31 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.31

UML diagram of the ObjectFlowGroup class.

Figure 6.31 - ObjectFlowGroup class definitions.

Table 6.31 Description of the "ObjectFlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ObjectFlowGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the detailed complex content/parameters to be defined for the object.

6.31.1 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.31.1.

Table 6.31.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.31.2 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.31.2.

Table 6.31.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.31.3 "param" Attribute Description

The description of the "param" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.31.3.

Table 6.31.3 Description of the "param" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name param
Data Type Param
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is a parameter that is to be used in the conext of the HTML object i.e. passed to the object.

6.31.4 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class is given in Table 6.31.4.

Table 6.31.4 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "ObjectFlowGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.32 OutcomeRule Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeRule" class is shown in Figure 6.32 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.32

UML diagram of the OutcomeRule class.

Figure 6.32 - OutcomeRule class definitions.

Table 6.32 Description of the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeRule
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class to define an outcome processing rule. An outcome rule is either an outcomeCondition, a simple action or an outcomeProcessingFragment. Outcome rules define the light-weight programming language necessary for creating outcomes. Note that this programming language contains a minimal number of control structures, more complex rules must be coded in other languages and referred to using a customOperator. Result rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

6.32.1 "qti-lookup-outcome-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.1.

Table 6.32.1 Description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lookup-outcome-value
Data Type LookupOutcomeValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lookupOutcomeValue rule sets the value of an outcome variable to the value obtained by looking up the value of the associated expression in the lookupTable associated with the outcome's declaration.

6.32.2 "qti-outcome-processing-fragment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-processing-fragment" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.2.

Table 6.32.2 Description of the "qti-outcome-processing-fragment" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-processing-fragment
Data Type OutcomeProcessingFragment
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description An outcomeProcessingFragment is a simple group of outcome Rules which are grouped together in order to allow them to be managed as a separate resource. It should not be used for any other purpose.

6.32.3 "qti-set-outcome-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.3.

Table 6.32.3 Description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-set-outcome-value
Data Type SetValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The setOutcomeValue rule sets the value of an outcome variable to the value obtained from the associated expression. An outcome variable can be updated with reference to a previously assigned value, in other words, the outcome variable being set may appear in the expression where it takes the value previously assigned to it. Special care is required when using the numeric base-types because floating point values can not be assigned to integer variables and vice-versa. The truncate, round or integerToFloat operators must be used to achieve numeric type conversion.

6.32.4 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.4.

Table 6.32.4 Description of the "include" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of arbitrary content (the form depends on the binding approach).

6.32.5 "qti-exit-test" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-exit-test" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.5.

Table 6.32.5 Description of the "qti-exit-test" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-exit-test
Data Type Empty (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The exit outcome rule terminates outcomes processing immediately (for this invocation).

6.32.6 "qti-outcome-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-outcome-condition" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class is given in Table 6.32.6.

Table 6.32.6 Description of the "qti-outcome-condition" attribute for the "OutcomeRule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-outcome-condition
Data Type OutcomeCondition
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This allows the rule 'If..Then..Else' definition to be entered.

6.33 PhraseRBSelection Class Description

The data model for the "PhraseRBSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.33 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.33

UML diagram of the PhraseRBSelection class.

Figure 6.33 - PhraseRBSelection class definitions.

Table 6.33 Description of the "PhraseRBSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PhraseRBSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that forms a part of the Ruby annotation. It enables the Ruby markup to be composed of combinations of the HTML5 Phrasing content and 'rb' tags.

6.33.1 "phrasingContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class is given in Table 6.33.1.

Table 6.33.1 Description of the "phrasingContentModel" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name phrasingContentModel
Data Type PhrasingContentModelHTML5
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is an abstract attribute that allows the contents to be composed of the HTML phrasing content.

6.33.2 "rb" Attribute Description

The description of the "rb" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class is given in Table 6.33.2.

Table 6.33.2 Description of the "rb" attribute for the "PhraseRBSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rb
Data Type BaseHTML5Phrasing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description The 'rp' Ruby annotation tag option.

6.34 PhrasingContentModelHTML5 Class Description

The data model for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is shown in Figure 6.34 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.34

UML diagram of the PhrasingContentModelHTML5 class.

Figure 6.34 - PhrasingContentModelHTML5 class definitions.

Table 6.34 Description of the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PhrasingContentModelHTML5
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract class that is used to provide the set of HTML tag options defined as phrasing content. The formal definition of Phrasing content is given in [HTML5, 14].

6.34.1 "a" Attribute Description

The description of the "a" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.1.

Table 6.34.1 Description of the "a" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name a
Data Type A
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'a' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.2 "abbr" Attribute Description

The description of the "abbr" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.2.

Table 6.34.2 Description of the "abbr" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name abbr
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'abbr' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.3 "b" Attribute Description

The description of the "b" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.3.

Table 6.34.3 Description of the "b" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name b
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'b' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.4 "bdo" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdo" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.4.

Table 6.34.4 Description of the "bdo" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdo
Data Type BDO
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'bdo' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.5 "br" Attribute Description

The description of the "br" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.5.

Table 6.34.5 Description of the "br" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name br
Data Type BR
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'br' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.6 "cite" Attribute Description

The description of the "cite" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.6.

Table 6.34.6 Description of the "cite" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name cite
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'cite' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.7 "code" Attribute Description

The description of the "code" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.7.

Table 6.34.7 Description of the "code" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name code
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'code' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.8 "dfn" Attribute Description

The description of the "dfn" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.8.

Table 6.34.8 Description of the "dfn" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name dfn
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'dfn' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.9 "em" Attribute Description

The description of the "em" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.9.

Table 6.34.9 Description of the "em" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name em
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'em' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.10 "i" Attribute Description

The description of the "i" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.10.

Table 6.34.10 Description of the "i" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name i
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'i' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.11 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.11.

Table 6.34.11 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'img' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.12 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.12.

Table 6.34.12 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'picture' tag for the HTML.

6.34.13 "kbd" Attribute Description

The description of the "kbd" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.13.

Table 6.34.13 Description of the "kbd" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name kbd
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'kbd' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.14 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.14.

Table 6.34.14 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'object' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.15 "q" Attribute Description

The description of the "q" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.15.

Table 6.34.15 Description of the "q" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name q
Data Type Q
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'q' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.16 "samp" Attribute Description

The description of the "samp" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.16.

Table 6.34.16 Description of the "samp" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name samp
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'samp' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.17 "small" Attribute Description

The description of the "small" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.17.

Table 6.34.17 Description of the "small" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name small
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'small' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.18 "span" Attribute Description

The description of the "span" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.18.

Table 6.34.18 Description of the "span" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name span
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'span' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.19 "strong" Attribute Description

The description of the "strong" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.19.

Table 6.34.19 Description of the "strong" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name strong
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'strong' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.20 "sub" Attribute Description

The description of the "sub" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.20.

Table 6.34.20 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sub
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'sub' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.21 "sup" Attribute Description

The description of the "sup" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.21.

Table 6.34.21 Description of the "sup" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sup
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'sup' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.22 "var" Attribute Description

The description of the "var" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.22.

Table 6.34.22 Description of the "var" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name var
Data Type HTMLText
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'var' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.23 "audio" Attribute Description

The description of the "audio" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.23.

Table 6.34.23 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name audio
Data Type Audio
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'audio' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.24 "bdi" Attribute Description

The description of the "bdi" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.24.

Table 6.34.24 Description of the "bdi" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name bdi
Data Type BDI
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'bdi' tag for the HTML5.

6.34.25 "label" Attribute Description

The description of the "label" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.25.

Table 6.34.25 Description of the "label" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name label
Data Type BaseHTML5Flow
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'label' tag for the HTML.

6.34.26 "ruby" Attribute Description

The description of the "ruby" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.26.

Table 6.34.26 Description of the "ruby" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name ruby
Data Type Ruby
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'ruby' tag for the HTML.

6.34.27 "video" Attribute Description

The description of the "video" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class is given in Table 6.34.27.

Table 6.34.27 Description of the "video" attribute for the "PhrasingContentModelHTML5" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name video
Data Type Video
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the 'video' tag for the HTML.

6.35 PositionObjectStageSelection Class Description

The data model for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.35 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.35

UML diagram of the PositionObjectStageSelection class.

Figure 6.35 - PositionObjectStageSelection class definitions.

Table 6.35 Description of the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PositionObjectStageSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the staging image that is to be used for this interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and the use of either the 'img' or 'picture' is RECOMMENDED.

6.35.1 "object" Attribute Description

The description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class is given in Table 6.35.1.

Table 6.35.1 Description of the "object" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name object
Data Type Object
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image to be used to stage the interaction. The use of the 'object' tag is deprecated and either the 'img or 'picture' tags SHOULD be used.

6.35.2 "img" Attribute Description

The description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class is given in Table 6.35.2.

Table 6.35.2 Description of the "img" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name img
Data Type Img
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image, supplied using the HTML 'img' tag, required to create the staging.

6.35.3 "picture" Attribute Description

The description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class is given in Table 6.35.3.

Table 6.35.3 Description of the "picture" attribute for the "PositionObjectStageSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name picture
Data Type Picture
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The image, supplied using the HTML 'picture' tag, required to create the staging.

6.36 PromptStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "PromptStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.36 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.36

UML diagram of the PromptStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.36 - PromptStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.36 Description of the "PromptStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PromptStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to enable complex ordering of content within the 'Prompt' class.

6.36.1 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.36.1.

Table 6.36.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.36.2 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.36.2.

Table 6.36.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.36.3 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.36.3.

Table 6.36.3 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "PromptStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.37 RPRTSelection Class Description

The data model for the "RPRTSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.37 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.37

UML diagram of the RPRTSelection class.

Figure 6.37 - RPRTSelection class definitions.

Table 6.37 Description of the "RPRTSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RPRTSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Unordered ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that provides the choice between the 'rp', 'rt' and 'rtc' Ruby annotation tags.

6.37.1 "rp" Attribute Description

The description of the "rp" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class is given in Table 6.37.1.

Table 6.37.1 Description of the "rp" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rp
Data Type BaseHTML5Phrasing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The 'rp' Ruby annotation tag option.

6.37.2 "rtrtcSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "rtrtcSelection" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class is given in Table 6.37.2.

Table 6.37.2 Description of the "rtrtcSelection" attribute for the "RPRTSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rtrtcSelection
Data Type RTRTCSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that provides choices between the 'rt' and 'rtc' Ruby annotation tag option.

6.38 RTRTCSelection Class Description

The data model for the "RTRTCSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.38 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.38

UML diagram of the RTRTCSelection class.

Figure 6.38 - RTRTCSelection class definitions.

Table 6.38 Description of the "RTRTCSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RTRTCSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that provides the choice between the 'rt' and the 'rtc' Ruby annotation tags.

6.38.1 "rt" Attribute Description

The description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class is given in Table 6.38.1.

Table 6.38.1 Description of the "rt" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rt
Data Type BaseHTML5Phrasing
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The 'rt' Ruby annotation tag option.

6.38.2 "rtc" Attribute Description

The description of the "rtc" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class is given in Table 6.38.2.

Table 6.38.2 Description of the "rtc" attribute for the "RTRTCSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rtc
Data Type RTC
Value Space Container [ Selection ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The 'rtc' Ruby annotation tag option.

6.39 ResponseRuleGroup Class Description

The data model for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.39 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.39

UML diagram of the ResponseRuleGroup class.

Figure 6.39 - ResponseRuleGroup class definitions.

Table 6.39 Description of the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ResponseRuleGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class to define a response processing rule. A response rule is either a responseCondition, a simple action or a responseProcessingFragment. Response rules define the light-weight programming language necessary for deriving outcomes from responses i.e. scoring. Note that this programming language contains a minimal number of control structures, more complex scoring rules must be coded in other languages and referred to using a customOperator. Result rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

6.39.1 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.1.

Table 6.39.1 Description of the "include" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of arbitrary content (the form depends on the binding approach).

6.39.2 "qti-response-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-condition" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.2.

Table 6.39.2 Description of the "qti-response-condition" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-condition
Data Type ResponseCondition
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This allows the rule 'If..Then..Else' definition to be entered.

6.39.3 "qti-response-processing-fragment" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-response-processing-fragment" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.3.

Table 6.39.3 Description of the "qti-response-processing-fragment" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-response-processing-fragment
Data Type ResponseProcessingFragment
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description A responseProcessingFragment is a simple group of responseRules which are grouped together in order to allow them to be managed as a separate resource. It should not be used for any other purpose.

6.39.4 "qti-set-outcome-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.4.

Table 6.39.4 Description of the "qti-set-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-set-outcome-value
Data Type SetValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The setOutcomeValue rule sets the value of an outcome variable to the value obtained from the associated expression. An outcome variable can be updated with reference to a previously assigned value, in other words, the outcome variable being set may appear in the expression where it takes the value previously assigned to it. Special care is required when using the numeric base-types because floating point values can not be assigned to integer variables and vice-versa. The truncate, round or integerToFloat operators must be used to achieve numeric type conversion.

6.39.5 "qti-exit-response" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-exit-response" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.5.

Table 6.39.5 Description of the "qti-exit-response" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-exit-response
Data Type Empty (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The exit response rule terminates response processing immediately (for this invocation).

6.39.6 "qti-lookup-outcome-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.39.6.

Table 6.39.6 Description of the "qti-lookup-outcome-value" attribute for the "ResponseRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-lookup-outcome-value
Data Type LookupOutcomeValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lookupOutcomeValue rule sets the value of an outcome variable to the value obtained by looking up the value of the associated expression in the lookupTable associated with the outcome's declaration.

6.40 RubricBlockContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.40 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.40

UML diagram of the RubricBlockContentModel class.

Figure 6.40 - RubricBlockContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.40 Description of the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricBlockContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the top-level complex content for the Rubric block to be defined.

6.40.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.1.

Table 6.40.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.40.2 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.2.

Table 6.40.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.40.3 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.3.

Table 6.40.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.40.4 "qti-template-block" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.4.

Table 6.40.4 Description of the "qti-template-block" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-block
Data Type RubricBlockTemplateBlock
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This allows template block content to be inserted into the rubric block structure.

6.40.5 "qti-template-inline" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.5.

Table 6.40.5 Description of the "qti-template-inline" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-inline
Data Type RubricBlockTemplateInline
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This allows template inline content to be inserted into the rubric block structure.

6.40.6 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.40.6.

Table 6.40.6 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.41 RubricTemplateBlockContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.41 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.41

UML diagram of the RubricTemplateBlockContentModel class.

Figure 6.41 - RubricTemplateBlockContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.41 Description of the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricTemplateBlockContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Ths is an abstract class that permits the insertion of the content for the RubricBlock when used in the context of a Template block. Rubric Blocks MUST NOT be nested within other Rubric Blocks

6.41.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.41.1.

Table 6.41.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.41.2 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.41.2.

Table 6.41.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.41.3 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.41.3.

Table 6.41.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.41.4 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.41.4.

Table 6.41.4 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.42 RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.42 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.42

UML diagram of the RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.42 - RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.42 Description of the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that allows the complex content for the Rubric block content in the context of inline Template content.

6.42.1 "inlineContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.42.1.

Table 6.42.1 Description of the "inlineContentModel" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name inlineContentModel
Data Type InlineContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon inline content.

6.42.2 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.42.2.

Table 6.42.2 Description of the "math" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.42.3 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.42.3.

Table 6.42.3 Description of the "include" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.42.4 "qti-printed-variable" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.42.4.

Table 6.42.4 Description of the "qti-printed-variable" attribute for the "RubricTemplateInlineStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-printed-variable
Data Type PrintedVariable
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This permits the insertion of data defined as a printed variable.

6.43 RubySelection Class Description

The data model for the "RubySelection" class is shown in Figure 6.43 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.43

UML diagram of the RubySelection class.

Figure 6.43 - RubySelection class definitions.

Table 6.43 Description of the "RubySelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RubySelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that forms a part of the Ruby annotation. It enables the Ruby markup to be composed of combinations of the HTML5 Phrasing content and the 'rb' tags, and the 'rp', 'rt' and rtc' tags.

6.43.1 "phraseSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "phraseSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class is given in Table 6.43.1.

Table 6.43.1 Description of the "phraseSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name phraseSelection
Data Type PhraseRBSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that allows the contents to be composed of the HTML5 phrasing content and 'rb' tags.

6.43.2 "rprtSelection" Attribute Description

The description of the "rprtSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class is given in Table 6.43.2.

Table 6.43.2 Description of the "rprtSelection" attribute for the "RubySelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name rprtSelection
Data Type RPRTSelection
Value Space Abstract Container [ Unordered ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the content to be based upon various combinations of the 'rp', 'rt' and rtc' tags.

6.44 RuleSystemSelection Class Description

The data model for the "RuleSystemSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.44 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.44

UML diagram of the RuleSystemSelection class.

Figure 6.44 - RuleSystemSelection class definitions.

Table 6.44 Description of the "RuleSystemSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RuleSystemSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class is used to enable the inclusion of either the SI or the US measurememt system for a rule.

6.44.1 "qti-rule-system-si" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rule-system-si" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class is given in Table 6.44.1.

Table 6.44.1 Description of the "qti-rule-system-si" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rule-system-si
Data Type SIRuleSystem
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the information on the SI based measurements for a rule.

6.44.2 "qti-rule-system-us" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-rule-system-us" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class is given in Table 6.44.2.

Table 6.44.2 Description of the "qti-rule-system-us" attribute for the "RuleSystemSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-rule-system-us
Data Type USRuleSystem
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the information on the US based measurements for a rule.

6.45 SSMLGroup Class Description

The data model for the "SSMLGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.45 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.45

UML diagram of the SSMLGroup class.

Figure 6.45 - SSMLGroup class definitions.

Table 6.45 Description of the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SSMLGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the set of SSML annotations to be used within the HTML content. SSML is part of a larger set of markup specifications for voice browsers developed through the open processes of the W3C. It is designed to provide a rich, XML-based markup language for assisting the generation of synthetic speech in Web and other applications. The essential role of the markup language is to give authors of synthesizable content a standard way to control aspects of speech output such as pronunciation, volume, pitch, rate, etc. across different synthesis-capable platforms.

6.45.1 "p" Attribute Description

The description of the "p" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.1.

Table 6.45.1 Description of the "p" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name p
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. A 'p' tag represents a paragraph.

6.45.2 "s" Attribute Description

The description of the "s" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.2.

Table 6.45.2 Description of the "s" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name s
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. A 's' tag represents a sentence.

6.45.3 "say-as" Attribute Description

The description of the "say-as" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.3.

Table 6.45.3 Description of the "say-as" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name say-as
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'say-as' tag allows the author to indicate information on the type of text construct contained within the tag and to help specify the level of detail for rendering the contained text. Defining a comprehensive set of text format types is difficult because of the variety of languages that have to be considered and because of the innate flexibility of written languages. SSML only specifies the 'say-as' tag, its characteristics, and their purpose. It does not enumerate the possible values for the characteristics.

6.45.4 "phoneme" Attribute Description

The description of the "phoneme" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.4.

Table 6.45.4 Description of the "phoneme" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name phoneme
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The phoneme tag provides a phonemic/phonetic pronunciation for the contained text. The phoneme tag may be empty. However, it is recommended that the tag contain human-readable text that can be used for non-spoken rendering of the document. For example, the content may be displayed visually for users with hearing impairments.

6.45.5 "sub" Attribute Description

The description of the "sub" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.5.

Table 6.45.5 Description of the "sub" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name sub
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'sub' tag is employed to indicate that the text in the alias attribute value replaces the contained text for pronunciation. This allows a document to contain both a spoken and written form.

6.45.6 "voice" Attribute Description

The description of the "voice" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.6.

Table 6.45.6 Description of the "voice" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name voice
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'voice' tag is a production element that requests a change in speaking voice.

6.45.7 "emphasis" Attribute Description

The description of the "emphasis" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.7.

Table 6.45.7 Description of the "emphasis" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name emphasis
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The emphasis tag requests that the contained text be spoken with emphasis (also referred to as prominence or stress). The synthesis processor determines how to render emphasis since the nature of emphasis differs between languages, dialects or even voices.

6.45.8 "break" Attribute Description

The description of the "break" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.8.

Table 6.45.8 Description of the "break" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name break
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'break' tag is an empty tag that controls the pausing or other prosodic boundaries between words. The use of the break tag between any pair of words is optional. If the tag is not present between words, the synthesis processor is expected to automatically determine a break based on the linguistic context. In practice, the break tag is most often used to override the typical automatic behavior of a synthesis processor.

6.45.9 "prosody" Attribute Description

The description of the "prosody" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.9.

Table 6.45.9 Description of the "prosody" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name prosody
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'prosody' tag permits control of the pitch, speaking rate and volume of the speech output.

6.45.10 "mark" Attribute Description

The description of the "mark" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.10.

Table 6.45.10 Description of the "mark" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name mark
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. A 'mark' tag is an empty tag that places a marker into the text/tag sequence.

6.45.11 "audio" Attribute Description

The description of the "audio" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.11.

Table 6.45.11 Description of the "audio" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name audio
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'audio' tag supports the insertion of recorded audio files and the insertion of other audio formats in conjunction with synthesized speech output. The audio tag may be empty. If the audio tag is not empty then the contents should be the marked-up text to be spoken if the audio document is not available. The alternate content may include text, speech markup, desc tags, or other audio tags.

6.45.12 "speak" Attribute Description

The description of the "speak" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class is given in Table 6.45.12.

Table 6.45.12 Description of the "speak" attribute for the "SSMLGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name speak
Data Type SSMLv1p1
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is one of the SSML annotation attributes. The 'speak' tag is the root for the markup annotation.

6.46 SectionPart Class Description

The data model for the "SectionPart" class is shown in Figure 6.46 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.46

UML diagram of the SectionPart class.

Figure 6.46 - SectionPart class definitions.

Table 6.46 Description of the "SectionPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SectionPart
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the inclusion of the external referenced content or child qti-assessment-sections to be used in an 'AssessmentSection'.

6.46.1 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "SectionPart" class is given in Table 6.46.1.

Table 6.46.1 Description of the "include" attribute for the "SectionPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of arbitrary content (the form depends on the binding approach).

6.46.2 "qti-assessment-item-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-item-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class is given in Table 6.46.2.

Table 6.46.2 Description of the "qti-assessment-item-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-item-ref
Data Type AssessmentItemRef
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of a reference to a 'qii-assessment-item' using the 'qti-assessment-item-ref'.

6.46.3 "qti-assessment-section" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "SectionPart" class is given in Table 6.46.3.

Table 6.46.3 Description of the "qti-assessment-section" attribute for the "SectionPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-section
Data Type AssessmentSection
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of a child 'qti-assessment-section' using the 'qti-assessment-section'.

6.46.4 "qti-assessment-section-ref" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class is given in Table 6.46.4.

Table 6.46.4 Description of the "qti-assessment-section-ref" attribute for the "SectionPart" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-assessment-section-ref
Data Type AssessmentSectionRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This enables the inclusion of a reference to a 'qti-assessmentSection' using the 'qti-assessment-section-ref'.

6.47 SelectOrderSelection Class Description

The data model for the "SelectOrderSelection" class is shown in Figure 6.47 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.47

UML diagram of the SelectOrderSelection class.

Figure 6.47 - SelectOrderSelection class definitions.

Table 6.47 Description of the "SelectOrderSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SelectOrderSelection
Class Type Abstract Container [ Sequence ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class enables the use of the selection and ordering functionality to be used to provide adaptive item provision.

6.47.1 "qti-selection" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-selection" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class is given in Table 6.47.1.

Table 6.47.1 Description of the "qti-selection" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-selection
Data Type Selection
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The rules used to select which children of the section are to be used for each instance of the test. Each child section has its own selection and ordering rules followed before those of its parent. A child section may shuffle the order of its own children while still requiring that they are kept together when shuffling the parent section.

6.47.2 "qti-ordering" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-ordering" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class is given in Table 6.47.2.

Table 6.47.2 Description of the "qti-ordering" attribute for the "SelectOrderSelection" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-ordering
Data Type Ordering
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The rules used to determine the order in which the children of the section are to be arranged for each instance of the test. Each child section has its own selection and ordering rules followed before those of its parent. A child section may shuffle the order of its own children while still requiring that they are kept together when shuffling the parent section.

6.48 SelectStimulusBody Class Description

The data model for the "SelectStimulusBody" class is shown in Figure 6.48 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.48

UML diagram of the SelectStimulusBody class.

Figure 6.48 - SelectStimulusBody class definitions.

Table 6.48 Description of the "SelectStimulusBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SelectStimulusBody
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of directly inherited characteristics are: The set of indirectly inherited characteristics are:
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the abstract container for the content. The stimulus body contains HTML and/or MathML content..

6.48.1 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class is given in Table 6.48.1.

Table 6.48.1 Description of the "math" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description No description supplied.

6.48.2 "blockContent" Attribute Description

The description of the "blockContent" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class is given in Table 6.48.2.

Table 6.48.2 Description of the "blockContent" attribute for the "SelectStimulusBody" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name blockContent
Data Type BlockContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description No description supplied.

6.49 TableCellGroup Class Description

The data model for the "TableCellGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.49 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.49

UML diagram of the TableCellGroup class.

Figure 6.49 - TableCellGroup class definitions.

Table 6.49 Description of the "TableCellGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TableCellGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that enables the selection between the 'td' and 'th' tags for HTML table rows.

6.49.1 "td" Attribute Description

The description of the "td" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class is given in Table 6.49.1.

Table 6.49.1 Description of the "td" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name td
Data Type TDH
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the 'td' HTML tag choice as a child of the 'tr' HTML tag.

6.49.2 "th" Attribute Description

The description of the "th" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class is given in Table 6.49.2.

Table 6.49.2 Description of the "th" attribute for the "TableCellGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name th
Data Type TDH
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the 'th' HTML tag choice as a child of the 'tr' HTML tag.

6.50 TemplateRuleGroup Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.50 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.50

UML diagram of the TemplateRuleGroup class.

Figure 6.50 - TemplateRuleGroup class definitions.

Table 6.50 Description of the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateRuleGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description A template rule is either a qti-template-condition or a simple action. Template rules define the light-weight programming language necessary for creating cloned items. Note that this programming language contains a minimal number of control structures, more complex cloning rules are outside the scope of this specification. An expression used in a qti-template-rule must not refer to the value of a response variable or outcome variable. It may only refer to the values of the template variables. Template rules are followed in the order given. Variables updated by a rule take their new value when evaluated as part of any following rules.

6.50.1 "qti-set-template-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-set-template-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.1.

Table 6.50.1 Description of the "qti-set-template-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-set-template-value
Data Type SetValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This sets the value of a template variable to the value obtained from the associated expression. A template variable can be updated with reference to a previously assigned value, in other words, the template variable being set may appear in the expression where it takes the value previously assigned to it.

6.50.2 "qti-exit-template" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-exit-template" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.2.

Table 6.50.2 Description of the "qti-exit-template" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-exit-template
Data Type Empty (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The exit template rule terminates template processing immediately.

6.50.3 "qti-template-condition" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-condition" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.3.

Table 6.50.3 Description of the "qti-template-condition" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-condition
Data Type TemplateCondition
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This allows the inclusion of the template condition i.e. the clause 'If..Then..Else' construction.

6.50.4 "qti-set-default-value" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-set-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.4.

Table 6.50.4 Description of the "qti-set-default-value" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-set-default-value
Data Type SetValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable or outcome variable to have its default value set.

6.50.5 "qti-set-correct-response" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-set-correct-response" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.5.

Table 6.50.5 Description of the "qti-set-correct-response" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-set-correct-response
Data Type SetValue
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The response variable to have its correct value set.

6.50.6 "qti-template-constraint" Attribute Description

The description of the "qti-template-constraint" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class is given in Table 6.50.6.

Table 6.50.6 Description of the "qti-template-constraint" attribute for the "TemplateRuleGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name qti-template-constraint
Data Type TemplateConstraint
Value Space Container [ Sequence ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the definition of the template constraints. A qti-template-constraint contains an expression which must have an effective base-type of boolean and single cardinality.

6.51 TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup Class Description

The data model for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is shown in Figure 6.51 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.51

UML diagram of the TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup class.

Figure 6.51 - TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup class definitions.

Table 6.51 Description of the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is an abstract class that is used to enable the content to be defined for Test feedback.

6.51.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.51.1.

Table 6.51.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is an abstract attribute that enables the insertion of complex HTML markup based upon flow content.

6.51.2 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.51.2.

Table 6.51.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.51.3 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class is given in Table 6.51.3.

Table 6.51.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "TestFeedbackFlowStaticGroup" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

6.52 TestRubricBlockContentModel Class Description

The data model for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class is shown in Figure 6.52 and the accompanying definition in Table 6.52

UML diagram of the TestRubricBlockContentModel class.

Figure 6.52 - TestRubricBlockContentModel class definitions.

Table 6.52 Description of the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestRubricBlockContentModel
Class Type Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes This class is not derived from another class.
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This abstract class is used to enable the different types of content to be supplied for the test rubric block infiormation.

6.52.1 "flowContentModel" Attribute Description

The description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.52.1.

Table 6.52.1 Description of the "flowContentModel" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name flowContentModel
Data Type FlowContentModel
Value Space Abstract Container [ Selection ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the container for all of the HTML5-based content.

6.52.2 "include" Attribute Description

The description of the "include" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.52.2.

Table 6.52.2 Description of the "include" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name include
Data Type Include
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This provides the insertion of markup from external files. The form of the inclusion depends upon the binding approach. When using XML this is achieved using the 'XInclude' approach.

6.52.3 "math" Attribute Description

The description of the "math" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class is given in Table 6.52.3.

Table 6.52.3 Description of the "math" attribute for the "TestRubricBlockContentModel" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name math
Data Type MathML3
Value Space Imported
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Allows the insertion of MathML 3 markup.

toc | top

7. Derived Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the derived data classes used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

7.1 ARIABaseEmpty Class Description

The data model for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is shown in Figure 7.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.1.

UML diagram of the ARIABaseEmpty class.

Figure 7.1 - ARIABaseEmpty class definitions.

Table 7.1 Description of the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ARIABaseEmpty
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a base class for all of the ARIA characteristics for an instance that must be empty. It is from this container that all of the other empty classes inherit their set of ARIA capabilities. This set of characteristics is taken from the Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) specification [ARIA, 14], [WAI-ARIA, 17] and [WAI-ARIA, 21]. WAI-ARIA This specification provides an ontology of roles, states, and properties that define accessible user interface elements and can be used to improve the accessibility and interoperability of web content and applications. These semantics are designed to allow an author to properly convey user interface behaviors and structural information to assistive technologies in document-level markup.

7.1.1 "role" Characteristic Description

The description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.1.

Table 7.1.1 Description of the "role" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name role
Data Type ARIARoleValue
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { article | columnheader | definition | document | group | heading | img | list | listitem | math | note | presentation | region | row | rowgroup | rowheader | separator | toolbar | button | checkbox | gridcell | link | log | option | radio | slider | spinbutton | status | tab | tabpanel | textbox | timer | listbox | radiogroup | tablist | complementary | contentinfo | alert | alertdialog | application | banner | combobox | dialog | form | grid | main | marquee | menu | menubar | menuitem | menuitemcheckbox | menuitemradio | navigation | progressbar | scrollbar | search | tooltip | tree | treegrid | treeitem | searchbox | switch | term | figure | code | time | subscript | superscript | meter | generic | insertion | deletion | strong | emphasis }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the ARIA role. Roles are defined and described by their characteristics. Characteristics define the structural function of a role, such as what a role is, concepts behind it, and what instances the role can or must contain.

7.1.2 "aria-controls" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.2.

Table 7.1.2 Description of the "aria-controls" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-controls
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. This identifies the element (or elements) whose contents or presence are controlled by the current element.

7.1.3 "aria-describedby" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.3.

Table 7.1.3 Description of the "aria-describedby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-describedby
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the element (or elements) that describes the object.

7.1.4 "aria-flowto" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.4.

Table 7.1.4 Description of the "aria-flowto" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-flowto
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the next element (or elements) in an alternate reading order of content which, at the user's discretion, allows assistive technology to override the general default of reading in document source order.

7.1.5 "aria-label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.5.

Table 7.1.5 Description of the "aria-label" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines a string value that labels the current element (see related 'aria-labelledby'). The purpose of 'aria-label' is the same as that of 'aria-labelledby'. It provides the user with a recognizable name of the object.

7.1.6 "aria-labelledby" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.6.

Table 7.1.6 Description of the "aria-labelledby" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-labelledby
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the tag (or tags) that labels the current element (see related 'aria-label' and 'aria-describedby'). The purpose of 'aria-labelledby' is the same as that of 'aria-label'. It provides the user with a recognizable name of the object. The most common accessibility API mapping for a label is the accessible name property. If the label text is visible on screen, authors SHOULD use 'aria-labelledby' and SHOULD NOT use 'aria-label'. Use 'aria-label' only if the interface is such that it is not possible to have a visible label on the screen. As required by the text alternative computation, user agents give precedence to 'aria-labelledby' over 'aria-label' when computing the accessible name property. The 'aria-labelledby' attribute is similar to 'aria-describedby' in that both reference other elements to calculate a text alternative, but a label should be concise, where a description is intended to provide more verbose information.

7.1.7 "aria-level" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.7.

Table 7.1.7 Description of the "aria-level" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-level
Data Type ARIALevelInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the hierarchical level of an element within a structure. This can be applied inside trees to tree items, to headings inside a document, to nested grids, nested tablists and to other structural items that may appear inside a container or participate in an ownership hierarchy. The value for 'aria-level' is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

7.1.8 "aria-live" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.8.

Table 7.1.8 Description of the "aria-live" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-live
Data Type ARIALiveValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { off | polite | assertive }
Default = "off".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that an element will be updated, and describes the types of updates the user agents, assistive technologies, and user can expect from the live region. The values of this attribute are expressed in degrees of importance. When regions are specified as polite, assistive technologies will notify users of updates but generally do not interrupt the current task, and updates take low priority. When regions are specified as assertive, assistive technologies will immediately notify the user, and could potentially clear the speech queue of previous updates.

7.1.9 "aria-orientation" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.9.

Table 7.1.9 Description of the "aria-orientation" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-orientation
Data Type ARIAOrientationValueEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { vertical | horizontal }
Default = "horizontal".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element and orientation is horizontal or vertical.

7.1.10 "aria-owns" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.10.

Table 7.1.10 Description of the "aria-owns" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-owns
Data Type IDREFS (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (see related 'aria-controls'). The value of the 'aria-owns' attribute is a space-separated list of IDREFS that reference one or more elements in the document by ID.

7.1.11 "aria-hidden" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.11.

Table 7.1.11 Description of the "aria-hidden" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-hidden
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element is exposed to an accessibility API.

7.1.12 "aria-activedescendant" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.12.

Table 7.1.12 Description of the "aria-activedescendant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-activedescendant
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It identifies the currently active element when DOM focus is on a composite widget, textbox, group, or application. This property provides an alternative method of managing focus for interactive elements that may contain multiple focusable descendants, such as menus, grids, and toolbars.

7.1.13 "aria-atomic" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.13.

Table 7.1.13 Description of the "aria-atomic" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-atomic
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether assistive technologies will present all, or only parts of, the changed region based on the change notifications defined by the 'aria-relevant' attribute.

7.1.14 "aria-autocomplete" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.14.

Table 7.1.14 Description of the "aria-autocomplete" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-autocomplete
Data Type ARIAAutoCompleteEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { inline | list | both | none }
Default = "none".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether inputting text could trigger display of one or more predictions of the user's intended value for an input and specifies how predictions would be presented if they are made. The 'aria-autocomplete' property describes the type of interaction model a textbox, searchbox, or combobox employs when dynamically helping users complete text input. It distinguishes between two models: the inline model (aria-autocomplete='inline') that presents a value completion prediction inside the text input and the list model (aria-autocomplete='list') that presents a collection of possible values in a separate element that pops up adjacent to the text input. It is possible for an input to offer both models at the same time (aria-autocomplete='both').

7.1.15 "aria-busy" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.15.

Table 7.1.15 Description of the "aria-busy" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-busy
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates an element is being modified and that assistive technologies MAY want to wait until the modifications are complete before exposing them to the user. The default value of 'aria-busy' is false for all elements. When 'aria-busy' is true for an element, assistive technologies MAY ignore changes to content owned by that element and then process all changes made during the busy period as a single, atomic update when 'aria-busy'' becomes false.

7.1.16 "aria-checked" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.16.

Table 7.1.16 Description of the "aria-checked" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-checked
Data Type ARIACheckedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | mixed | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current "checked" state of checkboxes, radio buttons, and other widgets (see related 'aria-pressed' and 'aria-selected'). The 'aria-checked' attribute indicates whether the element is checked (true), unchecked (false), or represents a group of other elements that have a mixture of checked and unchecked values (mixed). Most inputs only support values of true and false, but the mixed value is supported by certain tri-state inputs such as a checkbox or menuitemcheckbox. The mixed value is not supported on radio, menuitemradio, switch or any element that inherits from these in the taxonomy, and user agents MUST treat a mixed value as equivalent to false for those roles.

7.1.17 "aria-disabled" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.17.

Table 7.1.17 Description of the "aria-disabled" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-disabled
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that the element is perceivable but disabled, so it is not editable or otherwise operable (see related 'aria-hidden' and 'aria-readonly'). For example, irrelevant options in a radio group may be disabled. Disabled elements might not receive focus from the tab order. For some disabled elements, applications might choose not to support navigation to descendants. In addition to setting the 'aria-disabled' attribute, authors SHOULD change the appearance (grayed out, etc.) to indicate that the item has been disabled. The state of being disabled applies to the current element and all focusable descendant elements of the element on which the 'aria-disabled' attribute is applied.

7.1.18 "aria-expanded" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.18.

Table 7.1.18 Description of the "aria-expanded" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-expanded
Data Type ARIAExpandedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether the element, or another grouping element it controls, is currently expanded or collapsed. For example, this indicates whether a portion of a tree is expanded or collapsed. In other instances, this may be applied to page sections to mark expandable and collapsible regions that are flexible for managing content density. Simplifying the user interface by collapsing sections may improve usability for all, including those with cognitive or developmental disabilities. If the element with the aria-expanded attribute controls the expansion of another grouping container that is not 'owned by' the element, the author SHOULD reference the container by using the 'aria-controls' attribute.

7.1.19 "aria-haspopup" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.19.

Table 7.1.19 Description of the "aria-haspopup" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-haspopup
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the availability and type of interactive popup element, such as menu or dialog, that can be triggered by an element. A popup element usually appears as a block of content that is on top of other content. Authors MUST ensure that the role of the element that serves as the container for the popup content is menu, listbox, tree, grid, or dialog, and that the value of aria-haspopup matches the role of the popup container. For the popup element to be keyboard accessible, authors SHOULD ensure that the element that can trigger the popup is focusable, that there is a keyboard mechanism for opening the popup, and that the popup element manages focus of all its descendants.

7.1.20 "aria-invalid" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.20.

Table 7.1.20 Description of the "aria-invalid" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-invalid
Data Type ARIAInvalidEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | grammar | spelling }
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the entered value does not conform to the format expected by the application (see related 'aria-errormessage'). If the value is computed to be invalid or out-of-range, the application author SHOULD set this attribute to true. User agents SHOULD inform the user of the error. Application authors SHOULD provide suggestions for corrections if they are known. When the user attempts to submit data involving a field for which 'aria-required' is true, authors MAY use the 'aria-invalid' attribute to signal there is an error. However, if the user has not attempted to submit the form, authors SHOULD NOT set the 'aria-invalid' attribute on required widgets simply because the user has not yet entered data. For future expansion, the 'aria-invalid' attribute is an enumerated type. Any value not recognized in the list of allowed values MUST be treated by user agents as if the value true had been provided. If the attribute is not present, or its value is false, or its value is an empty string, the default value of false applies.

7.1.21 "aria-multiline" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.21.

Table 7.1.21 Description of the "aria-multiline" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-multiline
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates whether a text box accepts multiple lines of input or only a single line.

7.1.22 "aria-multiselectable" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.22.

Table 7.1.22 Description of the "aria-multiselectable" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-multiselectable
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that the user may select more than one item from the current selectable descendants. Authors SHOULD ensure that selected descendants have the 'aria-selected' attribute set to true, and selectable descendant have the 'aria-selected' attribute set to false. Authors SHOULD NOT use the' aria-selected' attribute on descendants that are not selectable.

7.1.23 "aria-posinset" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.23.

Table 7.1.23 Description of the "aria-posinset" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-posinset
Data Type ARIALevelInteger
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines an element's number or position in the current set of listitems or treeitems. It is not required if all elements in the set are present in the DOM. If all items in a set are present in the document structure, it is not necessary to set this attribute, as the user agent can automatically calculate the set size and position for each item. However, if only a portion of the set is present in the document structure at a given moment, this property is needed to provide an explicit indication of an element's position.

7.1.24 "aria-pressed" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.24.

Table 7.1.24 Description of the "aria-pressed" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-pressed
Data Type ARIAPressedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | mixed | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current 'pressed' state of toggle buttons (see related 'aria-checked' and 'aria-selected'). Toggle buttons require a full press-and-release cycle to change their value. Activating it once changes the value to true, and activating it another time changes the value back to false. A value of mixed means that the values of more than one item controlled by the button do not all share the same value. If the attribute is not present, the button is not a toggle button. The 'aria-pressed' attribute is similar but not identical to the 'aria-checked attribute'. Operating systems support pressed on buttons and checked on checkboxes.

7.1.25 "aria-readonly" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.25.

Table 7.1.25 Description of the "aria-readonly" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-readonly
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that the element is not editable, but is otherwise operable (see related 'aria-disabled'). This means the user can read but not set the value of the widget. Readonly elements are relevant to the user, and application authors SHOULD NOT restrict navigation to the element or its focusable descendants. Other actions such as copying the value of the element are also supported. This is in contrast to disabled elements, to which applications might not allow user navigation to descendants.

7.1.26 "aria-relevant" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.26.

Table 7.1.26 Description of the "aria-relevant" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-relevant
Data Type ARIARelevantList
Value Space A list from an enumerated value set of: { additions | removals | text | all | additions text }
Default = "additions text".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates what notifications the user agent will trigger when the accessibility tree within a live region is modified (see related 'aria-atomic'). The attribute is represented as a space delimited list of the following values: additions, removals, text; or a single catch-all value all. This is used to describe semantically meaningful changes, as opposed to merely presentational ones. For example, nodes that are removed from the top of a log are merely removed for purposes of creating room for other entries, and the removal of them does not have meaning. However, in the case of a buddy list, removal of a buddy name indicates that they are no longer online, and this is a meaningful event. In that case 'aria-relevant' will be set to all. When the 'aria-relevant' attribute is not provided, the default value, additions text, indicates that text modifications and node additions are relevant, but that node removals are irrelevant.

7.1.27 "aria-required" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.27.

Table 7.1.27 Description of the "aria-required" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-required
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates that user input is required on the element before a form may be submitted.

7.1.28 "aria-selected" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.28.

Table 7.1.28 Description of the "aria-selected" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-selected
Data Type ARIASelectedEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { true | false | undefined }
Default = "undefined".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates the current 'selected' state of various widgets (see related 'aria-checked' and 'aria-pressed'). This attribute is used with single-selection and multiple-selection widgets. Any explicit assignment of aria-selected takes precedence over the implicit selection based on focus.

7.1.29 "aria-setsize" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.29.

Table 7.1.29 Description of the "aria-setsize" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-setsize
Data Type Integer (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the number of items in the current set of listitems or treeitems. It is not required if all elements in the set are present in the DOM. See related aria-posinset. This property is marked on the members of a set, not the container element that collects the members of the set. To orient the user by saying an element is "item X out of Y," the assistive technologies would use X equal to the 'aria-posinset' attribute and Y equal to the 'aria-setsize' attribute. If all items in a set are present in the document structure, it is not necessary to set this property, as the user agent can automatically calculate the set size and position for each item. However, if only a portion of the set is present in the document structure at a given moment (in order to reduce document size), this property is needed to provide an explicit indication of set size. Authors MUST set the value of 'aria-setsize' to an integer equal to the number of items in the set. If the total number of items is unknown, authors SHOULD set the value of 'aria-setsize' to -1.

7.1.30 "aria-sort" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.30.

Table 7.1.30 Description of the "aria-sort" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-sort
Data Type ARIASortEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { ascending | descending | none | other }
Default = "none".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It indicates if items in a table or grid are sorted in ascending or descending order. Authors SHOULD only apply this property to table headers or grid headers. If the property is not provided, there is no defined sort order. For each table or grid, authors SHOULD apply aria-sort to only one header at a time.

7.1.31 "aria-valuemax" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.31.

Table 7.1.31 Description of the "aria-valuemax" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuemax
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the maximum allowed value for a range widget. Authors MUST ensure the value of 'aria-valuemax' is greater than or equal to the value of 'aria-valuemin'. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for 'aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'.

7.1.32 "aria-valuemin" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.32.

Table 7.1.32 Description of the "aria-valuemin" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuemin
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the minimum allowed value for a range widget. Authors MUST ensure the value of 'aria-valuemin' is less than or equal to the value of 'aria-valuemax'. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'.

7.1.33 "aria-valuenow" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.33.

Table 7.1.33 Description of the "aria-valuenow" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuenow
Data Type Decimal (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the current value for a range widget (see related 'aria-valuetext'). This property is used, for example, on a range widget such as a slider or progress bar. If the current value is not known (for example, an indeterminate progress bar), the author SHOULD NOT set the 'aria-valuenow' attribute. If the 'aria-valuenow' attribute is absent, no information is implied about the current value. If the 'aria-valuenow' has a known maximum and minimum, the author SHOULD provide properties for 'aria-valuemax' and 'aria-valuemin'. The value of 'aria-valuenow' is a decimal number. If the range is a set of numeric values, then 'aria-valuenow' is one of those values.

7.1.34 "aria-valuetext" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.34.

Table 7.1.34 Description of the "aria-valuetext" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-valuetext
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation. It defines the human readable text alternative of aria-valuenow for a range widget. This property is used, for example, on a range widget such as a slider or progress bar. If the 'aria-valuetext' attribute is set, authors SHOULD also set the 'aria-valuenow' attribute, unless that value is unknown (for example, on an indeterminate progressbar). Authors SHOULD only set the 'aria-valuetext' attribute when the rendered value cannot be meaningfully represented as a number. For example, a slider may have rendered values of small, medium, and large. In this case, the values of aria-valuenow could range from 1 through 3, which indicate the position of each value in the value space, but the 'aria-valuetext' would be one of the strings: small, medium, or large. If the 'aria-valuetext' attribute is absent, the assistive technologies will rely solely on the 'aria-valuenow' attribute for the current value. If 'aria-valuetext' is specified, assistive technologies SHOULD render that value instead of the value of 'aria-valuenow'.

7.1.35 "aria-modal" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.35.

Table 7.1.35 Description of the "aria-modal" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-modal
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates whether an element is modal when displayed. This attribute is used to indicate that the presence of a 'modal' element precludes usage of other content on the page.

7.1.36 "aria-current" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.36.

Table 7.1.36 Description of the "aria-current" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-current
Data Type ARIACurrentEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { page | step | location | date | time | true | false | undefined }
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates the element that represents the current item within a container or set of related elements. It has an enumerated type. Any value not included in the list of allowed values SHOULD be treated by assistive technologies as if the value true had been provided. If the attribute is not present or its value is an empty string or undefined, the default value of 'false' applies and the 'aria-current' state MUST NOT be exposed by user agents or assistive technologies.

7.1.37 "aria-placeholder" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.37.

Table 7.1.37 Description of the "aria-placeholder" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-placeholder
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines a short hint (a word or short phrase) intended to aid the user with data entry when the control has no value. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

7.1.38 "aria-colcount" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.38.

Table 7.1.38 Description of the "aria-colcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colcount
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the total number of columns in a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colindex'.

7.1.39 "aria-rowcount" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.39.

Table 7.1.39 Description of the "aria-rowcount" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowcount
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the total number of rows in a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowindex'.

7.1.40 "aria-colindex" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.40.

Table 7.1.40 Description of the "aria-colindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colindex
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines an element's column index or position with respect to the total number of columns within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colcount' and 'aria-colspan'.

7.1.41 "aria-rowindex" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.41.

Table 7.1.41 Description of the "aria-rowindex" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowindex
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines an element's row index or position with respect to the total number of rows within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowcount' and 'aria-rowspan'.

7.1.42 "aria-colspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.42.

Table 7.1.42 Description of the "aria-colspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-colspan
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the number of columns spanned by a cell or gridcell within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-colindex' and 'aria-rowspan'.

7.1.43 "aria-rowspan" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.43.

Table 7.1.43 Description of the "aria-rowspan" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-rowspan
Data Type NonNegativeInteger (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines the number of rows spanned by a cell or gridcell within a 'table', 'grid', or 'treegrid'. See related 'aria-rowindex' and 'aria-colspan'.

7.1.44 "aria-keyshorts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-keyshorts" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.44.

Table 7.1.44 Description of the "aria-keyshorts" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-keyshorts
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Indicates keyboard shortcuts that an author has implemented to activate or give focus to an element. The value of the 'aria-keyshortcuts' attribute is a space-delimited list of keyboard shortcuts that can be pressed to activate a command or textbox widget. The keys defined in the shortcuts represent the physical keys pressed and not the actual characters generated. Each keyboard shortcut consists of one or more tokens delimited by the plus sign ('+') representing zero or more modifier keys and exactly one non-modifier key that must be pressed simultaneously to activate the given shortcut.

7.1.45 "aria-roledescription" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.45.

Table 7.1.45 Description of the "aria-roledescription" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-roledescription
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Defines a human-readable, author-localized description for the role of an element.

7.1.46 "aria-errormessage" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.46.

Table 7.1.46 Description of the "aria-errormessage" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-errormessage
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Identifies the element that provides an error message for the object. See related 'aria-invalid' and 'aria-describedby'. This attribute references another element that contains custom error message text.

7.1.47 "aria-details" Characteristic Description

The description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class is given in Table 7.1.47.

Table 7.1.47 Description of the "aria-details" characteristic for the "ARIABaseEmpty" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name aria-details
Data Type IDREF (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is a part of the ARIA annotation (added in ARIA 1.1). Identifies the element that provides a detailed, extended description for the object. See related 'aria-describedby'. The 'aria-details' attribute references a single element that provides more detailed information than would normally be provided by 'aria-describedby'.

7.2 ARIALevelInteger Class Description

The data model for the "ARIALevelInteger" class is shown in Figure 7.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.2.

UML diagram of the ARIALevelInteger class.

Figure 7.2 - ARIALevelInteger class definitions.

Table 7.2 Description of the "ARIALevelInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ARIALevelInteger
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description Defines the data-type for the 'aria-level' property. This is an integer that must be '1' or greater.

7.2.1 "minInclusive" Attribute Description

The description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "ARIALevelInteger" class is given in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2 Description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "ARIALevelInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name minInclusive
Data Type Integer (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Constrains the value to be at least '1'.

7.3 AdaptiveHref Class Description

The data model for the "AdaptiveHref" class is shown in Figure 7.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.3.

UML diagram of the AdaptiveHref class.

Figure 7.3 - AdaptiveHref class definitions.

Table 7.3 Description of the "AdaptiveHref" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AdaptiveHref
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is the data-type for referencing information that is to be used to support the data exchange with the adaptive testing engine.

7.3.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class is given in Table 7.3.1.

Table 7.3.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier, logical reference, to the collection of information to be used for the adaptive testing engine. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.3.2 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class is given in Table 7.3.2.

Table 7.3.2 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AdaptiveHref" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The link to the location for the actual instance file that contains the required information.

7.4 AreaMapEntry Class Description

The data model for the "AreaMapEntry" class is shown in Figure 7.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.4.

UML diagram of the AreaMapEntry class.

Figure 7.4 - AreaMapEntry class definitions.

Table 7.4 Description of the "AreaMapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AreaMapEntry
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The map is defined by a set of qti-area-map-entry objects, each of which maps an area of the coordinate space onto a single float. When mapping points each area is tested in turn, with those listed first taking priority in the case where areas overlap and a point falls in the intersection.

7.4.1 "shape" Characteristic Description

The description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class is given in Table 7.4.1.

Table 7.4.1 Description of the "shape" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name shape
Data Type ShapeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { circle | default | ellipse | poly | rect }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The shape of the area.

7.4.2 "coords" Characteristic Description

The description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class is given in Table 7.4.2.

Table 7.4.2 Description of the "coords" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name coords
Data Type Coords
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The size and position of the area, interpreted in conjunction with the shape.

7.4.3 "mapped-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class is given in Table 7.4.3.

Table 7.4.3 Description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "AreaMapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mapped-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mapped value.

7.5 AssessmentSectionRef Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class is shown in Figure 7.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.5.

UML diagram of the AssessmentSectionRef class.

Figure 7.5 - AssessmentSectionRef class definitions.

Table 7.5 Description of the "AssessmentSectionRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentSectionRef
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description Sections can be included into qti-test-parts or other qti-assessment-sections by aggregation or by reference. The qti-assessment-section-ref element enables the inclusion by reference. The only documents that can be refered to by qti-assessment-section-ref are XML documents that contain a single qti-assessment-section as a single root. There are no other restrictions on the referenced qti-assessment-section document. The qti-assessment-section-ref element functions as a facade for the qti-assessment-section to which it refers. That means that, at runtime, the document that contains the reference, with the refered-to section merged in, should behave exactly the same as a document that has all the same sections aggregated in one document. Adaptive test branch rules can only refer to included or directly referenced sections, they can not refer to sections that are in their turn included or referenced within the referenced section. That is to say, branching rules should treat referred sections as leaf nodes, that have no children that are amenable to branching separately from their immediate parent.

7.5.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class is given in Table 7.5.1.

Table 7.5.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier for the section reference. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.5.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class is given in Table 7.5.2.

Table 7.5.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, this has a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes to which the element belongs.

7.5.3 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class is given in Table 7.5.3.

Table 7.5.3 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The uri is used to refer to the qti-assessment-section document file e.g. elsewhere in the same content package. There is no requirement that this be unique. A test may refer to the same section multiple times within a test. Note however that each reference must have a unique identifier.

7.5.4 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class is given in Table 7.5.4.

Table 7.5.4 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentSectionRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

7.6 AssessmentStimulusRef Class Description

The data model for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class is shown in Figure 7.6 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.6.

UML diagram of the AssessmentStimulusRef class.

Figure 7.6 - AssessmentStimulusRef class definitions.

Table 7.6 Description of the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name AssessmentStimulusRef
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is the structure that enables reference to a 'qti-assessment-stimulus' instance. The stimulus must be contained within its own instance and so the Item uses the 'qti-assessment-stimulus-ref' structure to provide the link between the Item and the Stimulus.

7.6.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class is given in Table 7.6.1.

Table 7.6.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The unique identifier for the stimulus reference. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.6.2 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class is given in Table 7.6.2.

Table 7.6.2 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The uri used to refer to the stimulus file (e.g. elsewhere in the same content package). There is no requirement that this be unique. Several items may refer to the same stimulus. Note however that each reference must have a unique identifier.

7.6.3 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class is given in Table 7.6.3.

Table 7.6.3 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The title of the stimulus is intended to enable the stimulus to be selected in situations where the contents are not available, for example when an author is browsing a repository.

7.6.4 "dataExtension" Characteristic Description

The description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class is given in Table 7.6.4.

Table 7.6.4 Description of the "dataExtension" characteristic for the "AssessmentStimulusRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name dataExtension
Data Type DataHTML5Extension
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Global ("+")
Multiplicity [0.. unbounded]
Description This is the HTML5 extension characteristic. A custom data characteristic is a characteristic in no namespace whose name starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

7.7 BaseValue Class Description

The data model for the "BaseValue" class is shown in Figure 7.7 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.7.

UML diagram of the BaseValue class.

Figure 7.7 - BaseValue class definitions.

Table 7.7 Description of the "BaseValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name BaseValue
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description One of the QTI expression functions. The simplest expression returns a single value from the set defined by the given base-type.

7.7.1 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "BaseValue" class is given in Table 7.7.1.

Table 7.7.1 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "BaseValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The base type of the of the value.

7.8 ContextUniqueIDRef Class Description

The data model for the "ContextUniqueIDRef" class is shown in Figure 7.8 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.8.

UML diagram of the ContextUniqueIDRef class.

Figure 7.8 - ContextUniqueIDRef class definitions.

Table 7.8 Description of the "ContextUniqueIDRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ContextUniqueIDRef
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The data-type for the context variable identifiers that are to be available to the PCI.

7.8.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextUniqueIDRef" class is given in Table 7.8.1.

Table 7.8.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "ContextUniqueIDRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type UniqueIdentifierRef
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the identifier of a context variable defined in the item who's value should be passed to the PCI module on initialization.

7.9 Coords Class Description

The data model for the "Coords" class is shown in Figure 7.9 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.9.

UML diagram of the Coords class.

Figure 7.9 - Coords class definitions.

Table 7.9 Description of the "Coords" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Coords
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The coords type provides the coordinates that determine the size and location of an area defined by a corresponding shape. The coordinates themselves are an ordered list of lengths (as defined in [XHTML, 10]). The interpretation of each length value is dependent on the value of the associated shape as follows. (a) rect: left-x, top-y, right-x, bottom-y; (b) circle: center-x, center-y, radius. Note. When the radius value is a percentage value, user agents should calculate the final radius value based on the associated object's width and height. The radius should be the smaller value of the two; (c) poly: x1, y1, x2, y2, ..., xN, yN. The first x and y coordinate pair and the last should be the same to close the polygon. When these coordinate values are not the same, user agents should infer an additional coordinate pair to close the polygon; (d) ellipse: center-x, center-y, h-radius, v-radius. Note that the ellipse shape is deprecated as it is not defined by XHTML; (e) default: no coordinates should be given.

7.9.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Coords" class is given in Table 7.9.

Table 7.9 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Coords" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "(([0-9]+%?[,]){2}([0-9]+%?))|(([0-9]+%?[,]){3}([0-9]+%?))|(([0-9]+%?[,]){2}(([0-9]+%?[,]){2})+([0-9]+%?[,])([0-9]+%?))".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the pattern that establishes the permitted values for the coords of: rect=x1,y1,x2,y2; circle=x,y,r; poly=x1,y1...xN,yN. All values are either an integer or a percentage.

7.10 Correct Class Description

The data model for the "Correct" class is shown in Figure 7.10 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.10.

UML diagram of the Correct class.

Figure 7.10 - Correct class definitions.

Table 7.10 Description of the "Correct" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Correct
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression. This expression looks up the declaration of a response variable and returns the associated correctResponse or NULL if no correct value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the correct response from an individual item.

7.10.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Correct" class is given in Table 7.10.1.

Table 7.10.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Correct" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the associated response variable. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.11 DataHTML5Extension Class Description

The data model for the "DataHTML5Extension" class is shown in Figure 7.11 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.11.

UML diagram of the DataHTML5Extension class.

Figure 7.11 - DataHTML5Extension class definitions.

Table 7.11 Description of the "DataHTML5Extension" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name DataHTML5Extension
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This data-type is used to define a constrained extension. The extension is in no namespace but has a name that starts with the string 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

7.11.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "DataHTML5Extension" class is given in Table 7.11.

Table 7.11 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "DataHTML5Extension" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "(data-)[a-zA-Z0-9_\-\.]+".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This is the pattern that defines the regular expression for the name of the attrubute. It is a the string starting with 'data-', has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

7.12 Default Class Description

The data model for the "Default" class is shown in Figure 7.12 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.12.

UML diagram of the Default class.

Figure 7.12 - Default class definitions.

Table 7.12 Description of the "Default" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Default
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is one of the QTI expression functions. This expression looks up the declaration of an item variable and returns the associated default value or NULL if no default value was declared. When used in outcomes processing item identifier prefixing (see variable) may be used to obtain the default value from an individual item.

7.12.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Default" class is given in Table 7.12.1.

Table 7.12.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Default" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the associated Item variable. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.13 EncVariableString Class Description

The data model for the "EncVariableString" class is shown in Figure 7.13 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.13.

UML diagram of the EncVariableString class.

Figure 7.13 - EncVariableString class definitions.

Table 7.13 Description of the "EncVariableString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name EncVariableString
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The data-type for 'VariableRefs' used in lists based upon VariableRefs and Strings.

7.13.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "EncVariableString" class is given in Table 7.13.

Table 7.13 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "EncVariableString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "\{[\i-[:]][\c-[:]]*\}".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Establishes the constraint that the content must be a string enclosed in curly brackets i.e. {...}.

7.14 FileHref Class Description

The data model for the "FileHref" class is shown in Figure 7.14 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.14.

UML diagram of the FileHref class.

Figure 7.14 - FileHref class definitions.

Table 7.14 Description of the "FileHref" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FileHref
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is the data-type for the URI for the associated content file.

7.15 FileHrefCard Class Description

The data model for the "FileHrefCard" class is shown in Figure 7.15 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.15.

UML diagram of the FileHrefCard class.

Figure 7.15 - FileHrefCard class definitions.

Table 7.15 Description of the "FileHrefCard" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FileHrefCard
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is the data-type for the URI for the associated content file for the alternative accessibility content.

7.15.1 "mime-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "FileHrefCard" class is given in Table 7.15.1.

Table 7.15.1 Description of the "mime-type" characteristic for the "FileHrefCard" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mime-type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The type of file i.e. content, using the mime-type vocabulary.

7.16 Identifier Class Description

The data model for the "Identifier" class is shown in Figure 7.16 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.16.

UML diagram of the Identifier class.

Figure 7.16 - Identifier class definitions.

Table 7.16 Description of the "Identifier" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Identifier
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description An identifier is simply a logical reference to another object in the item, such as an itemVariable or choice. An identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.17 InteractionModule Class Description

The data model for the "InteractionModule" class is shown in Figure 7.17 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.17.

UML diagram of the InteractionModule class.

Figure 7.17 - InteractionModule class definitions.

Table 7.17 Description of the "InteractionModule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InteractionModule
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description An interaction configuration settings to be used by the PCI [PCI, 20]. This setting is defined with respect to the set of JavaScript library modules.

7.17.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class is given in Table 7.17.1.

Table 7.17.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type NCName (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier for the module required by the PCI.

7.17.2 "primary-path" Characteristic Description

The description of the "primary-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class is given in Table 7.17.2.

Table 7.17.2 Description of the "primary-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name primary-path
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If provided, this overrides the module configuration defined by the parent qti-interaction-modules element and provides the primary location from which to load the Javascript module

7.17.3 "fallback-path" Characteristic Description

The description of the "fallback-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class is given in Table 7.17.3.

Table 7.17.3 Description of the "fallback-path" characteristic for the "InteractionModule" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name fallback-path
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If provided, this overrides the module configuration defined by the parent qti-interaction-modules element and provides the location from which to load the Javascript module if the module can't be loaded from the primary location.

7.18 InterpolationTableEntry Class Description

The data model for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class is shown in Figure 7.18 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.18.

UML diagram of the InterpolationTableEntry class.

Figure 7.18 - InterpolationTableEntry class definitions.

Table 7.18 Description of the "InterpolationTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name InterpolationTableEntry
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description Provides an interpolation table entry in the associated interpolation table.

7.18.1 "source-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class is given in Table 7.18.1.

Table 7.18.1 Description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name source-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lower bound for the source value to match this entry.

7.18.2 "include-boundary" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-boundary" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class is given in Table 7.18.2.

Table 7.18.2 Description of the "include-boundary" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-boundary
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Determines if an exact match of source-value matches this entry. If 'true', the default, then an exact match of the value is considered a match of this entry.

7.18.3 "target-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class is given in Table 7.18.3.

Table 7.18.3 Description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "InterpolationTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name target-value
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The target value that is used to set the outcome when a match is found.

7.19 ItemSessionControl Class Description

The data model for the "ItemSessionControl" class is shown in Figure 7.19 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.19.

UML diagram of the ItemSessionControl class.

Figure 7.19 - ItemSessionControl class definitions.

Table 7.19 Description of the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ItemSessionControl
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description When items are referenced as part of a test, the test may impose constraints on how many attempts, and which states are allowed. These constraints can be specified for individual items, for whole sections or for an entire qti-test-part. By default, a setting at qti-test-part level affects all items in that part unless the setting is overridden at the qti-assessment-section level or ultimately at the individual qti-assessment-item-ref. The defaults for an qti-Item-session-control are used only in the absence of any applicable constraint.

7.19.1 "max-attempts" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-attempts" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.1.

Table 7.19.1 Description of the "max-attempts" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-attempts
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description For non-adaptive items, max-attempts controls the maximum number of attempts allowed in the given test context. Normally this is 1 as the scoring rules for non-adaptive items are the same for each attempt. A value of 0 indicates no limit. If it is unspecified it is treated as 1 for non-adaptive items. For adaptive items, the value of max-attempts is ignored as the number of attempts is limited by the value of the completion-status built-in outcome variable. A value of max-attempts greater than 1, by definition, indicates that any applicable feedback must be shown. This applies to both Modal Feedback and Integrated Feedback where applicable. However, once the maximum number of allowed attempts have been used (or for adaptive items, completion-status has been set to completed) whether or not feedback is shown is controlled by the show-feedback constraint.

7.19.2 "show-feedback" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-feedback" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.2.

Table 7.19.2 Description of the "show-feedback" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-feedback
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This constraint affects the visibility of feedback after the end of the last attempt. If it is 'false' then feedback is not shown. This includes both Modal Feedback and Integrated Feedback even if the candidate has access to the review state. The default is 'false'.

7.19.3 "allow-review" Characteristic Description

The description of the "allow-review" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.3.

Table 7.19.3 Description of the "allow-review" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name allow-review
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This constraint also applies only after the end of the last attempt. If set to 'true' the item session is allowed to enter the review state during which the candidate can review the qti-item-body along with the responses they gave, but cannot update or resubmit them. If set to 'false' the candidate can not review the qti-item-body or their responses once they have submitted their last attempt. The default is 'true'. If the review state is allowed, but feedback is not, delivery systems must take extra care not to show integrated feedback that resulted from the last attempt as part of the review process. Feedback can however take the form of hiding material that was previously visible as well as the more usual form of showing material that was previously hidden. To resolve this ambiguity, for non-adaptive items the absence of feedback is defined to be the version of the qti-item-body displayed to the candidate at the start of each attempt. In other words, with the visibility of any integrated feedback determined by the default values of the outcome variables and not the values of the outcome variables updated by the invocation of response processing. For Adaptive Items the situation is complicated by the iterative nature of response processing which makes it hard to identify the appropriate state in which to place the item for review. To avoid requiring delivery engines to cache the values of the outcome variables the setting of show-feedback should be ignored for adaptive items when allow-review is 'true'. When in the review state, the final values of the outcome variables should be used to determine the visibility of integrated feedback.

7.19.4 "show-solution" Characteristic Description

The description of the "show-solution" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.4.

Table 7.19.4 Description of the "show-solution" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name show-solution
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This constraint controls whether or not the system may provide the candidate with a way of entering the solution state. The default is 'false'.

7.19.5 "allow-comment" Characteristic Description

The description of the "allow-comment" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.5.

Table 7.19.5 Description of the "allow-comment" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name allow-comment
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Some delivery systems support the capture of candidate comments. The comment is not part of the assessed responses but provides feedback from the candidate to the other actors in the assessment process. This constraint controls whether or not the candidate is allowed to provide a comment on the item during the session

7.19.6 "allow-skipping" Characteristic Description

The description of the "allow-skipping" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.6.

Table 7.19.6 Description of the "allow-skipping" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name allow-skipping
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "true".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An item is defined to be skipped if the candidate has not provided any response. In other words, all response variables are submitted with their default value or are NULL. This definition is consistent with the number-responded operator available in outcome-processing. If 'false', candidates are not allowed to skip the item, or in other words, they are not allowed to submit the item until they have provided a non-default value for at least one of the response variables. By definition, an item with no response variables cannot be skipped. The value of this attribute is only applicable when the item is in a test-part with individual submission mode. Note that if allow-skipping is 'true' delivery engines must ensure that the candidate can choose to submit no response, for example, through the provision of a "skip" button.

7.19.7 "validate-responses" Characteristic Description

The description of the "validate-responses" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class is given in Table 7.19.7.

Table 7.19.7 Description of the "validate-responses" characteristic for the "ItemSessionControl" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name validate-responses
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This attribute controls the behaviour of delivery engines when the candidate submits an invalid response. An invalid response is defined to be a response which does not satisfy the constraints imposed by the interaction with which it is associated (see interaction for more information). When validate-responses is turned on (true) then the candidates are not allowed to submit the item until they have provided valid responses for all interactions. When turned off (false) invalid responses may be accepted by the system. The value of this attribute is only applicable when the item is in a qti-test-part with individual submission mode (see Navigation and Submission).

7.20 Length Class Description

The data model for the "Length" class is shown in Figure 7.20 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.20.

UML diagram of the Length class.

Figure 7.20 - Length class definitions.

Table 7.20 Description of the "Length" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Length
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The length data-type is as defined in [XHTML, 10].

7.20.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Length" class is given in Table 7.20.

Table 7.20 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "Length" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "[0-9]+%?".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines the constraint on the length such that is must contain only the numbers 0-9.

7.21 MapEntry Class Description

The data model for the "MapEntry" class is shown in Figure 7.21 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.21.

UML diagram of the MapEntry class.

Figure 7.21 - MapEntry class definitions.

Table 7.21 Description of the "MapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MapEntry
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a part of the mapping functionality. The map is defined by a set of qti-map-entry, each of which maps a single value from the source set onto a single float.

7.21.1 "map-key" Characteristic Description

The description of the "map-key" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class is given in Table 7.21.1.

Table 7.21.1 Description of the "map-key" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name map-key
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The source value for the qti-map-entry.

7.21.2 "mapped-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class is given in Table 7.21.2.

Table 7.21.2 Description of the "mapped-value" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mapped-value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The mapped value for the qti-map-entry.

7.21.3 "case-sensitive" Characteristic Description

The description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class is given in Table 7.21.3.

Table 7.21.3 Description of the "case-sensitive" characteristic for the "MapEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name case-sensitive
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Used to control whether or not a qti-map-entry string is matched case sensitively. The default value is false.

7.22 MapResponse Class Description

The data model for the "MapResponse" class is shown in Figure 7.22 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.22.

UML diagram of the MapResponse class.

Figure 7.22 - MapResponse class definitions.

Table 7.22 Description of the "MapResponse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MapResponse
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression function. This expression looks up the value of a response variable and then transforms it using the associated mapping, which must have been declared. The result is a single float. If the response variable has single cardinality then the value returned is simply the mapped target value from the map. If the response variable has multiple or ordered cardinality then the value returned is the sum of the mapped target values. This expression cannot be applied to variables of record cardinality. For example, if a mapping associates the identifiers {A,B,C,D} with the values {0,1,0.5,0} respectively then mapResponse will map the single value 'C' to the numeric value 0.5 and the set of values {C,B} to the value 1.5. If a container contains multiple instances of the same value then that value is counted once only. To continue the example above {B,B,C} would still map to 1.5 and not 2.5.

7.22.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "MapResponse" class is given in Table 7.22.1.

Table 7.22.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "MapResponse" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the associated Response variable. The identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.23 MatchTableEntry Class Description

The data model for the "MatchTableEntry" class is shown in Figure 7.23 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.23.

UML diagram of the MatchTableEntry class.

Figure 7.23 - MatchTableEntry class definitions.

Table 7.23 Description of the "MatchTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MatchTableEntry
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description A qti-match-table transforms a source integer by finding the first qti-match-table-entry with an exact match to the source. The qti-match-table-entry allows the definition of each entry in the table.

7.23.1 "source-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class is given in Table 7.23.1.

Table 7.23.1 Description of the "source-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name source-value
Data Type Int (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The lower bound for the source value to match this entry.

7.23.2 "target-value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class is given in Table 7.23.2.

Table 7.23.2 Description of the "target-value" characteristic for the "MatchTableEntry" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name target-value
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The target value that is used to set the outcome when a match is found.

7.24 MathConstant Class Description

The data model for the "MathConstant" class is shown in Figure 7.24 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.24.

UML diagram of the MathConstant class.

Figure 7.24 - MathConstant class definitions.

Table 7.24 Description of the "MathConstant" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MathConstant
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression function. The result is a mathematical constant returned as a single float, e.g. Pi and e.

7.24.1 "name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathConstant" class is given in Table 7.24.1.

Table 7.24.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "MathConstant" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name name
Data Type MathConstantsEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { pi | e }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The name of the mathematical constant. This is from an enumerated list.

7.25 MimeType Class Description

The data model for the "MimeType" class is shown in Figure 7.25 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.25.

UML diagram of the MimeType class.

Figure 7.25 - MimeType class definitions.

Table 7.25 Description of the "MimeType" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MimeType
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The mime type (type and subtype), as defined by [RFC 2045].

7.25.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "MimeType" class is given in Table 7.25.

Table 7.25 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "MimeType" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "[\p{IsBasicLatin}-[()<>@,;:\\"/\[\]?=]]+/[\p{IsBasicLatin}-[()<>@,;:\\"/\[\]?=]]+".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines the regular expression for a mime-type value.

7.26 NonNegativeDouble Class Description

The data model for the "NonNegativeDouble" class is shown in Figure 7.26 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.26.

UML diagram of the NonNegativeDouble class.

Figure 7.26 - NonNegativeDouble class definitions.

Table 7.26 Description of the "NonNegativeDouble" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name NonNegativeDouble
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description This is the data-type for numbers that are of the data-type 'double' but must not be negative i.e. the minimum value is 0.0.

7.26.1 "minInclusive" Attribute Description

The description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "NonNegativeDouble" class is given in Table 7.26.

Table 7.26 Description of the "minInclusive" attribute for the "NonNegativeDouble" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name minInclusive
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "0.0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Defines the constraint that the minimum value is 0.0.

7.27 Number Class Description

The data model for the "Number" class is shown in Figure 7.27 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.27.

UML diagram of the Number class.

Figure 7.27 - Number class definitions.

Table 7.27 Description of the "Number" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Number
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is base class for some of the QTI expressions. This is the data-type used in some of the functions that are used in Outcome Processing only and which provide summative information.

7.27.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "Number" class is given in Table 7.27.1.

Table 7.27.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "Number" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name section-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items in the qti-assessment-section with matching identifier are matched. Items in sub-sections are included in this definition.

7.27.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "Number" class is given in Table 7.27.2.

Table 7.27.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "Number" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with a matching category are included.

7.27.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "Number" class is given in Table 7.27.3.

Table 7.27.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "Number" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name exclude-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with no matching category are included.

7.28 OutcomeMinMax Class Description

The data model for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is shown in Figure 7.28 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.28.

UML diagram of the OutcomeMinMax class.

Figure 7.28 - OutcomeMinMax class definitions.

Table 7.28 Description of the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name OutcomeMinMax
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a data-type for the 'qti-outcome-minimum' and 'qti-outcome-maximum' QTI expressions for outcome processing.

7.28.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is given in Table 7.28.1.

Table 7.28.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name section-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items in the assessmentSection with matching identifier are matched. Items in sub-sections are included in this definition.

7.28.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is given in Table 7.28.2.

Table 7.28.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with a matching category are included.

7.28.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is given in Table 7.28.3.

Table 7.28.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name exclude-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with no matching category are included.

7.28.4 "outcome-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is given in Table 7.28.4.

Table 7.28.4 Description of the "outcome-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name outcome-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description As per the 'qti-variable-identifier' attribute of 'qti-test-variables'.

7.28.5 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class is given in Table 7.28.5.

Table 7.28.5 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "OutcomeMinMax" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name weight-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description As per the 'weight-identifier' characteristic of 'qti-test-variables'.

7.29 Param Class Description

The data model for the "Param" class is shown in Figure 7.29 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.29.

UML diagram of the Param class.

Figure 7.29 - Param class definitions.

Table 7.29 Description of the "Param" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Param
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is the container for a parameter being passed to the HTML 'object' tag.

7.29.1 "name" Characteristic Description

The description of the "name" characteristic for the "Param" class is given in Table 7.29.1.

Table 7.29.1 Description of the "name" characteristic for the "Param" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name name
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The name of the parameter, as interpreted by the object.

7.29.2 "value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "value" characteristic for the "Param" class is given in Table 7.29.2.

Table 7.29.2 Description of the "value" characteristic for the "Param" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name value
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The value to pass to the object for the named parameter. This value is subject to template variable expansion. If the value is the name of a template variable that was declared with the paramVariable set to true then the template variable's value is passed to the object as the value for the given parameter. When expanding a template variable as a parameter value, types other than identifiers, strings and uris must be converted to strings. Numeric types are converted to strings using the "%i" or "%G" formats as appropriate (see printedVariable for a discussion of numeric formatting). Values of base-type boolean are expanded to one of the strings "true" or "false". Values of base-type point are expanded to two space-separated integers in the order horizontal coordinate, vertical coordinate, using "%i" format. Values of base-type pair and directedPair are converted to a string consisting of the two identifiers, space separated. Values of base-type duration are converted using "%G" format. Values of base-type file cannot be used in parameter expansion. If the valuetype is REF the template variable must be of base-type uri.

7.29.3 "valuetype" Characteristic Description

The description of the "valuetype" characteristic for the "Param" class is given in Table 7.29.3.

Table 7.29.3 Description of the "valuetype" characteristic for the "Param" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name valuetype
Data Type ParamTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { DATA | REF }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This specification supports the use of DATA and REF but not OBJECT.

7.29.4 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "Param" class is given in Table 7.29.4.

Table 7.29.4 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "Param" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description Used to provide a type, using mimetypes, for values valuetype REF.

7.30 PrintedVariable Class Description

The data model for the "PrintedVariable" class is shown in Figure 7.30 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.30.

UML diagram of the PrintedVariable class.

Figure 7.30 - PrintedVariable class definitions.

Table 7.30 Description of the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name PrintedVariable
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The outcome variable or template variable must have been defined. The values of response variables cannot be printed directly as their values are implicitly known to the candidate through the interactions they are bound to; if necessary, their values can be assigned to outcomes during response processing and displayed to the candidate as part of a body element visible only in the appropriate feedback states. If the variable's value is NULL then the element is ignored. Variables of base-type string are treated as simple runs of text. Variables of base-type integer or float are converted to runs of text (strings) using the formatting rules described below. Float values should only be formatted in the e, E, f, g, G, r or R styles. Variables of base-type duration are treated as floats, representing the duration in seconds. Variables of base-type file are rendered using a control that enables the user to open the file. The control should display the name associated with the file, if any. Variables of base-type uri are rendered using a control that enables the user to open the identified resource, for example, by following a hypertext link in the case of a URL. For variables of single cardinality, the value of the variable is printed. For variables of ordered cardinality, if the attribute index is set, the single value corresponding to the indexed member is printed, otherwise an ordered list of the values within the container is printed, delimited by the string value of the delimiter attribute. For variables of multiple cardinality, a list of the values within the container is printed, delimited by the string value of the delimiter attribute. For variables of record cardinality, if the attribute field is set, the value corresponding to the specified field is printed, otherwise a list of the field names and corresponding field values within the variable is printed, delimited by the string value of the delimiter attribute and with the correspondence between them indicated by the string value of the mappingIndicator attribute.

7.30.1 "id" Characteristic Description

The description of the "id" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.1.

Table 7.30.1 Description of the "id" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name id
Data Type UniqueIdentifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The unique identifier assigned to the 'qti-print-variable' tag. This must be unique otherwise features such as the accessibilty text cannot be supplied as an alternative.

7.30.2 "class" Characteristic Description

The description of the "class" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.2.

Table 7.30.2 Description of the "class" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name class
Data Type StringList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): String (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, it must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various style classes to which the element belongs.

7.30.3 "language" Characteristic Description

The description of the "language" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.3.

Table 7.30.3 Description of the "language" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name language
Data Type Language (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This attribute specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's attributes that contain text. Its value must be a valid [BCP 47] language tag, or the empty string. Setting the attribute to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown.

7.30.4 "label" Characteristic Description

The description of the "label" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.4.

Table 7.30.4 Description of the "label" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name label
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The label attribute represents information for the element that can be used to identify it or its functionality, such as would be appropriate for a tooltip. The value is text.

7.30.5 "baseuri" Characteristic Description

The description of the "baseuri" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.5.

Table 7.30.5 Description of the "baseuri" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name baseuri
Data Type Base (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional URI used to change the base for resolving relative URI for the scope of this object. Particular care needs to be taken when resolving relative URI included as part of an Item Fragment (see Item and Test Fragments in Section 2 for more information).

7.30.6 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.6.

Table 7.30.6 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The outcome variable or template variable must have been defined. The values of response variables cannot be printed directly as their values are implicitly known to the candidate through the interactions they are bound to; if necessary, their values can be assigned to outcomes during response processing and displayed to the candidate as part of a body element visible only in the appropriate feedback states.

7.30.7 "format" Characteristic Description

The description of the "format" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.7.

Table 7.30.7 Description of the "format" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name format
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The format conversion specifier to use when converting numerical values to strings (see Number Formatting Rules in Section 2 for details).

7.30.8 "base" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.8.

Table 7.30.8 Description of the "base" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Default = "10".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The number base to use when converting integer variables to strings with the 'i' conversion type code.

7.30.9 "index" Characteristic Description

The description of the "index" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.9.

Table 7.30.9 Description of the "index" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name index
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The index to use when displaying a variable of ordered cardinality. If a variable of ordered cardinality is to be displayed and index is not set, all the values in the container are displayed.

7.30.10 "power-form" Characteristic Description

The description of the "power-form" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.10.

Table 7.30.10 Description of the "power-form" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name power-form
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If the variable value is a float and powerForm is set to 'false', the variable will be rendered using the 'e' or 'E' format. If the powerform is set to 'true', the form "e+n" is changed to "x 10 to the power n".

7.30.11 "field" Characteristic Description

The description of the "field" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.11.

Table 7.30.11 Description of the "field" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name field
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The field specifier to use when displaying variables of record cardinality.

7.30.12 "delimiter" Characteristic Description

The description of the "delimiter" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.12.

Table 7.30.12 Description of the "delimiter" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name delimiter
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = ";".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The delimiter to use between values when displaying variables of ordered, multiple or record cardinality. ";" is default when delimiter is not declared. Implementations can override this default with personal preferences or locale settings.

7.30.13 "mapping-indicator" Characteristic Description

The description of the "mapping-indicator" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class is given in Table 7.30.13.

Table 7.30.13 Description of the "mapping-indicator" characteristic for the "PrintedVariable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name mapping-indicator
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "=".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The mapping indicator to use between field name and field value when displaying variables of record cardinality. "=" is default when mappingIndicator is not declared. Implementations can override this default with personal preferences or locale settings.

7.31 RadialSIValue Class Description

The data model for the "RadialSIValue" class is shown in Figure 7.31 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.31.

UML diagram of the RadialSIValue class.

Figure 7.31 - RadialSIValue class definitions.

Table 7.31 Description of the "RadialSIValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RadialSIValue
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The container for the information about the increment size for a protractor. The value is in the associated type of SI unit.

7.31.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

The description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialSIValue" class is given in Table 7.31.1.

Table 7.31.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialSIValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name unit
Data Type SIRadialUnitTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { Radian }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This defines the SI unit of radial increment that is used for the protractor.

7.32 RadialUSValue Class Description

The data model for the "RadialUSValue" class is shown in Figure 7.32 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.32.

UML diagram of the RadialUSValue class.

Figure 7.32 - RadialUSValue class definitions.

Table 7.32 Description of the "RadialUSValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RadialUSValue
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The container for the information about the increment size for a protractor. The value is in the associated type of non-SI unit.

7.32.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

The description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialUSValue" class is given in Table 7.32.1.

Table 7.32.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "RadialUSValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name unit
Data Type USRadialUnitTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { Degree | Minute | Second }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This defines the non-SI unit of radial increment that is used for the protractor.

7.33 RandomFloat Class Description

The data model for the "RandomFloat" class is shown in Figure 7.33 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.33.

UML diagram of the RandomFloat class.

Figure 7.33 - RandomFloat class definitions.

Table 7.33 Description of the "RandomFloat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RandomFloat
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expresssion function. Selects a random float from the specified range [min,max].

7.33.1 "min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class is given in Table 7.33.1.

Table 7.33.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min
Data Type FloatOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Double (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The lower bound for the random float generation.

7.33.2 "max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class is given in Table 7.33.2.

Table 7.33.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomFloat" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max
Data Type FloatOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Double (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The upper bound for the random float generation.

7.34 RandomInteger Class Description

The data model for the "RandomInteger" class is shown in Figure 7.34 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.34.

UML diagram of the RandomInteger class.

Figure 7.34 - RandomInteger class definitions.

Table 7.34 Description of the "RandomInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name RandomInteger
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression function. Selects a random integer from the specified range [min,max] satisfying min + step * n for some integer n. For example, with min=2, max=11 and step=3 the values {2,5,8,11} are possible.

7.34.1 "min" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class is given in Table 7.34.1.

Table 7.34.1 Description of the "min" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Default = "0".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The lower bound for the random integer generation.

7.34.2 "max" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class is given in Table 7.34.2.

Table 7.34.2 Description of the "max" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The upper bound for the random integer generation.

7.34.3 "step" Characteristic Description

The description of the "step" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class is given in Table 7.34.3.

Table 7.34.3 Description of the "step" characteristic for the "RandomInteger" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name step
Data Type IntegerOrVariableRef
Value Space The union consists of values of data-type(s): Integer (Primitive-type), VariableString (Derived-type)
Default = "1".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The step value for the random integer generation.

7.35 SILinearValue Class Description

The data model for the "SILinearValue" class is shown in Figure 7.35 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.35.

UML diagram of the SILinearValue class.

Figure 7.35 - SILinearValue class definitions.

Table 7.35 Description of the "SILinearValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SILinearValue
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The container for the information about the increment (length and unit) of a Rule. The value is the length in the associated type of SI unit.

7.35.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

The description of the "unit" characteristic for the "SILinearValue" class is given in Table 7.35.1.

Table 7.35.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "SILinearValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name unit
Data Type SIUnitTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { Millimeter | Centimeter | Meter | Kilometer }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This defines the type of SI unit of length that are permitted for the rule.

7.36 StyleSheet Class Description

The data model for the "StyleSheet" class is shown in Figure 7.36 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.36.

UML diagram of the StyleSheet class.

Figure 7.36 - StyleSheet class definitions.

Table 7.36 Description of the "StyleSheet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StyleSheet
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description Used to associate an external stylesheet with an object such as an assessmentItem, etc. QTI supports CSS 2.1 and CSS 3.0.

7.36.1 "href" Characteristic Description

The description of the "href" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class is given in Table 7.36.1.

Table 7.36.1 Description of the "href" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name href
Data Type AnyURI (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier or location of the external stylesheet.

7.36.2 "type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "type" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class is given in Table 7.36.2.

Table 7.36.2 Description of the "type" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name type
Data Type MimeType
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The type of the external stylesheet.

7.36.3 "media" Characteristic Description

The description of the "media" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class is given in Table 7.36.3.

Table 7.36.3 Description of the "media" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name media
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional media descriptor that describes the media to which this stylesheet applies.

7.36.4 "title" Characteristic Description

The description of the "title" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class is given in Table 7.36.4.

Table 7.36.4 Description of the "title" characteristic for the "StyleSheet" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name title
Data Type NormalizedString (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional title for the stylesheet.

7.37 SupportExtString Class Description

The data model for the "SupportExtString" class is shown in Figure 7.37 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.37.

UML diagram of the SupportExtString class.

Figure 7.37 - SupportExtString class definitions.

Table 7.37 Description of the "SupportExtString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SupportExtString
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The data-type that enables the 'SupportEnum' vocabulary to be extended.

7.37.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "SupportExtString" class is given in Table 7.37.

Table 7.37 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "SupportExtString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "(ext:)[a-zA-Z0-9_\.\-]+".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The regular expression to constrain the structure of the string that MUST be used when creating a new, proprietary, vocabulary term. The term must start with the substring 'ext:'.

7.38 TemplateUniqueIDRef Class Description

The data model for the "TemplateUniqueIDRef" class is shown in Figure 7.38 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.38.

UML diagram of the TemplateUniqueIDRef class.

Figure 7.38 - TemplateUniqueIDRef class definitions.

Table 7.38 Description of the "TemplateUniqueIDRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TemplateUniqueIDRef
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The data-type for the template variable identifiers that are to be available to the PCI.

7.38.1 "template-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateUniqueIDRef" class is given in Table 7.38.1.

Table 7.38.1 Description of the "template-identifier" characteristic for the "TemplateUniqueIDRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name template-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Provides the identifier of a template variable defined in the item whose value should be passed to the PCI module on initialization.

7.39 TestVariables Class Description

The data model for the "TestVariables" class is shown in Figure 7.39 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.39.

UML diagram of the TestVariables class.

Figure 7.39 - TestVariables class definitions.

Table 7.39 Description of the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TestVariables
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression function. This expression, which can only be used in outcomes processing, simultaneously looks up the value of an item variable in a sub-set of the items referred to in a test. Only variables with single cardinality are considered, all NULL values are ignored. The result has cardinality multiple and base-type as specified below.

7.39.1 "section-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.1.

Table 7.39.1 Description of the "section-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name section-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items in the qti-assessment-section with matching identifier are matched. Items in sub-sections are included in this definition.

7.39.2 "include-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.2.

Table 7.39.2 Description of the "include-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name include-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with a matching category are included.

7.39.3 "exclude-category" Characteristic Description

The description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.3.

Table 7.39.3 Description of the "exclude-category" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name exclude-category
Data Type IdentifierList
Value Space The list consist of values of data-type(s): NCName (Primitive-type)
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, only variables from items with no matching category are included.

7.39.4 "variable-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "variable-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.4.

Table 7.39.4 Description of the "variable-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name variable-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the variable to look up in each item. If a test brings together items with different variable naming conventions variable mappings may be used to reduce the complexity of outcomes processing and allow a single test variables expression to be used. Items with no matching variable are ignored.

7.39.5 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.5.

Table 7.39.5 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name weight-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, the defined weight is applied to each variable as described in the definition of weight-identifier for a single variable. The behaviour of this characterisic is only defined if the base-type attribute is float or omitted . When a weighting is specified the result of the expression always has base-type float. Note that this option is incomptable with base-type integer. This restriction ensures that the value of the base-type attribute remains consistent with the resulting container type.

7.39.6 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class is given in Table 7.39.6.

Table 7.39.6 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "TestVariables" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description If specified, matches only variables declared with this base-type. This also becomes the base-type of the result (subject to type promotion through weighting, as described below). If omitted, variables declared with base-type integer or float are matched. The base-type of the result is integer if all matching values have base-type integer, otherwise it is float and integer values are subject to type promotion.

7.40 TimeLimits Class Description

The data model for the "TimeLimits" class is shown in Figure 7.40 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.40.

UML diagram of the TimeLimits class.

Figure 7.40 - TimeLimits class definitions.

Table 7.40 Description of the "TimeLimits" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name TimeLimits
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description In the context of a specific qti-assessment-test an item, or group of items, may be subject to a time constraint. This specification supports both minimum and maximum time constraints. The controlled time for a single item is simply the duration of the item session as defined by the builtin response variable duration. For qti-assessment-sections, qti-test-parts and whole qti-assessment-tests the time limits relate to the durations of all the item sessions plus any other time spent navigating that part of the test. In other words, the time includes time spent in states where no item is being interacted with, such as dedicated navigation screens. The allow-late-submission attribute regulates whether a candidate's response that is beyond the max-time should still be accepted. Minimum times are applicable to qti-assessment-sections and qti-assessment-items only when linear navigation mode is in effect.

7.40.1 "min-time" Characteristic Description

The description of the "min-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class is given in Table 7.40.1.

Table 7.40.1 Description of the "min-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name min-time
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the minimum duration, in seconds, allocated to the test. Minimum times are applicable to qti-assessment-sections and qti-assessment-items only when linear navigation mode is in effect.

7.40.2 "max-time" Characteristic Description

The description of the "max-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class is given in Table 7.40.2.

Table 7.40.2 Description of the "max-time" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name max-time
Data Type NonNegativeDouble
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This is the maximum duration, in seconds, allocated to the test.

7.40.3 "allow-late-submission" Characteristic Description

The description of the "allow-late-submission" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class is given in Table 7.40.3.

Table 7.40.3 Description of the "allow-late-submission" characteristic for the "TimeLimits" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name allow-late-submission
Data Type Boolean (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "false".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description The allow-late-submission attribute regulates whether a candidate's response that is beyond the max-time should still be accepted.

7.41 URL Class Description

The data model for the "URL" class is shown in Figure 7.41 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.41.

UML diagram of the URL class.

Figure 7.41 - URL class definitions.

Table 7.41 Description of the "URL" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name URL
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is the data-type for URLs.

7.42 USLinearValue Class Description

The data model for the "USLinearValue" class is shown in Figure 7.42 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.42.

UML diagram of the USLinearValue class.

Figure 7.42 - USLinearValue class definitions.

Table 7.42 Description of the "USLinearValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name USLinearValue
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The container for the information about the increment (length and unit) of a Rule. The value is the length in the associated type of, non-SI, unit.

7.42.1 "unit" Characteristic Description

The description of the "unit" characteristic for the "USLinearValue" class is given in Table 7.42.1.

Table 7.42.1 Description of the "unit" characteristic for the "USLinearValue" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name unit
Data Type USUnitTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { Inch | Foot | Yard | Mile }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description This defines the type unit of length, non-SI, that are permitted for the rule. This is expressed as an enumerated vocabulary.

7.43 UniqueIdentifier Class Description

The data model for the "UniqueIdentifier" class is shown in Figure 7.43 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.43.

UML diagram of the UniqueIdentifier class.

Figure 7.43 - UniqueIdentifier class definitions.

Table 7.43 Description of the "UniqueIdentifier" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name UniqueIdentifier
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description A unique identifier is simply an identifier that is unique within the scope of the instance. An identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.44 UniqueIdentifierRef Class Description

The data model for the "UniqueIdentifierRef" class is shown in Figure 7.44 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.44.

UML diagram of the UniqueIdentifierRef class.

Figure 7.44 - UniqueIdentifierRef class definitions.

Table 7.44 Description of the "UniqueIdentifierRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name UniqueIdentifierRef
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description A reference to an object that has been declared using the 'UniqueIdentifier' data-type. A unique identifier is simply an identifier that is unique within the scope of the instance. An identifier is a string of characters that must start with a Letter or an underscore ('_') and contain only Letters, underscores, hyphens ('-'), period ('.', a.k.a. full-stop), Digits, CombiningChars and Extenders. Identifiers containing the period character are reserved for use in prefixing, as described in the definition of variable. The character classes Letter, Digit, CombiningChar and Extender are defined in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0 (Second Edition) [XML, 00]. Note particularly that identifiers may not contain the colon (':') character. Identifiers should have no more than 32 characters for compatibility with version 1. They are always compared case-sensitively.

7.45 UseExtensionString Class Description

The data model for the "UseExtensionString" class is shown in Figure 7.45 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.45.

UML diagram of the UseExtensionString class.

Figure 7.45 - UseExtensionString class definitions.

Table 7.45 Description of the "UseExtensionString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name UseExtensionString
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description For rubric blocks the vocabulary for the 'use' characteristic can be extended using the pattern defined in this derived data-type.

7.45.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "UseExtensionString" class is given in Table 7.45.

Table 7.45 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "UseExtensionString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "(ext:)[a-zA-Z0-9_\.\-]+".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The regular expression that defines the permitted string value that can extend the 'use' characteristic vocabulary.

7.46 Value Class Description

The data model for the "Value" class is shown in Figure 7.46 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.46.

UML diagram of the Value class.

Figure 7.46 - Value class definitions.

Table 7.46 Description of the "Value" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Value
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description A class that can represent a single value of any base-type in variable declarations and result reports. The base-type is defined by the 'base-type' attribute of the declaration except in the case of variables with record cardinality.

7.46.1 "field-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "Value" class is given in Table 7.46.1.

Table 7.46.1 Description of the "field-identifier" characteristic for the "Value" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name field-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characterisic is only used for specifying the field identifier for a value that forms part of a record.

7.46.2 "base-type" Characteristic Description

The description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "Value" class is given in Table 7.46.2.

Table 7.46.2 Description of the "base-type" characteristic for the "Value" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name base-type
Data Type BaseTypeEnum
Value Space Enumerated value set of: { boolean | directedPair | duration | file | float | identifier | integer | pair | point | string | uri }
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description This characteristic is only used for specifying the base-type of a value that forms part of a record.

7.47 Variable Class Description

The data model for the "Variable" class is shown in Figure 7.47 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.47.

UML diagram of the Variable class.

Figure 7.47 - Variable class definitions.

Table 7.47 Description of the "Variable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Variable
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description This is a QTI expression function. This expression looks up the value of an item variable that has been declared in a corresponding variable declaration or is one of the built-in variables. The result has the base-type and cardinality declared for the variable subject to the type promotion of weighted outcomes. During outcomes processing, values taken from an individual item session can be looked up by prefixing the name of the item variable with the identifier assigned to the item in the qti-assessment-item-ref, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 you would use a variable instance with identifier Q01.SCORE. In adaptive tests that contain items that are allowed to be replaced (i.e. that have the with-replacement attribute set to "true"), the same item can be instantiated more than once. In order to access the outcome variable values of each instantiation, a number that denotes the instance's place in the sequence of the item's instantiation is inserted between the item variable identifier and the item variable, separated by a period character. For example, to obtain the value of the SCORE variable in the item referred to as Q01 in its second instantiation you would use a variable instance, prefixed by the instantiation sequence number, prefixed by an identifier Q01.2.SCORE. When looking up the value of a response variable it always takes the value assigned to it by the candidate's last submission. Unsubmitted responses are not available during expression evaluation. The value of an item variable taken from an item instantiated multiple times from the same qti-assessment-item-ref (through the use of selection with-replacement) is taken from the last instance submitted if submission is simultaneous, otherwise it is undefined.

7.47.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class is given in Table 7.47.1.

Table 7.47.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the item variable that has been declared in a corresponding variable declaration or of the built-in variables.

7.47.2 "weight-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class is given in Table 7.47.2.

Table 7.47.2 Description of the "weight-identifier" characteristic for the "Variable" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name weight-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [0..1]
Description An optional weighting to be applied to the value of the variable. Weights are defined only in the test context (and hence only in outcomes processing) and only when the item identifier prefixing technique (see above) is being used to look up the value of an item variable. The weight identifier refers to a weight definition in the corresponding qti-assessment-item-ref. If no matching definition is found the weight is assumed to be 1.0. Weights only apply to item variables with base-types integer and float. If the item variable is of any other type the weight is ignored. All weights are treated as having base-type float and the resulting value is obtained by multiplying the variable's value by the associated weight. When applying a weight to the value of a variable with base-type integer the value is subject to type promotion and the result of the expression has base-type float.

7.48 VariableMapping Class Description

The data model for the "VariableMapping" class is shown in Figure 7.48 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.48.

UML diagram of the VariableMapping class.

Figure 7.48 - VariableMapping class definitions.

Table 7.48 Description of the "VariableMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name VariableMapping
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description Variable mappings allow outcome variables declared with the name source-identifier in the corresponding item to be treated as if they were declared with the name target-identifier during outcome processing. Use of variable mappings allows more control over the way outcomes are aggregated when using test variables.

7.48.1 "source-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "source-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class is given in Table 7.48.1.

Table 7.48.1 Description of the "source-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name source-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the outcome variable to identify the name of the source identifier during outcome processing variable mapping.

7.48.2 "target-identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "target-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class is given in Table 7.48.2.

Table 7.48.2 Description of the "target-identifier" characteristic for the "VariableMapping" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name target-identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description The identifier of the outcome variable to identify the name of the target identifier during outcome processing variable mapping.

7.49 VariableString Class Description

The data model for the "VariableString" class is shown in Figure 7.49 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.49.

UML diagram of the VariableString class.

Figure 7.49 - VariableString class definitions.

Table 7.49 Description of the "VariableString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name VariableString
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents There are no parent classes.
Derived Classes The set of derived classes are:
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of children attributes are:
Description The data-type for 'VariableRefs' used in list based upon VariableRefs with anything other than a string.

7.49.1 "pattern" Attribute Description

The description of the "pattern" attribute for the "VariableString" class is given in Table 7.49.

Table 7.49 Description of the "pattern" attribute for the "VariableString" class.
Descriptor Definition
Attribute Name pattern
Data Type String (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Default = "[\i-[:]][\c-[:]]*".
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Establishes the constraint that the content must be a valid string.

7.50 Weight Class Description

The data model for the "Weight" class is shown in Figure 7.50 and the accompanying definition in Table 7.50.

UML diagram of the Weight class.

Figure 7.50 - Weight class definitions.

Table 7.50 Description of the "Weight" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name Weight
Class Type Container [ DerivedType ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics The set of characteristics are:
Children There are no children.
Description The contribution of an individual item score to an overall test score typically varies from test to test. The score of the item is said to be weighted. Weights are defined as part of each reference to an item (qti-assessment-item-ref) within a test.

7.50.1 "identifier" Characteristic Description

The description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Weight" class is given in Table 7.50.1.

Table 7.50.1 Description of the "identifier" characteristic for the "Weight" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name identifier
Data Type Identifier
Value Space Container [ DerivedType ]
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description An item can have any number of weights, each one is given an identifier that is used to refer to the weight in outcomes processing (see the variable and test variables definitions).

7.50.2 "value" Characteristic Description

The description of the "value" characteristic for the "Weight" class is given in Table 7.50.2.

Table 7.50.2 Description of the "value" characteristic for the "Weight" class.
Descriptor Definition
Characteristic Name value
Data Type Double (Primitive-type)
Value Space See Appendix A1.3.
Scope Local ("-")
Multiplicity [1]
Description Weights are floating point values. Weights can be applied to outcome variables of base-type float or integer. The weight is applied at the time the variable's value is evaluated during outcomes processing. The result is always treated as having base-type float even if the variable itself was declared as being of base-type integer.

toc | top

8. Enumerated Vocabulary Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the enumerated vocabularies used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.4.

8.1 ARIAAutoCompleteEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-autocomplete ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIAAutoCompleteEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.1 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.1.

UML diagram of the ARIAAutoCompleteEnum class.

Figure 8.1 - ARIAAutoCompleteEnum class definitions.

Table 8.1 Description of the "ARIAAutoCompleteEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
both When a user is providing input, an element containing a collection of values that could complete the provided input may be displayed. If displayed, one value in the collection is automatically selected, and the text needed to complete the automatically selected value appears after the caret in the input.
inline When a user is providing input, text suggesting one way to complete the provided input may be dynamically inserted after the caret.
list When a user is providing input, an element containing a collection of values that could complete the provided input may be displayed.
none When a user is providing input, an automatic suggestion that attempts to predict how the user intends to complete the input is not displayed. This is the default value.

8.2 ARIACheckedEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-checked ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIACheckedEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.2 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.2.

UML diagram of the ARIACheckedEnum class.

Figure 8.2 - ARIACheckedEnum class definitions.

Table 8.2 Description of the "ARIACheckedEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
false The element supports being checked but is not currently checked.
mixed Indicates a mixed mode value for a tri-state checkbox or menuitem checkbox.
true The element is checked.
undefined The element does not support being checked. This is the default value.

8.3 ARIACurrentEnum Vocabulary Description

This is the permitted vocabulary for the 'aria-current' characteristic. The 'aria-current' attribute is used when an element within a set of related elements is visually styled to indicate it is the current item in the set. The data model for the "ARIACurrentEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.3 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.3.

UML diagram of the ARIACurrentEnum class.

Figure 8.3 - ARIACurrentEnum class definitions.

Table 8.3 Description of the "ARIACurrentEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
date Used to indicate the current date within a calendar.
false Used to represent this is NOT the current item within a set.
location Used to indicate the image that is visually highlighted as the current component of a flow chart.
page Used to indicate a link within a set of pagination links, where the link is visually styled to represent the currently-displayed page.
step Used to indicate a link within a step indicator for a step-based process, where the link is visually styled to represent the current step.
time Used to indicate the current time within a timetable.
true Used to represent the current item within a set.
undefined Denotes that the value for this attribute is undefined.

8.4 ARIAExpandedEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-expanded ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIAExpandedEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.4 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.4.

UML diagram of the ARIAExpandedEnum class.

Figure 8.4 - ARIAExpandedEnum class definitions.

Table 8.4 Description of the "ARIAExpandedEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
false The element, or another grouping element it controls, is collapsed.
true The element, or another grouping element it controls, is expanded.
undefined The element, or another grouping element it controls, is neither expandable nor collapsible; all its child elements are shown or there are no child elements.

8.5 ARIAInvalidEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-invalid ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIAInvalidEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.5 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.5.

UML diagram of the ARIAInvalidEnum class.

Figure 8.5 - ARIAInvalidEnum class definitions.

Table 8.5 Description of the "ARIAInvalidEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
false There are no detected errors in the value.
grammar A grammatical error was detected.
spelling A spelling error was detected.
true The value entered by the user has failed validation.

8.6 ARIALiveValueEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-live ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIALiveValueEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.6 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.6.

UML diagram of the ARIALiveValueEnum class.

Figure 8.6 - ARIALiveValueEnum class definitions.

Table 8.6 Description of the "ARIALiveValueEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
assertive Denotes that the content is assertive in nature.
off Denotes that the ARIA live feature is off (the default setting).
polite Denotes that the content is polite in nature.

8.7 ARIAOrientationValueEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of permitted values that indicate the orientation of the associated element. The data model for the "ARIAOrientationValueEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.7 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.7.

UML diagram of the ARIAOrientationValueEnum class.

Figure 8.7 - ARIAOrientationValueEnum class definitions.

Table 8.7 Description of the "ARIAOrientationValueEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
horizontal Denotes that the orientation of the associated element is horizontal.
vertical Denotes that the orientation of the associated element is vertical.

8.8 ARIAPressedEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-pressed ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIAPressedEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.8 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.8.

UML diagram of the ARIAPressedEnum class.

Figure 8.8 - ARIAPressedEnum class definitions.

Table 8.8 Description of the "ARIAPressedEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
false The element supports being pressed but is not currently pressed.
mixed Indicates a mixed mode value for a tri-state toggle button.
true The element is pressed.
undefined The element does not support being pressed.

8.9 ARIARoleValue Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the ARIA roles that have been identified as applicable to QTI XML markup. The data model for the "ARIARoleValue" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.9 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.9.

UML diagram of the ARIARoleValue class.

Figure 8.9 - ARIARoleValue class definitions.

Table 8.9 Description of the "ARIARoleValue" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
alert Identifies the role as a type of live region with important, and usually time-sensitive, information. See related 'alertdialog' and 'status'.
alertdialog Identifies the role as a type of dialog that contains an alert message, where initial focus goes to an element within the dialog. See related alert and dialog.
application Identifies the role as a structure containing one or more focusable elements requiring user input, such as keyboard or gesture events, that do not follow a standard interaction pattern supported by a widget role.
article Identifies the role as a section of a page that consists of a composition that forms an independent part of a document, page or site.
banner Identifies the role as a region that contains mostly site-oriented content, rather than page-specific content.
button Identifies the role as an input that allows for user-triggered actions when clicked or pressed. See related link.
checkbox Identifies the role as a checkable input that has three possible values: true, false or mixed.
code The primary purpose of the code role is to inform assistive technologies that the content is computer code and thus may require special presentation, in particular with respect to synthesized speech. Added in ARIA 1.2.
columnheader Identifies the role as a cell containing header information for a column.
combobox Identifies the role as a composite widget containing a single-line textbox and another element, such as a listbox or grid, that can dynamically pop up to help the user set the value of the textbox.
complementary Identifies the role as a supporting section of the document, designed to be complementary to the main content at a similar level in the DOM hierarchy, but remains meaningful when separated from the main content.
contentinfo Identifies the role as a large perceivable region that contains information about the parent document.
definition Identifies the role as a definition of a term or concept.
deletion This role identifies an element that contains content that is marked as removed or content that is being suggested for removal. See related 'insertion'. Added in ARIA 1.2.
dialog Identifies the role as a dialog in a descendant window of the primary window of a web application. For HTML pages, the primary application window is the entire web document i.e. the body element.
document Identifies the role as a region containing related information that is declared as document content, as opposed to a web application.
emphasis This role identifies one or more emphasized characters. See related 'strong' role. The purpose of the emphasis role is to stress or emphasize content. It is not for communicating changes in typographical presentation that do not impact the meaning of the content. Added in ARIA 1.2.
figure This role identifies a perceivable section of content that typically contains a graphical document, images, code snippets, or example text. The parts of a figure MAY be user-navigable. Added in ARIA 1.1.
form Identifies the role as a landmark region that contains a collection of items and objects that, as a whole, combine to create a form. See related 'search'.
generic This role identifies a nameless container element that has no semantic meaning on its own. The generic role is intended for use as the implicit role of generic elements in host languages (such as HTML div or span), so is primarily for implementors of user agents. Authors SHOULD NOT use this role in content. Added in ARIA 1.2.
grid Identifies the role as a composite widget containing a collection of one or more rows with one or more cells where some or all cells in the grid are focusable by using methods of two-dimensional navigation, such as directional arrow keys.
gridcell Identifies the role as a cell in a 'grid' or 'treegrid'.
group Identifies the role as a set of user interface objects which are not intended to be included in a page summary or table of contents by assistive technologies.
heading Identifies the role as a heading for a section of the page.
img Identifies the role as a container for a collection of elements that form an image.
insertion This role identifies and element that contains content that is marked as added or content that is being suggested for addition. See related 'deletion' role. Added in ARIA 1.2.
link Identifies the role as an interactive reference to an internal or external resource that, when activated, causes the user agent to navigate to that resource. See related 'button'.
list Identifies the role as a group of non-interactive list items. See related 'listbox'.
listbox Identifies the role as a widget that allows the user to select one or more items from a list of choices. See related 'list'.
listitem Identifies the role as a single item in a list or directory.
log Identifies the role as a type of live region where new information is added in meaningful order and old information may disappear.
main Identifies the role as a main content of a document.
marquee Identifies the role as a type of live region where non-essential information changes frequently. See related 'log'.
math Identifies the role as content that represents a mathematical expression.
menu Identifies the role as a type of widget that offers a list of choices to the user.
menubar Identifies the role as a presentation of menu that usually remains visible and is usually presented horizontally.
menuitem Identifies the role as an option in a set of choices contained by a menu or menubar.
menuitemcheckbox Identifies the role as a menuitem with a checkable state whose possible values are true, false or mixed.
menuitemradio Identifies the role as a checkable menuitem in a set of elements with the same role, only one of which can be checked at a time.
meter This role identifies an element that represents a scalar measurement within a known range, or a fractional value. See related 'progressbar' role. Added in ARIA 1.2.
navigation Identifies the role as a collection of navigational elements (usually links) for navigating the document or related documents.
note Identifies the role as a section whose content is parenthetic or ancillary to the main content of the resource.
option Identifies the role as a selectable item in a select list.
presentation Identifies the role as an element whose implicit native role semantics will not be mapped to the accessibility API.
progressbar Identifies the role as an element that displays the progress status for tasks that take a long time.
radio Identifies the role as a checkable input in a group of radio roles, only one of which can be checked at a time.
radiogroup Identifies the role as a group of radio buttons.
region Identifies the role as a large perceivable section of a web page or document, that is important enough to be included in a page summary or table of contents, for example, an area of the page containing live sporting event statistics.
row Identifies the role as a row of cells in a grid.
rowgroup Identifies the role as a group containing one or more row elements in a grid.
rowheader Identifies the role as a cell containing header information for a row in a grid.
scrollbar Identifies the role as a graphical object that controls the scrolling of content within a viewing area, regardless of whether the content is fully displayed within the viewing area.
search Identifies the role as a landmark region that contains a collection of items and objects that, as a whole, combine to create a search facility. See related 'form' and 'searchbox'.
searchbox Identifies the role as a type of textbox intended for specifying search criteria. See related 'textbox' and 'search' roles. Added in ARIA 1.1.
separator Identifies the role as a divider that separates and distinguishes sections of content or groups of menuitems.
slider Identifies the role as a user input where the user selects a value from within a given range.
spinbutton Identifies the role as a form of range that expects the user to select from among discrete choices.
status Identifies the role as a container whose content is advisory information for the user but is not important enough to justify an alert, often but not necessarily presented as a status bar.
strong This role is used to identify content that is important, serious, or urgent. See related 'emphasis' role. Added in ARIA 1.2.
subscript This role identifies one or more subscripted characters. This role is intended to be used only to mark up typographical conventions that have specific meanings; not for typographical presentation for presentation's sake. See related 'superscript'. Added in ARIA 1.2.
superscript This role identifies one or more superscripted characters. This role is intended to be used only to mark up typographical conventions that have specific meanings; not for typographical presentation for presentation's sake. See related 'subscript'. Added in ARIA 1.2.
switch Identifies the role as a type of checkbox that represents on/off values, as opposed to checked/unchecked values. See related 'checkbox' role. Added in ARIA 1.1.
tab Identifies the role as a grouping label providing a mechanism for selecting the tab content that is to be rendered to the user.
tablist Identifies the role as a list of tab elements, which are references to tabpanel elements.
tabpanel Identifies the role as a container for the resources associated with a tab, where each tab is contained in a tablist.
term This role is used to explicitly identify a word or phrase for which a definition has been provided by the author or is expected to be provided by the user. Added in ARIA 1.1.
textbox Identifies the role as an input that allows free-form text as its value.
time A role that identifies an element that represents a specific point in time. Added in ARIA 1.2.
timer Identifies the role as a type of live region containing a numerical counter which indicates an amount of elapsed time from a start point, or the time remaining until an end point.
toolbar Identifies the role as a collection of commonly used function buttons or controls represented in compact visual form.
tooltip Identifies the role as a contextual popup that displays a description for an element.
tree Identifies the role as a type of list that may contain sub-level nested groups that can be collapsed and expanded.
treegrid Identifies the role as a grid whose rows can be expanded and collapsed in the same manner as for a tree.
treeitem Identifies the role as an option item of a tree. This is an element within a tree that may be expanded or collapsed if it contains a sub-level group of tree item elements

8.10 ARIASelectedEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-selected ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIASelectedEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.10 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.10.

UML diagram of the ARIASelectedEnum class.

Figure 8.10 - ARIASelectedEnum class definitions.

Table 8.10 Description of the "ARIASelectedEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
false The selectable element is not selected.
true The selectable element is selected.
undefined The element is not selectable.

8.11 ARIASortEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the aria-sort ARIA annotations. The data model for the "ARIASortEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.11 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.11.

UML diagram of the ARIASortEnum class.

Figure 8.11 - ARIASortEnum class definitions.

Table 8.11 Description of the "ARIASortEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
ascending Items are sorted in ascending order.
descending Items are sorted in descending order.
none There is no defined sort applied.
other A sort algorithm other than ascending or descending has been applied.

8.12 AlignEnum Vocabulary Description

Provides the permitted set of values for the 'align' attribute in the HTML markup i.e. how the associated object is horizontally aligned on the page. The data model for the "AlignEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.12 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.12.

UML diagram of the AlignEnum class.

Figure 8.12 - AlignEnum class definitions.

Table 8.12 Description of the "AlignEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
center Center horizontal alignment.
char Set the horizontal alignment to the '.' character.
justify Justified horizontal alignment i.e. create equal margins left and right.
left Left horizontal alignment.
right Right horizontal alignment.

8.13 BaseTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

A base-type is simply a description of a set of atomic values (atomic to this specification). Note that several of the base-types used to define the runtime data model have identical definitions to those of the basic data types used to define the values for attributes in the specification itself. The use of an enumeration to define the set of base-types used in the runtime model, as opposed to the use of classes with similar names, is designed to help distinguish between these two distinct levels of modelling. The data model for the "BaseTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.13 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.13.

UML diagram of the BaseTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.13 - BaseTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.13 Description of the "BaseTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
boolean The set of boolean values is the same as the set of values defined by the boolean primitiveType.
directedPair A directedPair value represents a pair of identifiers corresponding to a directed association between two objects. The two identifiers correspond to the source and destination objects.
duration A duration value specifies a distance (in time) between two time points. In other words, a time period as defined by [ISO 8601], but represented as a single float that records time in seconds. Durations may have a fractional part. Durations are represented using the 'xsd:double' datatype rather than 'xsd:dateTime' for convenience and backward compatibility.
file A file value is any sequence of octets (bytes) qualified by a content-type and an optional filename given to the file (for example, by the candidate when uploading it as part of an interaction). The content type of the file is one of the MIME types defined by [RFC 2045].
float The set of float values is the same as the set of values defined by the float primitiveType.
identifier The set of identifier values is the same as the set of values defined by the identifier class.
integer The set of integer values is the same as the set of values defined by the integer primitiveType.
pair A pair value represents a pair of identifiers corresponding to an association between two objects. The association is undirected so (A,B) and (B,A) are equivalent.
point A point value represents an integer tuple corresponding to a graphic point. The two integers correspond to the horizontal (x-axis) and vertical (y-axis) positions respectively. The up/down and left/right senses of the axes are context dependent.
string The set of string values is the same as the set of values defined by the string primitiveType.
uri A URI value is a Uniform Resource Identifier as defined by [URI, 98].

8.14 CORSSettingsEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the Cross Origin Resource Sharing ARIA settings. The data model for the "CORSSettingsEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.14 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.14.

UML diagram of the CORSSettingsEnum class.

Figure 8.14 - CORSSettingsEnum class definitions.

Table 8.14 Description of the "CORSSettingsEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
anonymous Denotes that CORS requests for this element will not have the credentials flag set.
use-credentials Denotes that CORS requests for this element will have the credentials flag set i.e. the request will provide credentials.

8.15 CalculatorTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted values for the type of calculator that can be supplied as companion materials. The data model for the "CalculatorTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.15 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.15.

UML diagram of the CalculatorTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.15 - CalculatorTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.15 Description of the "CalculatorTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
basic The basic calculator.
graphing The graphing calculator.
scientific The scientific calculator.
standard The standard calculator.

8.16 CardinalityEnum Vocabulary Description

Contains the permitted set of cardinality values. The cardinality is used in the context of the associated variable. The data model for the "CardinalityEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.16 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.16.

UML diagram of the CardinalityEnum class.

Figure 8.16 - CardinalityEnum class definitions.

Table 8.16 Description of the "CardinalityEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
multiple A multi-valued expression (or variable) is called a container. A container contains a list of values, this list may be empty in which case it is treated as NULL. All the values in a multiple or ordered container are drawn from the same value set, however, containers may contain multiple occurrences of the same value. In other words, [A,B,B,C] is an acceptable value for a container.
ordered A container with cardinality multiple and value [A,B,C] is equivalent to a similar one with value [C,B,A] whereas these two values would be considered distinct for containers with cardinality ordered.
record The record container type is a special container that contains a set of independent values each identified by its own identifier and having its own base-type. This specification does not make use of the record type directly however it is provided to enable customInteractions to manipulate more complex responses and customOperators to return more complex values, in addition to the use for detailed information about numeric responses described in the stringInteraction abstract class.
single A cardinality of single i.e. a single value.

8.17 DIR Vocabulary Description

To define the direction of the text layout as part of the Bi-direction (bidi) element in HTML. The data model for the "DIR" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.17 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.17.

UML diagram of the DIR class.

Figure 8.17 - DIR class definitions.

Table 8.17 Description of the "DIR" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
auto Allow the rendering system to determine the text layout direction.
ltr A left-to-right text diection layout.
rtl A right-to-left text diection layout.

8.18 ExternalScoredEnum Vocabulary Description

Identifies the set of modes for the exernal scoring of the Item. The data model for the "ExternalScoredEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.18 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.18.

UML diagram of the ExternalScoredEnum class.

Figure 8.18 - ExternalScoredEnum class definitions.

Table 8.18 Description of the "ExternalScoredEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
externalMachine An external scoring system will be used to score the Item.
human A human must score the Item.

8.19 KindValueEnum Vocabulary Description

This is the permitted set of values for the 'kind' attribute on the HTML5 'track' tag. The data model for the "KindValueEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.19 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.19.

UML diagram of the KindValueEnum class.

Figure 8.19 - KindValueEnum class definitions.

Table 8.19 Description of the "KindValueEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
captions The track defines translation of dialogue and sound effects (suitable for deaf users).
chapters The track defines chapter titles (suitable for navigating the media resource).
descriptions The track defines a textual description of the video content (suitable for blind users).
metadata The track defines content used by scripts. Not visible for the user.
subtitles The track defines subtitles, used to display subtitles in a video.

8.20 MathConstantsEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of mathematical constants available to the mathematical expressions. The data model for the "MathConstantsEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.20 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.20.

UML diagram of the MathConstantsEnum class.

Figure 8.20 - MathConstantsEnum class definitions.

Table 8.20 Description of the "MathConstantsEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
e The mathematical constant 'e'.
pi The mathematical constant Pi.

8.21 MathOperatorNameEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of permitted names for the mathOperator expression. The data model for the "MathOperatorNameEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.21 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.21.

UML diagram of the MathOperatorNameEnum class.

Figure 8.21 - MathOperatorNameEnum class definitions.

Table 8.21 Description of the "MathOperatorNameEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
abs The absolute value of the argument. If the argument is 0 or -0, the result is 0. If the argument is INF or -INF, the result is INF. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL.
acos The inverse trigonometric cosine of the argument. The returned value is in the range 0 to Pi. If the absolute value of the argument is greater than 1, the result is NULL.
acot The inverse trigonometric cotangent of the argument. The returned value is in the range -Pi/2 to Pi/2.
acsc The inverse trigonometric cosecant of the argument. The returned value is in the range -Pi/2 to Pi/2. If the absolute value of the argument is less than 1, the result is NULL.
asec The inverse trigonometric secant of the argument. The returned value is in the range 0 to Pi. If the absolute value of the argument is less than 1, the result is NULL.
asin The inverse trigonometric sine of the argument. The returned value is in the range -Pi/2 to Pi/2. If the absolute value of the argument is greater than 1, the result is NULL. If the argument is zero, the result is 0.
atan The inverse trigonometric tangent of the argument. The returned value is in the range -Pi/2 to Pi/2. If the argument is zero, the result is 0.
atan2 The 2-argument inverse trigonometric tangent obtained from the two arguments. The returned value is in the range -Pi to Pi.
ceil The returned value is the smallest value greater than the argument, which is equal to an integer. If the argument is an integer, the result is that integer value. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, then the result is INF. If the argument is -INF, then the result is -INF.
cos The trigonometric cosine of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
cosh The hyperbolic cosine of the argument. If the argument is 0, the result is a 1.0. If the argument is INF or -INF, the result is INF.
cot The trigonometric cotangent (1/tan) of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
coth The hyperbolic cotangent (1/tanh) of the argument.
csc The trigonometric cosecant (1/sin) of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
csch The hyperbolic cosecant (1/sinh) of the argument.
exp The exponential function evaluated at the numerical value of the argument. If the argument is NaN, the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, the result is INF. If the argument is -INF, the result is 0.
floor The returned value is the greatest value smaller than the argument, which is equal to an integer. If the argument is an integer, the result is that integer value. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, then the result is INF. If the argument is -INF, then the result is -INF.
ln The natural logarithm of the argument. If the argument is less than zero, the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, the result is INF. If the argument is 0 or -0, the result is -INF.
log The logarithm to base 10 (log10) of the argument. If the argument is less than zero, the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, the result is INF. If the argument is 0 or -0, the result is -INF.
sec The trigonometric secant (1/cos) of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
sech The hyperbolic secant (1/cosh) of the argument.
signum The signum function of the argument; it returns an integer value: zero if the argument is zero, 1 if the argument is greater than zero, -1 if the argument is less than zero. If the argument is 0 or -0, the result is the same as the argument. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL.
sin The trigonometric sine of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
sinh The hyperbolic sine of the argument. If the argument is infinite, the result is an infinity with the same sign as the argument. If the argument is zero, the result is a 0.
tan The trigonometric tangent of the argument, which must be a numerical value in radians.
tanh The hyperbolic tangent of the argument. If the argument is zero, the result is a zero with the same sign as the argument. If the argument is INF, the result is 1.0. If the argument is -INF, the result is -1.0.
toDegrees The returned value is the result of converting the argument, which is a numerical value in radians, to degrees. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, then the result is INF. If the argument is -INF, then the result is -INF.
toRadians The returned value is the result of converting the argument, which is a numerical value in degrees, to radians. If the argument is NaN, then the result is NULL. If the argument is INF, then the result is INF. If the argument is -INF, then the result is -INF.

8.22 NavigationModeEnum Vocabulary Description

The navigation mode determines the general paths that the candidate may take throught the test. The data model for the "NavigationModeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.22 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.22.

UML diagram of the NavigationModeEnum class.

Figure 8.22 - NavigationModeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.22 Description of the "NavigationModeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
linear A qti-test-part in linear mode restricts the candidate to attempt each item in turn
nonlinear A qti-test-part in linear mode allows the candidate to an item in any order.

8.23 OrientationEnum Vocabulary Description

The orientation attribute provides a hint to rendering systems that the associated structures have an inherent vertical or horizontal interpretation. The data model for the "OrientationEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.23 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.23.

UML diagram of the OrientationEnum class.

Figure 8.23 - OrientationEnum class definitions.

Table 8.23 Description of the "OrientationEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
horizontal A horizontal orientation of the associated structures.
vertical A vertical orientation of the associated structures.

8.24 ParamTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The type of parameters that may be associated with the HTML object. The data model for the "ParamTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.24 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.24.

UML diagram of the ParamTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.24 - ParamTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.24 Description of the "ParamTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
DATA The parameter is a data value.
REF The parameter is a reference URI to a file.

8.25 PreLoadValueEnum Vocabulary Description

This is the permitted set of values for the 'preload' attribute on the HTML5 'audio' and 'video' tags. The data model for the "PreLoadValueEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.25 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.25.

UML diagram of the PreLoadValueEnum class.

Figure 8.25 - PreLoadValueEnum class definitions.

Table 8.25 Description of the "PreLoadValueEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
auto The browser should load the entire audio file when the page loads.
metadata The browser should load only metadata when the page loads.
none The browser should NOT load the audio file when the page loads.

8.26 RoundingModeEnum Vocabulary Description

Definition of the rounding modes to be used on numeric calculations. The data model for the "RoundingModeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.26 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.26.

UML diagram of the RoundingModeEnum class.

Figure 8.26 - RoundingModeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.26 Description of the "RoundingModeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
decimalPlaces Use a number of decimal places.
significantFigures The number of significant decimal places.

8.27 SIRadialUnitTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted values for the SI radial units. The data model for the "SIRadialUnitTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.27 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.27.

UML diagram of the SIRadialUnitTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.27 - SIRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.27 Description of the "SIRadialUnitTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
Radian This is a radial resolution of a radian.

8.28 SIUnitTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted values for the SI length units. The data model for the "SIUnitTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.28 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.28.

UML diagram of the SIUnitTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.28 - SIUnitTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.28 Description of the "SIUnitTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
Centimeter This is a linear resolution of a centimeter.
Kilometer This is a linear resolution of a kilometer.
Meter This is a linear resolution of a meter.
Millimeter This is a linear resolution of a millimeter.

8.29 ShapeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for the shape of the associated region. A value of a shape is always accompanied by coordinates (see coords and an associated image which provides a context for interpreting them). The data model for the "ShapeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.29 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.29.

UML diagram of the ShapeEnum class.

Figure 8.29 - ShapeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.29 Description of the "ShapeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
circle The shape is a circle. The associated integer coords are: center-x, center-y, radius. When the radius value is a percentage value, user agents should calculate the final radius value based on the associated object's width and height. The radius should be the smaller value of the two.
default The default shape refers to the entire area of the associated image.
ellipse The shape is an ellipse. This value is deprecated but is included for backwards compatibility with QTIv1.x. Systems should use circle or poly shapes instead.
poly The shape is a polygon i.e. a many sided object. The associated integer coords are: x1, y1, x2, y2, ..., xN, yN (the first x and y coordinate pair and the last should be the same to close the polygon. When these coordinate values are not the same, user agents should infer an additional coordinate pair to close the polygon).
rect The shape is a rectangle. The associated integer coords are: left-x, top-y, right-x, bottom-y.

8.30 ShowHideEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of values for whether or not the associated object should be displayed or hidden. The data model for the "ShowHideEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.30 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.30.

UML diagram of the ShowHideEnum class.

Figure 8.30 - ShowHideEnum class definitions.

Table 8.30 Description of the "ShowHideEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
hide Denotes that the object is originally displayed and hidden depending on the associated trigger condition.
show Denotes that the object is originally hidden and displayed depending on the associated trigger condition.

8.31 StatsOperatorNameEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of permitted names for the statsOperator expression. The data model for the "StatsOperatorNameEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.31 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.31.

UML diagram of the StatsOperatorNameEnum class.

Figure 8.31 - StatsOperatorNameEnum class definitions.

Table 8.31 Description of the "StatsOperatorNameEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
mean The arithmetic mean of the argument, which must be a container of numerical base type, which contains a sample of observations.
popSD The standard deviation of the argument, which must be a container of numerical base type with containerSize greater than 1.
popVariance The variance of the argument, which must be a container of numerical base type with containerSize greater than 1
sampleSD The standard deviation of the argument, which must be a container of numerical base type, with containerSize greater than 1, containing a sample of observations.
sampleVariance The variance of the argument, which must be a container of numerical base type, with containerSize greater than 1, containing a sample of observations.

8.32 SubmissionModeEnum Vocabulary Description

The submission mode determines when the candidate's responses are submitted for response processing. The data model for the "SubmissionModeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.32 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.32.

UML diagram of the SubmissionModeEnum class.

Figure 8.32 - SubmissionModeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.32 Description of the "SubmissionModeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
individual A qti-test-part in individual mode requires the candidate to submit their responses on an item-by-item basis.
simultaneous In simultaneous mode the candidate's responses are all submitted together at the end of the testPart.

8.33 SupportEnum Vocabulary Description

This is the enumerated vocabulary that is used to identify the type of support to be enabled by the alternative accessibility content defined in the associated card. The data model for the "SupportEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.33 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.33.

UML diagram of the SupportEnum class.

Figure 8.33 - SupportEnum class definitions.

Table 8.33 Description of the "SupportEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
additional-directions The alternative content is to be supplied for additional directions.
audio-description The alternative content is to be supplied for audio description i.e. narration has been added to the soundtrack to describe important visual details that cannot be understood from the main soundtrack alone.
braille The alternative content is to be supplied for braille readers.
glossary-on-screen The alternative content is to be supplied for the on-screen glossary.
high-contrast The alternative content is to be supplied for high contrast i.e. a resource offering an alternative visual version of another resource, with visual presentation of text and images of text that has a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1, or, for larger text, a contrast ratio of at least 3:1.
keyboard-directions The alternative content is to be supplied for the keyboard directions.
keyword-translation The alternative content is to be supplied for keyword translation.
linguistic-guidance The alternative content is to be supplied for lingusitic guidance.
long-description The alternative content is to be supplied to replace a long description.
sign-language The alternative content is to be supplied for sign language.
simplified-graphics The alternative content is to be supplied for providing simplified graphical descriptions.
simplified-language-portions The alternative content is to be supplied for simplified language.
spoken The alternative content is to be supplied for spoken content.
tactile The alternative content is to be supplied to replace the tactile content.
transcript The alternative content is to be supplied for transcripts i.e. a written, typewritten, or printed copy; something transcribed or made by transcribing.

8.34 SuppressTTSEnum Vocabulary Description

This is the permitted set of values for the 'data-qti-suppress-tts' attribute which is used to to instruct the delivery/presentation system on whether, or not, the associated content should be read out loud to the candidate. The data model for the "SuppressTTSEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.34 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.34.

UML diagram of the SuppressTTSEnum class.

Figure 8.34 - SuppressTTSEnum class definitions.

Table 8.34 Description of the "SuppressTTSEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
all The TTS suppression is to be applied to ALL devices.
computer-read-aloud The TTS suppression is to be applied to computer read aloud devices.
screen-reader The TTS suppression is to be applied to screen reader devices.

8.35 TableCellScopeEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of permitted values for the scope of a Table Cell. The data model for the "TableCellScopeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.35 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.35.

UML diagram of the TableCellScopeEnum class.

Figure 8.35 - TableCellScopeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.35 Description of the "TableCellScopeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
col The scope is the column.
colgroup The scope is the column group.
row The scope is the row.
rowgroup The scope is the row group.

8.36 TestFeedbackAccessEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted set of values for defining the time at which the test feedback to the candidate. The data model for the "TestFeedbackAccessEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.36 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.36.

UML diagram of the TestFeedbackAccessEnum class.

Figure 8.36 - TestFeedbackAccessEnum class definitions.

Table 8.36 Description of the "TestFeedbackAccessEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
atEnd Present the test feedback at the end of the test.
during Present the test feedback during the test.

8.37 TextFormatEnum Vocabulary Description

The set of permitted values to control the format of the text entered by the candidate. The data model for the "TextFormatEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.37 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.37.

UML diagram of the TextFormatEnum class.

Figure 8.37 - TextFormatEnum class definitions.

Table 8.37 Description of the "TextFormatEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
plain Indicates that the text to be entered by the candidate is plain text. This format is suitable for short unstructured responses. Delivery engines should preserve white-space characters in candidate input except where a response consists only of white-space characters, in which case it should be treated as an empty string (NULL).
preformatted Indicates that the text to be entered by the candidate is pre-formatted and should be rendered in a way consistent with the definition of pre in [XHTML, 10]. Delivery engines must preserve white-space characters except where a response consists only of white-space characters, in which case it should be treated as an empty string (NULL).
xhtml Indicates that the text to be entered by the candidate is structured text. The value of the response variable is text marked up in XHTML. The delivery engine should present an interface suitable for capturing structured text, this might be plain typed text interpreted with a set of simple text markup conventions such as those used in wiki page editors or a complete WYSIWYG editor.

8.38 ToleranceModeEnum Vocabulary Description

The tolerance mode determines whether the comparison is done exactly, using an absolute range or a relative range. The data model for the "ToleranceModeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.38 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.38.

UML diagram of the ToleranceModeEnum class.

Figure 8.38 - ToleranceModeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.38 Description of the "ToleranceModeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
absolute The comparison tolerance is absolute i.e. as defined by the tolerance range.
exact The comparison must be exact i.e. the same.
relative The comparison tolerance is a relative range.

8.39 USRadialUnitTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted values for the non-SI radial units. The data model for the "USRadialUnitTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.39 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.39.

UML diagram of the USRadialUnitTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.39 - USRadialUnitTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.39 Description of the "USRadialUnitTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
Degree This is a radial resolution of a degree.
Minute This is a radial resolution of a minute.
Second This is a radial resolution of a second.

8.40 USUnitTypeEnum Vocabulary Description

The permitted values for the non-SI length units. The data model for the "USUnitTypeEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.40 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.40.

UML diagram of the USUnitTypeEnum class.

Figure 8.40 - USUnitTypeEnum class definitions.

Table 8.40 Description of the "USUnitTypeEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
Foot This is a resolution of the foot.
Inch This is a resolution of the inch.
Mile This is a resolution of the mile.
Yard This is a resolution of the yard.

8.41 UseEnum Vocabulary Description

The predefined set of values for the 'use' attribute to describe how the associated rubric-block should be used. The data model for the "UseEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.41 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.41.

UML diagram of the UseEnum class.

Figure 8.41 - UseEnum class definitions.

Table 8.41 Description of the "UseEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
instructions The corresponding rubric block is to be used to present instructions for the assessment.
navigation The corresponding rubric block is to be used to provide navigation around the assessment.
scoring The corresponding rubric block is to be used to present scoring information.

8.42 ValignEnum Vocabulary Description

Provides the permitted set of values for the 'valign' attribute in the HTML markup i.e. how the associated object is vertically aligned on the page. The data model for the "ValignEnum" enumerated class is shown in Figure 8.42 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 8.42.

UML diagram of the ValignEnum class.

Figure 8.42 - ValignEnum class definitions.

Table 8.42 Description of the "ValignEnum" enumerated vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
baseline Set the vertical alignment to the baseline of the container element.
bottom Set the vertical alignment to the bottom of the container.
middle Set the vertical alignment to the middle of the container.
top Set the vertical alignment to the top of the container.

toc | top

9. Miscellaneous Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

9.1. List Class Descriptions

The set of list classes used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

9.1.1 IdentifierList Class Description

The data model for the "IdentifierList" class is shown in Figure 9.1.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.1.1.

UML diagram of the IdentifierList class.

Figure 9.1.1 - IdentifierList class definitions.

Table 9.1.1 Description of the "IdentifierList" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IdentifierList
Class Type Container [ List ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is a space separated list of Identifiers. Each identifier is of primitiveType NCName.

9.1.2 IntegerList Class Description

The data model for the "IntegerList" class is shown in Figure 9.1.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.1.2.

UML diagram of the IntegerList class.

Figure 9.1.2 - IntegerList class definitions.

Table 9.1.2 Description of the "IntegerList" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IntegerList
Class Type Container [ List ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is a space separated list of integers. Each integer value is of primitiveType Integer.

9.1.3 MimeTypeList Class Description

The data model for the "MimeTypeList" class is shown in Figure 9.1.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.1.3.

UML diagram of the MimeTypeList class.

Figure 9.1.3 - MimeTypeList class definitions.

Table 9.1.3 Description of the "MimeTypeList" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name MimeTypeList
Class Type Container [ List ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The set of mime types supplied as a space separated list.

9.1.4 StringList Class Description

The data model for the "StringList" class is shown in Figure 9.1.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.1.4.

UML diagram of the StringList class.

Figure 9.1.4 - StringList class definitions.

Table 9.1.4 Description of the "StringList" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StringList
Class Type Container [ List ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is a space separated list of Strings i.e. an unordered list of strings each separated by space (a string must NOT contain a space). Each string is of primitiveType String.

9.1.5 ToleranceList Class Description

The data model for the "ToleranceList" class is shown in Figure 9.1.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.1.5.

UML diagram of the ToleranceList class.

Figure 9.1.5 - ToleranceList class definitions.

Table 9.1.5 Description of the "ToleranceList" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name ToleranceList
Class Type Container [ List ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description This is a space separated list of either strings (must not contain a space) or numbers. Each value must either be of primitiveType String or primitiveType double.

9.2. Enumerated List Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

All of the enumerated lists used within this Information Model are defined in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.4.

9.2.1 ARIARelevantList Vocabulary Description

This is the permitted vocabulary for the 'aria-relevant' characteristic. It indicates what user agent change notifications (additions, removals, etc.) assistive technologies will receive within a live region. The data model for the "ARIARelevantList" enumerated list class is shown in Figure 9.2.1 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 9.2.1.

UML diagram of the ARIARelevantList enumeration list class.

Figure 9.2.1 - ARIARelevantList class definitions.

Table 9.2.1 Description of the "ARIARelevantList" enumerated list vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
additions Denotes that element nodes are added to the DOM within the live region.
additions text Default value. Equivalent to the combination of values "additions" and "text".
all Equivalent to the combination of all values i.e. "additions removals text".
removals Denotes that text or element nodes within the live region are removed from the DOM.
text Denotes that text is added to any DOM descendant nodes of the live region.

9.2.2 ViewEnum Vocabulary Description

The intended audience for the associated object can be set with the view attribute. If no view is specified the outcome is treated as relevant to all views. Objects may have content that is of no interest to the candidate at all, but are merely used to hold intermediate values or other information useful during the item or test session. Where more than one class of user should be able to view the content the view attribute should contain a comma delimited list. The data model for the "ViewEnum" enumerated list class is shown in Figure 9.2.2 and the accompanying vocabulary definition in Table 9.2.2.

UML diagram of the ViewEnum enumeration list class.

Figure 9.2.2 - ViewEnum class definitions.

Table 9.2.2 Description of the "ViewEnum" enumerated list vocabulary terms.
Term Definition
author Viewable by an 'author'.
candidate Viewable by a 'candidate'.
proctor Viewable by a 'proctor' (sometimes referred to as an 'invigilator').
scorer Viewable by a 'scorer'.
testConstructor Viewable by a 'testConstructor'.
tutor Viewable by a 'tutor'.

9.3. Union Class Descriptions

The set of union classes used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.2.

9.3.1 FloatOrVariableRef Class Description

The data model for the "FloatOrVariableRef" class is shown in Figure 9.3.1 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.1.

UML diagram of the FloatOrVariableRef class.

Figure 9.3.1 - FloatOrVariableRef class definitions.

Table 9.3.1 Description of the "FloatOrVariableRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name FloatOrVariableRef
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The type used for attributes of float type that may be replaced with the value of a template or outcome variable of base type float and single cardinality.

9.3.2 IntOrIdentifier Class Description

The data model for the "IntOrIdentifier" class is shown in Figure 9.3.2 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.2.

UML diagram of the IntOrIdentifier class.

Figure 9.3.2 - IntOrIdentifier class definitions.

Table 9.3.2 Description of the "IntOrIdentifier" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IntOrIdentifier
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children There are no children.
Description An intOrIdentifier value is the union of the primitiveType 'Int' and the primitiveType of 'NCName'.

9.3.3 IntegerOrVariableRef Class Description

The data model for the "IntegerOrVariableRef" class is shown in Figure 9.3.3 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.3.

UML diagram of the IntegerOrVariableRef class.

Figure 9.3.3 - IntegerOrVariableRef class definitions.

Table 9.3.3 Description of the "IntegerOrVariableRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name IntegerOrVariableRef
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The type used for attributes of integer type that may be replaced with the value of a template or outcome variable of base type integer and single cardinality.

9.3.4 StringOrVariableRef Class Description

The data model for the "StringOrVariableRef" class is shown in Figure 9.3.4 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.4.

UML diagram of the StringOrVariableRef class.

Figure 9.3.4 - StringOrVariableRef class definitions.

Table 9.3.4 Description of the "StringOrVariableRef" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name StringOrVariableRef
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The type used for characteristics of string type that may be replaced with the value of a template or outcome variable of base type string and single cardinality. When template references are bound to strings (using the mandatory binding described above) there is a potential ambiguity. Therefore, if a string appears to be a reference to a template or outcome variable but there is no variable with the given name it should be treated simply as string value.

9.3.5 SupportEnumExt Class Description

The data model for the "SupportEnumExt" class is shown in Figure 9.3.5 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.5.

UML diagram of the SupportEnumExt class.

Figure 9.3.5 - SupportEnumExt class definitions.

Table 9.3.5 Description of the "SupportEnumExt" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name SupportEnumExt
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The data-type for the 'support' characteristic used for the definition of the alternative cards used for the accessibility catalogs. This is an extensible enumerated vocabulary. Extending the vocabulary makes use of a naming convention.

9.3.6 UseEnumExt Class Description

The data model for the "UseEnumExt" class is shown in Figure 9.3.6 and the accompanying definition in Table 9.3.6.

UML diagram of the UseEnumExt class.

Figure 9.3.6 - UseEnumExt class definitions.

Table 9.3.6 Description of the "UseEnumExt" class.
Descriptor Definition
Class Name UseEnumExt
Class Type Container [ Union ]
Parents The set of parent classes are:
Derived Classes There are no derived classes.
Super Classes The set of classes from which this class is derived:
Characteristics There are no characteristics.
Children The set of directly inherited children attributes are:
Description The data-type for how the associated rubric-block should be used. This is an extensible enumerated vocabulary. Extending the vocabulary makes use of a naming convention.

9.4. Imported Class Descriptions

This Section is NORMATIVE.

The set of imported classes (the classes that are referenced in this Information Model but defined in another separate Information Model) used within this Information Model are described in this Section. The syntax and semantics for this representation is described in Appendix A1.6.

9.4.1 Include Class Description

The details for the "Include" class are shown in Table 9.4.1.

Table 9.4.1 Description of the "Include" imported class.
Descriptor Definition
Import Class Name Include
Parent Classes The set of parent classes, and the associated children, that use this imported class are:
Description This denotes the use of the XInclude feature [XInclude, 16]. This is used to enable XML fragments to be included within the content layout.

9.4.2 MathML3 Class Description

The details for the "MathML3" class are shown in Table 9.4.2.

Table 9.4.2 Description of the "MathML3" imported class.
Descriptor Definition
Import Class Name MathML3
Parent Classes The set of parent classes, and the associated children, that use this imported class are:
Description This denotes the use of the MathML 3 specification [MathML3, 14]. This is used to enable mathematical expressions to be defined using a standardised markup language. This refers to MathML version 3.0.

9.4.3 SSMLv1p1 Class Description

The details for the "SSMLv1p1" class are shown in Table 9.4.3.

Table 9.4.3 Description of the "SSMLv1p1" imported class.
Descriptor Definition
Import Class Name SSMLv1p1
Parent Classes The set of parent classes, and the associated children, that use this imported class are:
Description This denotes the use of the Speech Synthesis Markup Language (SSML) standard [SSML, 10]. This allows all of the mark-up feaures to be for annotating the text content appropriately. This refers to SSMLv1.1. SSML is part of a larger set of markup specifications for voice browsers developed through the open processes of the W3C. It is designed to provide a rich, XML-based markup language for assisting the generation of synthetic speech in Web and other applications. The essential role of the markup language is to give authors of synthesizable content a standard way to control aspects of speech output such as pronunciation, volume, pitch, rate, etc. across different synthesis-capable platforms.

toc | top

10. Extending and Profiling the Data Model

This Section is NOT NORMATIVE.

10.1. Extending the Data Model

This specification permits extensions at a very limited number of places within the data model. Extensions are permited at:

Extensions at any other point in the data model MAY cause unpredictable behavior.

10.1.1. Companion Materials

Extension of the 'CompanionsMaterialsInfo' is used to enable the inclusion of, or reference to, proprietary companion materials (physical and/or digital). The form of the extension is dependent on the binding technology. Extension is permitted for the child contents and the characteristics of the class.

10.1.2. Section Selection

Extension of the 'Selection' class is used to enable the implementation of Item/Section selection algorithms and techniques. The form of the extension is dependent on the binding technology. Extension is permitted for the child contents and the characteristics of the class.

10.1.3. Section Ordering

Extension of the 'Ordering' class is used to enable the implementation of Item/Section ordering algorithms and techniques for the delivery of the selected Sections/Items. The form of the extension is dependent on the binding technology. Extension is permitted for the child contents and the characteristics of the class.

10.1.4. Customizable Interactions

The 'CustomInteraction' class was used to provide a mechanism for the inclusion of Item interactions that otherwise could not be supported using the available set of interactions. This feature is deprecated.

Customizable interactions SHOULD be achieved using the Portable Custom Interaction capability [PCI, 20]. The PCI specification defines how the custom interactions should be defined so that there are standard ways in which data can be passed to, and received from, the custom interaction. This turns an interaction into service with a defined API.

10.1.5. Custom Operators

The 'CustomOperator' class provides a mechanism for defining new QTI expression functions to support response and outcomes processing. The form of the extension is dependent on the binding technology. Extension is permitted for the child contents and the characteristics of the class.

It has been suggested that customOperator might be used to help link processing rules defined by this specification to instances of web-service based processing engines. For example, a web-service which offered automated marking of free text responses. Implementors experimenting with this approach are encouraged to share information about their solutions to help determine the best way to achieve this type of processing.

10.1.6. Enumerated Vocabularies

The set of enumerated vocabularies that can be extended are:

The naming convention for the proprietary terms is constrained by the regular expression: "(ext:)[a-z]A-Z]0-9].]-]_]+". This expression requires the term to start with the string 'ext:'. There are no other naming constraints.

10.1.7. Controlled Characteristics on the HTML and Interaction Elements

New approaches in the processing of HTML, introduced in HTML5 [HTML5, 14] allow new attributes to be added to all tags provided they start with the pattern 'data-'. This capability is replicated in QTI but extended to also cover the QTI interactions. The controlled extension of new characteristics is permitted on the following classes:

10.2. Profiling the Data Model

This specification may be profiled: several alternative versions of the main QTI XSD are supplied each with a specific focus, for example validating an assessmentItem only. A profile must be a formal subset of the base specification. This ensures that, with the exception of namespace/schema location changes, any instance which is compliant to the profile MUST also be compliant to the base specification. This means that a profile must only increase the constraints on the properties of the data model. For example, an element with a multiplicity of [0..1] can have this changed to [1..1] but NOT [0..*]. Proprietary extensions are ONLY permitted as defined by the base specification.

It is strongly recommended that a profile of this specification is undertaken either by, or with the close support of, IMS Global. However, no matter who is responsible for creating the profile artifacts (documents, XSDs, etc.), it is strongly recommended that the IMS specification tools are used. This will ensure that the artifacts are consistent with the base specifications and that useful support documentation is automatically produced e.g. creation of a document that summarises the differences between the base specification and the profile. Organizations wishing to produce a profile of this specification should contact IMS Support at: https://support.imsglobal.org/support/home.

toc | top

References

[APIP, 14] IMS Accessible Portable Item Protocol (APIP): Technical Specification for QTIv2.1 Accessibility Features, Colin Smythe (IMS Global), Mark McKell (IMS Global) and Mike Russell (Measured Progress), IMS Global Learning Consortium, 31st March 2014, https://www.imsglobal.org/APIP/apipv1p0/APIP_QTI_v1p0.html.
[ARIA, 14] Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.0, J.Craig and M.Cooper, World Wide Web Consortium, March 2014, http://www.w3.org/TR/wai-aria/.
[BCP 47] Matching of Language Tags (RFC 4647) and Tags for Identifying Languages (RFC 5646), A.Phillips and M.Davis, Internet Engineering Task Force, September 2009, https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/bcp47.
[CAT, 19] IMS Computer Adaptive Testing (CAT) Service 1.0 Candidate Final 1.0, J.Carlson, M.Molenaar, C.Smythe and M.McKell, IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2019, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/catv1p0/imscatv1p0_servicev1p0cf.html.
[CC-13] IMS Global Common Cartridge Profile: Implementation Version 1.3, Lisa Mattson (IMS Global), IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2014, http://www.imsglobal.org/cc/ccv1p3/imscc_Implementation-v1p3.html.
[CP-12] IMS Content Packaging Information Model Version 1.2 Public Draft v2.0, Colin Smythe (IMS Global) and Boyd Nielsen (Independent), IMS Global Learning Consortium, March 2007, http://www.imsglobal.org/content/packaging/cpv1p2pd2/imscp_infov1p2pd2.html.
[CSS2, 11] Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 Revision 1 (CSS 2.1) Specification W3C Recommendation, B.Bos, T.Celik, I.Hickson and H.W.Lie, World Wide Web Consortium, June 2011, http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/.
[CSS3, 11] Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) Snapshot 2010 W3C Working Group Note, E.J.Etemad, World Wide Web Consortium, May 2011, http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS/.
[CSSRUBY, 15] CSS Ruby Layout Module Level 1 (Editor's Draft), E.Etemad, K.Ishii and R.Ishida, World Wide Web Consortium, April 2015, http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css-ruby/.
[HTML5, 14] A vocabulary and associated APIs for HTML and XHTML, Ian Hickson, Robin Berjon, Steve Faulkner, Travis Leithead, Erika Doyle Navara, Edward O'Connor and Silvia Pfeiffer, World Wide Web Consortium W3C Recommendation, October 2014, http://www.w3.org/TR/html5/.
[I-BAT, 06] IMS Binding Auto-generation Toolkit (I-BAT), Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, July 2006.
[IMD, 06] IMS Metadata Best Practice Guide for IEEE 1484.12.1-2002 Standard for Learning Object Metadata, Lorna M.Campbell, Anthony Roberts and Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, April 2006, http://www.imsglobal.org/metadata/mdv1p3/imsmd_bestv1p3.html.
[ISO 8601] ISO8601:2004 Data elements and interchange formats - Information interchange - Representation of dates and times, ISO, International Standards Organization (ISO), 2000, p.33.
[ISO 9899] ISO/IEC 9899 - Programming languages - C, ISO, International Standads Organization, December 2011, p.538.
[MathML3, 14] Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) Version 3.0 (Third Edition), D.Carlisle, P.Ion and R.Miner, World Wide Web Consortium, April 2014, http://www.w3.org/TR/MathML/Overview.html.
[PCI, 20] IMS Global Portable Custom Interactions v1.0 (Candidate Final), P.O'hiceadha and M.McKell, IMS Global Learning Consortium, March 2020, http://www.imsglobal.org/assessment/pciv1p0cf/imsPCIv1p0.html.
[QTI-BIND-30] IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0: Assessment, Section and Item XSD Binding 1.0, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar and Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_asi_infomodelv1p0.html.
[QTI-BPIG-30] IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0 Implementation Guide 1.0, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar and Padraig O'hiceadha, IMS Global Learning Consortium Inc., May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_implv1p0.html.
[QTI-CERT-30] Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0 Conformance and Certification 1.0, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar and Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_certificationv1p0.html.
[QTI-MD-BIND-30] IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0 Metadata Information Model and XSD Binding v1.0, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar, Colin Smythe and Mark McKell, IMS Global Learning Consortium Inc., May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_metadata_infobindv1p0.html.
[QTI-RR-30] IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0 Results Reporting Information Model and XSD Binding v1.0, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar and Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_results_infobindv1p0.html.
[QTI-UD-30] IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) 3.0 Usage Data Information Model and XSD Binding v1.0, Rich Dyck, Tom Hoffmann, Paul Grudnitski, Mark Molenaar and Colin Smythe, IMS Global Learning Consortium, May 2022, https://www.imsglobal.org/question/qtiv3p0/imsqtiv3p0_usagedata_infobindv1p0cf.html.
[RFC 2045] Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Part One: Format of Internet Message Bodies, N. Freed and N. Borenstein, Internet Engineering Task Force, November 1996, https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2045.txt.
[RFC 2119] Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement Levels, S. Bradner, IETF (RFC 2119), March 1997, https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2119.txt.
[RFC 4198] A Uniform Resource Name (URN) Namespace for Federated Content, D.Tessman, IETF (RFC 4198), November 2005, https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4198.txt.
[RUBYUC, 13] Use Cases and Exploratory Approaches for Ruby Markup: W3C Working Group Note 08, R. Ishida, World Wide Web Consortium, October 2013, http://www.w3.org/TR/ruby-use-cases/.
[SSML, 10] Speech Synthesis Markup Language (SSML) Version 1.1 W3C Recommendation, D.C.Burnett and Z.W.Shuang, World Wide Web Consortium, September 2010, http://www.w3.org/TR/speech-synthesis11/.
[URI, 98] RFC 2396 Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI): Generic Syntax, T. Berners-Lee, R. Fielding and L. Masinter, Internet Engineering Task Force, August 2008, https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2396.txt.
[VDEX, 04] IMS Vocabulary Definition Exchange Information Model v1.0, Adam Cooper, IMS Global Learning Consortium, February 2004, http://www.imsglobal.org/vdex/vdexv1p0/imsvdex_infov1p0.html.
[W3C, 14] CSS Writing Modes Level 3 W3C Candidate Recommendation, fantasai and K.Ishii, World Wide Web Consortium, March 2014, http://www.w3.org/TR/css-writing-modes-3/.
[WAI-ARIA, 17] Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.1, J.Diggs, S.McCarron, M.Cooper, R.Schwerdtfeger and J.Craig, World Wide Web Consortium, December 2017, https://www.w3.org/TR/wai-aria-1.1/.
[WAI-ARIA, 21] Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA) 1.2, J.Diggs, J.Nurthen and M.Cooper, World Wide Web Consortium, March 2021, https://www.w3.org/TR/wai-aria-1.2/.
[XHTML, 10] XHTML 1.1 - Module-based XHTML W3C Recommendation - Second Edition, M.Altheim and S.McCarron, World Wide Web Consortium, November 2010, http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/.
[XInclude, 16] XML Inclusions (XInclude) Version 1.1 (W3C Working Group Note), J.Marsh, D.Orchard, D.Veillard and N.Walsh, World Wide Web Consortium, July 2016, http://www.w3.org/TR/xinclude-11/.
[XML, 00] Extensible Markup Language (XML), Version 1.0 (second edition), T.Bray, J.Paoli, C. M. Sperberg-McQueen and E.Maler, World Wide Web Consortium, October 2000, http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/REC-xml-20001006.
[XSCHEMA, 01] XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes - W3C Recommendation 02, Paul V. Biron and A.Malhotra, World Wide Web Consortium, May 2001, http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/REC-xmlschema-2-20010502/.

toc | top

Appendix A Modelling Concepts and Terms

This Appendix is NOT NORMATIVE.

A1 Data Model Descriptions

This section is NOT NORMATIVE.

A1.1 Data Model Diagrams

Table A1.1 provides the key to the descriptions of data model diagrams.

Table A1.1 The key to the descriptions of data model diagrams.
Feature Definition and Usage
Data Model Package Each data model description is enclosed in a UML Package that has the stereotype of « dataModel » under which is the name of the data model diagram being described. Only one logical data model can be described.
DerivedType Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « DerivedType » under which is the name of the data-type. A derived class is one that is derived either from another derived class or a PrimitiveType class.
Enumeration Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « Enumeration » under which is the name of the enumeration data-type. The enumeration class consists of the list of tokens that are the permitted values of the assigned attribute.
Enumerated List Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « EnumeratedList » under which is the name of the enumerated list data-type. The enumeration list class consists of the list of tokens that are the permitted values of the assigned attribute. A list of tokens is permitted using comma separation.
PrimitiveType Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « PrimitiveType » under which is the name of the primitive data-type. A PrimitiveType is one of the many base data-types on which a data model can be built (see Appendix A1.3 for the set of primitive types that are available).
Selection Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « Selection » under which is the name of the data-type. The selection means that only one of the listed attributes make occur in an instance. If this is an abstract class then multiple iterations of the instance may occur and the multiplicity of the attribute defines the constraints on the number of times the attribute can occur in the full instance. If the stereotype and associated name of the class are in italics this denotes the class is abstract.
Sequence Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « Sequence » under which is the name of the data-type. The sequence means that the listed attributes must occur only in the order of the attributes listed on the class. The associated multiplicity defines the number of times the attribute may occur consecutively in the instance. If the stereotype and associated name of the class are in italics this denotes the class is abstract.
Unordered Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « Unordered » under which is the name of the data-type. The unordering means that the listed attributes may occur in any order but the associated multiplicity for the attribute must be followed (when binding to XML this requires the use of Schematron rules to enforce the multiplicity). If the stereotype and associated name of the class are in italics this denotes the class is abstract.
List Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « List » under which is the name of the data-type. A list class is one in which the associated instance will consist of a list of objects that conform to the permitted data-types of the list (the superclasses for the list class). The terms in the list are separated by a space.
Union Class This is a class that is identified by the stereotype « Union » under which is the name of the data-type. A union class is one in which the associated instance will consist of a objects that conform to the any of the permitted data-types of the union (the superclasses for the union class).
Characteristic Description Many classes contain a set of characteristics (the set of characteristics are listed under the stereotype « Characteristics »). Each characteristic description consists of the scope, name, data-type and multiplicity (see Appendix A1.3 for a more complete description). Note that when bound to XSD/XML, a characteristic is mapped to an XML attribute.
Attribute Description Many classes contain a set of attributes (the set of attributes are listed under the stereotype « Attributes »). Each attribute description consists of the scope, name, data-type and multiplicity (see Appendix A1.3 for a more complete description). Note when bound to XSD/XML, an attribute is mapped to an XML element.
Aggregation Arrow This is an arrow with a white diamond head to indicate that the child class is an aggregate structure to the parent class i.e. the child class may exist without the context of the parent class. This association allows complex structures to be constructed with common subcomponents.
Composition Arrow This is an arrow with a filled diamond head to indicate that the child class is a composite structure of the parent class i.e. the child class only exists within the context of the parent class. This association allows complex structures to be constructed with common subcomponents.
Generalization Arrow This is an arrow with a white arrow head to indicate the class/superclass relationship. The arrow points in the direction of generality i.e. from the class to the super class.

toc | top

A1.2 Class Descriptions

Table A1.2 provides the key to the descriptions of the data class tables.

Table A1.2 The key to the descriptions of the data class tables.
Category Definition
Class Name The name given to the class being described.
Class Type The nature of the class. This is described as a "Container [...]" or "Abstract Container [...]". The value of "..." being (see Appendix A1.1 for the meaning of these values):
  • "DerivedType"
  • "List"
  • "Selection"
  • "Sequence"
  • "Union"
  • "Unordered"
If the container is also marked as "Mixed" then the children are permitted to include text as well as attributes.
Parents This is the list of classes that contain the class being described as either the type of a child characteristic or attribute. In the case of a Root Class the entry is also labelled as "Root Class".
Derived Classes The set of classes that are derived from this class (there may be none). The entries are linked to the corresponding class descriptions.
Super Classes The set of super classes from which the class being described is derived (there may be none). The entries are linked to the corresponding class descriptions.
Characteristics Lists the set of characteristics for this class. The list of characteristics includes those that are inherited. Each characteristic is linked to the corresponding characteristic description table.
Children Lists the set of attributes for this class (the only other permitted associations are generalizations). The list of children includes those attributes that are inherited. Each child entry is linked to the corresponding attribute description table. The nature of the relationship between the children is defined by the stereotype of the parent class i.e. the class type. If the child is in italics this denotes a reference to an abstract class and that an instance would NOT contain a child of that name but would be replaced by a complex set of children as defined by the associated abstract class.
Link Data Lists the set of attributes for this class that are used to provide links to other data objects in the data model. Many types of link references are available. This row is ONLY shown when the class contains at least one link data definition.
Description Contains descriptions relating to the class and its properties and relationships.

toc | top

A1.3 Attribute and Characteristic Descriptions

Table A1.3 provides the key to the descriptions of the data attributes/characteristics for the data classes.

Table A1.3 The key to the descriptions of the data attribute/characteristic tables.
Category Definition
Attribute Name or Characteristic Name The name given to the attribute or characteristic being described. If the name is in italics this denotes an abstract attribute or characteristic.
Data Type This is the data-type of the attribute or characteristic (if this is in italics it denotes an abstract class). The data-type can take many forms:
  • Class Name - the name of the Class (this is linked to the class definition elsewhere in this document);
  • Primitive Data-types from:-
    • AnyTypeLax - the namespace data-type i.e. defining data from any context (this is used for allowing any form of extension and the form of that extension is dependent on the type of binding);
    • AnyURI - the AnyURI data-type (absolute or relative URI);
    • Base - the base data-type for defining a base URI/URL link reference;
    • Boolean - the boolean data-type (with permitted values of "true" and "false");
    • Date - the date data-type (using the [ISO 8601] format);
    • DateTime - the date/time data-type (using the [ISO 8601] format);
    • Decimal - the decimal data-type (a variable precision number that is either positive or negative);
    • Double - the double data-type (double precision floating point number - 64bit);
    • Duration - the duration data-type (using the [ISO 8601] format)
    • Empty - the associated instance must be empty i.e. no child attributes;
    • Float - the float data-type (single precision floating point number - 32bit);
    • ID - the unique identifier data-type (the scope is constrained to the instance file);
    • IDREF - the reference to a previously defined unique identifier data-type (ID);
    • IDREFS - a list, whitespace separated, of references to a previously defined unique identifier data-type (ID);
    • Int - the int data-type with a numeric value from -2147483648 to 2147483647;
    • Integer - the integer data-type (this is derived from the "decimal" data-type i.e. no decimal places);
    • Language - the language data-type as defined in [BCP 47];
    • Name - the Name data-type as per the XML 1.0 definition);
    • Namespace - the namespace data-type i.e. defining data from a context other than that as the default for the data model (this is used for importing other data models);
    • NamespaceLax - the namespace data-type i.e. defining data from a context other than that as the default for the data model (this is used for importing other data models but being lax on the validation);
    • NonNegativeInteger - the non-negative integer data-type (this is derived from the "integer" data-type) i.e. an integer that is zero or higher;
    • NCName - the NCName data-type (derived from the Name data-type i.e. non-colonized name);
    • NormalizedString - the normalized string data type (strings with line feeds, carriage returns and tab characters removed);
    • PositiveInteger - the positive integer data-type (this is derived from the "nonNegativeinteger" data-type) i.e. an integer that is one or higher;
    • String - the normalized string data type;
    • Time - the time data-type (using the [ISO 8601] format).
Value Space The range of valid values for this attribute/characteristic (including any default value). If the value space is unspecified, it is not known or is not important. This value space must be defined in terms of the associated data-type.
Scope This is the scope of the attribute/characteristic with permitted values of:
  • Local - denoted by "-" and meaning the attribute/characteristic has significance and access within the context of the parent class only;
  • Global - denoted by "+" and meaning that the attribute/characteristic has global scoping (so must have a unique name) and can be accessed from anywhere.
Multiplicity A property of an attribute/characteristic indicating the number of times it may be used or appear in a given class instance. The values of this property are expressed as a range or shorthand for a range using the notation:
  • "0..1" [optional; restricted]
  • "0..*" [optional; unrestricted]
  • "1" [mandatory; restricted]
  • "1..*" [mandatory; unrestricted]
Description Contains descriptions relating to the attribute/characteristic and its values space.
Link Data Contains the description of the link data definition. A link to the corresponding detailed link data description is supplied. This row is ONLY shown when the attribute/characteristice is a link data definition.

toc | top

A1.4 Enumerated Vocabulary Descriptions

Table A1.4 provides the key to the descriptions of the enumerated vocabulary classes. These are vocabularies that will be contained within the binding form itself. They are contained within a class that has a stereotype of either « Enumeration » or « EnumeratedList ».

Table A1.4 The key to the descriptions of the enumerated vocabulary tables.
Category Definition
Term The vocabulary token itself i.e. the vocabulary entry.
Definition The meaning of the term and how it should be used.

toc | top

A1.5 External Vocabulary Descriptions

Table A1.5 provides the key to the descriptions of the external vocabulary classes. These are vocabularies that will be contained in some independent format e.g. using the IMS VDEX [VDEX, 04].

Table A1.5 The key to the descriptions of the external vocabulary tables.
Category Definition
Term The vocabulary token itself i.e. the vocabulary entry.
Definition The meaning of the term and how it should be used. This consists of the "Caption" and "Description" of the vocabulary term. The caption is used to provide a human readable label for the term.

toc | top

A1.6 Import Class Descriptions

Table A1.6 provides the key to the descriptions of the import classes.

Table A1.6 The key to the descriptions of the imported class tables.
Category Definition
Import Class Name The name of the class.
Parent Classes The list of parent classes, and the associated children, that use this imported class. Each class and attribute name has a link to its corresponding tabular description in the information model.
Description The description of how the class is used within the data model.

toc | top

A1.7 Link Data Descriptions

Table A1.7 provides the key to the descriptions of the link data definitions.

Table A1.7 The key to the descriptions of the link data tables.
Category Definition
Target Class Name This is the name of the target class i.e. the destination point of the link reference.
Link Type This is the type of link that is being used. The types of link available are:
  • "SourcedId" - this link is through interoperability identifier for the target object i.e. the object can be obtained by using this sourceId with the corresponding service call;
  • "IntraParentClassId" - this link is between two attributes/characteristics that are contained within the same parent class;
  • "CPResourceId" - this link is to a resource contained within an IMS Content Package/IMS Common Cartridge/Thin Common Cartridge manifest. The reference value is that assigned to the "identifier" of the resource in the package/cartridge manifest;
  • "CASEItemId" - this link is to the learning objective description (contained within an IMS CASE Item definition).
Link Sources This is the set of classes that contain attributes/characteristics which use the link data defined by this entry. A link to the attribute/characteristic is provided.
Source Attribute This is the attribute/characteristic in the source object that contains the identifier of the target object (a characteristic name MUST start with an "@"). This will only be supplied if the pointer is contained within a substructure within the source object. If there is no source the statement "Not Applicable" will be displayed.
Target Attribute This is the attribute/characteristic in the target class which is the container for the identifier of the object being identified (a characteristic name MUST start with an "@"). It is the value for this identifier which MUST be supplied in the source object. For "CPResourceId" link types the fixed value of "@identifier" will be given. If there is no target the statement "Not Applicable" will be displayed.
Parent Class Name This is the name of the class that contains both the source and target attributes/characteristics. This value will only be supplied for the "IntraParentClassId" link types. If there is no parent class name the statement "Not Applicable" will be displayed.
Description The description of how the link data is used within the data model.

toc | top

A1.8 Common Data Model Persistent Identifier Descriptions

Table A1.8 provides the key to the descriptions of the common data model persistent identifier definitions.

Table A1.8 The key to the descriptions of the common data model persistent identifier tables.
Category Definition
Name This is the name of the data model component which has been assigned a common data model persistent identifier.
Type This is the type of link that is being used. The types of link available are:
  • "Class (...)" - a complex data model component i.e. it contains one or more properties;
  • "Property" - a property of a parent Class;
  • "Enumerated Vocabulary Term" - the term/token within an enumerated vocabulary
Persistent Identifier The common data model persistent identifier that has been assigned to this data model component. By definition, this is a unique (within the context of the IMS Common Data Model) and very long-lived identifier

toc | top

About this Document

Title: IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI): Assessment, Section and Item Information Model v3.0
Editors: Colin Smythe, IMS Global (UK)
Tom Hoffmann, IMS Global (USA)

Co-chairs: Padraig O'hiceadha (Houghton Mifflin Harcourt)
Mark Hakkinen (ETS
Mike Powell (Pearson)

Version: 1.0
Version Date: 1st May 2022
Status: IMS Final Release
Summary: This is the new, third generation, version of the QTI Assessment, Section and Item specification: it supercedes QTI 2.2. A key feature of the new Item is that all of the accessibility features are fully integrated with the QTI data model. This new data model is designed to reduce the need for transforming the representation for delivery through an assessment system. This document is the Information Model description for the new QTI version.

Revision Information: This is the third generation of the QTI Assessment, Section, Item and Stimulus structures.
Purpose: This document has been approved by the IMS Technical Advisory Board and is made available for adoption and conformance.
Document Location: https://www.imsglobal.org/question

toc | top

List of Contributors

The following individuals contributed to the development of this document:

Arjan Aarnink Cito (Netherlands)
Catriona Buhayar NWEA (USA)
Jason Craft Pearson (USA)
Gary Driscoll ETS (USA)
Paul Grudnitski Independent Expert (USA)
Mark Hakkinen ETS (USA)
Tjeerd Hans Cito (Netherlands)
Susan Haught IMS Global (USA)
Tom Hoffmann IMS Global (USA)
Rob Howard NWEA (USA)
Justin Marks NWEA (USA)
Mark McKell Pearson (USA)
Mark Molenaar Apenutmize (Netherlands)
Zach Murphy Pearson (USA)
Padraig O'hiceadha HMH (UK)
Michelle Richard Pearson (USA)
Julien Sebire O.A.T. (Luxemburgh)
Colin Smythe IMS Global (UK)

toc | top

Revision History

Version No. Release Date Comments
Final Release 1.0 1st May, 2022 The first Final Release of the QTI 3.0 specification and documentation. This version supercedes QTI 2.2 and is NOT backwards compatible.

toc | top

IMS Global Learning Consortium, Inc. ("IMS Global") is publishing the information contained in this document ("Specification") for purposes of scientific, experimental, and scholarly collaboration only.

IMS Global makes no warranty or representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the Specification.

This material is provided on an "As Is" and "As Available" basis.

The Specification is at all times subject to change and revision without notice.

It is your sole responsibility to evaluate the usefulness, accuracy, and completeness of the Specification as it relates to you.

IMS Global would appreciate receiving your comments and suggestions.

Please contact IMS Global through our website at http://www.imsglobal.org.

Please refer to Document Name: IMS Question and Test Interoperability (QTI): Assessment, Section and Item Information Model v3.0

Date: 1st May 2022

toc | top